STEP 5 Version 6.6

STEP 5 Version 6.6
Contents
SIMATIC S5
STEP 5 Version 6.6
Manual
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Overview
1
Practical Application of STEP 5
-Programming Example-
2
Overview of the Functions
3
Graphical User Interface
3.1
Object
3.2
Editor
3.3
Test
3.4
Management
3.5
Documentation
3.6
Change
3.7
Help
3.8
Description of Technical
Resources
4
Appendix, Index
A
Remarks Form
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal
safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the
level of danger:
Note
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling
the product, or to a particular part of the documentation.
Qualified Personnel
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment.
Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground,
and to tag circuits, equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Correct Usage
Note the following:
!
Trademarks
Warning
This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in
the catalog or the technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by
Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up,
and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
SIMATIC and SINEC are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG.
Copyright Siemens AG 1996 All Rights Reserved
Disclaimer of Liability
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not
permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility
model or design, are reserved.
We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely,
we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are
reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent
editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.
Siemens AG
Automation Group
Industrial Automation Systems
Postfach 4848, D-90327 Nürnberg
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Siemens AG 1996
Technical data subject to change.
C79000-G8576-C820
Contents
1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1.1
How to Use the Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
1.2
1.2.1
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Features Compared with Previous Versions . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
1-5
2
Practical Application of STEP 5
- Programming Example - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2.1
Introduction to the Example (Control Task) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
Creating the Carwash Program with STEP 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Documenting the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
2-6
2-8
2-19
2.3
Transferring Files, Blocks and Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-20
2.4
Checking and Modifying the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-25
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
Loading and Testing the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-30
2-30
2-31
2-31
3
Overview of the Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3.1
3.1.1
Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
3-8
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DOS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCP/M File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17
3-17
3-32
3-39
3-43
3-48
C79000-G8576-C820-01
iii
Contents
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
3.3.9
3.3.10
3.3.11
3-49
3-51
3-78
3-87
3-113
3-141
3-161
3-169
3-170
3-174
3-175
3.3.12
Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Statement Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Ladder Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Control System Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Data Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing DB Screen Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Assignment Software COM DB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Range of COM DB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Which PLCs can You Assign Parameters to with COM DB1? . .
How Do You Operate COM DB1? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of a Complete DB1 Parameter Assignment
with COM DB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing the Assignment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Force Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Force Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outputting PLC Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Test ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-225
3-226
3-232
3-238
3-239
3-243
3-246
3-252
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
3.5.6
Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generate XRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rewiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assignment Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-255
3-255
3-255
3-264
3-268
3-274
3-274
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doc Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-283
3-284
3-297
3-312
3-333
iv
3-191
3-209
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Contents
3.7
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-341
3.8
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Assignment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Info-STEP 5 Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version of S5 Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-343
3-343
3-343
3-343
4
Description of Technical Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4.1
4.1.1
S5 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STEP 5 Files with Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
4-2
4.2
Data Management S5-DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4
A
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
A.1
Creating the Program for the Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
A.2
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-15
A.3
S5 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-31
A.4
Key Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-37
A.5
Brief Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-45
A.6
PG Link between two PGs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-55
A.7
Key Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-59
A.8
A.8.1
A.8.2
A.8.3
Programming Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Available Blocks and Parameter Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphical Input in LAD and CSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input in STL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-61
1-62
1-63
1-70
Index
C79000-G8576-C820-01
v
Contents
Figures
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-21
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-27
3-28
vi
Carwash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller with Process Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration of the “Carwash” Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assignment List (Section to be Edited) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References to the Operand -STARTUP in CARWAS . . . . . . . . . .
List of Cross References from the Carwash Program . . . . . . . . .
Block Comparison between CARWAS and PROXEA . . . . . . . . .
Display of the Output Operands in Variables Block VB 5 . . . . . .
Overview: Main Menu ” STEP 5 Function ” User’s Guide . . . . . .
Overview: Main Menu ” STEP 5 Function
” User’s Guide (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of the Main and Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of a Job Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of a Block Selection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of a File Selection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Organization of the Project File and Program File . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of Page 1 of the “Settings” Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of a Box with Directory Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of Existing Directories and Files on Drive C:\ . . . . . . . . .
Example of Page 2 of the “Settings” Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying DOS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying PCP/M File(s) to DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying DOS File(s) to PCP/M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STEP 5 Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing STEP 5 Block(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing STEP 5 Blocks with Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of a Function Block (FB 200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Segment in Ladder Diagram Representation (Example) . . . . . . .
Segment in Control System Flowchart (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Operands and Functions (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing STEP 5 Data Block(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing STEP 5 Data Blocks using the Search Function . . . . . . .
Input field of the DB Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DB Screen Forms: Edit Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Assignment Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of a Completed DB Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-10
2-26
2-27
2-29
2-34
3-2
3-3
3-5
3-7
3-12
3-14
3-14
3-18
3-21
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-40
3-45
3-47
3-49
3-52
3-54
3-82
3-89
3-115
3-120
3-142
3-143
3-144
3-161
3-162
3-163
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Contents
3-29
3-30
3-31
3-32
3-33
3-34
3-35
3-36
3-37
3-38
3-39
3-40
3-41
3-42
3-43
3-44
3-45
3-46
3-47
3-48
3-49
3-50
3-51
3-52
3-53
3-54
3-55
3-56
3-57
3-58
3-59
3-60
DX0 Screen for the S5-135U Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DX0 Screen for the S5-135U Page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DX0 Screen for the S5-155U Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DX0 Screen for the S5-155U Page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hierarchical Structure of COM DB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Layout of the COM DB1 “Clock Parameters (CLP)
Screen Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COM DB1 “Clock Parameters (CLP)” Screen Form:
Selecting the Weekday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Help Screen Form: Explanations of the Current COM DB1
“Clock Parameters” Screen Form and Function
Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Info Window: Information about the “Weekday” Input Field
of the COM DB1 “Clock Parameters (CLP)” Screen Form . . . . .
Display of Incorrect Parameters in the
Parameter Assignment Screen Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COM DB1 “Select Language” Screen Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COM DB1 “Defaults” Screen Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COM DB1 “Overview Table” Screen Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COM DB1 “PLC Functions” Screen Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COM DB1 “Overview Table” Screen Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COM DB1 “Overview Table” Screen Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COM DB1 “Overview Table SINEC L2” Screen Form . . . . . . . . .
COM DB1 “SINEC L2 Basic Parameters” Screen Form . . . . . . .
COM DB1 “Standard Connection” Screen Form . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COM DB1 “Overview Table” Screen Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COM DB1 “Printing DB1” Screen Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COM DB1 “Transferring DB1” Screen Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COM DB1 “Transferring DB1” Screen Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COM DB1 “PLC Functions” Screen Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen Layout with Lines and Areas of the Editing Field . . . . . .
Example of the Assignment List in the Sequential Source File .
Status processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table for Editing the Operand List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operand List with Binary Inputs/Outputs and a Flag Byte . . . . .
Table of Control Bits (e.g. CPU 928 B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of the Interrupt Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-164
3-165
3-167
3-168
3-176
3-179
3-182
3-186
3-187
3-189
3-194
3-195
3-196
3-197
3-198
3-199
3-200
3-202
3-203
3-204
3-205
3-206
3-207
3-208
3-212
3-217
3-229
3-229
3-232
3-236
3-247
3-248
vii
Contents
3-61
3-62
3-63
3-64
3-65
3-66
3-67
3-68
3-69
3-70
3-71
3-72
3-73
3-74
3-75
3-76
3-77
3-78
3-79
3-80
3-81
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-8
A-9
A-10
A-11
A-12
A-13
A-14
A-15
A-16
A-17
viii
User Memory Size and Assignment on the S5-100U . . . . . . . . .
User Memory Size and Assignment as Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of the EPROM/EEPROM Information Screen . . . . . . . .
Operand List for Manual Rewiring (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printout Following Manual Rewiring (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error List after Editing the Source File (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of an Edited Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of a Job Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Overview with DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of Data Block Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example: Output of an Assignment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of a Standard I/Q/F List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced Printout of a Control System Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simple Printout of a Control System Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output of a Program Structure without DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/Q/F List of the Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structures of the Doc Commands (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Submit File Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interconnecting Doc Command Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Window for 132 Character Wide Footer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of the Versions of the S5 Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carwash with Process Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Structure with Operator Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flowchart of a Carwash Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structure of the Carwash Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents of the Data Block for the Carwash (Printout) . . . . . . . .
Scope and Limits of the STEP 5 Methods of Representation . .
Example of Nesting when Inputting in LAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of the Nesting above Output in CSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of Nesting when Inputting in CSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of the Nesting above Output in LAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Only AND Boxes are Permitted after a Complex Element . . . . .
Connector in LAD and STL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector in Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector in a Parallel Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector in CSF and STL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector at the First Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector not at the First Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-251
3-251
3-260
3-266
3-267
3-273
3-275
3-286
3-288
3-289
3-291
3-295
3-299
3-300
3-306
3-309
3-313
3-320
3-329
3-338
3-344
A-3
A-4
A-9
A-11
A-12
1-61
1-63
1-63
1-64
1-64
1-64
1-65
1-65
1-66
1-66
1-67
1-67
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Contents
A-18
A-19
A-20
A-21
A-22
A-23
A-24
A-25
Connector not at the First Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example without Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example with Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of the Rule for AND Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of the Rule for OR Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of the Rule for an AND before OR operation . . . . . . . .
Parenthesis with Complex Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of Undefined Inputs and Outputs in STL,
LAD and CSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C79000-G8576-C820-01
1-68
1-68
1-69
1-71
1-72
1-73
1-75
1-76
ix
Contents
Tables
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
A-1
A-2
x
Explanation of the Screen Lines (Figure 3-20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logic Operations in LAD (Ladder Diagram) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Complex Functions in LAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explanation of the Screen Lines (Figure 3-21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logic operations in CSF (Control System Flowchart) . . . . . . . . .
Complex Functions in CSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Procedure for Assigning Parameters to a
PLC with COM DB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the Permitted Operand Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Existing Submit File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fetch Line/Find Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replace Character String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Process Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Decision Table for the “Carwash” Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-90
3-92
3-98
3-116
3-118
3-125
3-191
3-211
3-323
3-323
3-324
3-325
3-325
A-5
A-10
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Overview
C79000-G8576-C820-01
1
1-1
Overview
1
1.1
How to Use the Manual
This STEP 5 manual is dual purpose. On the one hand, it
introduces you to the STEP 5 software and on the other, it serves
as source of reference for all functions provided by the software
for creating, managing, testing and documenting STEP 5 user
programs.
The following questions and answers will help you to make the
best use of the manual for your own personal requirements.
?
You are already an experienced STEP 5 user
The appendix contains a brief set of operating instructions which
will help you to become familiar with the menu structure without a
detailed description of the individual functions.
?
Finding your way through the user’s guide
(Chapter 3)
Highlighted sections of text and graphical “signposts” guide you
through this chapter.
1. At the top left of a double page you will find the corresponding
menu title from the main menu bar (e.g. Object).
2. At the top right of a double page you will see the name of the
particular function described in the section (e.g. Project).
3. In the left margin you can see the menu options you select to
activate the currently described function.
1-2
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Overview
Example: making the settings for a project
1
Project
Settings>
4. (→ Project, Settings, ). These pointers indicate that you can
find further information in this section. The terms following
“→” are always listed in the contents or in the index.
5. Keys such as ESC, Return or Insert are printed in italics and
bold face.
?
You want to run the STEP 5 software on a
programmer (PG) or personal computer (PC)
You must distinguish between the following situations
a)
If you have just acquired the STEP 5 software along with a
new PG, it is already installed on the PG. You only require a
few steps to activate the program (→ Getting Started)
b)
You have acquired the STEP 5 software as an upgrade
package or as a PC package. In this case, install the software
on your PG (PC) following the instructions in the “Product
Information” and start up the software.
In both cases, you will see start-up screens displayed which must
be completed based on the information in the Product Information.
The first STEP 5 menu is then displayed.
?
You want to create a user program with the
STEP 5 software for the first time
Chapter KEIN MERKER leads you step by step through the
process of writing a program based on the simple example of a
carwash. Using the complete example supplied as an STL program
with the package, you can check that your first programming
session was successful.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
1-3
Overview
?
1
You need to decide about the data management
system for your user data
If you use the S5-DOS/MT operating system, you can choose
between two data managers (S5-DOS and BTRIEVE). Read
Chapter KEIN MERKER for an explanation of the advantages of
one against the other. Make sure you decide before starting to write
your user program.
?
You want to get an idea of the operating elements
you use to move through the STEP 5 software
Section 3.1 provides you with this information. It is advisable to
read this section before beginning to work with STEP 5.
?
You are writing, testing, managing or documenting
a STEP 5 user program and are unsure about
using a function
The first source of help is the STEP 5 software itself. If you cannot
find an answer, turn to the menu description in the sections 3.2 to
3.8.
?
You have user programs you created under
S5-DOS (PCP/M) and you want to continue
working with them under S5-DOS/ST with the new
STEP 5 version
Convert these programs using the copy function “PCP/M file Copy” in the “Object” menu (→ Section 3.2.4). You can then use
all the processing functions.
1-4
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Overview
1.2
Product Overview
Operating System
1
STEP 5 software from release 3.0 can be used on a PG 7xx with
the following operating systems:
S5-DOS/ST (ST = Single Tasking using MS-DOS),
and on an AT compatible PC with a special operating system
package (STEP 5 programming package for PCs).
Information about installation and the functions of the operating
systems can be found in the relevant manuals.
1.2.1
New Features Compared with Previous Versions
Release V6.0 and higher differs considerably from previous STEP
5 versions. It also includes the extended functions and
modifications explained briefly below.
Data/File
Management
STEP 5 can no longer be run with S5-DOS (PCP/M). You can
convert existing programs so that they are compatible with
the operating system you decide to use. (→ Project, PCP/M
File).
It is now possible to “navigate” through the DOS file system
without having to change to the MS-DOS user interface
(→ Object, DOS file).
The files *DR.INI and *AP.INI are now managed centrally in
the STEP 5 system directory (→ Project).
User Interface
The user interface allows elementary functions to be selected
from menus (→ Graphical user interface).
You define functions in “job boxes” (→ Graphical user
interface) which have largely replaced the command lines.
A mouse is now available to activate and select many functions
(→ Graphical user interface).
The Return key corresponds to the Enter key (<OK> button in
the dialog window).
C79000-G8576-C820-01
1-5
Overview
Function keys allow you to select the most important functions
1
quickly (→ Graphical user interface).
Hotkeys, with which you can select a function directly are also
available. These hotkeys are indicated by a red letter in the
menu name (on a black background on monochrome monitors)
(→ Graphical user interface).
In many situations, you can display help texts by pressing
SHIFT F8.
Preparations for
Programming
All the settings and selections for files and program
parameters for a project have been put together in two basic
“settings boxes” (→ Project, Settings).
All the presets are stored in a file which can be reloaded
making repeated setting of program parameters unnecessary
(→ Project).
The presets you select during one programming session are still
valid when you want to program again, even after exiting
STEP 5.
Documentation
The previously independent package KOMDOK is now an
integral part of STEP 5 (→ Enhanced output).
Within each function the destination of the output can be
selected (→ Graphical User Interface, Job box).
Editing
All the modifications involving editing are listed below, sorted
according to functions.
Connector
Apart from the existing connector, a negated connector with the
same applications has been implemented. (→ Editor, Editing
Ladder Diagrams/Control System Flowcharts).
You can now specify the connector and the negated connector
immediately before CSF outputs.
Complex Function
Elements
1-6
The new language elements can be represented as complex
function elements (→ Editor, Editing Ladder
Diagrams/Control System Flowcharts)
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Overview
You can combine all complex function elements in a CSF
1
segment.
Complex arithmetical function elements have extendable inputs
(function element with two inputs).
The screen representation of the status display of complex
function elements has been extended (→ Test, Block Status).
Cursor Display
To indicate the current editor position, a long cursor has been
introduced, its length corresponding to the length of the input
field (→ Editor).
Block Calls
In an empty segment, a call can be input directly using the
function keys. You can append calls in existing segments
with/without the automatic expand function.
New Output in CSF
Implicit appending or inserting of a new output is possible (→
Editor, Editing Control System Flowcharts).
Cursor Positioning
There are new key functions for positioning the cursor in the
editing window (→ Appendix A4, Key Assignment).
These cursor positioning functions can also be activated using
function keys (“Extras”) (→ Editor, Editing Ladder
Diagrams/Control System Flowcharts).
Expanding
Whenever the expand function would otherwise be necessary,
this is now performed automatically (→ Editor, Editing Ladder
Diagrams/Control System Flowcharts).
Editing Mode
The “correction” mode no longer exists, there are only the
modes “edit” and “output”.
FB
There are new opportunities for editing FBs:
– They can now be programmed in LAD and CSF. With the
exception of the first segment, all new language elements
can now be used graphically within a segment (→ Editor,
LAD/CSF).
– The formal operands defined in the first segment cannot be
used in a LAD or CSF segment.
– The FB name is displayed in the “Directory” function
(→ Object, Blocks).
C79000-G8576-C820-01
1-7
Overview
1
DB
You can only select the LIB no. using function keys.
Segment in a Block
Segment functions can be selected using softkeys (→ Editor,
Editing Assignment Lists)
– Copying (within a block and from a buffer).
– Delete, insert, append, page
– Empty segment possible in LAD and CSF
Function Keys
Double function keys are now available. These reduce the
number of hardkeys.
Editing the
Assignment List
The STRING assignment of the function keys is now visible in
Bus Paths
Bus paths can be renamed.
the symbols editor and is available with F1 to F4 (previously
F1 to F8) (→ Editor, Editing the Assignment List).
The bus paths are reduced to possible (and guaranteed) paths. If
the path deviates from the preferred path, a message is
displayed (→ Management, Bus Paths).
EPROM
EPROM submodule programming numbers can be selected
from a selection box (→ EPROM).
Online
You are informed of the PLC type and the CPU number in all
online functions.
1-8
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Practical Application of STEP 5
- Programming Example -
C79000-G8576-C820-01
2
2-1
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
2.1
Introduction to the Example (Control Task)
To help you get to know STEP 5 and get used to working with
this software package, this section explains an application based
on an example. The control task “controlling a car wash” shows
you step by step how to edit, test, document and archive the
required user program.
This introduction to the use of STEP 5 based on an example has
the following two aims:
– to make the most important system and editing functions
on the programming device available to practised users as
quickly as possible and
– to provide information about planning and implementing a
project using the STEP 5 tools for first time users.
The development of the required STEP 5 program to control the
process is not part of this example. Nevertheless, the steps
necessary to produce such a program are explained in Appendix
A1, in case you would like to write the program yourself. The
complete program consists of the following parts:
– an assignment list (absolute operands, symbolic operands),
– a function block with 15 segments in the “Statement List”
(STL) method of representation,
– a data block,
– the organization blocks for start-up and cyclic operation of
the car wash.
It is advisable to try out the steps explained in Section 2.2 on
your PG. You will probably only need to edit a few segments.
You can find the complete function block in the directory
\S5_DATEN\DEFAULT along with all the other parts of the
example program.
2
2-2
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
Brief Description of
the Control Task
The following illustration shows a carwash of a type commonly
found at gas stations and this is what we want to automate with
the STEP 5 program.
2
Figure 2-1 Carwash
The structure of the carwash and the steps necessary to clean the
car result in the following sequence of events:
– the carwash moves to a starting position
– the car is driven into the washing position
– the door of the carwash is closed and the washing is
started
– shampoo is applied, the car is washed and rinsed, wax is
applied and the car is dried
– finally, the door is opened automatically and the car can
be driven out.
Certain variables such as the time allowed for drying or for the
wax to distribute evenly, can be modified by the operating
personnel. The controller records the number of washing cycles
(i.e. number of cars washed).
C79000-G8576-C820-01
2-3
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
2
Conditions
Necessary to
Implement the
Example
Based on the detailed schedule for the washing process outlined
above, we can determine the “process interfaces”, i.e. the
inputs/outputs for the required control system (Figure 2-2). By
labelling the I/O signals (Signal list, Table KEIN MERKER),
based on the verbal description of the process, the control
program to implement this process can be developed (Appendix
KEIN MERKER1).
Inputs
Outputs
I32.0
Main switch
Emergency STOP I32.1
Start carwash
Controller
(S5-95)
Q32.0 Carriage forwards
Q32.1 Carriage backwards
Q32.2 Open door
Car in position
I33.0
I32.3
Carriage front
I32.4
Q32.6 Rotate brushes
Carriage back
Q32.7 Apply shampoo
Door open
I32.5
I32.6
Door closed
I32.7
Q33.1 Apply wax
Q33.2 Dry
Q32.3 Close door
Q33.0 Rinse
Q32.4 DRIVE CAR IN
Q32.5 DRIVE CAR OUT
Figure 2-2
Controller with Process Interfaces
The following figure shows the hardware and software
components required to implement the example. You only require
the S5-95 and the simulator to test the control program.
2-4
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
Programmable controller
S5-90/95
Carwash simulator
(Order no. 6ES5788-8MK11)
2
Sensors
(simulator contacts)
Inputs
List of
control
statements
(program)
Contacts
Motors
Solenoid valves
Displays
Outputs
(relays)
Actuators
(lamps on PLC)
Online functions
STEP 5 SW
Figure 2-3
Programming device
PG
Configuration of the “Carwash” Example
C79000-G8576-C820-01
2-5
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
2.2
Creating the Carwash Program with STEP 5
We will call the carwash control system our “project” in keeping
with the STEP 5 terminology. Creating the user program on the
PG can be divided into the following phases:
– setting up and opening the project
– creating the contents of the project (editing and structuring
the program)
– managing and handling the project.
2
2.2.1
Setting up the Project
Object
Project >
Settings >
Page 1 ...
Since the operating system and the programmer start-up depend
on the particular PG being used, we must start the description of
the example assuming that the STEP 5 initial menu is already
displayed.
Beginning with the menu selection “Object” you make all the
settings and parameter assignments necessary to prepare for
programming in the submenu “Project”.
1. For a new project, you select “Project, Settings, Page 1”.
To select the existing project at a later date, you use
”Load project”.
Page 1 of the input window appears with input fields for
various file names. These files either have defaults or
“NONAME” entered.
2. Specify the program you wish to create for the carwash by
overwriting the defaults with the following names:
Working directory:
C:\S5_DATEN\EXAMPLE
Program file:
C: CARWASST.S5D
Symbols file:
C: CARWASZ0.INI
The characters shown in bold face are fixed and cannot be
modified.
2-6
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
3. You can make entries in the input fields by positioning the
cursor on the file name and then pressing F3 = Select.
4. To select the working directory
– first press F3 twice, in the file selection box. Select the
subdirectory “EXAMPLE” under “Dr C:”.
– After confirming twice with OK1) the working directory
C:\S5_DATEN\EXAMPLE is selected.
5. Press F4 to change to Page 2.
2
Note
If you have problems selecting directories or files in the
definition and selection boxes, refer to the introductory section
3.1 in the “User’s Guide - Part 3”.
Select Mode
As long as there is no PLC connected, only “offline” is possible
as the mode and is therefore preset by STEP 5.
Select Operand
Representation
6. Set “Symbols” to “yes” with F3 and the same for
”comments”.
The “display” parameter is set to “Sym”.
Name the Printer
File
7. Overwrite the name of the printer file . . . DR.INI with our
program name “CARWAS”.
The name is automatically entered as the name of the
documentation file ...LS.INI.
Select Method of
Representation
Since we want to program in “Statement List”
8. Set this parameter to STL by pressing F3 repeatedly until
STL is displayed.
Select Symbol /
Comment Length
To simplify matters, we will leave the maximum symbol length at
8 characters. Since, however, a more detailed explanation will be
helpful,
9. Change the comment length to 40 characters. You must
complete this entry with the Return key.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
2-7
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
Save the Settings
2
Object
Project >
Save as...
2.2.2
10. You return to the menu by pressing F8.
11. After selecting “Project, Save as...” ;
the file selection box appears in which you enter “CARWAS”
under file name.
After clicking on OK and acknowledging the message
“Destination file already on FD, overwrite?”, STEP 5 sets up the
project file CARWASPJ.INI, which contains the program files
and settings.
Creating the Program
Once you have specified the project by naming files and selecting
parameters, we can now start entering the statements or
operations in the function block and the timer and counter values
in the data block.
Our intention is to show you how to make the inputs and not to
work through the example to the end. We will only make the
inputs until they start to become repetitive. You can copy the
complete program with all the blocks and segments to your
working directory from the directory C:\S5_DATEN\DEFAULT
under the project name PROBSPPG.INI.
To make the program easier to read, we will work with symbolic
operands in the control statements. This means that we require an
assignment list before beginning editing STL.
The creation of the carwash program therefore involves the
following editing steps:
– compilation of a list with the assignments of absolute
operands to symbolic process signal names
– creation of the data block for process setpoints and to
record the number of cars washed (i.e. number of process
cycles)
– creation of a statement list in a function block to control
the process.
These three steps will give you the opportunity to get to know the
three most important STEP 5 editors.
2-8
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
Editing the
Assignment List
Editor
Assignment list F7
Symbolic operands are names (e.g. “OPEN DOOR”) of the
absolute operands processed by the controller (e.g. I 32.6, Q 32.2,
F 10.0). So that the programmer “understands” the symbolic
operands you are using, an assignment list (ASSLI) is necessary,
in this case, this is edited in the symbols file with the name
C:CARWASZ0.SEQ.
As the basis for creating this list, use the list of process signals
(Table KEIN MERKER), in which you can see the assignments.
Before these symbolic operands are entered in the ASSLI, they
must be reduced to the maximum 8 characters selected in the
settings. The use of upper case characters for the symbols makes
the program clearer.
1. Call the “assignment list” STEP 5 editor in the editor menu
(or press F7).
Below the top line containing CARWASZO.SEQ, an empty
screen form is displayed with the columns “Operand”, “Symbol”
and “Comment”. You have already stipulated the lengths of the
fields for the symbolic operands and comments.
2. Type in the first line of the assignment list as follows:
Operand
I 32.0
Symbol
MAINSWIT
Comment
Keyswitch “carwash on”
3. To do this type in the characters: I 32.0 (in the insert mode)
and press SHIFT cursor right or TAB.
4. Type in MAINSWIT (this field is then full, the cursor
automatically jumps to the next field).
5. Type in “Keyswitch “carwash on”” and press the Return key
or TAB.
Figure 2-4 shows you an extract of the assignment list. Enter this
list as it stands in your symbols file. To complete the editor
editing session
6. Press the Insert key or F7 = OK .
This stores the file and starts the translation. The PG generates
the symbols files required by STEP 5 of the type . . . Z*.INI.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
2-9
2
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
File:
2
C:
CARWASZ0.SEQ
Operand
Symbol
Comment
I 32.0
I 32.1
I 32.3
I 32.5
I 32.6
MAINSWIT
EMERSTOP
IN-POS
C-BACK
DOOROP
Keyswitch “carwash on”
Emergency OFF switch (NC)
Indication “car in position”
Indication “carriage is at back”
Indication “door is open”
Q 32.1
Q 32.2
C-BWDS
OPEN-D
Command to actuator “carriage backwards”
Command to actuator “open door”
Q 32.4
Q 32.5
CAR-IN
CAR-OUT
Display: DRIVE CAR IN
Display: DRIVE CAR OUT
F 10.0
POSEDGE
Edge flag “carwash on/cold restart.”
F 10.7
STARTUP
Restart identifier from OB 20/21/22
C2
STEP
Counter for process steps
Figure 2-4
Assignment List (Section to be Edited)
After the translation, STEP 5 displays one of the following
messages:
”n lines processed, no errors found” or
”error in line n” and e.g. “key not found” or
”n lines processed, x errors found”.
If no errors are found, you have successfully completed editing
the assignment list. If an error is found, the incorrect line is
displayed at the top.
2-10
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
Management
Assignment lists >
Output error list
Editing the Data
Block
Editor
Data block
If errors are indicated, display or print out the error list as
follows:
1. Press OK and continue.
This brings you into the menu.
2. Under “Management”, select the submenu “Assignment lists”
and “Output error list”.
3. Read the error list directly from the screen or print it out.
4. Make the corrections for the assignment list in the editor and
trigger the translation again.
1. You call the editor for creating data blocks in the menu under
”Editor” and “Data block in the program file ....” (or function
key F2).
Use Figure KEIN MERKER in the Appendix for the contents of
the data block.
in the program file F2
Naming the DB
2. Enter the type and number of the data block to be created in
the job box, in this case: DB5. Confirm this with OK.
Checking the
Header Line
In the header line of the empty input field, the name of the block
DB5 and the program file C:CARWASST.S5D appear. The editor
specifies the addresses of the data words beginning with 0.
Enter Format
3. First enter the format for the data word (KH).
If the format is “valid” the cursor jumps to the next field. If you
make an illegal entry, this is rejected with the message “Input
illegal”.
Inputting a Data
Value
4. You must now type in the numerical value in the preset
format, keeping to the corresponding range of values.
Illogical values are not accepted. The cursor will not move even
if you press the Insert key.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
2-11
2
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
Inputting Further
DWs
2
The next DW field (following line) is displayed with the same
format. If you require a different format:
5. Go back with cursor left and enter the required format.
DB5
0:
1:
C:CARWASST.S5D
LEN=
KH= 0000;
KC= 000;
6. Type in the remaining data words as shown in Figure
KEIN MERKER.
Correcting in the
Data Field
Delete Character
– Position the cursor on the character and press DEL.
Insert Character
– Position the cursor on the character you want to insert a
character before and press expand horizontal, if necessary
several times.
Delete Line
– Position the cursor in the format field of the line you want to
delete and press DEL.
Insert Line
– Position the cursor in the format field of the line you want to
insert a line before and press expand vertical.
Typing in DW
Comments
You can type in or overwrite the comments for the data words in
upper or lower case letters with up to a maximum of 32
characters.
7. Position the cursor in the comment field with SHIFT cursor
right. Move to the next line with cursor down. Insert /delete
characters as in the data field (see above). Insert/delete
comment lines using the function keys F1 = Expand DC and
F2 = Delete DC.
Entering the block
title
To enter the title “Carwash: counters/timers”
8. Type in the text after pressing SHIFT F6 or COM.
9. Press the Insert key to return to the DW editing area.
2-12
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
Writing the Block
Comment
You call the editor for the block comment by pressing SHIFT F7
= Comment or COM twice.
10. Type in the text from Figure KEIN MERKER, completing
each line with the Insert key.
Making Corrections in
the Block Comment
To try out the “insert/delete” functions in this editor. Position the
cursor on the “c” of controller in the second line and press F1 =
Insert.
The editor is in the insert mode. The softkey label changes to F1
= Overwrite, i.e the selectable mode is displayed and insert is set.
Type in “Simatic”. The text is inserted at this point. You return to
the overwrite mode with F1 = Overwrite.
Now position the cursor on the “S” of Simatic and press F2 =
Delete, move the cursor to the “c” of controller and F2 = Delete
again.
The word you inserted is now deleted.
Completing the
Comment
Complete the comment with F8 = Return and Insert or Insert
twice.
Inputting the LIB. No.
As the final step in the editing session, specify a library number
to identify the block (e.g. DB version).
11. Press SHIFT F2 = Lib no., the cursor jumps to the LIB field,
type in the LIB number, in this case “2”. Exit the field with
the Insert or the Return key.
Terminating the
Editing Session
Once your screen contains the information described above:
12. Complete editing the DB by pressing the Insert key. If the
message “DBn Already in file, overwrite?” appears, confirm
with yes.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
2-13
2
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
Your inputs or modifications are now edited and saved (in some
cases the messages must be confirmed twice).
DB 5
2
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
Editing a Function
Block
C:CARWASST.S5D
KH =
KC =
KC =
KH =
KT =
KH =
KF =
KH =
KT =
KH =
KF =
KH =
0000;
000;
000;
0000;
030.2;
0000;
+00000;
0000;
045.2;
0000;
+00000;
0000;
LIB=2
LEN=17 / 24
empty
counter: no. of cars washed (KH)
counter: no. of cars washed (KF)
empty
setpoint for wax distr. time WT
WT actual value (KH)
WT actual value (KF)
empty
setpoint for drying time DT
DT actual value (KH)
DT actual value (KF)
1. You call the editor for creating STEP 5 blocks in the editor
menu under “STEP 5 block, in the program file”.
The job box is then displayed again.
Editor
STEP 5 block >
in the program file F1
Naming a Block
2. Here you can enter the type and number of the block you want
to create in the job box.
The possible block types are available in the selection box, and
you can display this as follows:
3. Press F3 = Select.
4. Enter the type and an unused number for the block to be
created in the block field of the selection box, in this case FB
5, and complete your entry with OK.
STEP 5 enters the information in the job box.
5. Mark the options
– ”Confirm before overwriting “ and ”
– ”Update seq. source file”
with yes and then click on OK again.
The input field of the editor is then opened.
2-14
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
Entering a Block
Name
The header line contains the block name (FB 5), the program file
(C:CARWASST.S5D) and the length of the block with its header
(LEN=0). The cursor is positioned in the “Name” field, where 8
characters are available to name the function block.
6. Type in CARWASH and press the Return key.
The cursor jumps to the field “Decl: ...” which is only significant
for function blocks in which parameters can be assigned.
7. Exit this field by pressing the Return key again.
Entering Statements
for Segment 1
The cursor is now positioned in the input field for the first
statement. Take out the printed program excerpt from Appendix
A1 (step 5).
8. Type in the statement in segment 1: C DB 5 and then press
SHIFT cursor right or TAB cursor right.
The cursor is positioned in the field for the statement comment.
9. Type in the text “call DB 5 (timer/counter values)” and then
move on to the next statement field by pressing the Return
key.
Typing in the Segment
Title
Segment 1 does not contain any further statements, however, the
segment title has not yet been entered.
10. Press COM and SHIFT F6 = Title and type in “Prepare
program execution”. You exit this field again by pressing the
Return key or Insert.
Typing in Statements
for Segment 2
We now move on to segment 2.
11. Press Segment end (***)
The cursor is positioned in the first statement field of segment 2.
12. Type in the statements and statement comments based on Step
5 in Appendix KEIN MERKER. Write the operands using the
symbolic names specified in the assignment list. These must
be preceded by a hyphen in the statement field.
You can type in all the entries in the statement section without
blanks. However, symbols defined in upper case letters must be
written as upper case letters.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
2-15
2
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
Correcting the
Symbols File
2
2-16
In the 4th and 6th statement lines you will notice that when you
type in -POSPUL, the cursor jumps back to the hyphen and
cannot be moved out of the field. This symbol has not been
assigned to an operand (message: No assignment, symbol not
defined), and this must be corrected.
13. Instead of -POSPUL, type in the formal operand F10.1 to be
able to continue editing the segment which is finally
completed with the Insert key.
Reply to the message: Enter changed segment? with “yes”.
You then change to the output mode.
14. In the “output” mode of the editor, position the cursor on the
4th statement again and press F1 = Disp symb to call the
symbols editor.
From the symbols file ...*Z0.INI, the sequence of statements with
symbolic assignments is displayed with the cursor marking the
formal operand F 10.1. Complete this line with the symbol
”POSPUL” and the corresponding operand comment “pulse flag
for F 10.0 (only 1 cycle!)”.
15. Press F2 = Edit symb and after typing in the symbol and
comment, press F2 = Insert. Complete the correction by
pressing F8 = Return.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
When you return to the block editor, segment 2 should appear as
shown below.
FB5
Segment 2
:O
:O
:AN
:=
:R
:A
:S
:AN
:AN
:R
:***
C:CARWASST.S5D
0007
”define operating status”
-MAINSWIT
-STARTUP
-POSEDGE
-POSPUL
-STARTUP
-POSPUL
-POSEDGE
-MAINSWIT
-STARTUP
-POSEDGE
LEN= 23
2
Output
main switch “carwash on”
restart id from OB 20/21/22
edge flag for positive edge
pulse flag (only one cycle!)
reset restart identifier
update edge flag
no “carwash on” command
no restart identifier
reset edge flag
Correcting Statements
You make corrections in the statement and comment field in the
same way as when editing the data block. There is, however, one
difference: the delete and insert line functions affect the whole
line. To delete a line, position the cursor on the appropriate
statement colon.
Writing the Segment
Comment
Call the segment comment editor as follows:
16. Press SHIFT F6 = Seg com and SHIFT F7 = Comment or
press COM twice.
Under the $ character with the segment number, you can now
write your comment text. (Based on the printout of the program
at the end of Appendix KEIN MERKER1).
17. Type in the texts for segment 1 and segment 2, completing
each line with the Return key. You return to the block editor
with F8 = Return.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
2-17
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
Statements for
Segment 4 and
Segment 5
Once you have pressed Segment end, the cursor is positioned in
the first statement line of segment 3. You can now type in the
statements and comments for segment 4 and segment 5. We have
skipped segment 3 and will insert it later.
One special feature in segment 4 is the program branch with a
conditional jump to the second statement. The jump label CONT
must be positioned at the destination of the jump to mark the
re-entry before the statement colon.
18. Press the cursor left key twice and type in the jump label.
Inserting
Segment 3
19. Use
= scroll forward or
= scroll back to page to
segment 3 and press F5 = Seg fct
and then press F5 =Insert again.
After pressing F1 = New, the cursor is positioned in the first
statement of the newly inserted and still empty segment.
20. Edit the segment and complete it by pressing the Insert key
and confirming the system prompts.
2
2-18
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
2.2.3
Documenting the Program
Documentation
Standard output >
STEP 5 blocks >
In from
the program
programfile
file...
Documentation
Standard output >
Data blocks >
In from
the program
programfile
file...
You can now print out the program section in FB 5, the data
block and the assignment list. The printer file has the default
name NONAMEDR.INI in page 2 of the settings. Overwrite this
with CARWASDR.INI.
Change to the “Documentation” menu and select the standard
output of STEP 5 blocks.
As you will see in the job box, STEP 5 provides you with the
possibility of specifying blocks and segments.
1. Enter “FB 5” from your program file in the job box.
2. Under the options, select the address representation
“word-oriented” and the printout type “standard”.
3. The printout is triggered with OK.
The printout contains the following elements for each segment:
– the segment title and segment number
– the statements section with line comments
– the names of the operands in the assignment list.
Your printout of the program CARWASST.S5D should now
correspond to the program excerpt shown in Appendix
KEIN MERKER (Section 5) apart from the symbols names.
Follow the same procedure to obtain a printout of data block
”DB 5” and the assignment list “CARWASZ0.SEQ” by selecting
the appropriate submenu items.
You can print out other existing blocks by pressing F3 = Select
and selecting a block in the selection box.
If you have not connected a printer to your PG, you can output
the documentation to a file and print out the blocks from a
different PG/PC.
In this case, mark “Documentation to file” in the job box for
the settings (Page 2) and specify the file name
“CARWASLS.INI”.
This file name is automatically entered in the settings on page 2
“Documentation to file”.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
2-19
2
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
2.3
Transferring Files, Blocks and Segments
2
Object
DOS file >
Copy...
Object
DOS file >
Directory...
2-20
We interrupted the editing of the carwash program at the 5th
segment and will now add the missing sections from the supplied
program. This will familiarize you with the directory, transfer,
copy and delete functions in STEP 5.
The complete program is located under the name PROEXA... in
the directory \S5_DATEN\DEFAULT. To transfer the file, change
over to the DOS file functions as follows:
1. Select “DOS file” and “Copy” in the Object menu.
The job box “Copy DOS files” is displayed. Here, you select the
source and destination directory for the transfer and assuming
that you do not want to transfer all the source files displayed in
the middle window, copy the files belonging to the program one
after the other in the “single” mode.
2. First check that the directories are correctly selected.
Source drive: C:\S5_DATEN\DEFAULT
Destination drive: C:\S5_DATEN\EXAMPLE
We want to copy the files PROEXA*.* . To do this:
3. Mark “all” in the “Copy mode” window and select “yes” in
the “Confirm before overwriting” window.
4. Trigger the transfer by clicking on Transfer or pressing the
Return key.
If you have selected “confirm before overwriting”, STEP 5
displays the prompt “File already exists, overwrite?” if you repeat
a copy procedure.
5. Confirm the prompt with yes and exit the box after the
transfer with ESC = Exit.
In the “DOS files - directory” menu check that all the PROEXA..
files have been copied as follows:
set the directory C:\S5_DATEN\EXAMPLE\ under “Drive/dir.
Apart from the files of the CARWAS... program, the PROEXA...
files must also be entered.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
Now that both programs are in the working directory, you can add
the missing program sections to the incomplete program by
1. transferring the missing segments,
2. replacing the incomplete block FB5, by FB10 containing the
complete carwash program and renaming it as FB5,
3. transferring the missing organization blocks (the data blocks
are identical).
1. Transferring
Segments
Object
Blocks >
Transfer >
File – File
Segments can only be transferred between blocks in the same
program. This means that the function block FB10 must be
transferred from the program PROEXAST.S5D to our program
CARWAS... .
To transfer blocks, select “Transfer blocks” and “File - file”,
STEP 5 then displays a file selection box in which you specify
the following:
1. as source C:PROEXAST.S5D
–>\S5_DATEN\EXAMPLE\ and
as destination C:CARWASST.S5D
–>\S5_DATEN\EXAMPLE.
When you press F3, STEP 5 displays the files located in the
working directory.
2. Under “Selection” and “block list” enter the block you wish to
transfer (here, FB10) .
After clicking on Transfer or pressing the Return key, STEP 5
displays the prompt “Write preheader to FD?”.
3. Reply with yes.
This is followed by the prompt “Transfer comments as well?”
4. Confirm the message with “yes”.
Note
The messages “FC10 Already in file, overwrite?” and
“FBDO.010 Already in file, overwrite?” do not appear the first
time you transfer.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
2-21
2
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
2
Object
Blocks >
Directory >
in the program file...
Editor
STEP 5 blocks >
in the program file...
2-22
5. Confirm the message “block(s) transferred!” with OK and exit
the job box with ESC = Exit.
Check the transfer in the block directory in the program file.
1. Select “Blocks, Directory, in the program file” in the Object
menu or use F3 in the selection box (Directory file:settings).
Click “all blocks” (if not already selected as default) so that
2. after clicking Output (or pressing the Return key or Insert
key)
a list of the blocks in the program file CARWAS... is displayed on
the screen. By marking the corresponding selection, you can also
output this list on the printer or to a file.
To transfer segments
1. Go into the block editor and select FB10 in the job box.
= scroll down or the
2. Move the cursor to segment 6 using
+ key.
3. Press F5 = Seg fct and F4 = File.
4. With F8 = Return and ESC = Exit you can now exit FB10.
A copy of segment 6 is loaded in the system buffer. To transfer
this to FB5
5. Select FB5 in the block editor and move the cursor to segment
5 at the end of the program.
6. Press F5 = Seg Fct and F6 = Append. Then press F2 = Buffer
to append segment 6 to the program CARWAS.... .
7. Complete the operation with F8 = Return and F7 = OK.
Reply to the STEP 5 prompts with yes.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
You then exit the editor. Repeat the transfer procedure for
segment 7.
As you will see, not all the operands in the new segments have
been written as symbols. This is due to the incomplete
assignment list in the previously edited program section. To
correct the situation, proceed as follows:
Go to Page 1 of the project settings and enter
PROEXAZ0.INI as the symbols file. Then save with F6.
Since the block editor can now access the complete assignment
list of the supplied program, the operands in segments 6 and 7 are
also displayed in symbolic form.
You can check this by calling FB5 again in the block editor.
With this procedure, you can append or insert segments from
other blocks into the program file. To transfer and extend larger
program sections, this method is, however, time-consuming.
2. Transferring and
Renaming Blocks
Object
Blocks >
Delete >
in the program file...
C79000-G8576-C820-01
To replace FB5 in the program CARWAS... with FB10
completely,
– FB5 must first be deleted including the comments
– and then FB10 renamed as FB 5.
1. To delete FB5, select “Blocks, Delete” in the Object menu,
enter “FB5” in the job box .
2. After you press Delete, the system prompts “Delete comments
as well?”. Confirm this prompt with Yes and the message
“block(s) deleted!” with OK.
If you check the block directory, you can make sure that FB5,
FC5 and FBDO.005 have been deleted.
2-23
2
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
Object
Blocks >
2
Transfer >
File – File ...
3. Transferring the
Organization Blocks
Object
Blocks >
Transfer >
File – File ...
2-24
1. To rename FB10, select “Blocks - Transfer” in the Object
menu and then enter or select
– destination file C:CARWASST.S5D and
– mark “rename block” (X), [FB10] to [FB5]
2. Click on Transfer and confirm the system prompts with yes.
When you check the block directory, you will see that there is a
new FB5/FC5 along with FB10/FC10.
In the editor, check that the new FB5 is complete with 15
segments, symbolic operands and all comments.
To complete our program containing FB5 and DB5 the missing
organization blocks must also be transferred.
1. To transfer the OBs, select “Blocks, Transfer” in the Object
menu and enter the source file PROEXA... and the destination
file CARWAS... in the job box.
2. Mark all “OBs”. When you click on Transfer, the system
displays the message “Transfer comments as well” which you
confirm with OK and then “Blocks transferred”, which you
again confirm with yes.
The unconditional jump operation in OB 1 must now be changed
to JU FB5 and the data block call C DB 10 must be changed to
C DB 5 in FB 5, following which the CARWAS... program
contains all the blocks required for the controller.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
2.4
Checking and Modifying the Program
Apart from the editing functions, STEP 5 provides a series of
functions with which you can check and document the user
program and rename operands. You can now try out some of
these functions on the carwash program.
Cross References
Management
Generate XRF
C79000-G8576-C820-01
2
STEP 5 stores cross references to statements containing the same
operand (even in other blocks) in the XRF file (*XR.INI). You
can generate this file
by selecting”Generate XRF” in the management menu.
The XRF file is then entered in Page 1 of the “settings”. You can
now display the cross references for each operand in the block
editor.
1. Call FB 5 in the block editor and position the cursor in
segment 2 on statement “:O -STARTUP”.
2. Press F2 = Reference and once again F2 = Disp XRF.
The cursor now flashes under F 10.7, the operand with which the
cross references will be displayed.
3. Confirm with the Insert key.
A table of cross references for the selected operand is now
displayed (Figure 2-5). This table contains all the points in the
program at which the relevant operand is “addressed”. The cursor
is positioned on the first block reference “OB20 :1/AN”.
4. Press F2 = Jump.
The organization block OB 20 is displayed. If necessary, you can
change to the editing mode and make modifications. To return to
the table:
5. Press F2 twice and the Return key.
To return to FB5 press F2 to change back to OB 20 then
6. Press F2 = Reference followed by F5 = Orig blk.
2-25
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
You can repeat the jump to a referenced block
by positioning the cursor on FB10:2/AN in Figure 2-5 and
pressing F2 = Jump.
SEG 2 in FB10 is then displayed.
2
C:CARWASST.S5D
FB5
Segment 2
0007
LIB=2
”define operating status”
LEN=166
Output
Cross references
F 10.7
STARTUP
OB 20:1/AN
OB 22:1/AN
FB 5:2/R
Figure 2-5
Documentation
Standard output >
XRF list >
from program file...
2-26
OB 20:1/S
OB 22:1/S
FB 10:2/AN
restart identifier from OB
OB 21:1/AN
FB 5:2/AN
FB 10:2/O
OB 21:1/S
FB 5:2/O
FB 10:2/R
References to the Operand -STARTUP in CARWAS
The “documentation” menu provides you with a series of lists in
which the cross references are compiled either for a single
operand (in this case F 10.7) or for a group of operands (e.g. I, Q,
F, counters). The cross references can be restricted to a particular
block or extended to cover all the blocks in the program.
Figure 2-6 shows the printout of the cross references for the
“outputs” in FB5 and the “counters” and the start-up flag (F 10.7)
in all blocks. The asterisks beside segment numbers indicate that
the operand occurs in an assignment. You can select the list you
require by marking the options in the job box “Output XRF list”.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
FB 5
X reference list: outputs
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
QB
QB
32.0
32.1
32.2
32.3
32.4
32.5
32.6
32.7
33.0
33.1
33.2
32 32 -
C: CARWASST.S5D
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
-C-FWDS
-C-BWDS
-OPEN-D
-CLOSE-D
-CAR-IN
-CAR-OUT
-ROTATE–B
-SHAMPOO
-RINSE
-WAX
-DRY
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
LIB=2
7*,
4*,
4*,
6*,
5*,
4*,
7*,
7*,
8*,
9*,
12*
3*,
3*,
LEN=166
8*, 9*, 10*, 15*
8*, 9*, 10*, 11*, 15*
12*, 15*
7*, 15*
6*
5*, 13*, 14*
9*
8*
9*
10*
2
4*
4*
X reference list: counters
FB
FB
OB
OB
OB
OB
2
C
5
10
1
20
21
22
:
:
:
:
:
:
Processed
Processed
Processed
Processed
Processed
Processed
-STEP
OB 20
OB 21
OB 22
FB 5
FB 10
3*,
12*,
3*,
12*,
1*
1*
1*
6*
6*
FB 5
FB 10
OB 20
OB 21
OB 22
2*
2*
1*
1*
1*
FB 5
FB 10
C
20
-NUMBER
4*, 5*, 6*, 7*, 8*, 9*, 10*, 11*
13*, 14*
4*, 5*, 6*, 7*, 8*, 9*, 10*, 11*
13*, 14*
S e a r c h for an operand in all blocks
F
10.7
-STARTUP
F
10.7
-STARTUP
Figure 2-6
List of Cross References from the Carwash Program
Search
Editor
STEP 5 blocks >
in the program file...
C79000-G8576-C820-01
During the editing session, you can specify cross references to be
searched for.
1. Call FB5 in the block editor and press F3 = Search.
2. As the search key (KEY:) specify an operand, in this case
I 32.4 or -C-FRONT. Press F2 (From seg1).
The first occurrence of this operand is displayed in segment 8
statement 4.
3. Press F3 = Search again and F3 = Continue.
Segment 10 is displayed with the cursor marking statement line 4,
etc.
2-27
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
Rewiring
Management
2
Rewire >
Manual...
Comparing Blocks
Project
Blocks >
Compare >
File – File ...
2-28
It is sometimes necessary to assign an operand a new address
within the program. Using the “rewiring” function, operands can
be renamed, i.e. assigned different I/O addresses.
To illustrate how this function works, we will rename one of the
output operands in FB10.
1. Check the file name:
Program file C:CARWASST:S5D to
Program file C:CARWASST:S5D
2. Enter FB10 in the job box and confirm with OK.
A table appears in which you enter the previous operand (in
absolute representation) on the right-hand side and the new
operand on the left-hand side.
3. Type in the old operand: Q 33.2 new operand: Q 1.7.
4. Complete your input with the Insert key and confirm the
following system messages with yes.
Check that the modification has been made as follows:
5. – Call block FB10 in the editor and press F3 = Search,
– Type in the search key Q 1.7 and press F2 (From seg 1).
Segment 12, operand Q 1.7 is entered three times instead of
-DRY, i.e. the signal to open and close the air valves for drying
the car is now output via Q 1.7.
STEP 5 provides a compare function with which blocks of the
same type and same number in the PLC and PG can be compared.
If there is no PLC connected, blocks in different programs can be
compared with each other. To try out this function, you can
compare the FB10 in CARWAS... modified with the rewiring
function with the original FB in PROEXA... .
1. In the Object menu, call the functions “Blocks, Compare, File
- file”.
2. In the job box, enter C:PROEXAST.S5D under “compare with
program file” and FB10 under block list. When you have done
this, click on OK.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
You then obtain an overview of the differences found in segment
12. The differing STEP 5 operations are listed with their
addresses in MC5 code.
3. Repeat the block comparison by marking “all blocks” in the
job box.
STEP 5 displays the comparisons as shown in Figure 2-7.
Non-existent blocks are indicated by the message 020D. You can
also recognize that different FBs are called in OB1.
Compare function
Block
Segment Address C:CARWAS
DB 5
DB 10
FB 5
FB 10
Address
C:PROEXA
Message no. 020D
Message no. 020D
Message no. 020D
12
0084
0089
008B
D781
C781
F781
D2A1
C2A1
F2A1
1
0000
3D05
3D0A
OB 1
OB 20
Comparison no errors
Figure 2-7
Block Comparison between CARWAS and PROXEA
C79000-G8576-C820-01
2-29
2
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
2.5
Loading and Testing the Program
To test the carwash program, you must now connect an S5-95 to
your programmer. Establish the permanent connection between
the PG and PLC as follows: change the mode to “online[cycl.]”
in Page 2 of the “Settings” using F3 = Select and F6 = Save.
2
2.5.1
Loading the Program
Object
Blocks >
Transfer >
File - PLC F5
Object
Blocks >
Directory >
in the PLC Shift F3
Complete loading the program using the function “Transfer
blocks” in the object menu.
1. Select “Blocks, Transfer” in the object menu.
2. If it is not already set, enter C:CARWASST.S5D as the source
in the job box and under selection enter “FB5” in the block
list, then “DB5” and finally “all OBs”.
3. After pressing Transfer, the relevant blocks are copied to the
PLC. Confirm this with OK.
4. Check the loading by outputting a list of the blocks on the
PLC.
5. To do this, once again mark “all blocks” in the job box.
A list of all the blocks loaded on the PLC is output. The list only
contains the program sections required by the programmable
controller. Comments and block preheaders are not transferred
when the blocks are loaded.
Note
System blocks of the PLC are also output.
2-30
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
2.5.2
Testing the Program
You can now test your user program, i.e. function block FB5, in
the online mode segment by segment and statement by statement
to make sure that it runs correctly. The decision table (Page A-10)
shows you the reactions of the PLC on the output side to certain
combinations of input signals.
To set or modify the input signals, you can use the eight on/off
switches (I 32.0 ... I 32.7) and two buttons (I 33.0/I 33.1) on the
“SIMATIC INPUT” simulator (order no. 6ES5788-8MK11).
Depending on the required method of representation of the signal
status displays on the PG, select the function “block status” or
“status variable” to test the signals.
2.5.3
Block Status
Test
Block status...
Shift F6
1. On the simulator, switch all the toggle switches down (= off)
and set the mode selector on the PLC to STOP.
2. Select “Block status” in the test menu.
3. Enter FB5 in the job box, mark the options with yes and click
on OK.
Segment 1 appears in the “STL” method of representation. Below
the header information, the statement, the result of logic
operation RLO and the status of ACCU 1 and ACCU 2 are
displayed. The entries in the columns “status” (result condition
codes) and “SAC” (address counter) are irrelevant for testing the
example.
Now switch the PLC to RUN.
The corresponding RLO is displayed and at the bottom right the
message “Status processing active” appears.
1. Start the carwash by flicking up the switches for I 32.0 and I
32.1 (= on).
2. Move the breakpoint for status processing to segment 3 by
pressing
= scroll forward twice.
3. Move the cursor to the line following the jump operation by
pressing cursor down three times.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
2-31
2
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
The displays (RLO, Status etc.) disappear and you can see that
this statement (following the branch) is not processed (message
“Statement not processed). In segment 4, the situation is similar.
The processing also stops at the branch.
4. Now move the breakpoint to segment 5, in which according to
Figure KEIN MERKER the actual washing process begins.
RLO=1 in line 1 indicates that all the prerequirements such as the
initial carwash position and the step counter (-STEP) setting have
been fulfilled and the washing process can begin. In column 5 of
Table A-2 you can see which inputs must be set.
5. Flick the switches E32.5 and E32.6 up.
The step counter and ACCU 1 have the value 1, the set inputs
have the status 1. On the PLC, output Q 32.4 is lit, i.e. DRIVE
CAR IN is displayed.
6. Move the breakpoint to segment 6 and flick I 32.3 up for “car
in position”. After pressing the button I 33.0 (start) the
washing process is started.
The display for the driver goes off (Q 32.4 = 0) and the door is
closed (Q 32.3 is lit). The step counter (-STEP) changes to 2.
7. Move the breakpoint to segment 7 and simulate the closed
door by I 32.6 = off and I 32.7 = on.
The parts of the process “apply shampoo”, “rotate brushes” and
“carriage forwards” are started (variable = 1). The step counter
switches to 3.
8. Simulate the remaining parts of the washing process by
changing the inputs according to Table A-2 depending on the
position of the breakpoint.
In segment 11, following I 32.5 = 1, you can see how the wax
distribution time WT is decremented to 0 at one second intervals
followed by the start condition for drying being generated
automatically by the step counter (= 7).
9. Move the breakpoint to segment 12.
You can follow the drying time (DT = 45 s). Simulate the
remaining parts of the process in step 8 and step 9 as described
above.
2
2-32
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
Object
Blocks >
Transfer >
PLC – file...
Shift F5
Status Variable
Test
Status variable...
Shift F7
C79000-G8576-C820-01
In segment 14, the step counter returns to 1, indicating the initial
position of the carwash. This means that the example program is
capable of running and fulfilling the task. If errors occur, they
must be corrected using the information provided by the RLO and
contents of the ACCUs and the status of the signals.
1. Change to the editing mode with F6. You can position the
cursor on the statements you want to modify, delete or insert.
2. Press the Insert key and answer the prompt “Enter modified
segment?” and the next message with yes.
With the steps outlined above, you have modified the program in
the PLC. To transfer the modified block to the PG, e.g. for
archiving,
3. Select “Blocks, Transfer, PLC - file” in the object menu and
enter FB5 in the job box.
1. Set all the toggle switches on the simulator to off and the
mode selector on the PLC to STOP.
2. Select “Status variable” in the test menu.
An empty table with the columns “Operands:” and “Formats:”
appears on the screen.
3. Working from the signal list, enter all the output operands
including timers and counters in absolute or symbolic format
and complete each line with the Return key.
STEP 5 adds the format to your entries. Once your operand list
has the same contents as shown in Figure 2-8
2-33
2
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
4. Press F2 = Store and specify the number of the variables
block (in this case VB 5).
PLC in CYCLE
2
Operands:
Signal states:
-C-FWDS
-C-BWDS
-OPEN-D
-CLOSE-D
Q 32.0
Q 32.1
Q 32.2
Q 32.3
KM=
KM=
KM=
KM=
-CAR-IN
-CAR-OUT
Q 32.4
Q 32.5
KM= 0
KM= 0
-ROTATE-B
-SHAMPOO
-RINSE
-WAX
-DRY
Q 32.6
Q 32.7
Q 33.0
Q 33.1
Q 33.2
KM=
KM=
KM=
KM=
KM=
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
-WT
-DT
T 20
T 22
KT= stoppped
KT= stoppped
-STEP
-NUMBER
C 2
C 20
KC= 3
KC= 1
Figure 2-8
Display of the Output Operands in Variables Block VB 5
5. Complete these preparations by pressing the Insert key or F6
= Activate.
Test the function block using the “status variable” function as
follows:
6. Switch the PLC to RUN and the toggle switches I 32.0 and
I 32.1 to “on”.
The current values of the operands (initially all 0) and the
messages “PLC in CYCLE” and “Status processing active” are
added to the “Signal states” column. By using the decision table,
you can once again check the reaction of the controller to certain
combinations of values at the inputs.
7. Switch I 32.5 and I 32.6 to “on”.
The carwash goes to the ready status with Q 32.4 = 1 and C 2 = 1.
8. Simulate the car being driven in by I 32.3 = on and starting
the carwash by setting I 33.0.
2-34
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
To door is closed (Q 32.3 = 1), the step counter changes to 2 and
the action itself is stored in C 20 = 1.
9. Simulate the status “door closed” by I 32.6 = off and I 32.7 =
on.
The PG now displays the signal states shown in Figure 2-8. The
brush carriage now moves forwards with the brushes rotating and
the shampoo jets open.
10. Simulate the movement of the carriage “carriage front” or
“carriage back” by switching I 32.4 and I 32.5 on and off.
Continue simulating the inputs until the two times WT and DT
are displayed and terminated with step counter = 8.
In step 9 (I 32.7 = off, I 32.6 = on) DRIVE CAR OUT is
displayed and in the last step (I 32.3 = off) the ready status is
re-established with the display DRIVE CAR IN and
step counter = 1.
11. To terminate the status function, press ESC = Exit and you
return to the menu with F8.
STEP 5 displays the signal statuses at the selected breakpoint. By
pressing ESC = Exit once, you can interrupt the status processing
and insert additional operands in the list. Following this, the
Insert key continues the status processing.
Force Variables
C79000-G8576-C820-01
With this function you can modify variables (e.g. I/Q/F) in the
process image byte by byte. You can also display the current
signal states with the PLC in the RUN mode. Once again, an
operand list must be prepared for this function.
2-35
2
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example -
Test
Force variables ...
Shift F8
2
Select “Force variables” in the test menu and type in the
inputs and outputs as byte operands (IB and QB) in the empty
table “Operands - Formats”. Complete each line with the
Return key and overwrite the default format with “KM”. Add
C 2/C 20 and T 20/T 22 to the list and then press F6 =
Activate.
Your screen will then resemble the screen illustrated in the figure
below. By activating the switches on the simulator one after the
other, you can display the corresponding values at the outputs and
counters (much the same as in the status functions).
Press ESC = Exit and switch I 32.0/I 32.1 to “on” and the
PLC from STOP to RUN.
The PG now displays the column “Force process image”. You can
now influence the outputs in QB 32/QB 33 directly with the
keyboard and check the way in which the actuators function. Try
this out as follows:
Enter the bit pattern KM = 00110011 in QB 32 and press
Insert.
In the PLC, the output relays 32.0/32.1 and 32.4/32.5 must be
switched on and the message “End of force fct.” must appear on
the screen.
PLC in CYCLE
Operands:
.......................QB 32
.......................QB 33
.......................IB 32
.......................IB 33
- STEP
C 2
- WT
T 20
- DT
T 22
2-36
Signal states:
KM= 00000001
KM= 00000000
KM= 00000000
KM= 00000000
KC = 2
KC = stopped
KT = stopped
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Overview of the Functions
3
This section contains descriptions of all the operations and
functions you can use when working with STEP 5. The sequence
and contents of the individual sections are oriented on the
sequence in which the functions appear in the main and submenus
(Overview pages 3-2/3-3).
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-1
Overview of the Functions
User’s Guide (Chap 3)
Graphical User Interface (Chap 3.1)
3.2 Object
3
Project
Blocks
DOS file
PCP/M file
End
3.3 Editor
3.2.1 Project
3.2.2 Blocks
3.2.3 DOS file
3.2.4 PCP/M file
3.2.5 End
STEP 5 block
Data block
DB screen form
Assignment list
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
3.4 Test
3.3.1 Common Functions
3.3.2 Editing STL
3.3.3 Editing LAD
3.3.4 Editing CSF
3.3.5 Editing Data Blocks
3.3.6 Editing DB Screens
3.3.7 Editing an Assignment List
Block status
Status variable
PLC control
Force variables
Force outputs
Output PLC info
Program test ON
Program test OFF
3.4.1 Block Status
3.4.2 Status Variable
3.4.3 PLC Control
3.4.4 Force Variables
3.4.5 Force Outputs
3.4.6 Output PLC Info
3.4.7 Program Test ON
3.4.8 Program Test OFF
Generate XRF
EPROMs
Rewire
Assignment lists
Select drive
Bus paths
Figure 3-1
3-2
3.5 Management
3.5.1 Generate XRF
3.5.2 EPROMs
3.5.3 Rewiring
3.5.4 Assignment Lists
3.5.5 Select Drive
3.5.6 Bus Paths
Overview: Main Menu → STEP 5 Function → User’s Guide
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Overview of the Functions
User’s Guide (Chap. 3)
Graphical User Interface (section 3.1)
3.6 Documentation
Standard output
Enhanced output
Settings
3.7 Change
3.6.1 Standard Output
3.6.2 Enhanced Output
3.6.3 Settings
further
3
3.7.1 Other Packages
Key assignment list
Info - STEP 5 version
Version of S5 packages
Figure 3-2
3.8 Help
3.8.1 Key Assignment List for Function Selection
3.8.2 Info About STEP 5 Version
3.8.3 Version of S5 Packages
Overview: Main Menu → STEP 5 Function → User’s Guide (continued)
Key
Menus on the screen are shown with gray shading, the titles of
the sections in the User’s Guide are shown in italics.
Creating a Program
STEP 5 provides functions and utilities to help you create your
programs and for user-friendly
– editing,
– transferring (copying) and
– documentation
of blocks and files.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-3
Overview of the Functions
Online Functions
For testing and correcting your programs and for operating the
progammable controller (PLC), STEP 5 has functions
– for controlling and monitoring the PLC (STOP/RUN,
info),
– for outputting/displaying the current status of process
variables (in the block or in a selectable list),
– for displaying the process image of the peripheral I/Os and
for setting/modifying I/O values.
EPROM/EEPROM
Program Memory
If the PG has an EPROM slot, you can write (blow) and read
(copy) programs to and from the EPROM/EEPROM submodules
using STEP 5.
Bus Connection
If the PG is connected to a bus, you can establish (edit) bus paths
and store/call up the data you have created (path name, addresses,
nodes etc.) using STEP 5 utilities.
Operating System
STEP 5 programs and files you created under PCP/M-86 can also
be processed under S5-DOS.
3
3-4
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Graphical User Interface
3.1
Graphical User Interface
STEP 5 functions are activated using the menu bar with its main
menus and submenus. With either the mouse or keyboard, you
can select the tools and utilities you require for your session. If
you prefer to continue using the function keys as in previous
STEP 5 versions, you can, of course, do so.
Menu bar with
main menu titles
3.1
Object
Editor
Project>
Blocks >
DOS file>
PCP/M file >
End SHIFT F4
Menu with
options
Test
Management
Settings >
Load ...
F10
Save...
Save as ...
Page 1 ...
Page 2 ..
Documentation
Change
Help
F4
SIEMENS AG
Copyright
(1994)
Working area
Selection box
message or
information box
STEP 5
Function key
menu
F Edit PLC
1 Edit
F DB PLC
2 DB
F Dir PLC
3 Dir
F End
4 Presets
F BLK PLC–> F Stat BSK
5 BLK –> PLC 1 Comp BLK
>>
Other key assignments with TAB
Information
line
Figure 3-3
You can change the project settings
Graphical User Interface
Menu Bar, Menus
C79000-G8576-C820-01
When you select a menu item in the menu bar either by clicking
it with the mouse or by positioning the cursor on it and activating
it with the Return key, you open the menu. This menu contains
options or functions related to the main item. If you select menu
items with an arrow (>) to the right of them, you open a further
submenu.
3-5
Graphical User Interface
Working Area
The selection boxes in which you make settings, the information
and message boxes and the windows of the program editors are
displayed in the working area of the screen.
S5 Identifier
This displays the package you are currently working with, for
example, STEP 5 or another S5 package such as GRAPH 5.
Function Key Menu
The function key menu allows you to call certain selection boxes
or editors directly without a longer series of selections or
keystrokes.
To display the remaining functions assigned to function keys
simply press the TAB key or click the symbol “>>” to the
extreme right of the display.
You can trigger functions provided by the function key menu in
the following ways:
– Click the field containing the name of the function using
the mouse.
– The functions in the lower row can be activated by
pressing the function key with the number shown to the
left (F1 to F10).
You activate the functions displayed in the top row on a
shaded background by holding down the SHIFT key and
pressing the function key with the number displayed to the
left of the field (SHIFT F1 to SHIFT F9).
Info Line
The information line provides information about the menu item
you have selected (submenu or menu function) but not yet
activated.
Help
Key assignment: you can obtain more detailed information about
the functions assigned to the keyboard by activating the key
assignment list function in the help menu. When selection boxes
are displayed which have their own function key assignment, you
can obtain information about the function keys by pressing
SHIFT F8. If the prompt Continue? yes/no is displayed, you can
obtain more information about the individual functions by
selecting yes.
3.1
Help
Key assignment list
Information Line
3-6
The information line provides you with information about the
menu item (submenu title or function) currently selected but not
yet activated.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Graphical User Interface
Function Selection
You call a function or an editor in two steps, as follows:
1. Select the function in the main or submenu.
2. Specify the function by entering parameters in the job box and
confirming your input.
The function is then started/executed or the editor is called.
Object
Editor
STEP 5- block >
1st Step
Data block >
DB screen form >
Assignment list F3
Test
Management
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Documentation
3.1
in the program file
in the PLC...
Edit STEP 5 block(s)
Program file : F: XXXXXXST.S5D
Selection
Block :
[ PB1
Search key : [
2nd Step
Edit STEP 5 blocks(s)
Baustein : [
]
] Program file : F: XXXXXXST.S5D
Update
PB XRF
blocks
( )yes
(X) no
PB001
- PROG 1
PB002 - PROG 2
PB003 - PROG 3
Update seq. source file
PB006
( )yes
(X) no
PB010
PB111
< OK > < F3=select >
< ShiftF8=Help > < ESC=Cancel >
Confirm before overwriting
( )yes
(X) no
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
< OK >
]
Block types
Program block
Comment block
Function block
Comment block
Function block
Comment block
Organization block
PB
PC
FB
FC
FX
FCX
OB
< ESC=cancel >
The function is executed or
the editor is selected
Figure 3-4
Selection of the Main and Submenus
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-7
Graphical User Interface
3.1.1
3.1
Function Selection
Function Selection
With the main menu displayed, you can select a function or an
editor using the appropriate submenu. Depending on the current
operating status of the PG, e.g. when there is no connection to a
PLC, certain functions cannot be activated and do not respond in
the menu. There are four ways of selecting a function, as follows:
Mouse
1. Click on the required function with the mouse.
Cursor Keys
2. Move through the main menu boxes using the cursor
right, .. left keys and in the submenus using the cursor
up .. down keys. You display further submenu levels or
call selected functions with the Return key. You can clear
displayed submenus from the screen using ESC = Exit,
if necessary several times.
Hotkeys
3. You can press the letter displayed in red in the function
name (on monochrome screens this letter has a black
background).
Function Keys
(Fast Selection)
4. You can press a function key to select a regularly required
function directly (→ Graphical user interface, Function keys).
Example
Calling the block editor.
Mouse
Click on the following menu options one after the other
1. ”Editor” in the main menu
2. ”STEP 5 block” in the submenu,
3. ”in the program file” in the following submenu
The “Edit STEP 5 block(s)” job box is displayed.
Cursor keys
with the cursor keys:
1. Select “Editor” with the cursor right/left keys in the main
menu and press the Return key.
The editor submenu is opened.
2. Press the Return key.
The submenu “STEP 5 block” is opened.
3. Select the function “in the program file” with the cursor
up/down keys and press the Return key.
3-8
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Graphical User Interface
The “Edit blocks” job box is displayed.
Hotkeys
Starting from the main menu, press the following keys (upper/
lower case irrelevant):
1. E for “Editor”
2. S for “STEP 5 block”
3. I for “in the program file”
The “Edit STEP 5 block(s)” selection box is displayed.
Function Keys
Press F1 in the row of function keys on the keyboard.
The “edit blocks” selection box is displayed.
Key to the operating menus
The function names in the menus have been supplemented by
characters and markers with the following significance:
3.1
Red letter or with black
background
Followed by “>”
= The function can be activated
(by pressing this character)
= There is a further submenu to
follow
Followed by “. . .”
= There is a job box to follow
Function with no following = Selecting this menu box
character
activates the function
immediately.
F”n” or SHIFT F”n”
= Indicates that fast selection of
the function is possible using
the function key indicated.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-9
Graphical User Interface
Job/Selection Box
3.1
If more information is required before a function can be executed
(marked by “...” in the menu), STEP 5 opens a job box (Figure
3-5). In some situations, this box is adapted to the individual
functions and can have more or less input fields. In these input
fields, you enter the name or the parameters to specify your task
or job. Displayed objects and options are selected by entering an
“x”. When you complete the name fields, you can display
information about existing or possible blocks (block types) in the
selection box and select them directly.
When you fill in the name fields, you can display information
about existing blocks or possible block types or files in the
selection box by pressing F3 and then select them in the box.
Logically incompatible parameters are rejected by the system and
a self-explanatory message is displayed in red or with a black
background in the job box.
There are a variety of boxes, each responsible for a certain task:
– Job boxes as shown in Figure 3-5. The corresponding
function can only be activated from this box.
– Block selection boxes as shown in Figure 3-6.
– File selection boxes as shown in Figure 3-7.
– Job boxes of varying sizes where further inputs can be
made and which are adapted to the requirements of the
particular function.
Positioning the cursor and making entries is the same for all job,
block selection and file selection boxes.
Note
Input fields and particular features which are only important for
certain functions are not described here but are dealt with in the
description of the function.
3-10
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Graphical User Interface
Job box
This box type (Figure 3-5) is always displayed when you want to
activate a function within a function menu.
Program File (1)
With all functions specific to the program, the name of a
STEP 5 program file from the “Settings” (→ Project) is entered
as a default by STEP 5. Depending on the requirements for the
individual functions, this field is either blocked or an entry can be
made.
Selecting the
Objects (2)
You make your selection by marking (X) the displayed options or
writing in the square brackets as follows:
– a block (name)
– a block list (single blocks separated by commas)
– a file name
– a search key
– a number depending on the particular input field (e.g. from
[ ] to [ ] )
Outputting the
Objects
Depending on the particular function, you can output the objects
defined in the box as follows:
– on a printer
– on the screen
– to a file. The name of the file is taken from the “Settings”
box, however, you can change it there.
Printout Type
You can select the layout of the output to suit your purpose or set
the LS.INI file.
Output Options
Depending on the particular function, you can select the
following:
– a block and corresponding block header
– FB with names.
Selecting Input
Fields
Fields in the job box and key functions (→ Appendix 4 Key
Assignment) that can be used to guide the cursor in the fields of
the job box (Figure 3-5).
(2) Selection field
Selection boxes for blocks or files are displayed by pressing
F3. These fields have a colored background or are displayed
inversely.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-11
3.1
Graphical User Interface
(3) Fields within a frame
These fields contain specific selections, options and
destinations for output. This is indicated by a frame around
the field. If you do not have a mouse, you can select these
fields with the TAB key. Note that in “Output on/to”, the field
“Name” is selected with this key.
(4) Input fields
Within the fields in frames, you can select the input fields
using the cursor keys. Either a name or an X is entered at the
position marked by the cursor.
(5) Commands
3.1
OK = Return
The selected parameters are entered
and the function activated.
ESC = Cancel
Cancels without entering parameters.
SHIFT-F8 = Help A help text is displayed for the field
marked by the cursor
F3 = Select
Selection box for calling blocks or
files.
(2)
(1)
(3)
Print STEP5 block(s)
Program file : E:EXA409ST.S5D
(4)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Figure 3-5
3-12
Selection
(X) block list: [
]
or all:
( ) PB ( ) FB ( ) FX
( ) OB ( ) SB ( ) all blocks
( ) PC ( ) FC ( ) FCX ( ) OC ( ) SC
Segment number: from 1 to 255 Output on/to
Printout
(X) Printer
(X) Standard
( ) File
( ) Condensed with margin
Name: E:NONAMELS.INI ( ) Super condensed print A4
< OK >
< F3=select >
< ShiftF8=help >
(3)
(4)
< ESC=cancel >
Example of a Job Box
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Graphical User Interface
Block Selection
Box, File Selection
Box
If the cursor is positioned in a name field (Figure 3-5) and you
press the F3 key, a block or file selection box is displayed. In
these boxes (Figure 3-6/Figure 3-7) you can select an object
directly for processing.
(1)
(2)
The blocks/files in the set program file are listed in this field. If
the cursor is positioned on one of these objects and you press
the Return key, the object is entered in the “blocks” or “file
name” field and is therefore selected for processing. If you
require several blocks for processing, these must be entered
singly in the “blocks” field. If you click on OK or press the
Return key, the box is closed and the name of the selected
object is entered in the selection field of the job box.
Here, you can change the following:
Block type
You can select a type with the cursor keys or
can double click on a type with the mouse. All
blocks of this type are displayed in the field (1).
Drive
You can select the drive with the Return key or
by clicking on a drive with the mouse. The
directories in this drive are displayed in the field
(2).
Directory
You can select the content of a directory by
pressing the Return key or double clicking a
directory. The files in the directory are
displayed in the field (1).
(3)
(5)
Using the roll screen (up or down) keys or by clicking on the
bar of the field, you can move the contents of the field up and
down. The cursor keys move the list one line up or down.
(4)
The search key entered here is searched for in the selected
directory. If it exists, the file name is displayed in the field (1).
Note
Browsing in drives and directories is not permitted in all file
selection boxes.
User files must not be located in directories with system files
(S5*.CMD and S5*.DAT).
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-13
3.1
Graphical User Interface
(2)
(1)
Print STEP5 block(s)
Block :
[
]
Program file : C:EXA409ST.S5D
3.1
Figure 3-6
PB-Program blocks
PB001 - PROG1
PB002 - PROG2
PB003 - PROG3
PB012 - PROG12
Block types
PB Program blocks
PC Comment blocks
FB Function blocks
FC Comment blocks
FX Function blocks
FCX Comment blocks
OB Organization blocks
< OK >
< ESC=cancel >
(3)
Example of a Block Selection Box
(1)
(4)
(2)
File selection box
(3)
File name : [ EXA409ST.S5D]
-> C:\STEP5_VI
Search key : [ ??????ST.S5D ]
Files
NONAMEST.S5D
EXA409ST.S5D
EXAXXXST.S5D
<
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
>>
*
< OK >
Drive/dir.
. .
GEO
STEP5_B1
[-C-]
[-D-]
[-E-]
[-F-]
*
(5)
< ESC=cancel >
(5)
Figure 3-7
3-14
Example of a File Selection Box
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Graphical User Interface
Tip
If part of the screen display is covered by a message box or a
prompt such as “Continue? yes/no”, you can toggle the display
with the space bar.
Function Keys
Function keys are keys which are assigned a function by the
software and which are used to activate software tasks using the
keyboard or using buttons on the screen.
To allow STEP 5 to be operated to suit the situation or task in
hand, the function keys are available at various levels and can be
used to trigger the displayed function.
F1...F10
SHIFT F1...F9
(hardkeys)
1. Function keys can be used as shortcut keys to select STEP 5
functions from the main menu of the graphical user interface.
You can display the functions of the keys by selecting “Key
assignment list” in the Help menu. When you open a menu or
submenu, you will see that some functions have a function
assigned to them. In the editors and dialog boxes, you can
display the function key assignment by pressing SHIFT F8.
OK, ESC, yes, no
(box buttons)
2. The STEP 5 selection, information and message boxes all
have a line containing buttons at the bottom edge of the box.
Using these buttons you can confirm, discard or activate
operations.
F1...F8
SHIFT F1...F8
(function keys)
3. In the editors, STEP 5 normally displays a line of 8 (or 16)
function keys at the bottom edge of the screen which can be
used to activate editor functions.
Space Bar
You can show or hide prompts and messages with the space bar.
This allows you to see the parts of the screen behind messages.
ESC Key
You can exit dialog boxes with only one button by pressing ESC.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-15
3.1
Object
3.2
Object
In this menu you can select the following functions:
→ Project
You select all the settings for a project with the corresponding
safeguards in this menu. Once you have saved a project, you
can load it from this menu.
→ Blocks
Copying blocks and getting information about blocks.
3.2
→ DOS files
Copying files and getting information about the files.
→ PCP/M file
Copying files and getting information about PCP/M files.
→ End
Exits STEP 5.
3.2.1
Project
Object
Project
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Before you begin to program with STEP 5, you should plan the
following information:
– some or all the required file names of the user program,
– a working directory containing all the files.
– project-specific parameters such as type of representation
or mode,
You only need to make these settings once with STEP 5.
Specifying a unique directory which will contain the files
belonging to one project makes it far easier to organize your
programming. STEP 5 saves all these settings in a project file
(*PJ.INI) of which you can make copies. With this, you have a
schedule of all the relevant data for a project.
3-17
Object
You can change the settings at any time to match them to new
conditions. Once you load a project file, the data are available
immediately and you can begin programming without having to
create new settings.
The files themselves must, of course, be in the directory selected
in the project file.
Figure 3-8 shows how the project file and corresponding program
files are organized. The project file is in the same working
directory as the files. The settings in the project file relate to
these files. Exceptions to this are the printer file and the path file.
These are always in the directory in which STEP 5 is loaded.
Working Directory:
3.2
C:\PLANT1\MOTORHA (set in the project file)
Project file (*PJ.INI)
MOTOR1PJ.INI
MOTOR1PJ.INI
With the settings of the project file
MOTOR1ST.S5D
Working directory: C:\PLANT1\MOTORHA
C:\MOTOR1ST.S5D
Program file:
XRF file:
C:\MOTOR1XR.INI
C:\MOTOR1Z0.INI
Symbols file:
C:\MOTOR1Z0.SEQ
Sequential file:
Footer file:
C:\SAFETYF2.INI
SYSID file:
C:\EPROM2SD.INI
Path file:
PATH11AP.INI
Doc command file: C:\DCOM11SU.INI
Printer file:
PR210HDR.INI
Doc file:
C:\MOTOR1LS.INI
MOTOR1XR.INI
MOTOR1Z0.INI
Z1 Z2
MOTOR1Z0.SEQ
.
.
.
.
System directory
PR210HDR.INI
PATH11AP.INI
S5 COM
Figure 3-8
3-18
Organization of the Project File and Program File
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Object
The following functions are available in the “Project” menu.
Setting all the parameters required for a specific project
(→ Settings). Boxes are available in which you can set the
following:
– Files belonging to a project. These files are always set in
the job and selection boxes or editors in which they will be
addressed.
– Parameters, e.g. symbols, method of representation (LAD,
CSF, STL) etc.
Once you have selected these settings for a project, you can only
process this project.
Loading the settings for a project (→ Load). All the settings
for the selected project are loaded. Once the project is loaded,
only the files belonging to this project are made available for
processing.
Saving the project setting (→ Save). All the settings are
saved in the file specific to the project.
Saving under a new project name (→ Save as). All the
settings are saved in a selectable file for the specific project.
Settings
Object
Project
Settings
Before beginning with the actual programming, you select all the
parameters required for a project in the displayed setting box.
This box is divided into two selectable pages. The parameters you
set (e.g. file names) are then later entered in the corresponding
job or selection boxes automatically. These settings are brought
together in a project file. Selected files and parameters are always
valid for the whole project during a sitting.
Note
The settings are retained even when you terminate STEP 5.
When you start the next session, the last settings are adopted.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-19
3.2
Object
These settings are only saved in a *PJ.INI file when you save
them explicitly (→ Save). You can load saved settings at any time
(→ Load).
In general, one part of the names of system files is fixed (e.g.
*Z0.INI), and one part has 1 to 6 characters that you can select.
For example, the symbols file EXA409Z0.INI consists of the
fixed part in heavy print and the name “EXA409”.
Operation
You can move to the input files within the settings box (fields 1,
2, 3) either using the cursor keys or with the TAB key. For pages
1 and 2 of the “settings”, there are softkeys at the bottom of the
settings box. These softkeys are explained below.
Key
3.2
Function
F3
The cursor must be located on the label of an input
field (field 1 or 2 Figure 3-9 ):
1. You can change parameter settings (e.g. YES/NO
or RW/PROT) with F3.
2. Character input is activated. The cursor flashes
on the input file (field 2). Confirm your entries with
the Return key.
3. If you press F3 again, a file selection box is
displayed. You can navigate through this box and
select a file (→ Job box).
F4
Toggle between the pages.
F6
The selected parameters are saved in the *PJ.INI file
displayed in field 4.
Shift F6 With the file selection box open, you can use this key
combination to select an existing PJ.INI file.
3-20
F7
A help text is displayed for the field marked by the
cursor.
F8
Returns you to the previous level. Settings you have
changed are entered in the *PJ.INI file.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Object
Page 1
The box “Settings (page 1)” is displayed. Here, you set the files
for a specific project.
Object
Project
Settings
Page 1
Example
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4)
Settings (Page 1) in C:\DATEN\DEFAULT\EXA409PJ.INI
3.2
Working dir
: C:\STEP5_VI
Program file
: C:\EXA409ST.S5D [ RW ]
XRF file
: C:\EXA409XR.INI
Symbols file
: C:\EXA409Z0.INI
Sequential file
: C:\EXA409Z0.SEQ [ RW ]
Footer file
: C:\NONAMEF2.INI
SYSID file
: C:\EXA409SD.INI
Path file
: EXA409AP.INI
Doc comm file
: C:\NONAMESU.INI
F
1
F
2
Figure 3-9
C79000-G8576-C820-01
F
3 Select
[ - -
Data mgment: S5DOS
]
(in system direc.)
F
F
F
4 Page 2 5 Save as 6
Load F
Save 7
F Help
Info 8 Return
Example of Page 1 of the “Settings” Box
3-21
Object
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input Field
Working directories
3.2
Program file
3-22
Explanation
A working directory consists of the drive and a directory (e.g.
C:\S5_DATEN\EXAMPLE). This entry represents the complete path
under which the files you have entered or that are displayed are
stored. You must already have created the directory under MS-DOS.
If you have working directories on different drives, it is possible to
specify a separate working directory for every file specified in the
settings box (except for printer and path files). When you create a
working directory containing the system files (S5*.CMD and
S5*.DAT) a warning is displayed since user files should not be kept
in the same directories as system files.
Here, you enter the drive and a name up to 6 characters long. The
file is then automatically assigned to the working directory and
saved in it.
If you select the name of an existing program file and if there is no
current cross-reference list (XRF file), a box appears in which you
can generate a current cross-reference list immediately.
Drive names only up to J
1. If you do not enter a name, the last name entered is used
automatically.
2. If you enter less than 6 characters, the name is padded out with
the @ character.
Selectable file mode (field 3, Figure 3-9):
RW:
Read, write possible
PROT: Reserves exclusive access rights to the file. Access by
other S5 systems is no longer possible.
File mode set by STEP 5:
RESD: The file is currently reserved. A different S5 system is
accessing the file. Once the access is complete, this entry
is cleared.
RO:
Read only.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Object
Input field
Explanation
XRF file
The name of the file (*XR.INI), which will contain the cross
reference list, is only displayed here and cannot be modified.
For creating the XRF file, refer to (→ Management, Generate
XRF)
Symbols file
The name of the symbols file (*Z0.INI). If you set this file, then
providing you have set “Settings/Page2/Symbols”, you work
with symbolic operands (in the editors and in documentation
output).
As soon as you set this file, the setting for the sequential file is
made automatically.
The file mode for the symbols file can be selected (refer to
program file).
Sequential file
The source file (*Z0.SEQ) which contains the assignment list ,
is set as soon as you have named the symbols file. The file mode
can be selected (refer to program file).
Footer file
The name of the footer file. This footer is automatically output
for → Documentation. Depending on your selection for the
footer parameter (Settings/page 2) either
F1.INI for an 80 character wide footer or
F2.INI for a 132 character wide footer is entered.
SYSID file
This contains the system identification. It is required for
blowing EPROMs and editing a bus path. The file is created
with other S5 systems. It is advisable to load this file in the
selected working directory. You can, however, specify the file
name later in the appropriate dialog box.
Path file
The path file (*AP.INI) contains the bus paths stored under a
path name. You can also specify these later in the dialog box for
editing a bus path. The path file is always stored in the system
directory (in which STEP 5 is loaded).
Doc command file
The name of the file in which doc commands will be stored.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-23
3.2
Object
Example of Setting
a Working Directory
STEP 5 supports you when setting up the working directory. How
to make the best of these functions is explained below.
Ready to Start?
The box “Settings (page 1)” must be displayed.
1. Position the cursor on the “Working directory” field and press
F3.
C:\STEP5_VI
D:\
E:\
F:\
< OK >
< F3=Select >
3.2
Figure 3-10 Example of a Box with Directory Entry
A box is displayed with the working directory selected in
“Settings (page 1)”.
2. Position the cursor on the drive (here C: \) and press F3 =
Select.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3-24
The “File selection box” is displayed (Figure 3-11) with the
selected directory C:\ entered in field 1.
Using the TAB key, move the cursor to the “DR/directory”
field and position the cursor on the required directory (here,
STEP5-VI).
Complete your selection with the Return key.
The selected directory is now entered in field 1.
The “Files” field displays all the files in this directory. These
are only displayed for information and cannot be selected.
Press the Return key again.
The box displaying the directory appears (Figure 3-10). The
directory setting displayed previously in field (1) (Figure
3-11) is adopted.
Press the Return key (OK).
The “settings page 1” box is displayed again and the working
directory is entered in it.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Object
File Selection Box
File name : [ ????????.???]
(1)
Search key : [ ????????.???]
-> C: \
Files
COMMAND.COM
COMMAND.286
SR340.SYS
< OK >
Drive/dir
XGEMAPPS
PICTURES
DAARC
ARB
STEP-T1
BATCH
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
< ESC=cancel >
3.2
Figure 3-11 Display of Existing Directories and Files on Drive C:\
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-25
Object
Page 2
The “settings” box page 2 is displayed. Here, you select data for
the specific project. You can move from field to field as in page 1
using the cursor.
Object
Project
Settings
Page 2
Settings (Page 2) in C:\S5_DATEN\DEFAULT\PROEXA.INI
3.2
Mode
PLC type
Interface
Path name
Path file
: Offline
[ --- ]
Represent.
:
: AS511
Checksum
:
: NONAMEAP.INI (in system directory)
Symbols
Display
Comments
: Yes
: Sym
: Yes
Documentation
: ( ) on printer
Character set
( X ) to file
Footer
Name: C:PROEXALS.INI
Symbol length
Comment length
Printer file
: PROEXADR.INI
Diagnosis
: --
F
1
F
2
F
3 Select
: STL
: No
: 8
: 40
: ASCII
: No
(in system directory)
F
F
F
4 Page 1 5 Save as 6 Save
F
7 Info
F Help
8 Return
Figure 3-12 Example of Page 2 of the “Settings” Box
Operation
3-26
The following overview describes the possible inputs and
parameters you can select in page 2 for a specific project.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Object
Input field
Explanation
Mode
Offline
No connection to the PLC.
Online
Establishment of a permanent connection to the PLC. The user
programs (blocks) can be processed in the PLC via the physical
and logical connection:
If a path name is set, the connection is via the
bus path.
If no path name is set, the connection is direct.
The establishment of the connection is checked. If no
connection can be set up, the message “PLC timeout” appears.
If the PG-PLC connection is interrupted, the PG is only
operational again when the monitoring time set has run out.
Dynamic
This mode is only possible when there is a connection via a bus
path. The connection is only established during the access
otherwise it is terminated. The mode in which programs in the
PLC can be changed can be selected by positioning the cursor
in the field after “Mode” and pressing F3. A box with possible
modification modes is displayed and you can select one of the
following:
None:
Stop:
Cycl:
Representation
PLC type
C79000-G8576-C820-01
You cannot change a program on the PLC.
You can only change a program on the PLC when the
PLC is in the stop mode.
You can change a program on the PLC during the
processing cycle.
You can select between one of the three methods of
representation, LAD, CSF, STL.
If there is a connection to the PLC, the type of PLC is specified
here.
3-27
3.2
Object
Input field
Interface
Explanation
If you press F3 a number of interfaces is displayed from which
you can select one. The interface AS 511 is the default. With
the interfaces AS 511 and AS 511 (special) to AS 511 (special
n) no bus paths are necessary. You can then select the mode. If
you select a different interface, a bus path must be edited
before you can select the mode.
Checksum
3.2
Yes
When you transfer blocks to the PLC, the checksum is
generated, appended to the block and transferred to the PLC.
When you read from the PLC, the checksum is used to check
the transfer.
No
The checksum is not generated.
Path name
Name under which an edited path (→Bus path) is stored. If you
specify this path name and a path file, the system attempts to
establish or terminate the connection stored under this path
when you change modes. Successful establishment of a
connection is indicated by the message PATH ACTIVE. If no
connection can be established, this is indicated by the message
“PLC timeout”.
Path file
Name of the file in which the path names are stored. This file is
stored in the directory in which STEP 5 is installed (system
directory).
Path option
No
Files assigned to a bus path are not entered.
Confirmation
If files are assigned to a bus path, and if the path is set, the files
are only entered globally in the presettings after user
confirmation.
Always
If files are assigned to a bus path, and if the path is set, the files
are entered globally in the presettings without user
confirmation.
3-28
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Object
Input field
Symbols
Explanation
What you select here decides whether you can program with
symbolic operands in all three methods of representation.
Yes
Symbolic operands with operand comments can be input and
output in LAD, CSF, STL. You can select between a symbolic
or absolute notation for the screen display and printer output.
No
The input and output of symbolic operands including comments
is not possible.
Symbol length
In your first editing session, you can select this setting between
8 and 24 characters. After making this setting, you can increase
it at any time. You can only reduce the length to that of the
longest actual symbol. Before doing this, delete the *Z?.INI
files.
Display
Sym
Operands are displayed symbolically. If symbols are longer
than 8 characters, they are truncated (only in LAD, CSF). The
first 8 characters of the symbolic operand names should
therefore be unique.
Abs
Operands are displayed in absolute form.
Comment length
Symbol comment.
The first time you create the settings, you can select this setting
with a maximum of 40 characters. You can increase the
comment length at any time. You can only reduce the length to
that of the longest actual comment. Before doing this, delete
*Z?.INI.
Comments
Yes
All comments are displayed. Operand comments are not
affected by this setting.
No
Line (DB), segment and block (DBDO) comments and segment
titles are not displayed.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-29
3.2
Object
Input field
Explanation
Documentation
On printer
Output is printed out on the connected printer. The printer file
for the particular printer must be set.
To file
Output to a selectable file (*LS.INI). You can also store a
hardcopy of the screen in this ASCII file (using the PRINT
key).
Name
Name of the *LS.INI.
Printer file
Here, you store the printer parameters selected in the
“documentation” menu (→ Printer parameters). You select the
printer type from a list and implicitly also the printer file of the
type DR.INI which contains the parameters for the connected
printer.
Character set
Only valid for enhanced output. The following can be selected:
ASCII
Documentation is only
printed with the characters of
the ASCII character set e.g.
!– – – – – – – – – – ( )– – – – !
CHAR.GRAPHICS
Documentation is
printed with the IBM
character set e.g.
 –
( )

Footer
You can decide wether or not to have a footer (80 or 132
characters wide) printed out at the bottom of the page. The
“footer file” must be set if you require the latter. This file is
processed in the “Documentation” menu (→ Edit footer). If you
use the enhanced output , the 132 character long footer must be
selected.
3.2
Diagnosis
Yes
Default when the software for the CP 522 is not loaded. You
can edit or output the diagnostic setpoint data if the CP 522
software is loaded.
No
The diagnostic setpoint data mode is disabled.
3-30
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Object
Load
Object
Project
Load
Save
Object
Project
Save
Save as
Object
Project
Save as
C79000-G8576-C820-01
With this function, you load the settings you selected under
→ Project, Settings and saved in a *PJ.INI file. All the currently
valid settings are overwritten when you use the load function. As
soon as you load new settings, only those in the current PJ.INI
file are valid. You can, however, change these as required. The
preset parameters (e.g. file names) are automatically entered in
the job and selection boxes in which they are required.
The “file selection box” is displayed. You can move through this
display and select a *PJ.INI file (→ Graphical user interface).
After OK, all the settings are loaded from the *PJ.INI file.
With this function, you save the current settings you have made
under → Project, Settings The settings are saved in the currently
selected *PJ.INI file.
A message box is displayed in which you decide whether or not
to save the settings.
With this function, you save the current settings you made under
→ Project, Settings. The settings are saved in a *PJ.INI file that
you select.
The “File selection box” is displayed. You can move through this
display and select a *PJ.INI file or create a new one (→
Graphical user interface).
3-31
3.2
Object
3.2.2
Blocks
Object
Blocks
Output Directory
3.2
Object
Blocks
Directory
Object
With the functions of this submenu, you can manage blocks and
documentation files belonging to the working directory.
With these functions, you can do the following:
– output a directory (DIR)
– transfer blocks and documentation files
– compare blocks
– delete blocks and documentation files
– delete the user memory on the PLC (overall reset)
The following directories can be output:
From the selected program file, the block list
– of all blocks entered in the block type
– of all blocks
– of all blocks of one block type
– of all documentation files
From the programmable controller, the block address list
– of all blocks entered in the block list
– of all blocks
– of all blocks of one block type depending on the PLC type
The following information is output for each block:
– block type, LIB NO, block length, FB name (option)
Blocks
Directory
in the program file
Object
Blocks
The following information is output for each block:
– block type, block length, address, LIB NO, FB name
(option)
Directory
in the PLC
3-32
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Object
The job box “Blocks-directory-program file: settings” is
displayed. You can browse through this box and make selections
(→ Graphical user interface).
You can output the following:
– preheaders as a group or assigned to blocks
– FBs with or without names.
Example
Once you have acknowledged the job box, the output is made on
the selected output device.
The block name, the length of the block, the LIB number and
corresponding FB name are listed under “block”. The character #
is inserted in front of documentation blocks.
Transferring
Blocks
With this function, you can transfer the following
Object
Blocks
Transfer
File-file
File-PLC
PLC-file
within a PLC
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3.2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
single blocks
a group of blocks of one block type
all blocks of one block type
a group of blocks with block list
all blocks of a program file
one or all documentation files, known as DOCFILES
the whole program file
from the selected program file to a selectable drive and
selectable program file (file - file)
– from a selectable drive with a selectable program file to
the programmable controller (file - PLC)
– from the programmable controller to a selectable drive
with a selectable program file (PLC - file).
3-33
Object
Transferring
Function and Data
Blocks
The preheaders of these blocks contain format information and
jump label information which can only be evaluated by the PG.
For this reason, they are not transferred to the PLC.
When a block that is assigned a preheader in the PG (FB/FV,
FX/FVX, DB/DV, DX/DVX) is transferred, the block preheader
can be deleted following a user prompt. Since the PG makes you
aware of this with the message “Overwrite preheader?” no data
can be accidentally lost.
By modifying a data block (DB and DX) during editing online in
the PLC and transferring it back to the program file in the PG, the
correlation between the DB (DX) and DV (DVX) may no longer
exist and it is therefore often advisable to overwrite the data
block preheader. The data in this data block is then displayed in
the format that was previously set.
In function blocks (FB and FX) the names (e.g. LEVEL) of the
jump labels can be lost when they are transferred back. These are
then replaced by STEP 5 with substitute names, e.g. M002.
Transferring Blocks
The job box “TRANSFER block file - file” is displayed:
3.2
Object
Blocks
The following overview explains the inputs you can make in the
job box that were not dealt with in the description of the job box
(→ Graphical user interface, Job box):
Transfer
File – file
3-34
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Object
Inputs
Explanation
Source
The preset program file is displayed in this field. You can edit
this name or replace it with an existing file name from the file
selection box using F3=Select.
Dest
The program file C: @@@@@@ ST.S5D is displayed in this field.
You can edit this name or replace it with an existing file name
from the file selection box using F3=Select.
Selection
all doc files
If you mark this parameter with an “X” all DOCFILES are
selected. Docfiles are indicated by the character # and can be
stored. Documentation files cannot be stored on the PLC
whole file
By marking the field with an “X” you can select the whole
program file (including docfiles).
3.2
Block area
If you want to transfer several successive blocks of one block
type, mark the line and enter the first block identifier (e.g. PB7)
in the field “from” and the last block identifier (e.g. PB22) in
the field “to”.
Copy
If you want to copy a single block and store it under a different
name, mark the line and enter the source block in the “Block”
field (e.g. DB6) and the new block identifier (e.g. DB 54) in the
“to” field. When you copy blocks you must not change the
block type.
Transfer
(OK)
The PG transfers the selected blocks. If errors occur during the
transfer, you will see alternatives displayed in the selection
boxes and you can select the best course of action in the
situation.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-35
Object
Object
Blocks
Transfer
File – PLC
Object
Blocks
3.2
The job box “TRANSFER block: file - PLC” is displayed. You
can browse through this box and make your selection (→
Graphical user interface).
When transferring to the PLC, remember that you can only
transfer block types that can be selected in the job box. If you
select an illegal block type, the transfer request will be denied.
For the description of specific parameters, refer to the
explanations for “file - file”.
The job box “TRANSFER block: PLC - file” is displayed. Here
you can browse and make your selections (→ Graphical user
interface).
Transfer
PLC - File
Note
Not all blocks that can be displayed can be transferred; this
depends on the PLC.
Only blocks up to a maximum of 4 Kw (8 Kb) can be transferred.
3-36
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Object
Comparing Blocks
Object
Blocks
Compare
File-file
File-PLC
PLC-file
With this function, you can compare the following:
– a block, a group of single blocks or all blocks of the first
named program file with those of the second named
program file.
The comparison operation is between the program file preset on
the PG and any other program file or the user program on the
PLC. It is also possible to compare the program in the PLC with a
selectable program file.
Note
Data blocks you want to compare must not be larger than 2
Kwords.
3.2
Object
Blocks
Compare
File – file
Object
Blocks
Compare
The job box “Block COMPARISON: ..........” is displayed. Here,
you can browse through the box and make your selection
(→ Graphical user interface, Job box).
When you compare blocks in the PLC, remember that you can
only compare blocks that can be selected in the job box.
File – PLC
Object
Blocks
Compare
In this case the PLC type and CPU identifier are displayed in the
job box.
The job box “Block COMPARISON: ..........” is displayed. Here,
you can browse through the box and make your selection
(→ Graphical user interface, Job box).
PLC - File
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-37
Object
Delete
Object
Blocks
Delete
in the program file
In the PLC
With this function you can delete the following:
– single blocks
– a group of blocks of one block type
– all blocks of one block type
– all blocks (only PLC: overall reset)
– one or more documentation files (only in the PG)
– the whole program file (only in the PG)
The job box “DELETE block(s)” is displayed. Here, you can
browse through the box and make your selection (→ Graphical
user interface).
3.2
Object
Blocks
Delete
If all the blocks in the PLC are deleted, this corresponds to the
OVERALL RESET function (only possible in the STOP mode).
The PLC sets defined statuses in the PLC RAM (see
programming guide for the relevant PLC).
in the PLC
3-38
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Object
3.2.3
DOS Files
With the functions in this submenu, you can manage files without
returning to the operating system level. The following functions
are available:
– Output single files or groups of files from the currently
selected directory on the screen.
– Copy single files or groups of files (source file name #
destination file name).
– Delete single files or file groups in the currently selected
directory.
Significance of the wildcards
3.2
? A question mark can stand for any character within a file
name.
* An asterisk can only be the last or the only character in a
file name or file extension. The operating system replaces
the asterisk by one or more question marks up to the end of
the file name or file extension.
Directory
This function displays the directory of
– a file
– several files.
The job box “DOS-files-directory” is displayed. Here, you can
browse through the box and make your selection (→ Graphical
user interface, Job box).
Object
DOS file
Directory
Inputs
Explanation
File name
The file name marked by the cursor in the list of field names is displayed
here. This is not a field for direct input.
Search key
If you want to find a particular file or group of files, you can enter the name
here. Wildcards are allowed, for example ??????.INI. Files matching the
search key are displayed in the “Files” field.
Drive/dir
Here, you can select a drive and a directory on this drive. Once you have
made the selection, the contents of the directory appears in the display field.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-39
Object
Copying
This function copies one or more files between different drives or
directories.
With the copying function, you can either
– retain the file name or
– use a different file name.
The following job box is displayed. Here, you can browse
through the box and make your selection (→ Graphical user
interface, Job box).
In the example below, all the files of the type *ST.S5D are copied
from the directory C:\S5_DATEN\DEFAULT to the directory
C:\S5_DATEN\EXAMPLE:
Object
DOS file
Copy
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Copy DOS file(s)
3.2
Source : [????????.???]
Source drive: C:\S5_DATEN\DEFAULT
Dest. :[????????.???]
Dest drive: C:\S5_DATEN\EXAMPLE
Source dr/dir
..
[ -A- ]
[ -C- ]
[ -D- ]
[ -E- ]
Source files
ENSAYOST.S5D
EXINSTST.S5D
NONAMEST.S5D
PROBSPST.S5D
PROEXAST.S5D
S5DEMOST.S5D
Copy mode
(X) all ( ) single
< Transfer >
Search key : [??????.???]
Dest dr/dir
..
[ -A- ]
[ -C- ]
[ -D- ]
[ -E- ]
Confirm before overwriting
(X) yes
( ) no
< ESC=cancel >
Figure 3-13 Copying DOS Files
3-40
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Object
Input field
Explanation
Source
Name of the file you want to transfer.
Search key
If you want to find a particular file or group of files, you can
enter the name here. Wildcards are allowed, for example
??????.INI. Files matching the search key are displayed in the
“Files” field.
Source drive
Drive and directory as set in “Source dr/dir” from which the file
is transferred.
Dest
Name of the destination file.
Dest drive
Drive and directory as set in “Dest dr/dir” to which the file is
transferred.
Source dr/dir
Here, you select a source drive and directory. This is displayed
in the “Source drive” field.
Source files
Displays the files that exist on the source drive. You can only
select with the cursor/ mouse click. All the files are then
displayed if question marks ( or *.*) are entered in the “Search
key” field.
Dest dr/dr
Here, you select a destination drive and directory. This is
displayed in the “Dest drive” field.
Copy mode
all
all files in the “Source files” field are copied.
single
one file entered in the “Source” field or “Source files” field and
selected with the cursor is copied..
Transfer
C79000-G8576-C820-01
The function is executed.
3-41
3.2
Object
Procedure
1. In the field “Source dr/dir”, select the drive and directory
from
which you want to transfer (copy) one or more files.
2. In the “Dest dr/dir” field, select the drive and directory to
which you want to transfer file(s).
3. You can either transfer single files or all the files listed in the
“Source files” field.
Single files: Either type the name of the file in the “Source”
field (no wildcards permitted) or select the file in the “Source
files” field by clicking with the mouse and click “single” in
the “Copy mode” field.
Several files: Click “all” in the “Copy mode” field and
specify whether you want to transfer all the files of the source
directory or only a selection in the “Search key” field. If you
specify ??????.??? or *.*, all the files are displayed and
transferred. If, for example, you only want to transfer STEP 5
program files, type in *ST.S5D as the search key.
4. If you want to save the destination files under a different
name, type in the new name or a group name.
If, for example you specified *.DOC as the search key for the
text files to be transferred, you could for example specify file
type *.TXT in the “destination” field.
5. Click “transfer” to start the copying.
Deleting Files
This function deletes files according to the selected delete mode
(single or all) in a selected directory.
The job box “Delete DOS file(s)” is displayed. You can move
through this box and make your selection (→ Graphical user
interface, Job box)
3.2
Object
DOS file
Delete
3-42
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Object
3.2.4
PCP/M File
The following functions are available:
Object
Conversion of PCP/M files to S5-DOS ST/MT files. Under
PCPM file
the latter operating system they can then be run and
processed.
Directory
Copy
Delete
Conversion of STEP 5 files created with S5-DOS/ST or
Directory
Object
PCPM file
Directory
C79000-G8576-C820-01
S5-DOS/MT to PCP/M files. You can then run these
converted files and process them under the S5-DOS operating
system.
Here, you have functions available to process PCP/M media.
PCP/M media are disks formatted under S5-DOS (PCP/M).
The following functions are available:
→ Output directory of PCP/M files from selectable user areas
→ Copy (convert) the following from or to PCP/M media:
– PCP/M files to DOS files
– DOS files to PCP/M files
→ Delete PCP/M files
Outputting a file list of a selectable USER area from a PCP/M
disk.
The job box “PCP/M file directory” is displayed. Here you can
browse and make your selections (→ Graphical user interface,
Job box). Depending on your input, a directory known from
PCP/M is displayed in a window:
File name
STEP5 files (e.g. *F1.INI)
Bytes
Number of bytes in the file
Recs
Number of records
Attrib.
File access mode
3-43
3.2
Object
Input field
File name
Search key
Drive
User area
3.2
Files
Drives
User area
3-44
Explanation
The file name marked by the cursor in the directory is displayed
here. This is only an output field and cannot be changed.
If you want to find a particular file or group of files, you can
enter the name here. Wildcards are allowed, for example
??????.INI. Files matching the search key are displayed in the
“Files” field.
Drive containing the files. This field is only for information and
no inputs can be made in it.
USER area in which the source is located. This field is only for
information and no inputs can be made in it.
Display of the files in the USER area on the selected drive. No
input can be made here.
All the existing PCP/M drives are displayed. You can select one
from this list.
List of all USER areas. You can select one of the user areas in
this list.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Object
Copying
With this function, you can convert the following:
PCP/M files to S5-DOS/ST/MT files
Object
S5-DOS/ST/MT files to PCP/M files
PCP/M file
Copy
The following job box is displayed. You can move through this
box and make your selection (→ Graphical user interface, Job
box).
Object
PCP/M file
Copy
PCP/M file –>DOS file
3.2
Copy PCP/M file(s) to DOS
Source : [????????.???]
Source drive: A User area:
0
Dest. :[????????.???]
Dest drive: C:\
Drives
Source files
[A]
[B]
User-area
USER = 0
USER = 1
USER = 2
USER = 3
USER = 4
Copy mode
( ) all (X) single
< Transfer >
Search key : [????????.???]
Dr/directory
DOS
INFO
TIGA
TEMP
BIN
DRIVERS
BOOT
NET
XGEMAPPS
Confirm before overwriting
(X) yes
( ) no
< ESC=cancel >
Figure 3-14 Copying PCP/M File(s) to DOS
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-45
Object
Explanation of the job box
Input field
Source
Search key
Source drive
User area
3.2
Dest
Dest drive
Drives
User area
Source files
Dest dr/dir
Copy mode
all
single
Transfer
3-46
Explanation
Name of the file to be transferred.
If you want to find a particular file or group of files, you can
enter the name here. Wildcards are allowed, for example
??????.INI. Files matching the search key are displayed in the
“Files” field.
Drive from which the file is transferred.
User area of the source. This field is only for information, no
input possible.
Name of the destination file.
Drive to which the file is transferred. This field is only for
information, no input possible.
Here, you select a source drive. This is displayed in the “Source
drive” field.
Here, you select a USER area. This is displayed in the “User
area” field.
Display of the files existing on the source drive You can select
files with the cursor or mouse click. All files are only displayed
when question marks (or *.*) are entered in the “Search key”
field.
You select a destination drive or directory.
Copies
all files displayed in the “Source files” field.
one file entered in the “Source” field or selected in the “Source
files” field.
The function is executed.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Object
Copying
The following job box is displayed. You can move through this
box and make your selection (→ Graphical user interface, Job
box).
The explanation of the input fields on page 3-46 for copying
PCP/M files to DOS files also apply to this function. Only the
position of the fields in the selection box is different. On the left
the source (dr/dir), on the right the destination (drive, user area).
Object
PCPM file
Copy
DOS file –>PCPM file
Copy DOS file(s) to PCP/M
Source : [????????.???]
Source drive: C:\
Dest :[????????.???]
Dest drive: A User area:
Source dr/dir
DOS
INFO
TIGA
TEMP
BIN
DRIVERS
BOOT
NET
XGEMAPPS
Search key : [????????.???]
3.2
0
Source files
COMMAND.COM
SCREEN.BAT
BSYS.BAT
Copy mode
( ) all (X) single
< transfer >
Drives
[A]
[B]
User area.
USER = 0
USER = 1
USER = 2
USER = 3
USER = 4
Confirm before overwriting
(X) yes
( ) no
< ESC=cancel >
Figure 3-15 Copying DOS File(s) to PCP/M
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-47
Object
Deleting
Object
PCPM file
Delete
PCP/M files are deleted on a PCP/M medium. You can delete a
single file or all files in a USER area.
The selection box “Delete PCP/M file(s)” is displayed. You can
move through this box and make your selection (→ Graphical
user interface, Job box). The significance of the input fields is the
same as for the PCP/M file directory.
Note
All files in a USER area are only displayed when question marks
are entered in the “Search key” field.
3.2
3.2.5
End
Object
End
3-48
End
With this function, you terminate STEP 5. You are prompted to
confirm that you want to exit the program so that you cannot
terminate it accidentally.
– Answer with “End” if you really want to exit STEP 5.
– Answer with “Cancel” if you want to return to the user
interface.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
3.3
Editor
3 User’s Guide
3.1 Graphical User Interface
Object
STEP 5 block
Data block
DB screen form
Assignment list
3.3 Editor
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
Test
Common Functions in STl, LAD, CSF
Editing Statement Lists (STL)
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
Editing Data Blocks
Editing DB Screens
Editing Assignment Lists
3.3
Figure 3-16 STEP 5 Editors
With the STEP 5 programming language you describe automation
tasks in the form of user programs which can be run on SIMATIC
S5 programmable controllers. With the STEP 5 editors, you can
edit a complete user program as follows:
– blocks in the methods of representation STL, LAD, CSF with
segment titles, statement and plant comments,
– data blocks with block titles, data word and block comments,
– DB screen forms for the S5-135U and S5-155U,
– symbolic operands with operand comments in the assignment
list. This is translated to a symbols file following the editing
session.
Internally, STEP 5 converts the blocks OB, PB, SB, FB, FX, DB,
DX into the MC 5 machine code and stores them on the hard
disk, on diskette or in the PLC.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-49
Editor
STEP 5 blocks and editors
Object to be edited
Editing function
..in the PLC
STEP 5 block,
STEP 5 block
with search
OB, PB, SB, FB, FX
in the block:
Segment title,
segment comment,
symbolic operands
and operand
comments
STEP 5 block
OC, PC, SC, FC, FCX –––
STEP 5 block
OBDO, PBDO,
SBDO, FBDO,
FXDO, DBDO,
DXDO, plant comm.
–––
Data block,
DB with search
DB, DX in the block:
block title, comment,
DB, DX
DB, DX
Data block
DC, DCX
–––
Data block
DBDO, DXDO, plant
comment
–––
DB screen form
DB1, DX0
DB1, DX0
Assignment list
symbolic operands
and operand
comments in the
Z0.SEQ (translated to
*Z0.INI when stored)
–––
3.3
3-50
..in the program file
OB, PB, SB, FB,
FX
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
3.3.1
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
This section lists all the functions you can use when editing in the
three methods of representation. These include the following:
– Selecting an editor
– Selecting an editor with the search function
– Assignment of the function keys in the output mode
– Inputting a library number
– Switching over the method of representation
– Editing comments
– Displaying operand comments
– Working with segments
– Displaying cross references, changing blocks
– Searching for operands
– Editing symbolic operands in a block
Selecting the
Editor
Editor
STEP 5 block
in the program file
in the PLC
Editing STEP 5 blocks in the methods of representation LAD,
CSF or STL and comment blocks, documentation blocks and
plant comments. The method of representation depends on the
“setting”
(→ Project) but this can be changed in the editing mode using a
function keys.
(1)
To edit a block, you enter it in absolute or symbolic form.
A search key (2) does not need to be entered.
If you want to search for a term in one or more blocks,
enter the block or blocks (maximum 6) in the block list in
absolute form or a block in symbolic form. The search
key, e.g. I 1.1 must be entered in (2). If the block entered
here does not exist, the first empty segment of this block
is displayed in the “editing” mode once you have entered
the parameters and options.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-51
3.3
Editor
Edit STEP 5 block(s)
Program file : C: XXXXXXST.S5D
Block :
Search key :
(3)
Confirm before overwriting
(X) yes
(5)
Selection
[ PB1
[
( ) no
(1)
(2)
]
]
(4)
Update XRF
( ) yes
(X) no
Update seq. source file
(X) yes
< OK >
( ) no
< F3=select>
< ShiftF8=help >
< ESC=cancel >
Figure 3-17 Editing STEP 5 Block(s)
3.3
If you press SHIFT F8 = Help, STEP 5 displays a list of possible
inputs. If you want to edit an existing block, you can call the
block with F3 = Select in the → Block selection box.
Selection/Search
Key
3-52
(2) Here, you enter a search key in absolute or symbolic
form. You can display the permitted search keys by
pressing SHIFT F8 = Help. You exit the field with the
Return key or you can select a different field with the
mouse. The key is searched for in all the specified
blocks. When the key is found, the segment is displayed
in the output mode.
You can continue the search for the key as follows:
– in the following segments with F3 = Search,
– in the next blocks with the Insert key confirmed by the
Return key.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Confirm Before
Overwriting
(3) yes When you store changes, you are first prompted to
confirm the changes within the individual blocks:
program block,
comment block,
documentation block,
documentation file.
no
Update XRF
(4) yes The cross reference list (file *XR.INI) is updated or set
up if it does not yet exist.
no
Update Seq. Source
File
Editor
STEP 5 block >
Search
in the program file
in the PLC...
C79000-G8576-C820-01
The cross reference list is not updated. You can,
however, update or set up the cross reference list later
using the function → Generate XRF.
(5) yes (only displayed if you selected symbols: yes)
If you want to edit symbolic operands, i.e. change the
symbols file *Z0.INI, the sequential source file *Z0.SEQ
is updated when you store your input.
no
Selecting an Editor
with Search
Modified blocks are overwritten as soon as you enter the
changes. In program blocks OB, PB, SB, FB/FX you are
always prompted to confirm the changes.
You can update or set up the sequential file later using
the function → INI > SEQ.
You can specify comment blocks, documentation blocks and
documentation files but they will be rejected since it is not
possible to search in these blocks.
Editing STEP 5 blocks in the methods of representation LAD,
CSF, STL with search. The key is searched for automatically in
all the specified blocks.
The method of representation depends on the setting (→ Project),
but can also be changed while editing in the output mode
(→ Switching over the method of representation).
3-53
3.3
Editor
Edit STEP 5 block(s) with search
Program file : C: XXXXXXST.S5D
(1)
Selection
(X) Block list
[
or all:
( ) PB ( )
FB ( )
]
FX ( )
OB ( )
SB ( )
Search key : [
(3)
(5)
(2)
]
Update XRF
Confirm before overwriting
(X) yes
all blocks
( )
no
( ) yes
(X)
(4)
no
Update seq. source file
(X) yes
( )
no
3.3
< OK >
< F3=select >
Figure 3-18
< ShiftF8=help >
< ESC=cancel >
Editing STEP 5 Blocks with Search
Note
If you select an editor with search and modify the block, the
modified block must first be saved before you can continue
searching.
1. Press F7 = OK in the EDIT mode and confirm the message
“Enter modified segment?” with “Yes”.
2. The editor changes to the output mode. Now press F7 = OK
and confirm the message “Enter modified block?” with “Yes”.
If you confirm the message “Continue” with “Yes” the search
is continued, if you reply “No” you return to the main menu.
3-54
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Selection/Block List
(1) You enter one or more blocks (max. 6) in the block list in
absolute form separated by a comma or one block in
symbolic form. The search key, e.g. I 1.1 must be entered in
(2).
If the first block entered does not exist, the first empty
segment of this block is displayed in the “edit” mode after
you enter the parameters and options. Once you exit this
block, the key is searched for in the other blocks you have
specified. If there is another non-existent block in the list,
this is skipped during the search.
If you press SHIFT F8 = Help STEP 5 displays a list of
possible inputs. You can select existing blocks with F3
= Select in the Block selection box.
( ) PB ... ( ) SB ( ) all blocks
Here, you can specify a block type or all blocks in which
case you do not need to make an entry in the block list.
Selection/Search
Key
(2) Here, you enter a search key in absolute or symbolic form. If
you press SHIFT F8 = Help the permitted search keys
are displayed. You exit the field with the Return key or
select a different field with the mouse. The key is searched
for in all the specified blocks. The segment containing the
search key is displayed in the output mode.
You can continue the search for the key as follows:
– in the following segments with F3 = Search,
– in the next blocks with the Insert key confirmed by the
Return key.
Confirm before
Overwriting
Update XRF
(3) → Job box: “Edit STEP 5 blocks”
Update Seq Source
File
C79000-G8576-C820-01
(4) → Job box: “Edit STEP 5 blocks”
(5) → Job box: “Edit STEP 5 blocks”
3-55
3.3
Editor
Assignment of the
function keys in
the output mode
This section contains the functions you can use when editing
regardless of the method of representation. This includes the
functions in the output mode and those for editing comments. The
following description of the keys provides you with an overview
of the tools and functions available to support editing.
Function keys
F Addresses
F Lib. no.
F Symb. SYM
F No comm.
1 Disp. Symb.
2 Reference
3 Search
4
F
–> LAD
5 Seg fct
F1
= Disp symb
F2
= Reference
F3
= Search
F4
= Diagnosis
3.3
F5
= Seg fct
F6
= Edit
F7
= Enter
F8
= Cancel
SHIFT F1
= Addresses
SHIFT F2
= Lib no
3-56
F
Seg comm.
6 Edit
F
7
Save
Enter
Diagnosis
F
Help
8 Cancel
Edit symbolic operands directly in the block.
Display references (cross references), change
block.
Search for single operands.
Setpoint data output: this function is required
for the CP 522 software package for handling
setpoint data.
Copy, mark, insert, append and delete
segments.
Change to the edit mode, also possible with
the CORR key.
Store the block if this has been changed, or
return to the main menu.
Return to the main menu.
Display relative operation addresses in bytes
or words; only in STL (→ Editing Statement
Lists Displaying addresses)
Input library number
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
SHIFT F3
= Symb.
SYM/ABS/OFF
SHIFT F4
= No com
SHIFT F5
= → LAD
SHIFT F6
= Seg com
SHIFT F7
= Save
SHIFT F8
= Help
Switch symbols on and off.
Switch line and symbol comments on and off.
Switch over to the indicated method of
representation, LAD, CSF or STL.
Edit the segment title or segment comments.
Save block without confirmation. You do not
exit the editor.
Explains the function keys.
Inputting the
Library Number
The library number is a 5 digit number (0 to 99999) to identify
blocks.
Ready to Start?
The block in which you want to enter the library number is open.
STEP 5 is in the output mode.
How to Input the
Library Number
1. Press SHIFT F2 = Lib no
The cursor is located in the displayed LIB field.
2. Type in the required LIB no or modify the existing LIB no.
3. To exit the LIB field: press the Return key.
If you enter 5 numbers the cursor automatically leaves the library
number field. If you do not enter a number or a number with less
than 5 digits, exit the field with ESC or the Return key.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-57
3.3
Editor
Method of
Representation
With this function you can switch over the method of
representation without having to call up the settings (→ Project).
Ready to Start?
STEP 5 is in the output mode. The displayed segment must be
capable of translation into the required method of representation.
How to Change the
Representation
Press SHIFT F5 = → LAD or click on it with the mouse.
The segment now appears on the screen as a Ladder Diagram. If
the segment cannot be represented in LAD or CSF, STEP 5
displays the message “LAD/CSF segment not translatable”.
The function key display is now “→ CSF”. If you press SHIFT
F5 again, the segment is displayed as a Control System
Flowchart and the softkey display is “→ STL”.
Editing Comments
You can add the following comments to the STEP 5 blocks OB,
PB, SB, FB and FX:
– Plant comments
– Statement comments (→ Editing Statement Lists)
– Segment comments
– Segment titles
– Operand comments (→ Editing Assignment Lists)
Comments for data blocks DB and DX can be found in the
section → Editing data blocks.
3.3
Type of comment
Plant comment
Where can you edit it?
Documentation file
Where is it stored?
# Documentation file
Statement comment
STL : OB, PB, SB, FB, FX
Documentation block: OC, PC, SC, FC,
FCX
OC, PC, SC, FC, FCX
Segment comment
STL, LAD, CSF : OB, PB, SB, FB, FX
Documentation file:
#OBDO.nnn, #PBDO.nnn, #SBDO.nnn,
#FBDO.nnn, #FXDO.nnn
STL, LAD, CSF : OB, PB, SB, FB, FX
Documentation block:
OC, PC, SC, FC, FCX
#OBDO.nnn, #PBDO.nnn,
#SBDO.nnn, #FBDO.nnn,
#FXDO.nnn
STL, LAD, CSF : OB, PB, SB, FB, FX
Assignment list
*Z0.INI
*Z0.SEQ
Segment title
Operand comment
3-58
OC, PC, SC, FC, FCX
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Plant Comment
Editor
STEP 5 block
in the program file
A plant comment is a text file (documentation file) and in
contrast to the segment comment is not oriented to one block.
With the S5-DOS data management, the number of characters of
all the plant comments in a program file must not exceed 16 K
characters. The maximum number of documentation files in a
program file is 255.
A plant comment is stored on diskette or on hard disk and is not
transferred to the PLC or to the EPROM/EEPROM.
When editing the plant comment, you can call up the command
mode and editing aids for text processing.
Name
The name begins with the # character, following this, the name
can have a maximum 8 further characters, e.g. #EXAMPLES.
When you type in a plant comment, you must make sure that the
second character of the name is not a colon, otherwise STEP 5
will not store the file, since it attempts to identify the letter
before the colon as a drive.
Working with the
Editor
1. Select STEP 5 block or data block in the editor menu.
2. Type in the name of the documentation block preceded by the
character “#” and enter your selection (→ Job box).
Type in your texts using the alphanumeric keyboard. The text
editor includes the following functions:
F
F
F
F
F
1 Insert
2 Delete
3 Command
4
5 Insert l.
F1
= Insert
F2
= Delete
F3
=
Command
F5
= Insert l
F6
= Delete l
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Switchover between the insert and overwrite
modes. The selectable mode is displayed.
Delete a string of characters in the text.
Commands for fast text processing.
Insert a line at the cursor position.
Delete the line at the cursor position.
3-59
3.3
Editor
Inserting Text
You can insert ASCII characters within a text.
1. Press F1 = Insert.
2. Type in the required string.
3. Switch over to the overwrite mode by pressing F1 =
Overwrite.
The insertion of the text is completed.
Deleting Text
Within a text, you can delete character strings and sections of text
of any length.
1. Position the cursor on the first character you want to delete.
2. Press F2 = Delete.
STEP 5 displays the start marker @ at the cursor position.
3. Position the cursor after the last character you want to delete.
4. Press F2 = Delete again.
The text between markers is deleted. The remaining text is
automatically repositioned.
Commands
The text editor has 8 commands for fast text processing.
3.3
Note
Write commands in upper case letters. The printer control
character $EJECT triggers a form feed in a segment, block or
plant comment.
$EJECT must also be in upper case letters, otherwise STEP 5
does not recognize the command. If you only type the dollar
sign, the segment comment is not printed out beyond this point.
How to Use the
Commands
3-60
You call the command mode by pressing F3 = Command.
The keystrokes for all commands are the same:
1. Position the cursor in the text.
2. Press F3 = Command.
3. Type in one of the 8 possible commands.
4. Press the Return key and the Insert key.
The PG executes the command.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
The 8 Commands
C79000-G8576-C820-01
1. JTT (jump to the top).
From any position, the cursor jumps to the start of the
comment.
2. JTE (jump to the end).
From any position, the cursor jumps to the end of the
comment.
3. ST1, ST2, ST3, ST4 (set tag 1 etc.).
You can set a maximum of 4 tags within the text.
4. JT1, JT2, JT3, JT4 (jump to tag 1 etc.).
From any position in the text, the cursor jumps to the
specified tag.
5. F/xyzrst/ (find ).
The cursor jumps to the selected text xyzrst, otherwise STEP
5 displays the message “not found”.
6. CTm, Tn (copy , m and n represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 or 4).
You copy the text from tag Tm (inclusive) to tag Tn, the
cursor must not be located between the two tags. Otherwise,
STEP 5 displays the error message “Illegal between tags”.
When you copy text, the tags are copied along with the text.
7. MTm, Tn (move, m and n represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 or 4).
The text from tag Tm (inclusive) to tag Tn is moved. The
cursor must not be located between the two tags. Otherwise
STEP 5 displays the error message “Illegal between tags”.
When you move text, the tags are moved along with the text.
8. DT1, DT2, DT3, DT4 (delete).
You can delete tags in any order.
3-61
3.3
Editor
Example
Copying a text:
You want to copy the empty line (7) and the title in line (8) into
line (2).
Printer control Î
(2) Î
Copy texts Î
Move texts Î
Set marker Î
Delete marker Î
(7) Î
( 8 ) PROCESSING TEXTS: Î
The editor allows you to write...
F
1 Insert
3.3
F
2 Delete
F
3 Command
F
4
F
5 Insert l.
First, you must select the text you want to copy by setting the
start and end tags.
Defining the Start
1. Position the cursor on the arrow in line (7) and press F3
= Command.
The cursor jumps to the top left corner of the screen.
2. Type in the characters “ST1” and press the Return and Insert
keys.
The cursor returns to the text.
Defining the End
3. Position the cursor after the last character (here arrow) in
line (8) and press F3.
The cursor returns to the top left-hand corner of the screen.
4. Type in the characters “ST2” and press the Return and Insert
keys.
The cursor returns to the text.
3-62
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Copying a Block of
Text
5. Position the cursor on the arrow in line (2) and press F3.
6. Type in the characters “CT1,T2” and press the Return and
Insert keys.
The selected section of text including the empty line is inserted in
line (2) as shown in the following figure. The tags are at the
beginning and end of the copied text.
Printer control Î
(2)Î
PROCESSING TEXTS: Î
Copy texts Î
Move texts Î
Set marker Î
( 7 ) Delete marker Î
(8)Î
PROCESSING TEXTS: Î
3.3
The editor allows you to write ...
F
1 Insert
F
2 Delete
F
3 Command
F
4
F
5 Insert l.
Moving a text
With this function, a marked block of text is moved and the gap
left by the text is closed automatically. The text marked for
copying is moved to the current cursor position using the
command “MT1,T2” followed by the Return and Insert keys.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-63
Editor
Segment Comment
Editor
STEP 5 block
in the program file
3.3
Segment comments are texts with which you can write extra
information about programs in segments or blocks. With the
S5-DOS data management, the number of characters in all the
segment comments in a program file must not exceed 16 K
characters per block. The maximum number of possible
documentation blocks in a program file is 255.
It is best to edit segment comments directly in the blocks and not
in the documentation blocks. If you want to edit comments in
documentation blocks, follow the procedure outlined in the
section
→ comments, plant comment.
– The block and documentation file are stored in the
program file.
– Documentation files cannot be transferred to the PLC or to
an EPROM/EEPROM submodule.
– The block number and the number of the documentation
file are the same, e.g. #PBDO.013 belongs to PB 13.
– Each block type has a corresponding documentation file in
each case preceded by the character “#”:
OBn → #OBDO.nnn
PBn → #PBDO.nnn
SBn → #SBDO.nnn
FBn → #FBDO.nnn
FXn → #FXDO.nnn
Note
You trigger a form feed with the printer control character
$EJECT. This string must be written in upper case letters,
otherwise STEP 5 does not recognize the command. If you only
write the dollar sign, the text following the dollar sign will not be
printed out.
3-64
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Ready to Start?
Working with the
Editor
C79000-G8576-C820-01
You have selected “comments: yes” in the settings (→ Project) or
by pressing SHIFT F4 in the editor. The segment for which you
want to write a segment comment is open. STEP 5 is in the
output or edit mode.
F No com.
F
F Seg com
F
Save
F Help
4 Diagnosis
5 Seg fct
6 Edit
7
Enter
8 Cancel
F
F
F Title
F Comment
F Help
4
5
6
7
8 Return
-> LAD
F
F
F
F
F
1 Insert
2 Delete
3
4
5 Insert l
1. Press SHIFT F6 = Seg com and SHIFT F7 = Comment or
press the COM key twice.
STEP 5 opens the empty editing field for the segment comment
or displays text you have already input. To allow the comment to
be assigned to the segment, STEP 5 generates a 7 character string
“$1 @” with the number of the segment. Do not delete this
number, otherwise the connection between the segment and
comment is lost.
2. Edit the text using the alphanumeric keyboard.
3. Complete each line with the Return key.
The end of the line is marked by a vertical arrow.
If your text takes more than one line, a line break is set at the end
of the line automatically.
3-65
3.3
Editor
Inserting Characters
F
1 Insert
F
2 Delete
F
5 Insert l
F
6 Delete l
F
1 Overwrite
1. Position the cursor on the position in the text from which you
want to insert characters.
2. Press F1 = Insert.
3. Insert text.
4. Press F8 = End to complete inserting text.
Deleting Characters
F
1 Insert
F
2 Delete
F
1
F
2 Delete
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
Inserting a Line
Position the cursor on the first character to be deleted.
Press F2 = Delete.
Position the cursor after the last character to be deleted.
Press F2 = Delete.
F
F
F
F
1 Insert
2 Delete
5 Insert l
6 Delete l
1. Position the cursor in the line before which you want to insert
an empty line.
2. Press F5 or click the “Insert l” field.
Deleting a Line
F
F
F
F
1 Insert
2 Delete
5 Insert l
6 Delete l
1. Position the cursor in the line you want to delete.
2. Press F6 or click the “Delete l” field.
Completing the
Segment Comment
Press F8 = Return.
STEP 5 displays the corresponding segment on the screen. The
text entered up to now is retained. When you store the block,
STEP 5 also stores the segment comment.
Storing the Segment
Comment
Press the Insert key.
3-66
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Segment Title
Editor
STEP 5 block
in the program file
Ready to Start?
Inputting the
Segment Title
C79000-G8576-C820-01
With the segment title, you can identify a segment. A segment
title has a maximum of 32 characters. You can enter it directly in
the block or separately in the corresponding comment block. The
first method is advisable, since the assignments are automatically
updated if you make changes and store the segment. STEP 5
stores the segment title in the comment block.
– The comment block is stored in the preset program file.
– Comment blocks cannot be transferred to the PLC or to an
EPROM/EEPROM submodule.
– The block number and the number of the comment block
are the same, e.g. PC 13 belongs to PB 13.
– STEP 5 assigns the name of the comment block
immediately as follows:
OBn → OCn
PBn → PCn
SBn → SCn
FBn → FCn
FXn → FCXn
You have selected “comments: yes” in the “Settings” (→
Project).
If this is not the case, you can switch over by pressing SHIFT F4
= Line comm. The segment in which you want to enter a title is
open. STEP 5 is in the output or edit mode.
F No com.
F
F Seg com
F
Save
F
Help
4 Diagnosis
5 Seg fct
6 Edit
7
Enter
8
Cancel
F
F
F Title
F Comment
F
Help
4
5
6
7
8
Return
–> LAD
1 Press SHIFT F6 = Seg com and SHIFT F6 = Title or press
COM and SHIFT F6 = Title.
The cursor jumps to the input field of the segment title.
2. Type in text or correct an existing text
3. Press the Return key.
3-67
3.3
Editor
The title is buffered, but is only stored in the comment block
in the program file when the block is stored.
Operand
Comments
When a segment is open, you can display the operand comments
for symbolic operands at any time.
Ready to Start?
The symbols file is entered in the settings and “symbols: yes” and
“display: sym” are selected. If this is not the case, you can switch
over by pressing SHIFT F3 = Symb SYM.
Display in LAD/CSF
Position the cursor on a symbolic operand in the segment. The
symbolic operand with the operand comment is displayed in the
third screen line.
Display in STL
Regardless of the setting “comments: yes/ no”, you can switch
over between the different displays with SHIFT F4 as follows:
– no comments
– line (statement) comments
– symbol (operand) comments
The setting you select is entered in the settings (page1).
3.3
3-68
F No com
F
4 Diagnosis
5 Seg fct
–> LAD
F Seg com
F Save
F
Help
6 Edit
7 Enter
8
Lib no
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Appending,
Inserting,
Transferring,
Deleting a
Segment
Appending or
Inserting a New
Segment
F No com
4 Diagnosis
F –> LAD
5 Seg fct
F Seg com
6 Edit
F Save
7 Enter
F Help
8 Cancel
F Delete
4 File
F
5 Insert
F
6 Append
F
7
F
8
Help
Return
The segment is in the output mode.
If you want to work with segments in the block, i.e.:
– to append or insert,
– to file (save temporarily)
– to delete,
you can perform these functions using the function keys or the
keys in the numeric pad (→ Appendix, key assignment).
Segment processing function
Function keys
Save segment temporarily
F4 = File
–
Insert before current segment
F5 = Insert
Insert segment
Append after current segment
F6 = Append
Segment end
Delete segment
SHIFT F4 =
Delete
Delete segment
Key in numeric
pad
3.3
1. Open the segment before or after which you want to add a
new segment.
2. Press F5 = Seg fct.
F Delete
4 File
F
5 Insert
F
6 Append
F
1
F
2 Buffer
F
3
New
F
7
F
8
Help
Return
From seg
3. Press F5 = Insert again if you want to insert a segment in
front of the current segment or F6 = Append if you want to
append a segment after the current segment.
4. Press F1 = New.
STEP 5 displays a new segment
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-69
Editor
Copying a
Segment
You can copy a segment within the same block or to a different
block in the same program file. The segment title and comment
are also copied. After you have copied a segment, it is advisable
to update the cross reference list if you have not already selected
“Update XRF” in the job box.
Ready to Start?
The block to which you want to copy a segment exists in the
program file. Copying is done in the output mode.
Copying a Segment
in the Same Block
3.3
Note
Segments within a function block that contain functions for the
specific function block, for example labels cannot be copied to
another position within the block.
When you copy a segment, jump labels with symbolically
defined names (e.g. MARK) can only be represented in absolute
format (e.g. M0001).
1. Open the block before or after the segment to be copied.
2. Press F5 = Seg fct.
F Delete
4 File
F
5 Insert
F
6 Append
F
1
F
2 Buffer
F
3
New
F
7
F
8
Help
Return
From seg
3. Press F5 = Insert again if you want to copy before the current
segment or F6 = Append if you want to append a segment
after the current segment.
4. Press F3 = From seg.
STEP 5 displays the message line “Seg no”.
5. Enter the segment number of the segment to be copied (e.g. 2)
and press the Return key.
The segment is copied.
3-70
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Copying a Segment
to a Different Block
1. Display the segment to be copied using page forwards/
backwards.
2. Press F5 = Seg fct.
Filing the Segment
3. Press F4 = File.
The segment is temporarily stored.
4. Press F8 = Return.
Returns you to the block editor in the output mode.
5. Exit the block, assuming you have made no corrections with
the ESC = Cancel key, otherwise press the Insert key.
Copying the
Segment
6. Open the block with the segment before or after which you
want to insert the copied segment.
7. Press F5 = Seg fct.
F Delete
4 File
F
1
New
F
5 Insert
F
6 Append
F
2 Buffer
F
3
F
7
F
8
Help
Return
3.3
From seg
8. Press F5 = Insert again, if you want to insert in front of the
current segment or F6 = Append if you want to append the
segment after the current segment.
9. Press F2 = Buffer.
The buffered segment is copied.
10. Press F8 = Return.
Returns you to the block editor in the output mode.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-71
Editor
Deleting a
Segment
You can delete individual segments in the block. The segment
title and comment are also deleted. After deleting a segment, you
must update the cross reference list (XRF).
Ready to Start?
The segment to be deleted is open. STEP 5 is in the output mode.
Deleting a Segment
in the Block
3.3
1. Press F5 = Seg fct.
2. Press SHIFT F4 = Delete and acknowledge with yes if you
really want to delete the segment.
The segment along with its title and comment is deleted, but not
removed from the program file. This only occurs at the end of the
editor editing session when you store the block.
3. Press F8 = Return.
Returns you to the block editor in the output mode.
Note
With SHIFT and delete segment in the numeric pad you can
also delete a segment.
Transferring/
Shifting a Segment
You can transfer a segment within the same block or to a different
block in the same program file. This function is a combination of
→ Copying a segment and → Deleting a segment. After the
transfer you must update the cross reference list 〈→ generate
XRF).
How to Transfer a
Block
The procedure for transferring segments is the same as for
copying segments (→ Copying a segment to a different block)
with the difference that after you have buffered the segment (file)
the segment must be deleted at its old position using F4.
Press SHIFT F4 = Delete and confirm with yes.
3-72
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Creating,
Displaying Cross
References, Block
Change
The cross references of all blocks in a program file are stored in a
special program file *XR.INI. You can access this data using the
function F2 = Reference. With this function, you can do the
following:
– Create a cross reference list with F1 = Gen XRF.
– Display cross references of an operand on the screen using F2
= Disp XRF.
– Trigger a block change by selecting a reference in the cross
reference list using the cursor and pressing F2 = Jump,
– Change blocks by specifying the destination block and
segment using F4 = Dest blk and...
if you have changed blocks, you can return to the original block
with F5 = Orig blk.
You can display a cross reference list of the following operands:
–
–
–
–
–
–
3.3
inputs/outputs
flags/extended flags
timers/counters
block calls
process I/Os
data and symbols.
Ready to Start?
STEP 5 is in the output mode. The file XR.INI exists and has
been updated. You can achieve this situation as follows:
– by setting → Update XREF in the “Edit STEP 5 block(s)” job
box; XR.INI is then updated when you stored a block,
– as an alternative, you can use the management function
→ Generate XRF.
Working with the
Function “Gen XRF”
With this function, you create the cross reference list for the
preset program file with the name *XR.INI:
After you start the function, it is executed automatically.
The created cross reference list is required in the block editor for
documentation in KOMDOK format and in GRAPH 5 for
executing the functions associated with F2 = Reference.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-73
Editor
Restrictions of “Gen
XRF”
When creating the XRF within the editor, there is less memory
available than for generating an XRF, that is strated directly from
the menu. This means that with large program files, data must be
buffered in temporary files earlier. This slows down the
generation of the XRF.
Working with the
Function “Display
XRF”
1. Position the cursor on the statement containing the operand
whose cross references you want to display or if the operand
does not exist in the current segment, start at step 2.
2. Press F2 = Reference.
3. Press F2 = Disp XRF.
STEP 5 displays the message: “XRF display of the operand:
e.g. I 32.0”.
4. Enter the operand or overwrite it and press the Insert or
Return key. The cross reference list of the operand is
displayed for example:
3.3
FB 10
C:PROEXAST.S5D
LIB=2
LEN=175
Cross references
I
32.0
MAINSWIT
IB
32
INP B
PB 10:1/L IB
PB 10:3/A
FB 10:3/A
Key switch “Plant on”
Load input byte 32 for test
PB 10:1/T IB
PB 10:3/=
PB 10:2/L IW
PB 10:2/AN
PB 10:2/T IW
FB 10:2/
O
Jump to: PB 10
Help
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1
2 Jump
3
4 Single
5 No Dup.
6
7
8 Return
F
1
F
2 Jump
F
3
F
4 Overlap
F
5 Dup
F
6
F
7
Help
F
8 Return
3-74
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
5. F4 = Overlap/Single:
”Overlap”: the cross reference list also contains the byte,
word or double word addresses that overlap the bit or byte
address of the displayed operands.
”Single”: only cross references of the specified operand. If the
cross reference list is long or if you do not have enough
memory, overlapping can be switched off.
6. F5= Dup/No dup:
”Dup”: if an operand occurs with the same operator more than
once in a segment, it is displayed as often as it occurs.
”No dup”: the operand with the same operator in a segment is
only displayed once. This setting is advisable in long cross
reference lists and when you do not have a lot of memory.
7. You can return to the previous level with F8 =,Return or
ESC. You can jump to a different block using F2 = Jump.
Select help (SHIFT F8) and reply yes to the “Continue?”
prompt, you will obtain detailed information about the functions.
Jumping to a Block
1. With the cursor in the cross reference list, select the block you
want to change to.
2. Press F2 = Jump.
The selected block is displayed.
3. You can return to the previous segment with:
F8 = Return
F5 = Orig blk.
Changing Blocks
C79000-G8576-C820-01
1. Press F2 = Reference.
2. Press F4 = Dest blk.
STEP 5 displays “Jump to block: segment: 1”
3. Type in the block and overwrite the segment number if you
require a different one.
4. Press the Insert key.
The selected block is displayed.
3-75
3.3
Editor
3.3
Searching for
Operands
Using the search function you can find certain terms, for example
operands, quickly in the open block. The key is searched for from
the cursor position or from the first segment. If STEP 5 finds the
key, this is displayed in the corresponding segment.
What can you search for ?
– Absolute operands
I, F, S, Q, T, C
– Block calls
OBn, PBn, SBn, FBn, FXn,
DBn, DXn
– Peripheral bytes/words PYn, PWn
– Data
DRn, DLn, DWn, DDn, Dn.m
– Symbolic operands
e.g. -INPUT
– Assignment for absolute or symbolic operands
e.g.* Q1.0,
* –INPUT
Ready to Start ?
STEP 5 is in the output mode.
How to Search for a
Key
Searching in the block
1. Press F3 = Search.
2. Type in the key in absolute or symbolic form, e.g. I 1.1 .
3. Start the search, as follows:
from the 1st segment - press F2 = From seg1 or
from the next statement line - press F3 = Continue.
Continuing the search
Press F3 = Search, see above.
Editing Symbolic
Operands in the
Block
3-76
Symbolic operands can be edited in a list directly in the block.
This list is an excerpt from the symbols file *Z0.INI and the
operands of the open segment are displayed.
If you change anything, the sequential source file *Z0.SEQ
should be updated as follows:
– by setting → Update SEQ. source file, in the “STEP 5
block” job box, so that the *Z0.SEQ is updated when the
block is stored,
– or you can generate the sequential source file from the
symbols file (→ Management, Assignment lists, Convert
INI > SEQ).
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Ready to Start ?
You have selected “symbols: yes” in the “settings” (→ Project).
If this is not the case, you can switch over with SHIFT F3.
How to Edit
Symbolic Operands
1. Press F1 = Disp symb.
A list containing the operands is displayed on the screen.
2. Select the operand with the long cursor.
3. Press F2 = Edit symb.
The character cursor is located in the symbols column.
SYMBOLS FILE: B:ALPHA1Z0.INI
OPERAND
SYMBOL
COMMENT
INPUT 3.1
I
3.1
INP 3–1
I
4.3
INP 4–3
I
4.4
F
2.5
FLA. 25
3.3
FLAG 25
4. Enter the symbolic name keeping to the original upper and
lower case letters.
5. Position the cursor in the comment column with SHIFT and
the cursor right key or with the Return key.
6. Type in the comment keeping to the upper and lower case
letters of the original.
7. Complete the edited line by pressing F2 = Insert.
8. To complete editing, press F8 = Return and the Insert key.
Note
Symbolic names should begin without a hyphen. Do not use
umlauts (ä, ü, ö).
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-77
Editor
3.3.2
Editing Statement Lists
Editor
STEP 5 block
in the program file
in the PLC...
The STEP 5 statement is the smallest independent unit of a
program. It represents a task description for the processor. In the
“Statement List” (STL) method of representation, a statement is
typed in per line in either absolute or symbolic form (possible
blocks: OB, PB, SB, FB/FX). A statement consists of the operand
and the operand as follows:
Operation
Operand
Absolute statement
AN
I 1.1
Symbolic statement
AN
–INPUT
You can write a maximum of 255 statements per segment.
3.3
Note
For an example of editing a Statement List, see Chapter 2.
Ready to Start ?
If you are using symbolic operands, a symbols file must exist and
the name of the symbols file must be entered in the settings (page
1) and “symbols: yes” selected in page 2. If this is not the case,
you can switch over with SHIFT F3.
Statements are always entered in the “edit” mode. If you call a
new block, STEP 5 is in the edit mode, if you call an existing
block, STEP 5 is in the output mode. In this case, you must
switch over to the editing mode with F6 = Edit.
Typing in
Statements
When typing in a statement, you do not have to keep to the strict
format, i.e. STEP 5 enters the blanks automatically after you have
entered the line. Complete each line with the Return key. The
cursor is positioned in the first line.
Type in the first statement or position the cursor on the
required line and type in the statement, e.g. AN I 1.1 or
AN–INPUT and press the Return key.
3-78
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Correcting
Statements
Storing the Block
Position the cursor on the statement and overwrite. You can
delete individual characters with the DEL key.
Press the Insert key.
STEP 5 switches to the output mode.
Press the Insert key again.
Displaying
Addresses
With this function you can display the relative operation
addresses in bytes or words when editing in STL. While the
addresses are displayed, you cannot edit statements and cannot
enter a library number.
Ready to Start ?
STEP 5 is in the output mode.
How to Display
Addresses
1. Press SHIFT F1 = Addresses.
STEP 5 displays the relative addresses in words.
2. Press SHIFT F1 = Addresses again.
3.3
STEP 5 displays the relative addresses in bytes.
3. Press SHIFT F1 = Addresses.
STEP 5 returns to the Statement List without addresses.
Note
If you display the addresses from the PLC online, they are only
displayed in words. If you press SHIFT F1 = Addresses a
second time, the address information is cleared from the screen.
Statement
Comment
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Statement comments are stored in comment blocks just as →
Segment titles. While the input of segment titles is not dependent
on the method of representation, you can only assign a (line)
comment to a single statement in the STL editor. A statement
comment has a maximum of 32 characters.
You can type in a statement comment directly when
programming the statement without having to open the comment
block in the program file. In this case, the comment block is
generated automatically when you store the STEP 5 block.
3-79
Editor
You can also enter statement comments separately in the
comment block. We recommend the first method, since the
comment block is automatically updated if you make any
changes. The names of the comment blocks are assigned
automatically by STEP 5 as follows:
OCn for OBn,
PCn for PBn,
SCn for SBn,
FCn for FBn,
FCXn for FXn.
3.3
Ready to Start ?
You have selected “Comments: yes” in the settings (→ Project).
If this is not the case, you can switch over with SHIFT F4.
STEP 5 is in the edit mode.
How to Enter
Statement
Comments
1. Position the cursor on the required statement.
2. Move the cursor to the right to the comment field (TAB and
cursor right).
3. Type in a text with a maximum of 32 characters or correct an
existing text.
After the 32nd character, the cursor jumps to the beginning of the
comment field.
4. Press the Return key.
How to Store the
Comment
The first time you store the block with comments, the comment
block (OC, PC, SC, FC/FCX) is generated automatically.
If the comment block already exists, STEP 5 displays the
message: “Enter modified block?”.
Enter the comment with the Insert key or discard it with ESC =
Cancel.
3-80
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Function Block
A function block (FB, FX) is a STEP 5 program block similar to
OBs, PBs and SBs. While these blocks only contain the basic
STEP 5 operations, an FB or FX can contain the following:
– basic operations,
– supplementary operations and
– system operations.
An FB occurs only once in the program memory of the
programmable controller. When you program the block, you
decide on its function, and the operands you enter can be formal
operands which have a token function. When the block is called
(→ Calling a function block) the higher ranking block replaces
the formal operands by actual operands.
Structure of an FB
A function block consists of the following:
– a block preheader (FV, FXV),
– a block header (as with all other blocks),
– a block body (as with all other blocks).
Block Preheader
The block preheader contains the identifiers of the jump labels
that you have entered in the block. The block header is
– automatically generated by STEP 5 when the block is
translated,
– stored in the preset program file as an FV or FXV,
– not transferred to the PLC and not to EPROM/EEPROMs,
– automatically deleted when its FB or FX is deleted.
If the block preheader does not exist when a function block is
transferred from the PLC memory to the selected program file,
STEP 5 displays the following message: “Preheader does not
exist for this block”.
Block Header
The block header contains the following:
– the block type and block number,
– the library number,
– the block length.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-81
3.3
Editor
Block Body
The block body contains the STEP 5 program and a parameter list
with the block parameters of all segments of the function block.
This parameter list contains all the information necessary to
perform the following tasks:
– to represent the block graphically (e.g. input, output
parameters),
– to check that the data type is entered correctly when the
actual operands are input (parameter assignment).
FB 200
3.3
Name
Decl
Decl
Decl
Decl
Decl
Decl
MARK
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
C:[email protected]@@ST.S5D
: EXAMPLE
: INP1
: INP2
: OUTP
: BLK
: TIME
: CTR
: DO
:A
:A
: JC
:L
:T
: SP
:A
:=
:***
LIB=12345
LEN=45
OUTPUT
0000
Segment 1
EXAMPLE is the name of FB 200
I/Q/D/B/T/C:
I/Q/D/B/T/C:
I/Q/D/B/T/C:
I/Q/D/B/T/C:
I/Q/D/B/T/C:
I/Q/D/B/T/C:
I
I
Q
B
T
C
BI/BY/W/D: BI
BI/BY/W/D: BI
BI/BY/W/D: BI
=
=
=
=
BLK
INP1
INP2
MARK
Dataw10
FW 2
= TIME
= TIME
= OUTP
F Addresses F Lib no
Block call C DB
Conditional jump to MARK
load DW 10
Jump label; start time
Segment end
F
1 Disp symb 2 Reference 3 Search
F No comm.
F ––>LAD
4 Diagnosis
5
Seg fct
F Seg com
F
Save
F
Edit
7
Enter
8 Cancel
6
Help
Figure 3-19 Example of a Function Block (FB 200)
3-82
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Editing a Function
Block
A function block can contain the STEP 5 statements, a block
name and a parameter list of the formal operands. Jumps or
branches can be programmed within a segment.
– Programming is also possible in LAD and CSF. Except for
the first segment, all the new language elements can be
used within a segment (→ Editor, LAD/CSF)
– The formal operands defined in the first segment cannot
be used in a LAD or CSF segment.
– The FB name is displayed in the “Directory” function (→
Object, Blocks)
”Name”
The block name can be up to 8 characters long and must begin
with a letter.
Parameter List
The parameter list contains the name, the parameter type and the
data type of the formal operand. You can include a maximum of
40 formal operands per function block.
”Decl”
Name of the formal operand, with a maximum of 4 characters,
the first of which must be a letter.
”I/Q/D/B/T/C”
The type of formal operand:
I
Input parameter
Q
Output parameter
D
Data (constant)
B
Block call (C DBn/DXn, JU OBn, PBn, SBn,
FBn/FXn)
T
Timer
C
Counter
”BI/BY/W/D”
Type of data:
BI
BY
W
D
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Operand with bit address
Operand with byte address
Operand with word address
Operand with double word address
3-83
3.3
Editor
Editing a new
function block
Ready to Start ?
For symbolic operands, a symbols file must exist and “symbols:
yes” must be selected in the settings. STEP 5 is in the edit mode
(STL). Segment 1 is open.
How to Input an FB
1. Type in a name with a maximum of 8 characters, e.g.
EXAMPLE1
If the name is 8 characters long, the cursor jumps to the
comment file (→ Statement comment).
2. Press the Return key.
The parameter list for the formal operands is opened and “Decl:”
is displayed.
FB 200
3.3
C:[email protected]@@ST.S5D
Segment 1
LEN=0
Edit
Name : EXAMPLE
Decl
:
3. Type in a maximum 4 character string for the first formal
operand.
After 4 characters, the cursor jumps to the next input field. If
you use less than 4 characters, jump to the next field with the
Return key.
4. Select the type of formal operand, e.g. type in I
The cursor jumps to the next input field.
5. Select the type of data, e.g. type in BI
If you only use one character here, press the Return key. The
cursor jumps to the next line in the parameter list.
6. Continue to enter the parameters as described above.
7. Complete the parameter list by pressing the Return key.
3-84
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
The cursor jumps to the first line of the block body, where you
can enter the first statement.
Note
You can only add parameters later between the lines of the
parameter list if the parameters already entered do not yet exist
in any statement line in the block body.
Calling a Function
Block
When you call the function block, the actual operands are
assigned to the formal operands.
Ready to Start ?
STEP 5 is in the edit mode. The function block to be called is in
the program file.
How to Assign
Parameters
1. Type in the block call, as follows:
JU FB
for an unconditional FB call
JC FB
for a conditional FB call
DO FX
for an unconditional extended function block
call
DOC FX
for a conditional extended function block call
2. Press the Return key.
The PG displays the name of the FB.
3. Press the Return key.
In the next line, STEP 5 displays the first formal operand and
waits for you to type in the first actual operand.
4. Type in the actual operand in absolute or symbolic form and
press the Return key.
Note
Absolute actual operands for BI, T, C must be entered with a
blank, for example I 1.0.
5. Type in the remaining actual operands and complete each one
with the Return key.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-85
3.3
Editor
STEP 5 sets the type of parameter and data type automatically
which you can either accept or change.
1. Press the Return key in the line of the formal operand or
move the cursor to the right.
STEP 5 displays the type of parameter you selected in the
parameter list.
2. Either accept the displayed parameter type or overwrite it
with a different type.
3. Press the Return key.
3.3
3-86
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
3.3.3
Editing Ladder Diagrams
Editor
STEP 5 block
in the program file
New Functions
C79000-G8576-C820-01
In the Ladder Diagram method of representation (LAD) the
control task is described based on the symbols used in circuit
diagrams. Based on these symbols, the block operations are
represented by contacts (NC contacts, NO contacts, outputs) and
function symbols for counters, timers and arithmetic operations.
You can program in LAD in the following STEP 5 blocks:
– organization block OB
– program block PB
– sequence block SB
– function block FB
– extended function block FX.
STEP 5 stores the corresponding segment comments in the blocks
OBDO.nnn, PBDO.nnn etc. Segment titles are stored in the
comment blocks OC, PC etc.
It is advisable to enter and correct comments when editing a
block and not to write them directly in the documentation or
comment blocks.
Compared with previous STEP 5 versions, the following
functions are now available when editing in LAD:
1. The softkey menu has been extended from 8 to 16 function
keys and can be activated with the mouse.
2. Function blocks (FB, FX) can be created, however, the first
segment must still be programmed in STL.
3. The first segment must be programmed in STL.
4. No formal operands can be used.
5. The following extended functions can be invoked using
softkeys:
– conditional and unconditional block calls for OB, PB, SB,
DB, DX, FB, FX
– loading and transfer operations
– negated connector
– SHIFT and rotate operations (only in FB, FX)
– conversion operations (only in FB, FX)
– digital logic operations (only in FB, FX)
3-87
3.3
Editor
Working with the
LAD Editor
Settings for editing → Object, Settings, Page 1 and 2 and then
Program file:
Name of the currently selected program file.
Symbols file:
If you want to work with symbolic operands,
you must specify the symbols file, select
“symbols: yes” on page 2 and specify the
symbol length.
Mode:
”Online” if a PLC is connected and you want
to edit in the PLC.
Representation:
”LAD”
Comments:
“Yes” and the comment length (max. 40
characters) if you want to edit segment titles
and comments.
If you are editing existing blocks, you can select LAD with
SHIFT F5 = LAD regardless of the selected method of
representation.
3.3
Calling the Editor
3-88
After selecting the editor function “Edit STEP 5 blocks in the
program file” or “in the PLC” the job box is displayed. Here, you
name the block and it is advisable to select the options “Update
XRF” and “Update seq. source file” if you are working with
symbolic operands.
After confirming your entries with OK, the Ladder Diagram
editor is called. A working field appears on the screen (Figure
3-20) and the softkey menu with the symbols for entering
contacts and processing LAD segments.
The editing field is divided into lines and columns in which you
enter rungs, branches, contacts, outputs and function elements
using the keys of the softkey menu or the mouse. As you build up
your segment, you are supported intensively by STEP 5.
Connections and symbols of all types (e.g. signal inputs/outputs
for counter or arithmetic functions) are generated automatically.
Input fields for labelling and assigning parameters are displayed
and can be reached with the automatic cursor control. STEP 5
rejects inconsistent configurations.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Screen Layout
The screen is divided into 48 fields (8 columns and 6 horizontal
sections). The horizontal sections are 3 lines high. The first 7
columns contain logic operations, the 8th column is reserved for
the outputs.
The label and the corresponding contact are arranged one above
the other in one of the 48 fields.
The Ladder Diagram can be a maximum of 2.5 times the length
of one screen.
(1)
PB 3
-PROG 3
Segment 1
I 1.1
-INP 1
(2)
(3)
-INP 1
][
I
I
C:[email protected]
Segment title
LIB=12345
LEN=19
Edit
Input 1.1
F 3.0
2.2
][
S
3.1
3.3
][
I
3.2
][
F 3.3
][
(23)
I
4.2
][
I
5.5
][
F 2.0
]/[
Q 1.0
RQ
-()Message line
(24)
(25)
F Math
F Blocks
F Shift
F Convert
F Compare
F Seg com
1
2
3
4
5 Binary op 6 Compl seg 7
F
Extras
Enter
F
Help
8
Cancel
Figure 3-20 Segment in Ladder Diagram Representation (Example)
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-89
Editor
Table 3-1
3.3
Naming Operands
Explanation of the Screen Lines (Figure 3-20)
Line
Display
Explanation
(1)
PB3
–PROG3
C:[email protected]
LIB=12345
LEN=19
Block type and number
Symbolic block name
Drive and program file
Library number
Block length in words
(2)
Segment 1
Segment title
Edit
Segment number
Text with max. 32 characters
STEP 5 mode
(3)
Symbolic operands
Assignment “absolute operand” →
“symb. operand” → operand
comment, when the cursor is located
on an operand identifier
(4)...
(22)
Editing area
Input fields for logic operations, calls
and operands
(23)
Message line
STEP 5 messages or prompts (red or
on a black background)
(24)
(25)
Function keys
Key assignment for the currently
active functions
After you input a LAD symbol, the cursor jumps to the name
field (max. 8 characters) for the operand. If you have selected a
symbol length greater than 8 characters in the “Settings”, STEP 5
only displays the first 8 characters. If you use longer symbol
names, make sure that the names are unique within the first 8
characters. Example: you have the following assignment:
Operand
Symbol
F 100.1
F 1.1
F 1.7
Myflag 100
Myflag 1.1
Myflag 1.7
Comment
The selected symbolic operand names are displayed or printed
out as follows:
3-90
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
-Myflag 1
-Myflag 1
-Myflag 1
There are two methods of naming operands, as follows:
1. The operand can be named immediately after selecting a
symbol (automatic cursor positioning),
or after exiting the name field [?????] with the Return key.
2. Entering the operand names in the name fields of the
completed segment, guided by the long cursor.
Note
You can only exit a segment or block when all the names and
parameters have been input correctly.
Reconfiguring a
Segment
If while editing a segment its layout has become awkward (e.g. as
a result of repeated branches) you can redisplay the segment by
pressing SHIFT F7 = Extras and F2 = New disp even if the
segment does not yet have all the required parameters. The screen
is then reconfigured and the display layout optimized.
Editing Symbolic
Operands
When you press F1 = Disp symb in the output mode, STEP 5
displays a list of operands in absolute and symbolic form for the
open segment. You can then edit this list. If you use longer
symbol names make sure that the names are unique within the
first 8 characters. The symbolic operand names are reduced to 8
characters on the screen and when printing in LAD and CSF.
If you make changes, it is advisable to update the sequential
source file if you have not already selected this function in the
job box.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-91
3.3
Editor
Logic Operations
When you select “LAD” on page 2 of the “Settings” and “Edit
STEP 5 block(s) in ...”, STEP 5 opens the block selected in the
job box at segment 1. If you are working with a new block, this is
empty apart from the power rail on the left-hand side.
Using the function keys, you can now input contacts, outputs and
function elements (Tables 3-1 and 3-2). The left-hand column of
these tables contains the operation for processing the contact(s)
which you call in the edit mode using the keystrokes shown.
Table 3-2 Logic Operations in LAD (Ladder Diagram)
Operation
Softkeys
Explanation
F1
NO contact
F2
NC contact
F3
Branch, close branch
F4
Output
F5
Call complex functions
(#)
F5+F4
Connector
( )
F5+F5
Negated connector
3.3
( )
Binary op
→ (Cursor right) Empty element
Editing Series and
Parallel Rungs
3-92
When you input the first contact at the position marked by the
long cursor in the empty segment, you generate a continuous rung
including the output symbol. You can include up to 7 contacts in
series within this rung by positioning the long cursor on the
empty element and selecting the required function (Table 3-2).
Further parallel circuits are connected to this continuous rung. A
parallel circuit must be continued as far as the close branch point,
if necessary by inserting empty elements. Only then is it possible
to label elements or make corrections.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
You can always connect a parallel circuit to the power rail.
Branches can be generated by positioning the long cursor below a
contact. The branch point is then generated before this contact.
You select the close branch point if necessary by including empty
elements using F3 = Close branch.
If you attempt to branch from an empty element, this is rejected
with the message “parallel circuit illegal”.
Inserting Contacts
You can always insert a contact where there is an empty element.
Before you can insert a contact in a rung, you must first expand
the rung with SHIFT F7 = Extras, F6 = Hor exp. or the expand
(horizontal) key.
Series
Position the long cursor on the contact after the insertion point
and press SHIFT F7 = Extras and F6 = Hor exp.
All the lines of the segment are moved one column to the right.
Now position the long cursor on the inserted empty element and
insert the contact using F1 or F2 or the connector with F5 =
Binary op + F4 = # or F5 = /.
When you store the segment (Insert) or reconfigure the screen
(half screen) unnecessary empty elements are discarded.
Parallel
C79000-G8576-C820-01
You can generate parallel circuits within a segment as described
above by positioning the long cursor between the paths below the
contact in front of which you want to start a parallel circuit.
1. Select the required contact with F1 ... F4 .
STEP 5 now expands your segment implicitly without you
pressing SHIFT F7 = Extras, F7 = Vert exp or the expand
(vertical) key and makes room for a new parallel path.
3-93
3.3
Editor
Examples of Editing
Logic Operations
Initial display after pressing F1 = NO contact and entering the
operand identifier I 10.0 and pressing the Return key and Q 10.0
for output and pressing the Return key.
Initial situation:
I 10.0
Q 10.0
( )
Series and Parallel
Contact
3.3
1. Series contact: position the cursor in the second column and
press F2 = NC contact type in I 10.2 and press the Return
key.
2. Parallel contact: position the cursor below the contact I 10.0
and press F1 = NO contact. The parallel branch is opened.
Then move the cursor to the right , press F3 = Close branch,
type in I 10.2 and press the Return key.
I 10.0
I 10.1
Q 10.0
( )
I 10.2
Implicit Expanding
3. Inserting an NO contact in a further parallel branch: position
the long cursor below contact I 10.0 once again and press F1
= NO contact and F3 = Close branch.
Replacing an Empty
Element by a
Contact
4. Contact I 10.3 is generated by positioning the cursor on the
empty element and pressing F2 = NC contact.
I 10.0
I 10.1
Q 10.0
( )
?????
I 10.2
3-94
I 10.3
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Bridge Circuit
You can obtain the bridge circuit below as follows:
1. In the upper rung: position the cursor on the second column
and press F2 = NC contact then position the cursor in the
third column and press F1 = NO contact.
2. Creating the parallel branch: position the cursor below contact
I 10.0, press F2 = NC contact and F3 = Close branch and
position the cursor in the second column of the parallel
branch, press F1 = NO contact and F3 = Close branch.
I 10.0
I 10.2
Opening a Branch
after a Contact
I 10.1
Q 10.0
( )
I 10.3
The following segment shows a parallel path opened after the
first contact.
1. In the upper rung, position the cursor on the second column
and press F2 = NC contact for I 10.1.
2. Creating the parallel branch: position the cursor below contact
I 10.1, press F2 = NC contact, F1 = NO contact and F3 =
Close branch.
I 10.0
I 10.1
Q 10.0
I 10.5
Assignment
I 10.4
( )
I 10.6
Connecting an output or an assignment:
Position the long cursor under output Q 10.0 and press F4 =
Output.
I 10.0
Q 10.0
( )
F 2.1
( )
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-95
3.3
Editor
Using Connectors
Connectors and negated connectors (Table 3-2) are intermediate
flags in binary logic operations. They store the RLO formed up to
that point. A connector is input in LAD in the same way as a
contact. If it is located after the last contact of the rung it is
represented as an output after the rung is entered and stored.
Immediately after the parallel branch is closed, the intermediate
RLO is written to flag F 10.7.
I 10.0
I 10.1
I 10.4
I 10.5
Q 10.0
( )
I 10.6
Since it is not possible to expand the rung horizontally at this
point, contact I 10.4 must first be deleted and then inserted again
after the connector, as follows:
1. Position the cursor on the contact below I 10.4 and press
DEL.
2. Now position the cursor on the empty element and press F5 =
Binary op and F4 = Connector to create a connector which
you can then label F 10.7. Following this, insert contact
I 10.4 again.
3.3
I 10.0
I 10.1
I 10.5
3-96
F 10.7
(#)
I 10.4
Q 10.0
( )
I 10.6
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Complex
Functions
In LAD, the following rules apply to the complex functions listed
in Table 3-2:
1. All operations (1) to (10) in Table 3-3 are represented as “long
boxes” in which the operands are displayed on the left before
the processing and on the right the result of the processing.
STEP 5 enters the operation selected with the softkeys in the
long box itself.
2. Only one complex function is possible in a segment, i.e. a
new segment must always be opened.
3. Some function elements can be extended, i.e. the number of
inputs can be increased provided the operation allows. To do
this, position the cursor on the “roof” of the box and press the
vertical expand key.
4. The “shift/rotate” function (4) requires the shift parameter “n”
to be entered in the long box, i.e. the number of bits by which
the content of the ACCU is shifted left or right. The
maximum possible shift depends on the format of the operand
(16 or 32 bits).
5. With the functions “Math” and “Compare” you can specify a
different operand type in the long box. The type “fixed point
number = F” is the default.
Note
The type can only be changed once directly after calling the long
box.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-97
3.3
Editor
In the editing mode, the following functions can be called with
SHIFT or F5: = Binary op:
(1)
Arithmetic operations
(2)
Block calls
(3)
Load and transfer operations
(4)
Shift and rotate word/double word operands
(5)
Binary operations
(6)
Conversion operations
(7)
Comparison between two operands
(8)
Digital logic operations
(9/10)
Counter and timer operations
Table 3-3 Complex Functions in LAD
Keys (softkeys)
Operation
3.3
Math.
ADD, SUB
MULT, DIV
SHIFT F1
and
(with FBs/FXs)
AND
OR
XOR
SHIFT F1
and
Blocks
JU FB, JC FB
DO FX, DOC FX
JU..., JC...
C DB, CX DX
SHIFT F2
and
(SHIFT)
SHIFT F3
and
3-98
L/T
Explanation
F1, F2
F3, F4
(1) Arithmetic operations:
Addition, subtraction multiplication,
division
F5
F6
F7
(8) Digital logic operations:
AND operation, words
OR operation, words
Exclusive OR operation, words
F1, SHIFT
F1 F2,
SHIFT F2
F4, SHIFT
F4 F6,
SHIFT F6
F7
(2) Call blocks as follows:
FB unconditional, FB conditional
FX unconditional, FX conditional
OB, PB, SB unconditional,
conditional
DB, DX
(3) Load and transfer operations
Load and transfer operand
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Table 3-3 Complex Functions in LAD
Operation
Keys (softkeys)
SHIFT
(with FBs/FXs)
SLW, SLD
SRW
SSW, SSD
RLD, RRD
SHIFT F3
Convert
(with FBs/FXs)
DEF, CFW
DUF, CSW
DED, CSD
DUD
FDG, GFD
SHIFT F4
Compare
!=
><
>=
<=
>
<
SHIFT F5
Binary op
CD, CU
F5
and
Binary op
SP, SE
SD, SF
SS
F5
and
and
and
and
F1, SHIFT
F1 F2,
F3, SHIFT
F3 SHIFT
F4 SHIFT
F5
F1, SHIFT
F1 F2,
SHIFT F2
F3, SHIFT
F3 F4
F5, F6
F1, F2
F3, F5
F4, F6
C79000-G8576-C820-01
(4) SHIFT and rotate operations
SHIFT word/double word left
SHIFT word right
SHIFT word/double word with sign right
Rotate left, right
(6) Convert operations
BCD->binary, form 1’s compl., 16 bit
Binary->BCD, form 2’s compl., 16 bit
BCD->binary, form 2’s compl., 32 bit
Binary->BCD, 32 bit fixed point -> floating
point, floating point -> fixed point, 32 bit
(7) Comparator operations (between two
operands): Compare for “equal to”, “not
equal to”
Compare for greater than or equal to, less
than or equal to
Compare for “greater than”, “less than
F1, F2
(9) Counter operations: counter value
incremented, decremented by 1
SHIFT F1/F2
SHIFT F3/F5
SHIFT F4
(10) Timer operations:
Start timer as pulse, extended pulse
Start timer as ON/OFF delay
Start timer as stored on delay
SHIFT F6
SHIFT F7
(5) Binary latching operations:
Priority setting flip-flop
Priority resetting flip-flop
F5 and
R/S
S/R
Explanation
3-99
3.3
Editor
Arithmetic
Operations
(1) in Table 3-3
The operators ADD, SUB, MULT and DIV combine two
operands in ACCU 1 and 2 to form a result in ACCU 1. The
function corresponds to the following STL statements:
– load operand 1
– load operand 2
– execute the selected logic operation
– transfer result to operand (ACCU 1)
Operand types : KF, DW, IW...
Example
Editing an ADD operation for two fixed point numbers:
1. Press *** or F6 = Compl seg and then SHIFT F1 = Math.
2. Select the required operation, here F1 = ADD.
STEP 5 displays the long box with undefined inputs and outputs
and the default operand format “F”.
3.3
?????????
?????????
+F
KF + 12345
?????????
DW 12
+F
DW 14
3. Confirm the operand format by pressing the Return key.
4. Type in the 1st operand, in this case KF + 12345 and press the
Return key.
5. Type in the 3rd operand, in this case DW 12 and press the
Return key.
6. Name the operand to which the result will be transferred
(DW 14) and press the Return key.
The segment now appears as shown on the right-hand side of the
figure.
3-100
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Block Calls
(2) in Table 3-3
Using the STEP 5 block calls with which other blocks in the user
program can be called from any block allows structured
programming. A block call is represented in LAD either as an
output (assignment) or as a long box when calling a function
block (FB/FX).
In an empty segment, you can input a call directly using the
softkeys. In existing segments, you can insert and append calls
with/without implicit expanding of the rung.
Note
A LAD segment contains either only an unconditional block call
or a logic operation with a conditional block call. For this reason,
if you press F4 = Output the default “JU” or “ = ” (assignment)
is displayed.
3.3
Example 1
Conditional program block call
1. Position the cursor below the output symbol and press SHIFT
F2 = Blocks and SHIFT F4 = JC ....
2. Enter the destination block, in this case PB 24, in the input
field above the call symbol and complete the entry with the
Return key.
I 10.0
I 10.1
I 10.2
Example 2
Q 10.0
( )
PB 24
( JC )
Unconditional program block call
Press SHIFT F2 = Blocks and F4 = JU ....
PB 24
( JU )
Example 3
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Unconditional FB call in an empty segment
1. Press SHIFT F2 = Blocks and F1 = JU FB.
3-101
Editor
The editor displays the “roof” of the block with the cursor in the
labelling field.
2. Type in the name of the function block to be called, in this
case FB 10.
The function block with its formal operands is displayed in the
form shown on the left-hand side.
3. The cursor is positioned on the input field of the first actual
operand. Now type in the operand in absolute or symbolic
form. Move to the other fields using the Return key.
The segment then appears as shown on the right-hand side.
FB 10
FB 10
TEST
?????????
?????????
?????????
?????????
3.3
INP1 OUTP
INP2
INP2
COUN
TEST
?????????
I 1.0
I 1.2
T 32
C8
INP1 OUTP
Q 1.0
INP2
INP2
COUN
Load and Transfer
Operations
(3) in Table 3-3
The function is displayed as a “long box” with the operand to the
left and the result to the right. The function SHIFT F3 = Shift
and F7 = L/T correspond to the following STL statements:
– load operand (DW, DD, IW...),
– transfer to operand (DW, DD, IW...).
After generating the long box (see above) you simply enter the
operands displayed as [?????].
Shift and Rotate
Operations
(4) in Table 3-3
Shift and rotate operations belong to the supplementary
operations (only FB, FX). A shift/rotate operation is displayed in
an empty segment as a long box with the operand in ACCU 1 to
the left before the shift operation and the result to the right. After
pressing the softkeys SHIFT F3 = Shift and the required function
at the second key level, STEP 5 generates the “undefined” long
box in which you enter the required operation.
3-102
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
The character cursor flashes below the parameter “n”. Here, you
enter the number of bits by which the content of the operand will
be shifted.
The function corresponds to the STL statements:
– load operand
– shift/rotate operand by “n” bits
– transfer result to operand (ACCU 1).
Example
Shifting the input operand IW 12 seven bits to the right and
transferring to DW 12.
1. Press *** or F6 = Compl seg followed by SHIFT F3 = Shift.
2. Select the required operation, in this case F1 = SRW.
STEP 5 displays the long box (left).
?????????
SRW 0
?????????
IW 12
SRW 7
DW 12
3. Position the cursor on the parameter “n” in the box, in this
case 0, and type in the number “7”.
4. Type in the input and output operands.
Note
It is not possible to modify “n” at a later time.
Latching
Operations
C79000-G8576-C820-01
(5) in Table 3-3
Using the latching functions, the RLO can be stored. You can
specify how the latching function works after pressing F5 =
Binary op and then selecting either F6 “priority set” or F7
“priority reset” at the second key level. STEP 5 enters the
operands with priority at the top of the long box.
The latching function is displayed as a box with 2 inputs and 1
output, S is the “set” input, R is the “reset” input and Q is the
output. Only one latching function can be inserted in a segment.
3-103
3.3
Editor
The latching function corresponds to the following statements
(STL):
– A (N)
1st input operand
– S (R)
Operand
– A (N)
2nd input operand
– R (S)
Operand
– A
Operand
– =
Operand (assignment)
Operand types: F m.n, Q m.n, D m.n ...
The latching function reacts in the following way to changes at
the single inputs depending on the function selected:
State at input
3.3
Binary output Q
S
R
0
0
Old state retained
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1 with S/R element
0 with R/S element
After pressing F5 = Binary op and the required function key at
the second key level, STEP 5 generates an undefined long box at
the position of the long cursor in a LAD statement.
Example
3-104
Editing a latching operation with “reset” priority.
1. Position the cursor on an empty element or the contact for the
set/reset input and press F5 = Binary op and F7 = S.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
STEP 5 displays the long box or inserts it in the segment.
?????????
?????????
S
?????????
R
I 2.1
Q
F 1.0
S
Q 14.0
I 2.2
?????????
R
Q
( )
2. Type in the operand ID for the memory location, in this case
F 1.0 and press the Return key.
3. Enter the input operands with F1 = NO contacts I 2.1 and I
2.2. Exit each input field with the Return key.
4. Type in the output (Q) for scanning the binary signal state, in
this case Q 14.0 and press the Return key. Following this,
press the Insert key. Alternatively, press F4 = –()–, and then
type in Q 14.0 and press the Return key.
Conversion
Operations
C79000-G8576-C820-01
(6) in Table 3-3
Conversion operations (BINARY ↔ BCD, 1’s/2’s complement)
belong to the supplementary operations (only FB, FX).
A conversion operation is displayed in the empty segment as a
long box with the operand in ACCU 1 to the left before the
conversion and the result to the right. After pressing SHIFT F4 =
Convert and selecting the required function at the second key
level, STEP 5 generates the long box in which you can enter the
operation.
3-105
3.3
Editor
This function corresponds to the statements (STL):
– load operand
– convert the operand
– transfer the result to the operand (ACCU 1)
Operand types: DW, DD, IW...
After generating the long box (see above) you must simply type
over the token operands ?????.
Comparator
Operations
3.3
(7) in Table 3-3
The comparator operations combine two digital operands in
ACCU 1 and ACCU 2 to produce a binary result in ACCU 1.
The function corresponds to the statements (STL):
– load operand 1
– load operand 2
– execute the selected comparison
– result of logic operation.
A comparison is represented in an empty segment as a long box
with the operands in ACCU 1 and 2 to the left and the result of
the comparison to the right.
After pressing SHIFT F5 = Compare and selecting the required
function at the second key level, STEP 5 generates the undefined
long box in which you can enter the selected operation.
The selected comparator operation (! =, ><, >=, >, <=, <) is
entered in the left-hand side of the long box and the format of the
operands to the right, as follows:
F = fixed point number (16 bits)
D = double word (32 bits)
G = floating point number (32 bits)
Note
You can only exit a segment or block when all the names and
paramenters have been input correctly.
3-106
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Example
Operation to compare two fixed point numbers:
1. Open a new segment with *** or F6 = Compl seg and then
press SHIFT F5 = Compare.
2. Select the required operation, in this case F2 = >< Compare
for “not equal to”.
STEP 5 displays the long box with token inputs/outputs and the
default operand format “F”.
?????????
><F
?????????
?????????
KF + 100
><F
F 12.1
DW 34
3.3
( )
3. Confirm the operand format with the Return key.
4. Type in the first operand, in this case KF + 100, and press the
Return key.
5. Type in the second operand, in this case DW 34, and press the
Return key.
6. With the cursor on the output, press F4 = –()–.
7. Identify the operand to which the result will be assigned, in
this case F 12.1, and press the Return key.
The segment then appears as shown above.
Digital Logic
Operations
C79000-G8576-C820-01
(8) in Table 3-3
Digital logic operations belong to the supplementary operations
(only FB, FX). The operators AND, OR and XOR combine two
digital operands in ACCU 1 and ACCU 2 and the result is entered
in ACCU 1.
The functions correspond to the statements:
– load operand 1 (DW, IW, FW...),
– load operand 2 (DW, IW, FW...),
– combine the operands as words (AW, OW, XOW),
– transfer the result to operand (DW, IW, FW...).
3-107
Editor
Example
AND operation of two operands in words.
1. Open a segment with *** or F6 = Compl seg and then press
SHIFT F1 = Math.
2. Select the required function, here F5 = AND.
STEP 5 displays the long box with the token inputs and outputs
and the selected format “AW”.
?????????
?????????
IW 124
AW
?????????
FW 10
AW
DW 16
3. Confirm the operand format with the Return key.
4. Type in the first operation, in this case IW 124, and press the
Return key.
5. Type in the second operand, in this case FW 10 and press the
Return key.
6. Identify the operand to which the result will be transferred, in
this case DW 16 and press the Return key.
The segment then appears as shown on the right-hand side of the
figure.
3.3
Counter
Operations
3-108
(9) in Table 3-3
A counter operation is displayed as a long box in the empty
segment. The counter operand is above the box. Depending on
your selection at the second key level, F1 = “count down”, F2 =
“count up”, the first input of the counter input is either a
decrementing counter CD or an incrementing counter CU and the
second input is the opposite of the first. This results from the rule
that the first input of a counter must always be “connected”.
After pressing F5 = Binary op and selecting the required function
at the second key level, STEP 5 generates the “undefined” long
box with the following inputs/outputs:
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
CD Decrement the counter value by one when the RLO
changes from 0 to 1 at this input (positive going edge).
CU Increment the counter value by one when the RLO
changes from 0 to 1 at this input.
S
Load the counter value from input CV when there is a
positive signal change (0 → 1) at the “set” input S.
CV Value to which the counter is set, decimal (BCD) coded
0 ... 999, operand type: KC, IW, FW, QW, DW.
R
Reset the counter to the value 0 when there is a 1 at this
input. The output Q is set to “0”.
BI
Current counter value in binary.
DE Current counter value in BCD.
Q
The output indicates whether the counter value is
zero = “0” or > zero: = “1”.
Counter operand:
Range of values:
Example
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3.3
C 0 ... C 255
0 ... 999
Editing a counter function “count up”.
1. Open a segment with *** or F6 = Compl seg and then press
F5 = Binary op and F2 = CU.
3-109
Editor
STEP 5 displays the long box with the token inputs/outputs.
?????????
?????????
?????????
?????????
?????????
CU
CD
S
CV BI
DE
?????????
R
I 32.0
F 2.0
KC 255
E 32.1
3.3
Q
?????????
?????????
?????????
C 10
CU
CD
S
CV BI
DE
DW 64
DW 66
F 12.1
R
Q
( )
2. Type in the operand (C10) and press the Return key.
3. Type in the operation for CU, in this case press F1 = NO
contact and type in I 32.0. Complete the input with the
Return key.
4. Skip the operation for CD by pressing the DEL key.
5. Type in the operation for setting the counter, in this case press
F1 = NO contact, and type in F 2.0. Complete the input by
pressing the Return key.
6. Type in the counter value, in this case KC 255, and press the
Return key.
7. Press F1 = NO contact to reset input and type in the operand
identifier I 32.1, and press the Return key.
8. Type in the transfer of the counter value to the operands
DW 64 and DW 66 and press the Return key.
9. Press F4 = –()– at output Q and type in F 12.1 and press the
Return key.
3-110
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Timer Operations
(10) in Table 3-3
Using the timer operations, you can program timed program
sequences and monitoring functions. You select the required
timer function by pressing F5 and selecting the function at the
second key level with SHIFT F1 ... SHIFT F5. STEP 5 enters
the selected function in symbolic form at the start input of the
long box. The timer operand is above the box.
A timer function is started when the RLO at the start input
changes. With an OFF delay (SF) the RLO must change from 1 to
0, in all other cases from 0 to 1. The parameters at the start input
have the following meaning (see also SHIFT F8 = Help):
Symbol
Key
Meaning
1–-–
SHIFT F1 (SP)
Start timer as pulse
1–-V
SHIFT F2 (SE)
Start timer as extended pulse
T ! – !0
SHIFT F3 (SD)
Start timer as ON delay
T ! – !S
SHIFT F4 (SS)
Start timer as stored ON delay
0 ! – !T
SHIFT F5 (SF)
Start timer as OFF delay
After pressing F5 = Binary op and selecting the required function
at the second key level, STEP 5 generates the undefined long box
with the following inputs/outputs:
”Symbol” Operand for starting the timer function (the symbol
corresponding to the timer function is shown in the
table above).
TV
Input for inputting the timer value.
Operand type: KT, IW, DW ...
The time is a combination of the timer value and
the time base. The timer value represents the number of time periods for which the timer function is
active. The time base specifies the interval at
which the timer value is changed.
e.g. KT = n.i;
n = timer value: 0 ... 999;
i = time base: 0 = 0.01s, 1 = 0.1s, 2 = 1s, 3 = 10s.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3-111
3.3
Editor
Example
R
Reset input for the timer function. When this
operand changes to 1, the timer and Q are set to 0.
BI
Current timer value, binary coded.
DE
Current timer value, BCD coded.
Q
Output indicating that the timer is running (Q = 1)
or stopped or elapsed (Q = 0).
Timer number: T 0 ... T 255
Editing a timer function with OFF delay.
1. Open a segment with *** or F6 = Compl seg and then press
F5 = Binary op+ SHIFT F5 = SF.
STEP 5 displays the long box
?????????
3.3
?????????
?????????
I 20.0
KT 100.1
I 20.3
?????????
0! !T
TV BI
DE
R
Q
?????????
?????????
?????????
T 20
0! !T
TV BI
DE
R
Q
DW 20
DW 22
F 22.1
( )
2. Type in the timer number, in this case T 20 and press the
Return key.
3. Press F1 = NO contact as the operand to start the timer and
type in I 20.0 and press the Return key.
4. Type in the time KT 100.1 (10s) and press the Return key.
5. Press F1 = NO contact, type in the reset input I 20.3, and
press the Return key.
6. Enter the transfer of the timer value to the operands DW 20
and DW 22 and complete each input with the Return key.
7. Press F4 = –()– at output Q, type in F 22.1 and press the
Return key.
3-112
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
3.3.4
Editing Control System Flowcharts
Editor
STEP 5 block
in the program file
in the PLC
New Functions
C79000-G8576-C820-01
In the Control System Flowchart method of representation (CSF)
the control task is described by connecting function symbols.
Based on the circuit logic symbols complying with DIN 40700,
the block functions are displayed on the screen with operation
symbols (DIN 40719, DIN 19339).
You can program in the Control System Flowchart representation
in the following STEP 5 blocks:
– organization block OB
– program block PB
– sequence block SB
– function block FB
– extended function block FX.
STEP 5 stores the corresponding segment comments in the blocks
OBDO.nnn, PBDO.nnn etc. Segment titles are stored in the
comment blocks OC, PC etc.
It is advisable to enter and correct comments when editing a
block and not to write them directly in the documentation or
comment blocks.
Compared with previous STEP 5 versions, the following
functions are now available when editing in CSF:
1. The function key menu has been extended from 8 to 16
function keys and can be activated with the mouse.
2. Function blocks (FB, FX) can be created, however, with the
following restrictions :
– the first segment must be edited in STL
– no formal operands must be used
3. The following extended functions can be called with softkeys:
– conditional and unconditional block calls for OB, PB, SB,
DB, DX, FB, FX
– loading and transfer operations
– negated connector
– shift and rotate operations (only in FB, FX)
– conversion operations (only in FB, FX)
– digital logic operations (only in FB, FX)
3-113
3.3
Editor
Working with the
CSF Editor
Settings for editing → Object, Settings, Page 1 and 2 then
Program file:
Name of the currently selected program file.
Symbols file:
If you want to work with symbolic
operands, you must specify the symbols file,
select “symbols: yes” on page 2 and specify
the symbol length.
Mode:
”Online” if a PLC is connected and you
want to edit in the PLC.
Representation:
”CSF”
Comments:
”Yes” and the comment length (max. 40
characters) if you want to edit segment titles
and comments.
If you are editing existing blocks, you can select CSF with
SHIFT F5 = select CSF regardless of the set method of
representation.
3.3
Calling the Editor
3-114
After selecting the editor function “Edit STEP 5 block(s) in the
program file” or “in the PLC” the job box is displayed. Here, you
name the block and it is advisable to select the options “Update
XRF” and “Update seq. source file” if you are working with
symbolic operands.
After confirming your entries with OK, the Control System
Flowchart editor is called. A working field appears on the screen
(Figure 3-21) and the function key menu with the symbols for
entering contacts and processing CSF segments.
The editing field is divided into lines and columns in which you
enter CSF symbols using the function keys menu or the mouse. A
symbol itself takes up one column width. The identifiers of the
inputs and outputs before and after the symbol take up a further
column. As you build up your segment, you are supported
intensively by STEP 5. Connections and symbols of all types
(e.g. symbol inputs/outputs for counter or arithmetic functions)
are generated automatically and can be reached with the
automatic cursor control. STEP 5 rejects inconsistent
configurations.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Screen Layout
The screen is divided into 48 fields (8 columns and 6 horizontal
sections). The horizontal sections are 3 lines high. CSF symbols
are edited in the columns 2 to 7.
The Control System Flowchart can be a maximum of 2.5 times
the length of one screen. You can press SHIFT F8 = Help to
obtain an explanation of the function keys on the screen.
(1)
PB 3
-PROG 3
Segment 1
I 1.1
-INP 1
(2)
0000
Input 1.1
C:[email protected]
Segment title
LIB=12345
LEN=19
Edit
(3)
I
I
1.1
2.2
&
I
I
I
>=1
3.1
3.2
3.3
0
F 3.0
I 4.2
F 2.0
0
&
3.3
S
I 5.5
R
=
Q
Q 1.0
:BE
(23)
Message line
(24)
(25)
F Blocks
F
1
&
2 >=1
F
3
Shift
F
4
Convert
F
Compare F Seg com
F
5 Binaryop 6 Compl seg 7
Extras
Enter
F
Help
8
Cancel
Figure 3-21 Segment in Control System Flowchart (Example)
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-115
Editor
Table 3-4 Explanation of the Screen Lines (Figure 3-21)
3.3
Naming Operands
3-116
Line
Display
Explanation
(1)
PB3
–PROG3
C:[email protected]
LIB=12345
LEN=19
Block type and number
Symbolic block name
Drive and program file
Library number
Block length in words
(2)
Segment 1
Segment title
Edit
Segment number
Text with max. 32 characters
STEP 5 mode
(3)
Symbolic operands
Assignment “absolute operand” →
“symb. operand” → operand
comment, when the cursor is located
on an operand identifier
(4)...
(22)
Editing area
Input fields for logic operations, calls
and operands
(23)
Message line
STEP 5 messages or prompts (red or
on a black background)
(24)
(25)
Function keys
Key assignment for the currently
active functions
After you input a CSF symbol, the cursor jumps to the name field
(max. 8 characters) for the operand. If you have selected a
symbol length greater than 8 characters in the “Settings”, STEP 5
only displays the first 8 characters. If you use longer symbolic
operand names, make sure that they are unique within the first 8
characters.
Example: you have the following assignment:
Operand
Symbol
F 100.1
F 1.1
F 1.7
Myflag 100
Myflag 1.1
Myflag 1.7
Comment
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
In CSF, the selected symbolic operand names are all displayed or
printed as “Myflag1”.
There are two methods of naming operands, as follows:
1. The operand can be named immediately after selecting a
symbol (automatic cursor positioning),
or if you have exited the name field [?????], you can return to
it with the Return key.
2. Entering the operand names in the name fields of the
completed segment, guided by the long cursor.
Note
You can only exit a segment or block when all the names and
parameters have been input correctly (make sure the formats are
correct).
Reconfiguring a
Segment
If, while editing a segment its layout has become awkward (e.g.
as a result of repeated branches) you can redisplay the segment
by pressing the SHIFT F7 = Extras and F2 = New disp even if
the segment does not yet have all the required parameters. The
screen is then reconfigured and the display layout optimized.
Editing Symbolic
Operands
When you press F1 = Disp symb in the output mode, STEP 5
displays a list of operands in absolute and symbolic form for the
open segment. You can then edit this list. If you use longer
symbol names, make sure that the names are unique within the
first 8 characters. The symbolic operand names are reduced to 8
characters on the screen and when printing in LAD and CSF.
If you make changes, it is advisable to update the sequential
source file.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-117
3.3
Editor
Logic Operations
When you select “CSF” on page 2 of the “Settings” and “Edit
STEP 5 block(s) in ...”, STEP 5 opens the block selected in the
job box at segment 1. If you are working with a new block, this is
empty.
Using the function keys, you can now input the basic CSF
symbols for AND/OR operations on binary operands (Table 3-5).
The left-hand column of this table contains the operation for
processing the operands which you call in the edit mode using the
keystrokes shown.
Table 3-5 Logic operations in CSF (Control System Flowchart)
Operation
Function keys
Explanation
&
F1
AND operation
>=1
F2
OR operation
F3
Input
F4
Negated input
Binary op
F5
Call complex functions
#
F5 and F4
Connector
F5 and F5
Negated, connector
3.3
Editing, Modifying
and Deleting
Functions
When you input the first operator at the position marked by the
long cursor in the empty segment, a function block is created
with two input operands and one output. You can create a serial
chain of functions with a maximum of 5 AND/OR operators.
Modifying a
Segment
The number of input operands can be increased (see example):
– You can append by positioning the long cursor below the
lowest input of the long box.
– You can insert and position in a function block.
(limit = 2 1/2 times the screen height)
You can convert an input to a function block:
– Place the cursor on the corresponding operand identifier
and press F1 = & or F2 = >=1.
3-118
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
You invert an input by positioning the cursor on the operand
identifier and pressing F4 = Input or F5 = Negated input. The
current input then has the opposite effect to the previous one. You
can modify an edited function by positioning the cursor on the
function identifier in the box and overwriting it with the required
operation.
Deleting
C79000-G8576-C820-01
The following rules apply when deleting operands and functions
in segments ( DEL):
1. An input located under the long cursor is deleted. The
function block itself is reduced in length by one line (A).
2. If you delete a connected input, the function element before
this input is also removed. The input is then displayed as
non-connected (B).
3. A function element with two operand inputs is removed. The
remaining operand then occupies the free input of the next
block (C).
4. Function elements with two inputs (one of which is
connected) are removed from the segment after deleting the
operand. The function elements before the other input now
influence the next block directly.
3-119
3.3
Editor
Long cursor + DEL
I 10.0
&
I 10.1
<1
I 20.0
I 10.0
<1
I 20.0
I 20.1
I 10.0
&
I 10.1
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
<1
I 20.0
I 20.1
I 10.0
I 10.1
I 10.0
&
(A)
I 10.1
<1
&
I 10.1
3.3
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
I 10.0
(B)
&
I 10.1
<1
I 20.0
????????
(C)
<1
I 20.0
I 20.1
ÏÏÏÏ
&
I 20.0
I 20.1
<1
I 10.1
<1
(D)
I 20.0
I 20.1
Figure 3-22 Deleting Operands and Functions (Example)
If you want to mark a named input operand as undefined, it is
sufficient to type in a question mark as the first character of the
input field.
3-120
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Appending
Operands
Position the long cursor on the lower edge of the function
block and press F3.
An undefined operand is appended to the bottom of the block
(A).
Appending a
Function Block
Position the long cursor on the input operand to be replaced
by a function block and press F1 or F2.
STEP 5 places the selected function block with two inputs (if
necessary with implicit expanding) before the previous input. The
operand identifier is transferred to the upper input of the new
block (B).
Horizontal and vertical expanding, i.e. in this case moving the
segment to the right and down is performed implicitly.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Long cursor +
I 10.0
F1
<1
I 20.0
I 10.0
(A)
I 10.0
<1
3.3
I 20.0
????????
&
???????
<1
I 20.0
(B)
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-121
Editor
Inserting Operands
I 10.0
1. Position the long cursor on the input of the function block
above which you want to insert an input operand.
2. Press SHIFT F7 = Extras, F7 = Vert exp and then F3 =
Input.
&
I 10.1
I 10.0
ÏÏÏ
I 10.1
<1
I 20.0
Long cursor + F7
(Vert exp) +
&
&
????????
F1 ( & )
<1
I 20.0
A non-connected operand is inserted in the block. After you have
named the operand, you can invert the input with F4.
3.3
Inserting a Function
Block
I 10.0
1. Position the long cursor on the input of the box before which
you want to insert a new function.
2. Press SHIFT F7 = Extras, F6 = Hor exp and select the
required function, in this case F1 = &.
&
Long cursor +
I 20.0
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
I 10.1
<1
F6(Hor exp))
I 10.0
+ F3 (Input))
I 10.1
&
<1
????????
I 20.0
STEP 5 places the selected function block so that the upper input
is connected. The operand at the lower input is undefined.
3-122
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Editing Connectors
Connectors and negated connectors (Table 3-2) are intermediate
flags in binary logic operations. A connector is input in CSF like
a function block. If it follows the last block of a segment it is
handled and displayed as an output.
Inserting
You want the intermediate result written to a flag F20.1 at the
output of the AND block.
1. Position the cursor on the input of the next block and press
SHIFT F7 = Extras, F6 = Hor exp and F5 = Binary op and
F4 = # .
2. Name the connector, e.g. F 20.1 (A) and press the Return key.
Connector Stack
You obtain a connector stack by
Positioning the cursor on the connector and pressing F5 =
Binary op again and F4 = # or F5 = / and typing in the flag
name, in this case F 30.1.
With implicit expanding, the previously entered connector is
moved one line down.
Connector before
Output
I 10.0
Inputting connector F 20.1 before the output results in the
situation shown in (B).
&
I 10.1
<1
I 20.0
I 10.0
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Long cursor
+ F6
(Hor exp.)
+ F5
(Binary op) + F4
=
(#)
Q 10.1
&
I 10.1
/ F 30.1
# F 20.1
I 20.0
(A)
<1
=
Q10.1
=
F20.1
(B)
You can delete a connector by positioning the cursor on the
connector and pressing DEL.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-123
3.3
Editor
Complex
Functions
3.3
In CSF, the following rules apply to the complex functions listed
in Table 3-6:
1. All operations (1) to (10) in Table 3-6 are represented as “long
boxes” in which the operands are displayed on the left before
the processing and on the right the result of the processing.
STEP 5 enters the operation selected with the function keys in
the long box itself.
2. Combinations of several complex functions are possible in a
segment. Make sure, however, that the data types match up.
A combination of complex function elements with binary
function elements is only possible with the complex element
“comparator”. Parallel branches are not allowed.
3. Some function elements can be extended, i.e. the number of
inputs can be increased provided the operation allows.
4. The “shift/rotate” function (4) requires the shift parameter “n”
to be entered in the long box, i.e. the number of bits by which
the content of the operand is shifted left or right. The
maximum possible shift depends on the format of the operand
(16 or 32 bits).
5. With the functions “Math” and “Compare” you can specify a
different operand type in the long box. The type “fixed point
number = F” is the default.
Note
The type can only be changed once directly after calling the long
box.
3-124
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
In the editing mode, the following functions can be called with
SHIFT and function keys or F5:
(1)
Arithmetic operations
(2)
Block calls
(3)
Load and transfer operations
(4)
Shift and rotate word/double word operands
(5)
Binary operations
(6)
Conversion operations
(7)
Comparison between two operands
(8)
Digital logic operations
(9/10) Counter and timer operations
Table 3-6 Complex Functions in CSF
Operation
Keys (function keys)
Math.
ADD, SUB
MULT, DIV
SHIFT F1 and
(with FBs/FXs)
AND
OR
XOR
SHIFT F1
and
Blocks
JU FB, JC FB
DO FX, DOC FX
JU..., JC...
C DB, CX DX
SHIFT F2
and
(Shift)
L/T
SHIFT F3
and
SHIFT
(with FBs/FXs)
SLW, SLD
SRW
SSW, SSD
RLD, RRD
SHIFT F3
Convert
(with FBs/FXs)
DEF, CFW
DUF, CSW
DED, CSD
DUD
FDG, GFD
SHIFT F4
and
and
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Explanation
F1, F2
F3, F4
(1) Arithmetic operations:
Addition, subtraction
multiplication, division
F5
F6
F7
(8) Digital logic operations:
AND operation, words
OR operation, words
Exclusive OR operation, words
F1, SHIFT F1 F2,
SHIFT F2 F4,
SHIFT F4 F6,
SHIFT F6
(2) Call blocks as follows:
FB unconditional, FB conditional
FX unconditional, FX conditional
OB, PB, SB unconditional, conditional
DB, DX
F7
(3) Load and transfer operations
Load and transfer operand
F1, SHIFT F1 F2
F3, SHIFT F3
SHIFT F4, SHIFT
F5
F1, SHIFT F1 F2,
SHIFT F2 F3,
SHIFT F3 F4
F5, F6
3.3
(4) SHIFT and rotate operations
SHIFT word/double word left
SHIFT word right SHIFT word/double word with
sign right
Rotate left, right
(6) Convert operations
BCD->binary, form 1’s compl., 16 bit
Binary->BCD, form 2’s comp., 16 bit
BCD->binary, form 2’s compl., 32 bit
Binary->BCD, 32 bit
Fixp -> floatp, floatp -> fixp, 32 bit
3-125
Editor
Table 3-6 Complex Functions in CSF
Operation
Keys (function keys)
Compare
!=
><
>=
<=
>
<
SHIFT F5
Binary op
CD, CU
F5
and
Binary op
SP, SE
SD, SF
SS
F5
and
R/S
S/R
F5 and
and
F1, F2 F3,
F5 F4, F6
Explanation
(7) Comparator operations (between two
operands):
Compare for “equal to”, “not equal to”
Compare for greater than or equal to, less than or
equal to
Compare for “greater than”, “less than”
F1, F2
(9) Counter operations:
Counter value incremented, decremented by 1
SHIFT F1/F2
SHIFT F3/F5
SHIFT F4
(10) Timer operations:
Start timer as pulse, extended pulse
Start timer as ON/OFF delay
Start timer as stored on delay
F6
F7
(5) Binary latching operations:
Priority resetting flip-flop
Priority setting flip-flop
3.3
3-126
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Arithmetic
Operations
(1) in Table 3-6
The operators ADD, SUB, MULT and DIV combine two
operands in ACCU 1 and 2 to produce a result in ACCU 1.
Arithmetic operations can be cascaded with other complex
functions.
At the highest input:
– arithmetic operations
– shift operations
– conversion operations
– digital logic operations
At the output:
– arithmetic operations
– shift operations
– conversion operations
– comparator operations
– digital logic operations
The arithmetic operations correspond to the statements (STL):
– load operand 1;
– load operand 2;
– execute the required logic operation;
– transfer result to operand (ACCU 1).
Operand types : KF, DW, IW...
Examples
Editing an ADD operation for two fixed point numbers:
1. Press *** or F6 = Compl seg and then SHIFT F1 = Math.
2. Select the required operation, here F1 = ADD.
STEP 5 displays the long box with undefined inputs and outputs
and the default operand format “F”.
?????????
?????????
C79000-G8576-C820-01
+F
KF + 12345
?????????
DW 12
+F
DW 14
3-127
3.3
Editor
3. Confirm the operand format with the Return key.
4. Type in the 1st operand, in this case KF + 12345 and press the
Return key.
5. Type in the 2nd operand, in this case DW 12 and press the
Return key.
6. Name the operand to which the result will be transferred
(DW 14) and press the Return key.
The segment now appears as shown on the right-hand side of the
figure.
Inserting an Input
Position the long cursor between the two inputs and press
F3 = Input and name the input.
Long cursor + F3 (Input)
DW 10
3.3
DW 12
Appending an Input
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
DW 10
xF
xF
???????
DW 14
DW 12
DW 14
Position the long cursor at the bottom of the function box and
press F3 = Input and name the input.
DW 10
DW 12
DW 10
xF
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
xF
DW 12
DW 14
DW 14
???????
Long cursor + F3 (Input)
Inserting a complex
function at the input
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
DW 10
DW 12
Position the long cursor on the 1st input operand, select a
complex function, in this case SHIFT F1 = Math and
F1 = ADD and label the operand
DW 10
xF
DW 14
Long cursor + SHIFT F1 (Math)
+ F1 (ADD)
3-128
+F
xF
???????
DW 12
DW 14
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Inserting a Complex
Function at the
Output
DW 10
DW 12
Position the long cursor on the output operand, select a
complex function, in this case SHIFT F1 = Math and F1
= ADD and label the operand
xF
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
DW 14
DW 10
Example 1
???????
DW 14
(2) in Table 3-6
Using block calls in STEP 5, you can call further blocks in the
user program from any block allowing a structured program
sequence. A block call is programmed in CSF as a long box. Only
one block call per segment is allowed.
In an empty segment, you can enter a block call directly using the
softkeys.
Conditional program block call.
1. Press SHIFT F2 = Blocks and SHIFT F4 = JC.. in the empty
segment.
2. Type in the input operands, in this case I 10.1 and I 10.2.
Specify the destination block, in this case PB 24 in the right
input field and complete with the Return key.
?????????
&
?????????
I 10.1
I 10.2
C79000-G8576-C820-01
+F
DW 12
Long cursor + SHIFT F1 (Math)
+ F1 (ADD)
Block Calls
xF
JC
?????????
JC
PB 24
&
3-129
3.3
Editor
Example 2
Unconditional program block call
1. Press SHIFT F2 = Blocks and F4 = JU.. in the empty
segment.
2. Specify the destination block, in this case PB 24, in the right
input field and complete with the Return key.
JU
Example 3
3.3
JU
?????????
PB 24
Unconditional FB call in an empty segment
1. Press SHIFT F2 = Blocks and F1 = JU FB.
The editor displays the “roof” of the block with the cursor in the
labelling field.
2. Type in the name of the function block to be called, in this
case FB 10.
The function block with its formal operands is displayed.
3. Type in the name in absolute or symbolic form. Move to the
other fields using the Return key.
FB 10
FB 10
TEST
?????????
?????????
?????????
?????????
INP1 OUTP
INP2
INP2
COUN
TEST
?????????
I 1.0
I 1.2
T 32
C8
INP1 OUTP
Q 1.0
INP2
INP2
COUN
The segment then appears as shown on the right-hand side.
Loading and
Transfer
Operations
3-130
(3) in Table 3-6
The function is displayed as a “long box” with the operand to the
left and the result to the right. The function SHIFT F3 = Shift
and F7 = L/T correspond to the following STL statements:
– load operand (DW, DD, IW...),
– transfer to operand (DW, DD, IW...).
After generating the long box (see above) you simply enter the
operands displayed as [?????].
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Shift and Rotate
Operations
(4) in Table 3-6
Shift and rotate operations belong to the supplementary
operations (only FB, FX). A shift/rotate operation is displayed in
an empty segment as a long box with the operand in ACCU 1 to
the left before the shift operation and the result to the right.
They can be cascaded with other complex functions at the input
and output.
After pressing the softkeys SHIFT F3 = Shift and the required
function at the second key level, STEP 5 generates the
“undefined” long box in which you enter the required operation.
The character cursor flashes below the parameter “n”. Here, you
enter the number of bits by which the content of the operand will
be shifted.
The function corresponds to the STL statements:
– load operand
– shift/rotate operand by “n” bits
– transfer result to operand (ACCU 1).
Example
Shifting the input operand IW 12 seven bits to the right and
transferring to DW 12.
1. Press *** or F6 = Compl seg followed by SHIFT F3 =Shift.
2. Select the required operation, in this case F2 = SRW.
STEP 5 displays the long box (left).
?????????
SRW 0
????????? IW 12
SRW 7
DW 12
3. Position the cursor on the parameter “n” in the box, in this
case 0, and type in the number “7”.
4. Type in the input and output operands.
Note
It is not possible to change the parameter “n” later.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-131
3.3
Editor
Latching
Operations
3.3
(5) in Table 3-6
Using the latching functions, the RLO can be stored statically
outside the processor. You can specify how the latching function
works after pressing F5 = Binary op and then selecting either F6
“priority set” or F7 “priority reset” at the second key level.
STEP 5 enters the operands with priority at the top of the long
box.
The latching function is displayed as a box with 2 inputs and 1
output, S is the “set” input, R is the “reset” input and Q is the
output. Only one latching function can be inserted in a segment.
The latching function corresponds to the following statements
(STL):
– A (N)
1st input operand
– S (R)
Operand
– A
2nd input operand
– R (S)
Operand
– A (N)
Operand
– =
Operand (assignment)
Operand types: F m.n, Q m.n, D m.n ...
The latching function reacts in the following way to changes at
the single inputs depending on the function selected:
State at input
State at output Q
S
R
0
0
Old state retained
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1 with S/R flip flop
0 with R/S flip flop
After pressing F5 = Binary op and the required function key at
the second key level, STEP 5 generates an undefined long box at
the position of the long cursor in a CSF segment.
3-132
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Example
Editing a latching operation with “reset” priority.
1. Press *** or F6 = Compl seg and then F5 = Binary op and
F7 = S.
?????????
?????????
S
?????????
R Q
=
?????????
=
Q 14.0
M 1.0
I 2.1
S
I 2.2
R Q
2. Type in the operand ID for the memory location, in this case
F 1.0 and press the Return key.
3. If the input operands do not yet exist, type in the NO contacts
I 2.1 and I 2.2. Exit each input field with the Return key.
4. Type in the output for scanning the binary signal state, in this
case Q 14.0 and press the Return key. Following this, press
the Insert key.
Conversion
Operations
C79000-G8576-C820-01
(6) in Table 3-6
Conversion operations (BINARY ↔ BCD, 1’s/2’s complement)
belong to the supplementary operations (only FB, FX). A
conversion operation is displayed as a long box with the operand
in ACCU 1 to the left before the conversion and the result to the
right. They can be cascaded with other complex functions at the
input and output.
After pressing SHIFT F4 = Convert and selecting the required
function at the second key level, STEP 5 generates the long box
in which you can enter the operation.
This function corresponds to the statements (STL):
– load operand
– convert the operand
– transfer the result to the operand (ACCU 1)
Operand types: DW, DD, IW...
After generating the long box (see above) you must simply type
over the token operands ?????.
3-133
3.3
Editor
Comparator
Operations
3.3
(7) in Table 3-6
The comparator operations combine two digital operands in
ACCU 1 and ACCU 2 to produce a binary result in ACCU 1.
They can be cascaded with other complex functions at the input.
The function corresponds to the statements (STL):
– load operand 1
– load operand 2
– execute the selected comparison
– result of logic operation.
A comparison is represented in an empty segment as a long box
with the operands in ACCU 1 and 2 to the left and the result of
the comparison to the right.
After pressing SHIFT F5 = Compare and selecting the required
function at the second key level, STEP 5 generates the undefined
long box in which you can enter the selected operation.
The selected comparator operation (! =, ><, >=, >, <=, <) is
entered in the left-hand side of the long box and the format of the
operands to the right, as follows:
F = fixed point number (16 bits)
D = double word (32 bits)
G = floating point number (32 bits)
Note
The type can only be changed once directly after calling the long
box.
Example
3-134
Operation to compare two fixed point numbers:
1. Open a new segment with *** or F6 = Compl seg and then
press SHIFT F5 = Compare.
2. Select the required operation, in this case F2 = >< compare
for “not equal to”.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
STEP 5 displays the long box with token inputs/outputs and the
default operand format “F”.
?????????
><F
?????????
Q
KF + 100
><F
DW 34
Q
=
?????????
=
F 12.1
3. Confirm the operand format with the Return key.
4. Type in the first operand, in this case KF + 100, and press the
Return key.
5. Type in the second operand, in this case DW 34, and press the
Return key.
6. Identify the operand to which the result will be assigned, in
this case F 12.1, and press the Return key.
The segment then appears as shown above.
Digital Logic
Operations
C79000-G8576-C820-01
(8) in Table 3-6
Digital logic operations belong to the supplementary operations
(only FB, FX). They can be cascaded with other complex
functions such as arithmetic operations.
The operators AND, OR and XOR combine two digital operands
in ACCU 1 and ACCU 2 and the result is entered in ACCU 1.
The functions correspond to the statements:
– load operand 1 (DW, IW, FW...),
– load operand 2 (DW, IW, FW...),
– combine the operands as words (AW, OW, XOW),
– transfer the result to operand (DW, IW, FW...).
3-135
3.3
Editor
Example
AND operation of two operands in words.
1. Open a segment with *** or F6 = Compl seg and then press
SHIFT F1 = Math.
2. Select the required function, here F5 = AND.
STEP 5 displays the long box with the token inputs and outputs
and the selected format “AW”.
?????????
?????????
IW 124
AW
?????????
FW 10
AW
DW 16
3. Type in the first operation, in this case IW 124, and press the
Return key.
4. Type in the second operand, in this case FW 10 and press the
Return key.
5. Identify the operand to which the result will be transferred, in
this case DW 16 and press the Return key.
The segment then appears as shown on the right-hand side of the
figure.
3.3
3-136
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Counter
Operations
(9) in Table 3-6
A counter operation is displayed as a long box in the empty
segment. The counter operand is above the box. Depending on
your selection at the second key level, F1 = “count down”, F2 =
“count up”, the first input of the counter input is either a
decrementing counter CD or an incrementing counter CU and the
second input is the opposite of the first. This results from the rule
that the first input of a counter must always be “connected”.
After pressing F5 = Binary op and selecting the required function
at the second key level, STEP 5 generates the “undefined” long
box with the following inputs/outputs:
CD Decrement the counter value by one when the RLO
changes from 0 to 1 at this input (positive going edge).
CU Increment the counter value by one when the RLO
changes from 0 to 1 at this input.
S
3.3
Load the counter value from input CV when there is a
positive signal change (0 → 1) at the “set” input S.
CV Value to which the counter is set, decimal (BCD) coded
0 ... 999, operand type: KC, IW, FW, QW, DW.
R
Reset the counter to the value 0 when there is a 1 at this
input. The output Q is set to “0”.
BI
Current counter value in binary.
DE Current counter value in BCD.
Q
The output indicates whether the counter value is
zero = “0” or > zero: = “1”.
Counter operand:
Range of values:
C79000-G8576-C820-01
C 0 ... C 255
0 ... 999
3-137
Editor
Example
Editing a counter function “count up”.
1. Open a segment with *** or F6 = Compl seg and then press
F5 = Binary op and F2 = CU.
STEP 5 displays the long box with the undefined inputs/outputs.
?????????
?????????
?????????
?????????
?????????
CU
CD
S
CV BI
DE
?????????
R
Q
?????????
?????????
=
?????????
C 10
I 32.0
3.3
F 2.0
KC 255
I 32.1
CU
CD
S
CV BI
DE
R
Q
DW 64
DW 66
=
F 12.1
2. Type in the operand (C10) and press the Return key.
3. Type in the operand for CU, in this case I 32.0. Complete the
input with the Return key.
4. Skip the operation for CD by pressing the DEL key.
5. Type in the operand for setting the counter, in this case F 2.0.
Complete the input by pressing the Return key.
6. Type in the counter value, in this case KC 255, and press the
Return key.
7. Type in the reset input, in this case I 32.1, and press the
Return key.
8. Type in the transfer of the counter value to the operands
DW 64 and DW 66 and press the Return key.
9. Type in F 12.1 at the output and press the Return key.
3-138
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Timer Operations
(10) in Table 3-6
Using the timer operations, you can program timed program
sequences and monitoring functions. You select the required
timer function by pressing F5 and selecting the function at the
second key level with SHIFT F1 ... SHIFT F5. STEP 5 enters
the selected function in symbolic form at the start input of the
long box. The timer operand is above the box.
A timer function is started when the RLO at the start input
changes. With an OFF delay (SF) the RLO must change from 1 to
0, in all other cases from 0 to 1. The parameters at the start input
have the following meaning:
Symbol
Key
Meaning
1–-–
SHIFT F1 (SP)
Start timer as pulse
1–-V
SHIFT F2 (SE)
Start timer as extended pulse
1 ! – !0
SHIFT F3 (SD)
Start timer as ON delay
1 ! – !S
SHIFT F4 (SS)
Start timer as stored ON delay
0 ! – !T
SHIFT F5 (SF)
Start timer as OFF delay
3.3
After pressing F5 = Binary op and selecting the required function
at the second key level, STEP 5 generates the undefined long box
with the following inputs/outputs:
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
”Symbol”
TV
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Operand for starting the timer functions (the symbol corresponding to the timer functions is shown
in the table above).
Input for inputting the timer value.
Operand type: KT, IW, DW ...
The time is a combination of the timer value and
the time base. The timer value represents the
number of time periods for which the timer
function is active. The time base specifies the
interval at which the timer value is changed.
e.g. KT = n.i;
n = timer value: 0 ... 999;
i = time base: 0 = 0.01s, 1 = 0.1s, 2 = 1s, 3 = 10s.
3-139
Editor
Example
R
Reset input for the timer function. When this
operand changes to 1, the timer and Q are set to 0.
BI
Current timer value, binary coded.
DE
Current timer value, BCD coded.
Q
Output indicating that the timer is running (Q = 1)
or stopped or elapsed (Q = 0).
Timer number: T 0 ... T 255
Editing a timer function with OFF delay.
1. Open a segment with *** or F6 = Compl seg and then press
F5 = Binary op + SHIFT F5 = SF.
?????????
3.3
?????????
0! !T
?????????
TV BI
DE
?????????
R
I 20.0
T 20
0! !T
Q
KT 100.1
TV BI
DE
I 20.3
R
Q
?????????
?????????
=
?????????
DW 20
DW 22
=
F 22.1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Type in the timer number T 20 and press the Return key.
Type in I 20.0 to start the timer and press the Return key.
Type in the time KT 100.1 (10s) and press the Return key.
Type in the reset input I 20.3, and press the Return key.
Enter the transfer of the timer value to the operands DW 20
and DW 22 and complete each input with the Return key.
7. Type in F 22.1 at the output and press the Return key.
3-140
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
3.3.5
Editing Data Blocks
Data blocks contain fixed or variable data for the user program to
work with.
The block title and line comments are stored in the corresponding
comment block DC/DCX. STEP 5 stores a block comment in the
documentation block DBDO.nnn/DXDO.nnn.
Both block types are generated automatically when you enter the
edited DB/DX. They are not transferred to the PLC or to an
EPROM/EEPROM. Although it is possible to edit directly in
these blocks, it is advisable to input titles and comment texts in
the DB/DX since all the assignments can be recognized here.
After introducing you to the basics of editing a data block, the
individual functions of the editor are described separately.
Selecting the
Editor
Editor
STEP 5 block
in the program file
in the PLC
(1)
The job box is displayed in which you can make your
selections (see Figure 3-23). If you want to edit or
work on a data block, specify the block either in absolute
form (e.g. DB 15) or using a symbolic name.
If you want to search for a particular data word in one or more
data blocks, enter the block(s) in the block list in absolute
form (maximum 6 DBs) or enter one DB with a symbolic
name. You can then enter the number of the data word, e.g.
123, in (2).
If you press SHIFT F8 = Help, STEP 5 displays a list of
possible inputs.
If you want to work with an existing block, you can select this
using the → Block selection box. You call the block selection
box with F3 = Select.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-141
3.3
Editor
Output from Data
Word
(2) Here, you can type in a data word number. You exit the field
using the Return key or select a different field with the
mouse.
The data word number is searched for in all the blocks you
specified.
Edit STEP 5 data block(s)
Program file : C: XXXXXXST.S5D
Selection
Block :
[
]
Output from data word :
[ 0
(1)
]
(2)
3.3
< OK >
< F3=Select >
< ShiftF8=Help >
< ESC=Cancel >
Figure 3-23 Editing STEP 5 Data Block(s)
Selecting The
Editor and Search
Function
Editor
Data block
Search
in the program file
in the PLC
1.
The job box is displayed in which you can make your
selections (see figure below). If you want to edit or work on
a data block, specify the block either in absolute form (e.g.
DB 15) or using a symbolic name.
If you want to search for a particular data word in one or
more data blocks, enter the block(s) in the block list in
absolute form (maximum 6 DBs) or enter one DB with a
symbolic name.
If you press SHIFT F8 = Help, STEP 5 displays a list of
possible inputs.
If you want to work with an existing block, you can select
this using the → Block selection box. You call the block
selection box with F3 = Select.
3-142
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Output from Data
Word
2.
Here, you select a data block type or all data blocks and do
not make an entry in the block list.
3.
Here, you enter the data word number to be searched for.
Exit the field with the Return key or select a different field
using the mouse.
The data word number is searched for in all the blocks you
have specified.
Edit STEP 5 data block(s) with search
Program file : C: XXXXXXST.S5D
(1)
Selection
(X) Block list :
[
or all:
( ) DB ( )
DX ( ) all blocks
Output from data words :
[0
]
(2)
]
(3)
< OK >
< F3=select >
< ShiftF8=help >
< ESC=cancel >
Figure 3-24 Editing STEP 5 Data Blocks using the Search Function
The input fields of the DB editor
(1) DB field
This displays the block number (here:
DB 2) that you entered when you filled in the job box.
(2) Program file
This field displays the drive and the name of the program file (here:
drive C: with the program file [email protected]@ST.S5D).
(3) LIB field
In this field you can input a maximum 5-digit long DB library
number (number from 0 to 99999).
(4) LEN field
This field displays the block length in data words, including the
block header. The number after the slash is the length of the DB
preheader. This display is updated whenever you enter a complete
line.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-143
3.3
Editor
Figure 3-25 shows the editing field of the DB editor with the
softkeys of the basic menu and a displayed data block.
(1)
(2)
DB2
(6) (7)
1:
2:
3:
4:
6:
8:
9:
10 :
11 :
12 :
13 :
14 :
15 :
16 :
28 :
30 :
3.3
F
(5)
(3)
(4)
LIB=
C:[email protected]@ST.S5D
LEN= 37 / 22
(13)
(8) (9)
(10)
Data block title
(11) (12) Data word comment
KH = FFFF;
Hex number, upper limit
KF = - 32768;
Fixed point no., lower limit
KF = +32767;
Fixed point no, upper limit
KG = - 1469368 - 38;
C Floating point no, lower limit
KG = +1701412+39;
Floating point no, upper limit
KT = 001.0;
Timer value/time base, 0.1s
KT = 999.3;
Timer value/time base, 9990 s
KC = 000;
Counter value, lower limit
KC = 999;
Counter value, upper limit
KY = 000,001;
Byte or address of a DB
KY = 255,255;
Byte or address of a DB
KM = 00000000 00000000;
Bit pattern, lower limit value
KM = 11111111 11111111;
Bit pattern, upper limit value
KS = ’Text line with 24 chars”;
ASCII characters enclosed in ’ ’
S
= ’ENDE’;
ASCII characters enclosed in ’ ’
F
F
Lib no
1 Expand DC 2 Delete DC-
F Line back
3 Expand DF 4 Delete DF
F Line fwd
F Title
F Comment
F
5 KG test
6
7 Enter
8 Cancel
Help
Figure 3-25 Input field of the DB Editor
(5) Title field
Here, you can enter a maximum 32-character long title for the data
block.
(6) DW number
field
This displays the number of the data word (DW). If the format
involves several DWs, the number of the lowest DW is displayed.
You can jump to the last data word of the data block by selecting the
last DW number or a number higher than the last DW number.
(7) “:” field
Both at this point and in the format field you can insert or delete
lines using the function keys. If you delete a line, the whole line
including the comment is deleted. When you exit the line with the
cursor, all following DW numbers are updated.
3-144
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
(8) Repetition
factor field
With the repetition factor, you can reproduce 1 up to a maximum of
12 DWs with the same format. The repetition factor specifies how
often the marked block of data words will be entered in the DB. The
highest possible repetition factor is 255. All the data words up to and
including the cursor position are repeated. The following DW
numbers are updated automatically. Data word comments are not
reproduced, they remain in their old position.
Before executing a repetition factor, the DB editor checks whether
the number of DWs to be reproduced plus the existing DWs will
exceed the maximum number of 2043 DWs (without DB header). If
this is the case, STEP 5 displays the message :”Memory or internal
buffer full”. The function is then not executed.
(9) Format field
You input the DW format you require in this field. If the field is
already displaying a format, you can overwrite it. If a format cannot
be represented, the identifier “F” appears in the format error field. If
you convert a format that requires several DWs (KG), the next DW is
also converted. If several DWs can be represented by a single DW
(S, KS) only one DW will be converted.
(10) Editing area
Here, you input data in the current format. If non-interpretable data
occur when you change a format, this is indicated in the error field
by “F”.
(11) Format error
field
An “F” in this field indicates that an error occurred when interpreting
the DW in the specified format.
(12) Comment
display field
With data formats requiring several DWs (KS, S, KG), a comment
allocated to a DW that is not the first DW cannot be displayed on the
screen. A “C” indicates these “suppressed” comments.
(13) Comment
field
Here, you can input a data word comment, if required, for each data
word. This is a text up to a maximum of 32 characters long. After the
32nd character, the cursor jumps to the beginning of the comment
line again. You can exit the comment line by pressing the Return
key. You can only display “suppressed” comments by changing the
data format.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-145
3.3
Editor
The function keys of the basic menu
F
1 Expand DC
F Line back
5 KG test
3.3
3-146
F Lib no
2 Delete DC
F Title
6
F
3 Expand DF
F Line fwd
4 Delete DF
F Help
8 Cancel
F Comment
7 Enter
F1
= Expand DC
Expand the data word comment; i.e. all the
following comment fields are moved one line
down.
F2
= Delete DC
Delete a data word comment; i.e. all the
following comment fields are moved one line
up.
F3
= Expand DF
Expand a format; i.e. all the following format
fields are moved one line down.
F4
= Delete DF
Delete a format; i.e. all the following format
fields are moved one line up. In the last line
of a DB with the format “KG” this function is
only executed if you change the format to
KM.
F5
= KG test
Floating point test. The floating point number
in the data field is displayed in hexadecimal
form with its exponent (1 byte) and mantissa
(3 bytes). This can also be modified. Exit with
the Insert key.
F7
= Enter
The data block is stored in the preset program
file.
F8
= Cancel
End editing without storing.
SHIFT F2
= Lib no
Input the library number.
SHIFT F4
= Line fwd
Move down one line.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Structure of a Data
Block
Block Preheader
C79000-G8576-C820-01
SHIFT F5
= Line back
Move up one line.
SHIFT F6
= Title
Block title.
SHIFT F7
= Comment
Block comment.
SHIFT F8
= Help
Display explanation of the function keys.
A data block created with the DB editor is stored in the preset
program file (→ Project) and consists of the following parts:
1. Block preheader
2. Block header
3. Block body and if required
4. Comments
When you load the STEP 5 program in the PLC, only the block
header (2) and the block body (3) are transferred to the PLC
memory.
The block preheader contains the data formats of the data words
in the block body. The length of the preheader depends on the
number and order of data formats in the DB. A DVn is generated
for a DBn and a DVXn for a DXn. When you delete a DB or DX,
its block preheader is automatically deleted along with it.
If the block preheader does not exist when you transfer a data
block from the PLC memory or EPROM/EEPROM submodule to
the preset program file, the following message appears on the
screen: “Preheader for this block does not exist”, a line with
possible formats is displayed. Using this line, you can set the data
format you require.
3-147
3.3
Editor
Preheader
Header
Header
Body
Body
DC
DO
Program file
Block Header
3.3
PLC memory
The block header is always 5 data words long. The programmer
automatically enters the following information:
– Block start-up ID
– Block type (DB, DX)
– Block number (number between 0 and 255)
– Programmer ID
– Library number (number between 0 and 99999)
– Block length (including the length of the block header)
DW 0
DW 1
DW 2
DW 3
DW 4
DW 5
DW 6
Block identifier
Block type
Block number
PG-identifier
L i b r a r y n u m b e r
Block length with header (no. of words)
4
1
5
5
5
4
2
0
3
1
3
2
3
8
3
2
4
C
6
5
7
4
7
A
0110 0111
1000
0111
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Block header
5 data words
Block body
max. 2043 data words
DW 2042
3-148
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Block Body
The block body contains the data words in ascending order
starting with data word DW 0. Each data word takes up one word
(16 bits) in the memory. Your user program works with these data
words.
DBs created with the DB editor can contain up to 2043 DWs. On
the other hand, a data block generated in the user program can
contain a maximum of 4091 data words in the block body. The
maximum length of a block also depends on the memory capacity
of the PLC.
Editing Using
Block Comments
Block comments are texts with which you can add information to
data blocks. The maximum number of characters of all block
comments in a block is 16 K characters. Block comments are
stored in a documentation file (DOCFILE) as follows:
– The block and the documentation file are stored in the
preset program file. A maximum of 255 documentation
files can be stored in one program file under S5-DOS.
– Documentation files are not transferred to the PLC or to an
EPROM/EEPROM submodule.
– The number of the documentation file corresponds to the
block number, e.g. DBDO.015 belongs to DB 15.
– The documentation files are assigned to the corresponding
blocks and preceded by the identifier “#”:
DBn → #DBDO.nnn
DXn → #DXDO.nnn
Note
Use the printer control character $EJECT to achieve a form
feed. This string must be in upper case letters, otherwise STEP 5
does not recognize the command. If you only write the dollar
character, the segment comment after the dollar character is not
printed out.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-149
3.3
Editor
Ready to Start ?
You have selected “Comments: yes” in the settings (→ Project).
The basic menu of the DB editor is displayed on the screen. The
DB contains at least one data word.
How to Input
Comments
1. Press SHIFT F7 = Comment or press the COM key
twice.
STEP 5 opens the empty editing field for the block comment
or displays an existing text. To make sure that the editor can
assign the text to the data block, it automatically generates a
7-character string “$1 @”.
Do not delete or modify this string, otherwise STEP 5 can no
longer identify the block comment as belonging to the
particular data block.
2. Edit the text using the alphanumeric keyboard.
3. You can complete each line with the Return key.
STEP 5 marks the end of a line with a vertical arrow. If your
text covers more than one line, a line break is set
automatically.
3.3
Inserting Characters
With F1 = Insert/overwrite you can change the mode. The
selectable mode is always displayed.
1. Position the cursor on the position in the text where you want
to insert characters.
2. Press F1 = Insert and insert the text.
3. To exit the insert mode: press F8 = Return or the Insert key.
F
1 Insert
F
2 Delete
F
5
Insert l
F
6 Delete l
F
1 Overwrite
Deleting Characters
3-150
1.
2.
3.
4.
Position the cursor on the first character to be deleted.
Press F2 = Delete.
Position the cursor after the last character to be deleted.
Press F2 = Delete.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Completing a Block
Comment
Saving the Block
Comment
Press F8 = Return.
STEP 5 displays the data block to be edited on the screen. The
text input up to this point is retained. If you store the data block,
STEP 5 then stores the block comment.
Press the Insert key.
Inputting the Block
Title
The block is identified by the block title. A block title is a
maximum of 32 characters long. You can use both upper and
lower case letters.
The title is stored in the comment block belonging to the data
block. STEP 5 assigns this name automatically (DCn is assigned
to DBn). The comment block number is the same as the data
block number, e.g. DC 123 belongs to DB 123.
Ready to Start ?
You have selected “comments : yes”in the settings (→ Project).
This basic menu of the DB editor is displayed on the screen.
There is at least one data word entered in the DB.
How to Input the DB
Title
1. Press SHIFT F6 = Title or press the COM key.
The cursor jumps to the input field for the block title.
2. Type in the text or correct an existing text.
3. Press the Return key.
The title is buffered, but is only stored in the comment block
in the program file when you store the whole block.
Influencing the
Length of the
Block Preheader
The length of the block preheader depends on the number of data
formats and their order. If you enter data words with the same
format one after the other and avoid changing the data formats
too often you obtain a shorter block preheader.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-151
3.3
Editor
Example
Starting point
The data formats are mixed: DW0/1=KH, DW2/3=KF, DW4=KH
and DW5=KF. The block preheader is 10 data words long.
DB3
LEN= 11 / 10
0: KH= FFFF;
1: KH= 1A2B;
2: KF= + 12345;
3: KF= – 00099;
4: KH= 80F1;
5: KF= + 06787;
The data formats are grouped together: DW 0 to DW 2=KH, DW
3 to DW 5= KF. The block preheader is now 6 data words long.
DB3
LEN= 11 / 6
0: KH = FFFF;
1: KH = 1A2B;
2: KH = 80F1;
3: KF= – 00099;
4: KF= + 06787;
5: KF= + 12345;
When you output data blocks from the PLC, the block preheader
must exist in the program file, otherwise STEP 5 displays the
message “Preheader does not exist for this block”. In this case,
you must select one of the possible formats (KM, KH, KY...).
Inputting the
Library Number
The library number is a 5-digit number (0 to 99999) to identify
STEP 5 blocks.
Ready to Start ?
The block in which you want to input the library number is open.
The DB body must contain at least one DW.
How to Input the
Library Number
1. Press SHIFT F2 = Lib no.
The cursor is located in the displayed LIB field.
2. Type in the LIB no or modify the existing LIB no.
3. To exit the LIB field, press F7 = Enter or the Insert key.
If you want to exit the field without making an entry, press F8 =
Cancel or ESC.
3.3
3-152
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Changing Data
Formats
You can change data formats by positioning the cursor on the
format and overwriting it.
Example
You want to change the format in DW 1 to a bit pattern.
1: KH = FFFF;
1. Position the cursor on the format field.
2. Type in the characters KM.
Result:
1: KM = 11111111 11111111;
Inputting Data
Words
If the preset program file does not contain a DB with the DB
number you have selected, STEP 5 displays the message “Data
element does not exist”. You can then start to input data words. If
the DB already exists, it is displayed beginning at DW 0.
You can enter a maximum of 2043 data words in a data block
(body). If you use formats requiring several data words, STEP 5
displays the lowest data word.
Format
Limit value
lower
Meaning
upper
KH
0000
FFFF
Hexadecimal number
KF
–32768
+32767
Fixed point number
KG
–1469368–38
+1701412+39
Floating point number
KT
000.0
999.3
Time value with time
base
KC
000
999
Counter value
KY
A
000.000
255.255
Byte or address of a DB
KM
00000000.00000000
11111111.11111111
Bit pattern
KS
S
ASCII characters, max. 24 characters per line
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Text format
3-153
3.3
Editor
The following table shows the number of data words required for
the formats.
DWs occupied
Format
KH, KF, KT, KC, KY, KM
1
KG *)
2
KS, S
1 to 12
*) With some negative floating point numbers, rounding errors
can occur.
Ready to Start ?
The basic menu of the DB editor is displayed.
How to Input Data
Words
1. Type in the required data format in the format field.
STEP 5 automatically adds the equality sign.
2. Type in the data in the specified data format following the
equality sign.
STEP 5 automatically adds a semicolon, displays the next
editing line and repeats the data format you have selected in
this line.
The following examples explain how to input different data
formats.
Example 1
Hexadecimal numbers:
You want to input KH = 0000 in DW 0 and KH = FFFF in DW 1.
1. Type in the characters KH.
STEP 5 automatically adds the equality sign.
2. Type in the hexadecimal string 0000.
STEP 5 automatically completes the line and displays the next
line in the format “KH”.
3. Type in the hexadecimal string FFFF.
The cursor is now positioned on DW 2.
3.3
3-154
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Example 2
Example 3
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Floating point numbers
You want to enter the floating point number –0,1469368*10–38
in DW 2 and the number + 0,1701412*1039 in DW 4.
The cursor is located on DW 2.
0: KH = 0000;
1: KH = FFFF;
2: KH = ❚
1. Position the cursor on the format field.
2. Type in the character string KG.
3. Type in the numerical strings –1469368 –38 and +1701412
+39
Result:
1: KH = FFFF;
2: KG = –1469368–38;
4: KG = +1701412+39;
6: KG = ❚
ASCII characters
You want to input the characters text lines with 24 chars starting
from DW 6 with the format KS and S and END in DW 28.
The cursor is positioned on DW 6.
4: KG = +1701412+39;
6: KG = ❚
1. Position the cursor on the format field ( 6: ❚ )
2. Type in the characters KS.
3. Type in text lines with 24 chars, the cursor jumps to the next
line at DW 18.
4. Overwrite data format KS with S. Type in the characters
END.
The characters “END” are ASCII characters and are not
interpreted as the end of the block.
3-155
3.3
Editor
Result:
4: KG = +1701412+39;
6: KS = ‘text lines with 24 chars‘;
18: –S = ‘END’ ❚ ;
3.3
Storing the Block
Press F7 or the Insert key.
The data block is stored in the preset program file.
Inputting Data
Comments
Data word comments are texts that you can enter in each line of a
data format.
You can input data word comments in upper case and lower case
letters and they can be up to 32 characters long. Data word
comments are stored in the comment block belonging to the data
block. STEP 5 assigns the name of the comment block
automatically (DCn for DBn). The comment block number is the
same as the data block number, e.g. DC 123 belongs to DB 123.
Ready to Start ?
You have selected “comments: yes” in the settings (→ Project).
The basic menu of the DB editor is displayed on the screen. The
DB contains at least one data word.
How to Input Data
Word Comments
1.
Storing a Comment
The comment block is generated automatically when you first
store the data block with comments.
If the comment block already exists, STEP 5 displays the
message: “DCn already in destination file, overwrite?”
Press the Insert key to store the comment.
3-156
Position the cursor on the relevant data word line with
SHIFT and cursor right.
2. Type in a text with a maximum of 32 characters or correct
an existing text.
After the 32nd character, the cursor jumps to the start of the
comment field.
2. Press the Return key.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Reproducing the
DWs
Example
With this function you can reproduce a group of DWs (1 to 12
data words of one format). The repetition factor “n” specifies
how many times the marked data words are required in the DB.
You can select a number between 2 and 255 as the repetition
factor. When you reproduce a group of data words, you must take
into account the maximum data length in a DB (2043 words).
If there are too many data words for a DB, STEP 5 displays
“Memory or internal buffer full”. The function is not executed.
When you reproduce a group of data words, the original block is
included in the reproduced blocks. This means that if you specify
n repetitions of the group, on completion of the function, the
group exists n times. The DW numbers coming after the
reproduced groups are updated.
If you enter a one or two digit repetition factor, you must pad out
the number with blanks or type in the character “ < ” or exit the
field using the cursor right key. You then position the cursor in
the last format field to be reproduced. The function is executed
when you press the Return key.
You want data words 1 and 2 twice in the DB. The basic menu of
the DB editor is displayed on the screen.
Initial situation
Result
0:
1:
2:
3:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
KF = +00123;
KH = 8F1A;
KH = 4BBB;
KY = 001,255
KF = +00123;
KH = 8F1A;
KH = 4BBB;
KY = 8F1A
KH = 4BBB;
KY = 001,255;
1. Position the cursor after 1: ❚ with SHIFT and cursor left.
2. Type in the number 2.
3. Move the cursor to the right into the editing field and position
it on the number 8 either with < and the cursor right key
twice or the cursor right key four times or the space bar twice
and cursor right twice.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-157
3.3
Editor
4. Move the cursor down to the number 4 in DW 2.
5. To reproduce the data words, press the Return key.
3.3
To Cancel the
Function
Press ESC.
If you interrupt the repetition by starting a different operation, the
PG displays the message “first finish repetition factor!”. The
operation cannot be executed at this point, since the editor is in
the repeat mode; this must first be completed.
Testing Floating
Point Numbers
Floating point numbers are positive and negative fractional
numbers and are represented as an exponential number. You enter
the format KG at the PG for floating point numbers. Floating
point numbers always occupy a double word (32 bits) in the PLC
memory. The mantissa occupies 3 bytes and the exponent 1 byte.
If you press the function key F7 = KG test you can display
floating point numbers in hexadecimal format and modify them.
Ready to Start ?
The basic menu of the DB editor is displayed on the screen. The
DB contains at least one data word.
Example
Testing the floating point number 0,1234567 +12 in hexadecimal
format.
The floating point number is in data word 1.
1: KG = +1234567 +12
1. Position the cursor on the + of the mantissa.
2. Press F5 = KG test.
The number is now displayed in hexadecimal format beside the
floating point number, as follows
1: KG = + 1234567+ 12
25
72FA5F
Exponent
Mantissa.
3. To terminate the display, press ESC or Insert.
You can change the exponent and mantissa in the hexadecimal
format.
4. To enter your changes, press the Insert key.
5. To discard your changes, press ESC.
3-158
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Inserting a Line
Using various keys, you can insert or delete DWs and comment
lines in a DB.
Cursor on
Key
“:”
field
Format
field
Editing
area
Comment
field
Result
Expand
vertical
Line inserted, DW and
comment line moved one
line down from cursor
position.
F3
= Expand
DF
Data format inserted, data
format moved one line
down from cursor
position, comments not
moved.
F1
= Expand
DC
Comment line inserted,
DWs not moved,
comments moved one line
down from cursor
position.
Gray shading indicates that the function is possible at this cursor position.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-159
3.3
Editor
Deleting a Line
Cursor on
Key
“:”
field
Format
field
Editing
area
Comment
field
Result
Delete key
Data word and comment
line deleted, following
lines moved one line up.
F4
= Delete
DF
Data format deleted,
following data formats
moved one line up,
comments not moved.
F2
= Delete
DC
Comment deleted,
following comments
moved one line up.
Gray shading indicates that the function possible at this cursor position.
3.3
Note
If you use F3 = Expand DF or F4 = Delete DF, the content of
the data block can be changed when using the format KG owing
to rounding up/down errors.
3-160
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
3.3.6
Editing DB Screen Forms
DB screen forms are special data forms for the S5-135U and
S5-155U. The parameters you enter depend on the CPU in the
PLC. These DB screen forms belong to the particular PLC and do
not contain comments.
Editor
DB screen form
in the program file
in the PLC
DB 1
I/O assignment
DX 0
for the S5-135U
DX 0
for the S5-155U
This contains a list of the digital inputs and
outputs (I/Os with relative byte addresses
from 0 to 127), IPC flag inputs and outputs
for the S5-135U and the timer field length.
Defaults of certain system program functions
for the S5-135U, e.g. for processing the PLC
start-up in multiprocessor operation.
Defaults of some system program functions
for the S5-155U, e.g. cold restart, warm
restart, process interrupts etc.
Job Box
DB SCREEN FORMS: edit
blocks
PROEXAST.S5D
[DB 1
]
Program file:
Block
:
(X)
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
< OK >
DB 1
DX 0
DX 0
DX 0
DX 0
DX 0
(1
(2
DB sc form
I/O assignment
for S5 135U
for S5 135U CPU 928 R
for S5 155U CPU 946/947
for S5 155U CPU 948
for S5 155U CPU 948 R
<F3=select>
< SHIFT F8 = help>
< ESC = cancel>
Figure 3-26 DB Screen Forms: Edit Blocks
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-161
3.3
Editor
Block
DB1
I/O Assignment for
the S5-135U
3.3
1. Here, you enter the data block in absolute or symbolic form.
If you press SHIFT and F8 = Help the PG displays a list
of possible inputs.
You can call existing blocks using the block selection box by
pressing F3 = Select.
2. Here, you select the PLC for which the screen form is
intended.
In multiprocessor operation, each CPU must be assigned digital
inputs and outputs, IPC flags and the timer field length. The PG
displays a table on the screen in which you can enter these
assignments as decimal numbers. The numerical values are stored
consecutively in the DB.
Settings for the
Editing Session
Program file:
Mode:
Selecting the Editor
1. Select the menu editor.
2. Select the DB screen forms in the editor menu.
3. Choose whether you want to edit the block in the program file
or in the PLC.
4. Type in the block, e.g. DB 1.
5. Select “DB1, I/O assignment” in the selection box and enter
DB 1 as the block.
6. Enter your selections.
The PG displays the I/O assignment screen form below.
Name of your current program file.
”Online”, if a PLC is connected and you want
to edit in the PLC.
For more information about the settings refer to → Project.
DB 1
Digital inputs:
Digital outputs:
IPC flag inputs:
IPC flag outputs:
Timer field length:
I/O assignment
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
Figure 3-27 I/O Assignment Screen
3-162
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
The feasible and permissible numerical values depend on the
configuration of the programmable controller. Refer to the manual
of your particular programmable controller.
The cursor is in the first input field of the DB screen.
Inputting the Data
1. Position the cursor in the field in which you want to enter or
overwrite a value.
2. Type in the value in decimal.
After three digits, the cursor automatically jumps to the next
field. If you press the Return key, you jump to the next line.
To Insert a Line
Position the cursor in the line before which you want to insert a
line and press the expand vertical key.
To Delete a Line
Position the cursor in the line you want to delete and press the
delete segment key.
To Delete a Character
Press the DEL key or overwrite with blanks.
To Enter the Screen
Form
Press the enter key.
Example of a completed DB screen form for the S5-135U:
DB 1
Digital inputs:
Digital outputs:
IPC flag inputs:
IPC flag outputs:
Timer field length:
3.3
I/O assignment
,
,
,
, 0, 1, 2, 3, 120,121, ,
, 2, 3, 118,119,120,121,122, , 123,124,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, 126,127, ,
, 0, 1, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24,
,
,
,
,
,
,128,129,254,255, ,
, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 222, ,
, 16,
Figure 3-28 Example of a Completed DB Screen
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-163
Editor
DX 0 for the
S5-135U
DX 0 contains the system data for the S5-135U in the form of a
DB screen form for this PLC. How to complete the screen form is
described in the programming instructions for the PLC.
Settings for the
Editing Session
Program file:
Mode:
Selecting the Editor
1. Select the editor menu.
2. Select DB screen form in the editor menu.
3. Specify whether you want to edit the block in the program file
or in the PLC.
4. Type in the block e.g. DX0
5. Select “DX0 for S5-135U”.
6. Enter your selections with OK or the Return key.
3.3
Name of your current program file.
”Online”, if a PLC is connected and you want
to edit in the PLC.
For more information about the settings refer to → Project.
DX 0 - param. ass.
(S5 135U:
CPU928, R processor)
Restart after power up:
1
DX 0
( 1 = warm restart
2 = cold restart)
Synchronize multiprocessor restart
YES
Block transfer of IPC flags
NO
Addressing error monitoring
YES
Cycle time monitoring (X 10 MS)
15
(R-PROC.: 1 - 400
CPU 928: 1 - 600)
256
No. of timer cells
(R-PROC.:
0 - 128
CPU 928, -B:
Accuracy of float. point arithmetic
#24-Bit mantissa only in CPU928#
, -B:
16-BIT mantissa
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1
2
3 Select
4
5
6 Continue 7 Enter
0 - 256)
0 - 256)
F
8 Cancel
Figure 3-29 DX0 Screen for the S5-135U Page 1
3-164
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
F3 = Select
Display possible parameters at the cursor
position or
Input the parameter at the cursor position using
F3 = Input
the keyboard.
F6 = Continue Go to the next page or return to the previous
one.
F7 = Enter
Enter and save the data.
F8 = Cancel
Return to the previous menu.
The feasible and permissible numerical values depend on the
configuration of the programmable controller. Refer to the manual
for your particular programmable controller.
Values deviating from the basic setting are displayed red (or on a
black background) on the screen. The cursor is located in the first
input field of the DX 0 screen form.
3.3
DX 0 for S5-135U
Page 2:
DX0 - param. ass.
(S5 135U:
CPU 928B, CPU 928, CPU 922)
DX 0
System stop if event occurs and error OB does not exist:
Address. error (OB 25)
YES
Cycle error
(OB 26)
YES
Acknowl. error (OB 23, 24)
NO
Timer err.
(OB 33)
YES
Command code error (OB 27, 29, 30)
YES
Controller err. (OB 34)
YES
Runtime error (OB 19, 31, 32)
YES
Process int. servicing
LEVEL
triggered
Interruptability of user program at block bounds:
MODE 1
1 All interrupts at block bounds
2
: All interrupts at operation bounds
: Only process interrupts at operation bounds
3
:4 Only proc. and controller interrupts at op. bounds
: (X=10, . . . 17) Time int. from OB10 - OBX and controller/proc.
X
: ints. at op. bounds
#only possible with CPU 928, -B#
F
1
F
2
F
3 Select
F
4
F
5
F
F
6 Continue 7
Enter
F
8 Cancel
Figure 3-30 DX0 Screen for the S5-135U Page 2
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-165
Editor
3.3
Inputting the Data
1. Position the cursor in the field in which you want to change a
value.
2. Select the parameter with F3 = Select or if F3 = Input is
displayed, type in the parameter using the keyboard.
3. To call page 2 of the DB screen form, press F6 = Continue and
type in the parameters as on page 1.
4. To enter DX 1, press the Insert key or to cancel your input
press ESC.
DX 0 for the
S5-155U
DX 0 contains the system data for the S5-155U in the form of a
DB screen form for this PLC. How to complete the screen form is
described in the programming instructions for the PLC.
Settings for the
Editing Session
Program file:
Mode:
Selecting the Editor
1. Select the editor menu.
2. Select DB screen form in the editor menu.
3. Specify wether you want to edit the block in the program file or
in the PLC.
4. Type in the block e.g. DX 0
5. Select “DX 0 for S5-155U” in the selection box.
6. Enter your selections.
3-166
Name of your current program file.
”Online”, if a PLC is connected and you want
to edit in the PLC.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
The PG displays the DX 0 screen form shown below:
DX 0 - param. ass.
F
1
DX 0
(S5-155U CPU 946/947)
Mode
:
Restart after power up
:
150U
Warm restart procedure
:
1
Number of timer cells
:
Cycle time monitoring ( X 10 MS )
:
Synchronize multiprocessor restart
:
Block transfer of the IPC flags
:
256
( 0. . .256 )
20
( 1. . .255 )
F
2
1
( 1 = warm restart
2 = cold restart
3 = manual start )
F
3 Select
(1 = warm restart
2 = warm restart with memory)
YES
NO
F
4
F
5
F
F
6 Continue 7 Enter
F
8 Cancel
Figure 3-31 DX0 Screen for the S5-155U Page 1
F3 = Select
Displays possible parameters at the cursor
position or
F3 = Input
Input the parameter at the cursor position using
the keyboard.
F6 = Continue Goes to the next page or returns to the previous
one.
F7 = Enter
Enter and save the data.
F8 = Cancel
Return to the previous menu.
Values deviating from the basic setting are displayed red (on a
black background) on the screen. The permitted values depend on
the configuration of the programmable logic controller.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-167
3.3
Editor
DX 0 for S5-155U,
page 2:
DX 0 - param. ass.
(S5-155U CPU 946 / 947)
DX 0
Time int:
Time int. servicing
:
Basic
clock ( X 10 MS )
:Clock pulse proc.
:
YES
10
1
Priority :
1
( 1. .255
) 1, 2, 5, 10
( 1 = factor
2 = factor 1, 2, 4, 8 )
Hardware process int. (only in 155U mode) :
System interrupt A/B :
System interrupt E :
System interrupt F :
System interrupt G:
NO
NO
NO
NO
Priority
Priority
Priority
Priority
Process int. input byte 0 (only in 150U mode)
:
Process
YE
int.:
S
3.3
F
F
F
1
2
3
Select
:
:
:
:
2
2
2
2
Priority :
2
F
F
F
F
F
4
5
6 Continue 7
Enter
8 Cancel
Figure 3-32 DX0 Screen for the S5-155U Page 2
Inputting the Data
3-168
1. Position the cursor in the field in which you want to change a
value, e.g. Mode S5-155U or S5-150U.
2. Select the parameter with F3 = Select or if F3 = Input is
displayed, type in the parameter using the keyboard.
3. To call page 2 of the DB screen form, press F6 = Continue and
type in the parameters as on page 1.
4. To enter DX 1, press the Insert key or, to cancel your input,
press ESC.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
3.3.7
Parameter Assignment Software COM DB1
Introduction
Customer
Advantage of
Assigning
Parameters to DB1
with COM DB1
The COM DB1 parameterization software allows you to assign
parameters to CPUs of the low end and mid range. The time
required for successful parameterization is minimal.
Until now, it has only been possible to assign parameters to the
CPUs in plain text using DB1. Editing of DB1 in plain text was
done with the DB editor of the STEP 5 package.
COM DB1 can interpret and modify every DB1 with
parameterization data and provide it with comments.
The user need no longer take into account the rules for DB1
parameterization in the PLC manuals since COM DB1 already
knows these rules. The user is shown the CPU-specific
parameters on the screen. The arguments and the value ranges
of the arguments are available in special select boxes.
COM DB1 can detect input errors in DB1 and indicate these
errors in plain text. Errors in DB1 are detected at the latest
when transferring to the PLC or to the program file. This
excludes the possibility of setting wrong parameters with COM
DB1.
COM DB1 can be used to generate further data blocks required
for parameters (e.g. for send and receive mailboxes).
COM DB1 has online capability, i.e. a generated DB1 can be
transferred online to the CPU. In addition, a DB1 can be loaded
online from the CPU to the programmer.
A help text related to the current input can be called up on the
screen at any point during parameter assignment.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-169
3.3
Editor
Scope of Supply of
the COM DB1
Software Package
COM DB1 is supplied with STEP 5/ST, V6.6. It is in the directory
\STEP5\S5_COM.
COM DB1 files:
File name
s5pxcdbx.cmd
s5pdcdbx.dat
s5pecdbx.dat
s5pfcdbx.dat
s5picdbx.dat
s5pscdbx.dat
3.3.8
Contents
COM DB1 (command file)
Texts in German
Texts in English
Texts in French
Texts in Italian
Texts in Spanish
Performance Range of COM DB1
3.3
In this chapter, you will learn:
The functions provided by COM DB1 and the restrictions to be
observed
Which CPUs you can assign parameters with COM DB1.
What Functions does
COM DB1 Provide?
The COM DB1 parameterization software is a user-friendly aid for
parameterizing low-end and mid-range CPUs.
The functions offered by COM DB1 are described below. Some
functions can only be executed with the CPU online. These are
indicated specially in the text. All other functions can be used both
in online and offline mode. Online and offline mode is selected in
the Defaults screen form of COM DB1.
Generating a new DB1
You have just processed a DB1 with COM DB1 and you want to
delete it.Press F1 “New DB1” in the “Overview Table” screen
form. The DB1 just generated will be deleted and the parameter
settings of the default DB1 will appear in the Overview Table.
3-170
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Loading and, if required, modifying a DB1 that already
exists in the PLC
You can modify parameters in a DB1 that already exists in the PLC
by selecting “Online mode”, loading the DB1 from the PLC and
overwriting the relevant parameters.
Loading and, if required, modifying a DB1 that already
exist in a STEP 5 program file
You can modify parameters in a DB1 that already exists in a STEP
5 program file. Select the STEP 5 program file either in the
Defaults form or in the “Loading DB1” form. Then load the DB1
from the STEP 5 program file and overwrite the relevant
parameters.
Generating empty data blocks required for parameter
assignment
(e.g. send mailbox DB for SINEC L1 parameter assignment)
When you specify a DB in a parameter block, COM DB1 checks to
see if this DB already exists in the PLC (only possible in online
mode) or in a STEP 5 program file. If the DB exists but its length
is not sufficient for the parameter assignment, the length is
corrected.
Entering a comment on the entire DB1 or on the current
parameter block
You can enter a comment on the entire DB1 or on the individual
parameter blocks. A comment can consist of up to 80 characters
(including spaces).
Transferring a DB1 to the PLC
You can transfer a DB1 to the PLC if you have first selected
“Online mode”. If there is already a DB1 in the PLC, you will be
asked if it is to be overwritten.
Transferring a DB1 to a STEP 5 program file
You can transfer a DB1 to a STEP 5 program file. Specify the
STEP 5 program file either in the “Defaults” screen form or in the
“Transferring DB1” screen form.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-171
3.3
Editor
Outputting a DB1 to a printer
You can output DB1 parameters to a printer. All parameter
assignment forms and the “Overview table” form can be printed. If
you want to use a printer file and/or a footer file for your printout,
the printer file or footer file must already exist, i.e. it must already
have been generated with the STEP 5 package. You specify the
printer file or footer file in the “Defaults” screen form.
Outputting a DB1 to a file
You can output a DB1 to a file. This is necessary if you want to
print the DB1 on a printer that is not connected to the programmer.
You specify the output file in the “Defaults” screen form.If you
want to use a printer file and/or a footer file, the same conditions
apply as for direct output of DB1 to a printer. The same contents
are output to the file as are output direct to a printer
(! ”Outputting a DB1 to a printer”).
Deleting a parameter block
3.3
If you do not want to use parameter blocks, you can delete them in
the Overview Table of COM DB1.
Executing PLC functions if you first select “Online mode”:
– Compressing the PLC memory
– Switching the PLC from STOP to RUN, the DB1
parameters are updated in the CPU
– Switching the PLC from RUN to STOP
In addition, COM DB1 provides a range of Help functions to
make parameter assignment easier for you.
Incorrect parameter assignment is prevented since COM
DB1:
– Detects errors as parameters are entered
– Examines all inter-parameter dependencies within a DB1
– Checks that the value ranges of the arguments are not
violated
– Displays an error message in the event of an error and
forces you to correct the error (an incorrect DB1 cannot be
stored).
3-172
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
• COM DB1 can only process one DB1 at a time.
COM DB1 cannot check the interdependencies of parameters
between different PLCs (e.g. whether the same transmission
rate is set for all nodes in a SINEC L2 network).
Direct parameter assignment in the system data is not possible.
Only those CPU functions which could previously be assigned
parameters in DB1 can be assigned parameters with COM
DB1.
If a parameter block in the Overview Table of COM DB1
contains no parameters, the operating system of your PLC
automatically writes the available default parameters into the
system data.
Default parameters enclosed between comment characters (#)
(! representation of the default DB1 in the relevant PLC
manual) are not recognized by COM DB1 and will be lost. (If
the default parameters enclosed in comment characters (#) are
immediately in front of the DB1 end-of-text identifier “END”,
these characters will be interpreted as comments on the entire
DB1.).
The PLCs listed in Section 3.3.9 can be assigned parameters
with COM DB1. The following rules apply to mature PLCs, i.e.
same CPU/same PLC with new revision level:
COM DB1 works with the latest PLC revision level known to it,
i.e. in the case of a mature PLC, COM DB1 can only assign
parameters for the functions it was able to in the last revision level,
and it will not recognize any newly added parameters/parameter
blocks and/or modified value ranges.
Handling of the individual COM DB1 functions is described in
detail in the example of a complete DB1 parameter assignment at
the end of this section.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-173
3.3
Editor
3.3.9
Which PLCs can You Assign Parameters to with COM DB1?
Using COM DB1, you can assign parameters to all the programmable controllers/CPUs listed
in the table below:
Programmable controller / CPU
3.3
Can be assigned parameters with
COM DB1 from
order no. and version
S5-90U programmable controller
6ES5 090-8MA01
A01
S5-95U programmable controller::
♦ Basic unit
♦ with SINEC L2 interface
♦ with two serial interfaces
♦ with SINEC L2-DP interface
6ES5 095-8MA01
6ES5 095-8MB01
6ES5 095-8MC01
6ES5 095-8MD01
A01
A01
A01
A01
S5-100U programmable controller:
♦ CPU 103
6ES5 103-8MA03
A01
S5-115U programmable controller:
♦ CPU 941
♦ CPU 942
♦ CPU 943 with one serial interface
♦ CPU 943 with two serial interfaces *
♦ CPU 944 with one serial interface
and operating system module
♦ CPU 944 with two serial interfaces
and operating system module *
♦ CPU 945 with 256 Kbyte memory
and operating system module
♦ CPU 945 with 384 Kbyte memory
and operating system module
6ES5 941-7UB11
6ES5 942-7UB11
6ES5 943-7UB11
6ES5 943-7UB21
6ES5 944-7UB11
6ES5 816-1BB11/21
6ES5 944-7UB21
6ES5 816-1BB11/21
6ES5 945-7UA11
6ES5 816-5AA01
6ES5 945-7UA21
6ES5 816-5AA01
A01
A01
A01
A01
A01
A01
A01
A01
A01
A01
A01
A01
3-174
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Starting COM DB1
With STEP 5 version 6.6 and higher, COM DB1 can be started as
follows:
1. Start the S5-DOS/ST operating system (Stage VI).
2. Key on to the “Further SIMATIC S5 programs” start window:
[Change] [further ... ] < ↵ >
3. Make the directory in which you have stored COM DB1
(DR:\STEP5\S5_COM) your working directory.
4. Select the “COM DB1” program in the “Further SIMATIC S5
programs” select box.
5. Start loading COM DB1 with OK or the INSERT key.
The “Select Language” screen form (the COM DB1 start screen
form) appears on the programmer screen.
3.3.10
How Do You Operate COM DB1?
3.3
This Chapter shows you:
How to proceed when parameterizing with COM DB1 (general
operating concept)
The layout of the COM DB1 screen forms
How to make entries in the COM DB1 screen forms and the
rules to observe in doing so
The help functions and error messages provided by COM DB1.
Hierarchy of COM
DB1 Operator
Functions
COM DB1 is operated via screen forms organized into several
operator levels. The following applies for all operator levels of
COM DB1:
By pressing one of the function keys F1 to F7 you can execute
a COM DB1 function or change to a lower-level COM DB1
screen form.
You can exit every COM DB1 screen form with the F8
function key and return to the next higher screen form.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-175
Editor
The following diagram illstrates the operating concept when working with COM DB1.
Start screen form:
Select language
COM DB1
F5
F1
...
: In all screen forms
F8 takes you back to the
next higher screen form
F5
Defaults
1st operator level
F6
3.3
Overview table
2nd operator level
3rd operator level
Loading DB1
Transferring DB1
Printing DB1
F2
...
F4
F6
F7
Parameter field, e.g.CLP
PLC functions
Overview table SINEC L2
F6
SINEC L2 parameter field
4th operator level
Figure 3-33 Hierarchical Structure of COM DB1
3-176
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Operating Concept
when Assigning
Parameters to DB 1
with COM DB1
After starting COM DB1, the first COM DB1 screen form appears.
This is the “Select Language” screen form. Use the function keys
to select COM DB1 in the desired language.
1st Operator Level:
Defaults
After selecting the language, you reach the Defaults screen form.
This is where you establish the defaults required by COM DB1 to
execute its functions.
You must specify the following in the Defaults screen form:
– Function mode between COM DB1 and the CPU (online,
offline)
– Order number of the CPU
– Revision level of the PLC.
Entries in the other input fields of the Defaults screen form depend
on the functions you want to execute in the subsequent screen
forms. (If, for example, you want to store a DB1 in a program file,
you can enter the name of the program file (destination file) in the
“Program file:” input field provided for that purpose in the
Defaults screen form).
2nd Operator Level:
Overview Table
C79000-G8576-C820-01
When the defaults have been entered, you reach the “Overview
Table” screen form. The Overview Table contains all the parameter
blocks possible for the CPU type defined in the Defaults screen
form. The “Setting” appears beside each individual parameter
block (e.g. “Not parameterized”, “Parameterized (default)”, etc.).
You can decide the following in the “Overview Table” screen
form:
– If you want to load, transfer or print a DB1 that exists in the
PLC or in a program file (DB1 utility functions)
– If you want to modify or delete parameter blocks of a
loaded DB1
– If you want to generate a new DB1
– If you want to branch to a PLC function.
3-177
3.3
Editor
The first time you make the transition from the Defaults screen
form to the “Overview Table” screen form, you will be informed in
the message line as to whether there is a DB1 in a program file
and/or in the PLC. If you load an existing DB1, the Overview
Table will be updated.
3rd Operator Level:
DB1 Utility
Functions/Parameter
Block .../PLC
Functions
If you have selected a DB1 utility function (e.g. “Loading DB1”)
or a PLC function in the 2nd operator level, the relevant screen
form for executing the function appears then in the 3rd operator
level.
If you have selected a parameter block in the 2nd operator level,
you branch to the parameter assignment screen form in the 3rd
operator level. The parameter assignment screen form contains a
list of all the parameters belonging to the parameter block. Already
existing parameter assignment data (e.g. after loading a DB1)
appears in the relevant input fields of the parameter assignment
screen form. Some input fields without parameter assignment
contain default values.
SPECIAL CASE
3. 3rd operator level: SINEC L2 Overview table
One screen is not sufficient for listing all parameters of the
“SINEC L2” parameter block. In this case, the parameter block is
divided into logical subunits. After selecting this parameter block
in the “Overview Table” screen form, the system takes you to the
“SINEC L2 Overview Table” screen form containing the logical
subunits.
4th Operator Level:
SINEC L2 Parameter
Block
The fourth operator level only exists if the “SINEC L2 Overview
Table” screen form with the logical subunits appears in the 3rd
operator level of COM DB. Each subunit has its own parameter
assignment screen form. In the 4th operator level, “SINEC L2
Parameter Block”, the same entries can be made as in the 3rd
operator level “Parameter Block...”.
Layout of the COM
DB1 Screen Forms
All COM DB1 functions can be executed by entries in screen
forms. The COM DB1 screen forms all share the same basic
layout. They are divided into five areas. The example below of the
“Clock Parameters (CLP)” parameter assignment screen form
shows the divisions of COM DB1 screen forms.
3.3
3-178
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Header
Clock parameters (CLP)
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Comment line
_
Location of the status word:
Location of the clock data:
Corr. factor
Save clock time:
Input/output
area
No.:
No.:
Updating the clock during “STOP”:
Date/time:
Weekday:
Clock mode:
Date (dd mm yy):
Cl. time (hh mm ss):
Prompting:
Weekday:
Clock mode:
Dae (dd mm):
Cl. time (hh mm ss):
Set the operating hours counter (hhhhhh mm ss):
Enable the operating hours counter:
3.3
Message line
Menu
line
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1
2
3 Select
4
5
6 Store
7 Info
8 Return
Figure 3-34 Layout of the COM DB1 “Clock Parameters (CLP) Screen Form
Header
The headers of all COM DB1 screen forms are one line long and
separated from the rest of the screen form area by one line. It
indicates the contents of the COM DB1 screen form. The header
cannot be changed in any COM DB1 screen form.
Comment Line
Here you can enter a comment on the parameter block (in the
relevant parameter assignment screen form) or on the entire DB1
(in the “Overview Table” screen form). The comment line is one
line long and can contain up to 80 characters.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-179
Editor
3.3
Input/Output Area
The large middle area of the screen is the input area of the COM
DB1 screen forms. This area contains fixed texts and input fields,
depending on the operator level, in which parameters can be set.
Using the keyboard, you can enter the relevant and permissible
parameters for the selected function in these input fields and then
transfer them to a program file or the PLC.
In the same area, you can view the parameter assignment data of a
DB1 existing in a program file or in the PLC (output area). This is
also the area where COM DB1 displays select boxes, help
windows and warnings for supporting COM DB1 operation.
Message Line
COM DB1 uses the message line to inform you about current
processes, operator errors or faults. The first time you make the
transition from the Defaults screen form to the “Overview Table”
screen form, COM DB1 informs you in the message line as to
whether a DB1 exists in a program file and/or in the PLC.
Menu Line
The menu line (function keys F1 to F8) on the bottom edge of the
screen tells you which function key on the keyboard executes
which COM DB1 function. COM DB1 functions which are not
possible in offline mode (e.g. “Load from PLC”) are not supported
by the relevant function keys in offline mode.
Possible Entries in
COM DB1 Screen
Forms and Rules to
Observe
This Section shows you:
– How to make entries in the input fields
– How to enter comments in the comment line
– Points to remember when editing.
3-180
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
All inputs to the COM DB1 screen forms are cursor-oriented.
Making Entries in the
Input Fields
There are two ways of entering parameter values in the input fields
with cursor support:
S Entering the text character-by-character via the keyboard.
S Selecting the text from a select box belonging to the input
field (if available) (with F3 “Select”).
Note
The F6 “Store” key then stores the modified parameter
assignment data in DB1. The data is stored only if all parameter
assignment data of the block is free of errors. After the data is
stored, COM DB1 switches automatically to the “Overview
Table” screen form.
Example of : Entering a correction factor
character-by-character
1. Position the cursor on the “Correction factor:” input field
2. Enter the desired parameter via the keyboard (e.g. “9”).
3. Terminate the entry by pressing < ↵ > or <INSERT>. (Press
<ESC> to abort the text.)
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-181
3.3
Editor
Example of : Entering the day of the week via a select box
1. Position the cursor on the “Weekday:” input field.
2. Open the select box belonging to the input field by pressing F3
“Select”.
3. Position the cursor on the relevant text line in the select box.
4. Enter the selected weekday in the input field by pressing < >
or <INSERT>. The selected text appears in the input field.
(Press <ESC> to abort the entry.).→ Figure 3-35)
Clock parameters (CLP)
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
No.:
No.:
SUin:
Corr. factor:
Updating the clock
MO
Save clock time:
TU
WE
Date/time:
Clock mode:
THUhrzeit (hh mm
Date
(dd
mm
yy):
Weekday:
FR
Clock
mode:
Promting:
SAss):
Date (dd mm):
XXUhrzeit (hh mm
Weekday:
ss):
Set the operating hours counter (hhhhhh mm ss):
Location of the status word:
Location of the clock data:
3.3
_
Enable the operating hours counter:
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1
2
3 Select
4
5
6 Store
7 Info
8 Return
Figure 3-35 COM DB1 “Clock Parameters (CLP)” Screen Form: Selecting the
Weekday
3-182
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Entering Comments
With COM DB1, you can enter
Comments concerning the entire DB1 in the “Overview
Table” screen form and
Comments concerning each parameter block in the relevant
parameter assignment screen form.
You enter the comment in the comment line provided at the top
edge of the COM DB1 screen form. The comment can be up to 80
characters long (including spaces).
Example of : Entering a comment concerning the “Clock
Parameters (CLP)” parameter block
1. Press the <COM> comment key in the “Clock Parameters
(CLP)” parameter assignment form. The cursor will then jump
to the comment line.
2. Enter the comment via the keyboard (e.g. “Setting the prompter
interval of maintenance unit 1”).
3. Terminate the entry by pressing <<Logo3: 1>> or
<INSERT>. (Press <ESC> to exit the comment line without
changing the original contents.)
Note
A comment concerning a parameter block is stored together with
the parameter block (with F6 “Store”) in DB1.
Rules and Points to
Remember when
Making Entries in
COM DB1 Screen
Forms
C79000-G8576-C820-01
We have collected a few points to remember and rules for
parameterizing DB1 with COM DB1 under the “Note” heading
below.
3-183
3.3
Editor
Note
If you do not enter the revision level of the CPU in the Defaults
3.3
COM DB1 Help and
Error Handling
Concept
screen form, COM DB1 will access the parameter set (parameter
blocks, value ranges) of the highest revision level known to it. COM
DB1 enters the valid revision level in the relevant input field in the
Defaults screen form.
In the case of CPU 944 with two serial interfaces, you must
additionally specify the order number and the version of the
operating system module in the Defaults screen form.
When loading a DB1 generated with STEP 5, comments may be lost
if:
– the comment is longer than 80 characters
– the comment concerning the entire DB1 is not located
immediately in front of the “END” end-of-text identifier
– the comment concerning a parameter block is not located
immediately after the relevant block identifier. Parameter blocks
enclosed between comment characters (#) in the default DB1 will
also be lost.
If, before storing a parameter block, you delete a parameter to which
a default value has been assigned, the default value remains valid in
the PLC. The next time the parameter assignment screen form is
selected, the default value appears in the input field of the parameter.
COM DB1 supports you with an extensive help and error handling
concept in programming DB1. This Section gives you an overview
of the following:
All the help information which COM DB1 offers during
parameter assignment
All error messages which COM DB1 displays during
programming of DB1
Help Concept
3-184
The COM DB1 help concept is based closely on the STEP 5
concept.
You can request help texts on the screen depending on the selected
COM DB1 screen form and the current cursor position. COM DB1
provides three types of help:
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Message line: Notes and error messages in the message line
of the COM DB1 screen forms
Help screen: Help texts with explanations of the current COM
DB1 screen form and function key assignments
Info window: Help texts with information on the input fields
Message line: Notes and error messages in the message
line of COM DB1
COM DB1 informs you about the following in the message line of
the COM DB1 screen forms:
S COM DB1 operator errors (e.g. “Invalid entry”)
S Parameter assignment errors
S Currently active COM DB1 functions (e.g. “DB1 is being
loaded. Please wait...”)
S Existence of a DB1 on a program file and/or in the PLC when
changing from the Defaults screen form to the “Overview
Table” screen form.
Help screen forms: Help texts with explanations of the
current COM DB1 screen form and function key assignments
If you press the <HELP> key inside a COM DB1 screen form (!
Section 3.5), a help form appears on the screen with a short
explanation of the selected screen form and the current function
key assignments.
The old screen contents are deleted and the relevant help text is
displayed.
If one screen is not sufficient, you can scroll to the next page using
the <INSERT> or < ↵ > keys.
Press the <ESC> key to exit the help screen form. The old screen
contents are restored.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-185
3.3
Editor
Example:
Help screen form: Explanations of the current COM DB1 “Clock
Parameters (CLP)” screen form and function key assignments.
Clock Parameters (CLP)
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Parameter block for integral clock (CLP):
You can parameterize the integral clock for
– Clock and calendar functions )e.g. to configure a clock-time dependent
control)
– Prompt and alarm functions (e.g. to monitor the duration of a process)
– Operating hours counter (e.g. to monitor inspection intervals)
The memory space required is determined depending on the clock functions used. If
DBs are used, COM DB1 checks the PLC or relevant file after the transfer to find out
whether these DBs exist at all and have the required size. It generates these DBs if
necessary. The PLC also starts up if they do not exist!
F3
Opens select box with the permissible entries
F7
Provides information on the input field on which the cursor is positioned
F6
Transfers the changes
<ESC> or F8 Cancels the changes
<COM> or <-:-> Editing a comment concerning the entire parameter block
<ESC>
Closes the window
3.3
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1
2
3 Select
4
5
6 Store
7 Info
8 Return
Figure 3-36 Help Screen Form: Explanations of the Current COM DB1 “Clock Parameters” Screen
Form and Function Key Assignments
Info window: Help texts with information on the input
fields
You can request help information concerning the input fields of
COM DB1 by pressing function key F7 “Info” (if selectable) .
Depending on the cursor position, all possible and permissible
inputs are briefly described in an info window.
In contrast to the help screen forms, described above, for
explaining function key assignments, each info window only
overlaps part of the screen so the input field remains visible.
Only one info window can be opened at a time.
3-186
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
The info window must be closed before filling in the input field or
positioning the cursor on the next input field. Press the <ESC> key
to close the info window.
Example:
Info window: information about the “Weekday” input field of the
COM DB1 “Clock Parameters (CLP)” screen form.
Clock Parameters (CLP)
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Lage
Statuswortes:
_ No.:
Enter
thedes
abbreviation
for the weekday:
No.:
der Uhrendaten:
MoLage
- Monday,
Tu - Tuesday, We - Wednesday, Th - Thursday, Fr
- Friday,
Sa - Saturday, Su - Sunday
Korrekturfaktor:
Aktualisierung der Uhr im Stop:
If XX is entered, the clock continues with the current weekday.
Uhrzeit retten:
<ESC>: Closes the window
Datum/Uhrzeit:
Uhrzeitmodus:
Weekday:
Date (dd mm yy):
Cl time (hh mm ss):
Prompting:
Weekday:
Clock mode:
Date (dd mm):
3.3
Cl time (hh mm ss):
Set the operating hours counter (hhhhhh mm ss):
Enable the operating hours counter:
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1
2
3 Select
4
5
6 Store
7 Info
8 Return
Figure 3-37 Info Window: Information about the “Weekday” Input Field of the COM DB1 “Clock
Parameters (CLP)” Screen Form
Error Handling
Concept
C79000-G8576-C820-01
The COM DB1 error handling concept is based closely on the
STEP 5 error handling concept. COM DB1 can detect errors and
inform the user of them with the relevant messages on the screen.
COM DB1 reacts to the following errors:
Errors detected during loading or transferring of DB1
Errors during programming of DB1 (operator errors)
3-187
Editor
COM DB1 reacts to the above listed errors in following ways:
either
S With an error message. Error messages are displayed as in
STEP 5 in a shortened form in the message line on the screen
(e.g. “Invalid value range”).
S or with a warning (safety prompt). Warnings are displayed in a
plain-bordered window in the center of the screen (e.g.: “Do
you want to discard the parameter assignment?”). Safety
prompts must be acknowledged with <ESC> or answered
according to the prompt text with <ESC> for “No, or Abort” or
<↵> for “Yes”.
Errors detected during loading or transferring of DB1
When loading DB1 from a program file or the PLC, and during
transfer of DB1 to the program file or PLC, all parameters are
checked for:
– Value range violations
– Parameter dependencies within blocks
– Parameter dependencies between blocks
If COM DB1 detects an error ( e.g. “Gaps in input or output area
or multiple assignments”), it automatically calls the “Overview
Table” in which the parameter blocks concerned are labelled as
“errored”:
3.3
S In the “errored” block, the “genuine” parameter assignment
errors are marked with a “!” in front of the input field.
S The system enters “*” in the input field in those cases where
data for parameters in the “errored” block cannot be
“interpreted” (this can only occur in a DB1 which has been
programmed with the DB editor of the STEP 5 package).
Note
If you position the cursor on the erroneous (”!”) parameter in the
parameter assignment screen form, the relevant error message will
appear in the message line.
3-188
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Example: Marking erroneous parameters in the “Clock Parameters
(CLP)” block after loading DB1. DB1 has been generated with the
DB editor of the STEP 5 package.
1. error: “DY” was entered instead of “FY” for the position of the
status word. (Typing error, unexpected entry).
2. error: “AM” was entered instead of “PM” for the clock mode.
(Wrong value range).
Error:
Unexpected entry in DB1
Clock Parameters (CLP)
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
KKK
Location of the status word:
KK No.:
Location of the clock data:
FW No.:
1
1 Updating the clock during “STOP”:
Corr. factor:
YES
Save clock time: YES
Date/time:
Clock mode: ! AM
Weekday: FR Date (dd mm yy): 3 9 93 Cl. time (hh mm ss): !14 0 0
Clock mode: AM
Prompting:
Weekday: MO Date (dd mm):
Cl. time (hh mm ss): 9 10 0
6 9
Set the operating hours counter (hhhhhh mm ss):
Enable the operating hours counter:
Error:
displayed
by
COM DB1
Error in time or date entry
F
1
F
2
F
3 Select
F
4
F
5
F
6 Store
Error: Inconsistency in
parameter dependency
F
7 Info
F
8 Return
Figure 3-38 Display of Incorrect Parameters in the Parameter Assignment Screen Form
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-189
3.3
Editor
Errors during programming of DB1 (operator errors)
Impermissible user inputs are blocked by COM DB1 during
programming:
S The input texts are checked by COM DB1 after the entry has
been terminated with < ↵ >:
The user is informed of syntax errors or value range violations
with an error message e.g. “Invalid value range”). Erroneous
parameters are indicated by a “!” in front of the input field.
S When the parameter assignment data is stored in DB1 with F6
“Store”, additional parameter dependencies within the block
are checked:
The user is informed of “unfulfilled” parameter dependencies
with the warning “The parameter assignments cannot be stored
since they still contain errors”. After acknowledging with
<ESC>, the erroneous parameter settings found in this way are
indicated with a “!” in front of the input field.
3.3
Note
If you position the cursor on the erroneous (”!”) parameter in the
parameter assignment screen form, the relevant error message will
appear in the message line.
Note
Only after all parameters have been correctly entered can the
parameter block be stored with F6 “Store”.
3-190
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
3.3.11
Example of a Complete DB1 Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
Using a concrete example, this Chapter shows you how to proceed
when parameterizing with COM DB1. This chapter is concerned
with the handling of COM DB1 and not with the function to be
assigned parameters in DB1.
You will find an explanation of the function and its parameters in
the relevant PLC manual. You should read the example below and
transfer the principle to your specific application.
The table below contains:
– All the steps required to assign parameters to a PLC;
– All the screen forms in which these steps are executed. (We
have included the S5-95U with integral SINEC L2 interface
specially for our example).
The individual steps will appear as subtitles in this Chapter.
3.3
Table 3-7 Overview of Procedure for Assigning Parameters to a PLC with COM DB1
Steps to be Executed in the Following
Order and...
Screen Forms Required
1. Install COM DB1
2. Start COM DB1
3. Select language
“Select Language” screen form
4. Enter defaults
“Defaults” screen form
5. Switch PLC from RUN to STOP
“PLC Functions” screen form
6. Load Default DB1 from PLC;
Enter comment concerning DB1;
Select parameter block
“Loading DB1” screen form
7. Enter comment concerning parameter
block
“SINEC L2 Overview Table” screen form
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-191
Editor
Table 3-7 Overview of Procedure for Assigning Parameters to a PLC with COM DB1
Steps to be Executed in the Following
Order and...
8. Edit parameters
Screen Forms Required
”Basic Parameters” screen form
”Standard Connection” screen form
9. Output DB1 to printer
”Printing DB1” screen form
10. Transfer DB1 to PLC
”Transferring DB1” screen form
11. Save DB1 to STEP 5 program file
”Transferring DB1” screen form
12. Switch PLC from STOP to RUN
”PLC Functions” screen form
3.3
3-192
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Description of example task:
An S5-95U with integral SINEC L2 interface is to be assigned
parameters. The S5-95U is to communicate with another PLC via
the standard connection.
The standard connection is assigned parameters with COM DB1 as
described below.
(The parameters and their arguments are taken from the DB1
parameter assignment example for the standard connection in the
“SINEC L2 Interface of the S5-95U Programmable Controller”
Manual.)
Prerequisites for the example:
An S5-95U with SINEC L2 interface (Order No.: 6ES5
095-8MB12, Version 01).
A PG 7XX programmer plugged into the programmer port of
the S5-95U.
The bus connector must not be plugged into the SINEC L2
interface.
The S5-95U must be in RUN.
You have generated a program file “AG95L2ST.S5E” with the
STEP 5 package.
You have generated a printer file or footer file with the STEP 5
package.
Selecting the
Language
C79000-G8576-C820-01
After starting COM DB1, the “Select Language” screen form
appears. Use keys F1 to F5 to select the language in which COM
DB1 is to appear on the screen.
3-193
3.3
Editor
Press F2 “English”. (You can exit COM DB1 by pressing F8
“Return” or the <ESC> key.)
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
COM DB1
Version x.y
3.3
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1 deutsch 2 english 3 francais 4 espanol 5 italiano 6
7
8 Return
Figure 3-39 COM DB1 “Select Language” Screen Form
Defining Defaults
3-194
You define the defaults for parameter assignment with COM DB1
in the “Defaults” screen form as described below.
Defining the operating mode between COM DB1 and the CPU:
After selecting the Defaults screen form, the cursor is positioned at
the “Online/Offline:” input field.
1. Press F3 “Select” to open the select box belonging to the
“Online/Offline:” input field.
2. Press < ↵ > or <INSERT> to enter “Online” in the input field.
“Online” appears in the input field.
3. Press < ↵ > or <INSERT> to position the cursor on the next
input field.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Defining the order number:
1. To define the order number, proceed exactly as you did for
“Defining the operating mode between COM DB1 and the
CPU”. (You can position the cursor on either the line
”095-8MB22” or “095-8MB02” in the select box.)
Defining the PLC revision level:
2. Enter PLC revision level “01” via the keyboard and terminate
the entry by pressing <<Logo3: 1>> or <INSERT>. (You can
abort the entry with <ESC>, i.e. the input field will be empty
again.)
When you have entered all defaults, the screen form will look like
this:
Defaults
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
3.3
Online
Online/Offline:
MLFB:
6ES5 095-8MB12
PLC rev. level:
01
Drive:
Program file:
@@@@@@ST.S5D
Drive:
Printer file:
@@@@@@DR.INI
Drive:
Footer file:
@@@@@@F1.INI
Drive:
Output file:
@@@@@@LS.INI
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1
2
3 Select
4
5
6 Store
7 Info
8 Return
Figure 3-40 COM DB1 “Defaults” Screen Form
3. Store the entries by pressing F6 “Store”. The “Overview
Table” screen form appears.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-195
Editor
Switching the PLC
from RUN to STOP
COM DB1 knows the possible parameter blocks and parameter
settings in the default DB1 for the PLC entered in the “Defaults”
screen form.
COM DB1 generates the following screen form for the S5-95U:
Overview table
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Settings
Permissible parameter blocks
3.3
Onboard - Interrupt
Onboard - counter
(OBI)
(OBC)
Parameterized (default)
Parameterized (default)
Onboard - analog inputs
SINEC L1
(OBA)
(SL1)
Parameterized (default)
Not parameterized
Timer function block
Clock parameters
System-dependent parameters
SINEC L2
Error return
(TFB)
(CLP)
(SDP)
(SL2)
(ERT)
Parameterized (default)
Not parameterized
Parameterized (default)
Not parameterized
Not parameterized
F
1
F
New
DB1
2
F
Load
DB1
F
3 Transfer 4
DB1
F
Print
DB1
F
F
F
5 Delete 6 Select 7 PLC
8 Return
Block
Block
Function
Figure 3-41 COM DB1 “Overview Table” Screen Form
3-196
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
You can change the operating mode of the PLC in the “PLC
Functions” screen form:
1. Press F7 “PLC function” for this purpose.
2. Change the operating mode by pressing F2 “Run ! Stop”. The
PLC is now in STOP.
PLC functions
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
3.3
F
F
F
F
F
F
1Compress 2 Run –> 3 Stop –> 4
PLC
Stop
Run
F
F
5
6
7
8 Return
Figure 3-42 COM DB1 “PLC Functions” Screen Form
3. Press F8 “Return” to return to the “Overview Table” screen
form.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-197
Editor
Loading the Default
DB1 from the PLC;
Entering Comments
for DB1; Selecting the
Parameter Block
The DB1 in the PLC is to be loaded into COM DB1 and modified.
Loading DB1 from the PLC:
1. Press F2 “Load DB1” in the “Overview Table” screen form
(! Figure 3-41). The “Loading DB1” screen form appears as
shown below:
Loading DB 1
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
3.3
Drive:
Program file:
F
1
F
ST.S5D
F
F
F
F
Load 2 Load 3 Select 4
from FD from PLC
F
5
6
7
F
Info
8 Return
Figure 3-43 COM DB1 “Overview Table” Screen Form
2. Press F2 “Load from PLC”.
When loading is completed the parameter settings of DB1 in
the PLC will be displayed in the Overview Table. Since you
have not yet set any parameters in DB1 of the PLC, the default
DB1 will be displayed (! Figure 3-44).
3-198
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Entering a Comment for DB1:
1. If you want to enter a comment, press the <COM> key. The
cursor will now be in the comment line of the “Overview
Table” screen form.
2. Enter the comment, consisting of up to 80 characters; for our
example: “Parameterization of SINEC L2 interface (standard
connection only)”
(! Figure 3-44).
3. Press either < ↵ > or <INSERT>. The cursor then appears in
the first line of the “Permissible parameter blocks”.
Selecting the parameter block:
1. To select the parameter block, position the cursor on the
parameter block “SINEC L2” (cursor control ! Section 3.5).
Overview table
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
3.3
Parameterization of SINEC L2 interface (standard connection only)
Settings
Permissible parameter blocks
Onboard - interrupt
Onboard - counter
(OBI)
(OBC)
Parameterized (default)
Parameterized (default)
Onboard - analog inputs
SINEC L1
(OBA)
(SL1)
Parameterized (default)
Not parameterized
Timer function block
Clock parameters
System-dependent parameters
SINEC L2
Error return
(TFB)
(CLP)
(SDP)
(SL2)
(ERT)
Parameterized (default)
Not parameterized
Parameterized (default)
Not parameterized
Not parameterized
F
F
F
1
2
3 Transfer 4
DB1
New
DB1
Load
DB1
F
F
Print
DB1
F
F
F
5 Delete 6 Select 7 PLC
8 Return
block
block
Function
Figure 3-44 COM DB1 “Overview Table” Screen Form
2. Press either <↵ > or <INSERT>. The “Overview table SINEC
L2” screen form appears on the screen.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-199
Editor
Entering Comments
Concerning the
Parameter Block
You can enter a comment concerning the SINEC L2 parameter
block in the “Overview table SINEC L2” screen form.
1. Press <COM>. The cursor is now in the comment line.
2. Enter the comment consisting of up 80 characters.; for our
example: “Parameterization of standard connection between
station 2 and station 1”.
3. Press either <↵ > or <INSERT>. The cursor then appears in
the line “Basic parameters”.
Overview table SINEC L2
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Parameterization of standard connection between station 2 and station 1
Settings
Permissible parameter blocks
3.3
Basic parameters
Standard connection
Not parameterized
Not parameterized
PLC to PLC connection
Cyclic I/O master
Not parameterized
Not parameterized
Cyclic I/O slave
FMA services
Layer 2 services
Not parameterized
Not parameterized
Not parameterized
F
F
1 neuer
DB!
2
F
F
F
F
F
F
8 Return
DB1 3 DB1 4 DB1 5 Delete 6 Select 7 AGLaden
Uebertr
Drucken
block
block
Funktion
Figure 3-45 COM DB1 “Overview Table SINEC L2” Screen Form
3-200
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Editing Parameters
In the “Overview table SINEC L2” screen form, you can select the
SINEC L2 functions you want to assign parameters to.
Note
You must always define the basic parameters as the first step since
these apply to all SINEC L2 functions. Only after this can you
define the parameters for the special SINEC L2 functions.
Editing Basic
Parameters
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Selecting “Basic parameters”:
1. After selection of the “Overview Table” screen form, the cursor
is positioned at the “Basic parameters” line.
2. Press either F6 “Store”, <↵ > or <INSERT>. The “Basic
parameters” screen form appears (! Figure 3-46).
Defining the station number:
After selecting the “Basic parameters” screen form, the cursor is
positioned at the “Station number:” input field.
1. Enter “2” via the keyboard.
2. Store the entry by pressing <↵ > or <INSERT>. The cursor is
now at the next input field. (you can abort the entry with
<ESC>, i.e. the input field will be empty again.)
Defining station status:
1. Press F3 “Select” to open the select box belonging to the
“Station status:” input field.
2. The cursor is at the “ACTIV(E)” line of the select box.
3. Enter “ACTIV(E)” in the input field by pressing <↵ > or
<INSERT>.
4. Position the cursor on the next input field by pressing <↵ > or
<INSERT>.
3-201
3.3
Editor
5. Enter all further arguments of the basic parameters as described
above:
– Either direct via the keyboard (you can call up a display of
the value range of the arguments via F7 “Info”) or
– Using the select box.
Please see the screen form in 3-46 for the parameter arguments.
When you have entered all basic parameter arguments, the screen
form appears as shown below:
SINEC L2 basic parameters
3.3
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Own station number
z
Own station status
ACTIVE
Baud rate:
500
Highest station address on bus:
10
Target rotation time:
5120
Setup time:
0
Slot time:
400
Shortest delay time:
12
Longest delay time:
360
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1
2
3 Select
4
5
6 Store
7 Info
8 Return
Figure 3-46 COM DB1 “SINEC L2 Basic Parameters” Screen Form
6. Press F6 “Store”. The basic parameters are stored in DB1 and
the “Overview table SINEC L2” screen form appears
(! Figure 3-45). “Parameterized” appears in the “Basic
parameters” line in the screen form.
3-202
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
(Press <ESC> or F8 “Return” to abort the entry. The
“Overview table SINEC L2” screen form then appears in its
original form.)
Editing Parameters
for Standard
Connection
Select “Standard connection”:
The cursor is in the “Overview table SINEC L2” (! Figure 3-45)
screen form at the “Standard connection” line.
1. Press either F6 “Store”, <↵ > or <INSERT>. The “SINEC L2
Standard Connection” screen form appears.
2. Enter all parameter arguments as described for the basic
parameters either directly at the keyboard or using the select
box.
Please see the screen form in Figure 3-45 for the parameter
arguments.
When you have entered all the arguments, the screen form appears
as shown below:
SINEC L2 standard connection
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Own station address 2
/ Stations active
Location of the receive mailbox:
DB
No. :
9
Location of the receive coordination byte:
FY
No. :
61
Location of the send mailbox:
DB
No. :
8
Location of the send coordination byte:
FY
No. :
60
DW-No.:
0
DW-No.:
0
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1
2
3 Select
4
5
6 Store
7 Info
8 Return
Figure 3-47 COM DB1 “Standard Connection” Screen Form
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-203
3.3
Editor
3. Press F6 “Store”. The parameters are stored in DB1 and the
“Overview table SINEC L2” screen form appears (! Figure
3-45). “Parameterized” appears in the “Standard connection”
line in the screen form.
(Press <ESC> or F8 “Return” to abort the entry. The
“Overview table SINEC L2” screen form then appears in its
original form.)
The parameter assignment of example DB1 is now complete.
You want to print the DB1 you have just generated.
1. Press F8 “Return” twice to return to the “Overview table”
screen form.
The “Overview table” screen form has changed; the SINEC L2
parameter block is displayed as having parameters assigned:
Outputting DB1 to
the Printer
3.3
Overview table
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Parameterization of SINEC L2 interface (standard connection only)
Permissible parameter blocks
Onboard interrupt
Onboard counter
(OBI)
(OBC)
Parameterized (default)
Parameterized (default)
Onboard analog inputs
SINEC L1
Timer function block
Clock parameters
System-dependent parameters
SINEC L2
Error return
(OBA)
(SL1)
(TFB)
(CLP)
(SDP)
(SL2)
(ERT)
Parameterized (default)
Not parameterized
Parameterized (default)
Not parameterized
Parameterized (default)
Parameterized
Not parameterized
F
1
Settings
F
New
DB1
2
F
Load
DB1
F
3 Transfer 4
DB1
F
Print
DB1
F
F
F
5 Delete 6 Select 7 PLC
8 Return
block
block
function
Figure 3-48 COM DB1 “Overview Table” Screen Form
2. Press F4 “Print DB1”.
3-204
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
The “Printing DB1” screen form appears as shown below:
Printing DB1
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
3.3
F
F
F
1
Print 2 Print
printer
on FD
3
F
F
F
F
F
8 Return
DB1 4 DB1 5 Block 6 Block 7 AGUebertr
Drucken Loeschen Anwahl Funktion
Figure 3-49 COM DB1 “Printing DB1” Screen Form
3. Press F1 “Print printer”..
This prints the “Overview table” screen form, the “Overview
table SINEC L2” screen form and all parameter assignment
forms of the SINEC L2 block. The number of the page
currently being printed is displayed in the message line.
When printing has been completed, the “Overview table” screen
form automatically appears.
(If DB1 has not been printed, you will receive a relevant message.)
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-205
Editor
Transferring DB1 to
the PLC
The DB1 you have just generated will be transferred to the PLC.
1. Press F3 “Transfer DB1” in the “Overview table” screen form
(! Figure 3-48).
The “Transferring DB1” screen form appears as shown below:
Transferring DB 1
3.3
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Drive:
Program file:
F
F
ST.S5D
F
F
F
F
1 Transfer 2 Transfer 3 Select 4
to FD
to PLC
F
5
6
7
F
Info
8 Return
Figure 3-50 COM DB1 “Transferring DB1” Screen Form
2. Press F2 “Transfer to PLC”. The message line now informs
you that DB1 is being transferred. The DB1 in the PLC is
simultaneously overwritten.
When transfer of DB1 is complete, the “Overview Table” screen
form automatically appears. (If there are errors in DB1, you will
get the relevant message and DB1 will not be transferred. The
erroneous parameter block will be indicated in the Overview
screen form.
3-206
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Saving DB1 to a
STEP 5 Program File
The DB1 you have just transferred to the PLC should be saved/archived to a STEP 5 program file (or diskette). For this purpose,
you must specify the STEP 5 program file to which DB1 is to be
stored in the “Transferring DB1” screen form. It was a condition
for our example that you had already generated the STEP 5 program file “AG95L2ST.S5E” with the STEP 5 package.
1. Press F3 “Transfer DB1” in the “Overview table” screen form
(! Figure 3-48). The “Transferring DB1” screen form appears.
2. nter the STEP 5 program file and the drive (! Figure 3-51).
Transferring DB 1
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
3.3
Drive:
Program file:
C
AG95L2ST.S5D
F
F
F
F
1 Transfer 2 Transfer 3 Select 4
to FD
to PLC
F
5
F
6
F
7
Info
F
8 Return
Figure 3-51 COM DB1 “Transferring DB1” Screen Form
3. Press F1 “Transfer to FD”. The message line then informs you
that DB1 is being transferred.
When transfer of DB1 is complete, the “Overview table” screen
form automatically appears.
(If there are errors in DB1, you will get the relevant message and
DB1 will not be transferred. The incorrect parameter block will be
indicated in the Overview screen form.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-207
Editor
Switching the PLC
from STOP to RUN
You can change the operating mode of the PLC in the “PLC functions” screen form.
1. Press F7 “PLC functions” in the “Overview table” screen form
(! Figure 3-48). The “PLC functions” screen form appears.
2. Change the operating mode by pressing F3 “Stop ! Run”. You
will be asked if the parameter settings in the PLC are to be
updated.
3. To acknowledge, press <↵ > or <INSERT>. The parameter
settings will be transferred to the operating system of the PLC.
(You can abort updating in the PLC with <ESC> or F8
“Return”.)
The parameter settings in the PLC have been updated and the PLC
is in RUN.
PLC functions
3.3
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
F
F
F
F
1Compress 2 Run –> 3 Stop –> 4
PLC
Stop
Run
F
5
F
6
F
7
F
8 Return
Figure 3-52 COM DB1 “PLC Functions” Screen Form
4. Exit COM DB1 by pressing F8 “Return” 4 times.
3-208
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
3.3.12
Editing the Assignment List
Editor
Assignment list
C79000-G8576-C820-01
With symbolic programming, you can specify a string of
alphanumeric characters, e.g. BUTTON-ON instead of an
absolute operand, e.g. I 1.1. Before you can program with
symbolic operands, you must create a list of assignments between
the absolute and symbolic operands using the STEP 5 symbolic
editor. While making these assignments, you can also write an
operand comment for each operand.
You can select the length of the symbolic operands and operand
comments (→ Project, Settings), as follows:
– symbolic operand: 8 to 24 characters (8 default),
– comment:max.
40 characters (40 default).
These settings are valid for all your work with the assignment
list. You can increase the length easily later. You can, however,
only decrease the length to that of the longest comment in the file
(first delete ?????Z?.INI).
The assignments and modifications to the assignments are made
in the sequential source file. After editing, this file is converted to
the symbols file (*Z0.INI) when you store the source file.
You must enter the name of the symbols file in the settings. This
name is then automatically used for the sequential source file.
If you select the assignment list submenu, the editor for the
sequential source file (*Z0.SEQ) is called immediately.
STEP 5 then displays an (empty) assignment list with columns
for the following:
– absolute operands,
– symbolic operands,
– operand comments and
– → additional comments, beginning with a semicolon.
To create the assignment list, follow the procedure outlined
below.
1. You edit the assignment list as the sequential source file
(extension *Z0.SEQ).
3-209
3.3
Editor
2. The sequential source file is translated into the symbols file
(three files with the extensions Zx.INI, x = 0, 1, 2) when you
store the symbols file. If errors occurred during the
conversion, STEP 5 stores the errors in an error file (extension
*ZF.INI). You can display or print out this error list with the
functions 〈→ Management, Assignment lists, Output error
list).
If you have assigned texts to the function keys for editing the
assignment list (→ Programmable function keys) the file
*ZT.INI is also created.
Sequential source file
Symbols file
[email protected]@Z0.INI
[email protected]@Z0.SEQ
convert
[email protected]@Z1.INI
[email protected]@Z2.INI
3.3
[email protected]@ZT.SEQ
File for programmed
function keys
Error during
conversion
[email protected]@ZF.INI
Error file
3. The stored symbols file is used to translate the user program
into machine code and for the output.
3-210
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Permitted Operand
Types
The following table lists all the operand types to which you can
assign a symbolic name in the assignment list.
Table 3-8 Overview of the Permitted Operand Types
Operand
Explanation
Operand
Explanation
C
Counter
IW
Input word
D
Bit in data word
OB
Organization block
DB
Data block
OW
Word in ext. I/Os
DD
Data double word
OY
Byte in ext. I/Os
DL
Data word, left byte
PB
Program block
DR
Data word, right byte
PW
Peripheral word
DW
Data word
PY
Peripheral byte
DX
Extended data block
Q
Output
F
Flag
QB
Output byte
FB
Function block
QD
Output double word
FD
Flag double word
QW
Output word
FW
Flag word
S
Extended flag
FX
Extended function block
SB
Sequence flag
FY
Flag byte
SD
Ext. flag double word
I
Input
SW
Extended flag word
IB
Input byte
SY
Extended flag byte
ID
Input double word
T
Timer
3.3
Note
Variables blocks (VB) can also be assigned a symbolic name.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-211
Editor
Screen layout
The lines and areas of the editing field have the following
significance:
Seq. File
(1) Drive and name of the sequential source file (assignment
list). The name is preset with the name of the symbols file
selected in the settings.
Line
(2) Number of the line in which the cursor is located.
Mode
(3) Mode display, can be switched over between insert and
overwrite mode with SHIFT F5 = Mode.
139 Kb
(4) Available or required memory space.
(1)
Seq. file:
Line:
C:EXAMP1Z0.SEQ
Operand
3.3
(2)
Symbol
1
(3)
- Insert mode -
(4)
139Kb
Comment
(5)
(6)
F Text 1
F Text 2
F Text 3
F Text 4
F Mode
F Page fwd F Page back F Help
1 Mark
2 Recall
3 Cut out
4 Find
5 Replace
6 Enter
7 Save
8 Cancel
Figure 3-53 Screen Layout with Lines and Areas of the Editing Field
3-212
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Editing Area
(5) This area is divided into three columns:
– Operand
Column for entering the absolute operands.
This column width cannot be changed.
– Symbol;
Column for entering the symbolic operands,
The column width depends on the setting you made in
Object\Setting\Page2.
– Comment;
Column for entering the operand comments.
The column width depends on the setting in page 2.
Function Keys
(6) Function key menu for calling editing functions (keys marked
with ”*” call further key levels). The keys have the following
effects:
C79000-G8576-C820-01
F1*
= Mark
Stores a selected text (line, text field or text you
have typed in) in the buffer from where you can
copy the text to any part of the assignment list
using F2* = Recall. Stores texts in memory that
have been typed in and can be called using the
function keys SHIFT F1 = Text 1 to SHIFT F4 =
Text 4.
F2*
= Recall
Fetches a text buffered with F1*= Mark and
copies it at the cursor position.
F3 *
= Cut out
Deletes the line containing the cursor or deletes a
selected passage of text. The deleted text is
written to the buffer and allows text to be
transferred using F2* = Copy. A text you put in
the buffer previously is lost.
F4 *
= Find
Find operands, lines, text passages or strings or
go to the beginning or end of the assignment list.
If you enter a search key, the text string will only
be found if it is an exact match including upper
and lower case letters.
3-213
3.3
Editor
3.3
3-214
F5 *
= Replace
Replaces character strings (maximum 20
characters including blanks) with another
character string. The search key must be identical
to the string to be replaced including upper and
lower case characters.
F6
= Enter
Complete the editing session and store the
sequential source file. The conversion to the
symbols files is started automatically.
F7
= Save
Save the source file without conversion, e.g. if
you want to take a break. You can resume work
with the assignment list immediately.
F8
= Cancel
Cancel the editing session without storing the
sequential source file.
SHIFT F1
= Text 1
Output text 1 with programmed function key.
SHIFT F2
= Text 2
Output text 2 with programmed function key.
SHIFT F3
= Text 3
Output text 3 with programmed function key.
SHIFT F4
= Text 4
Output text 4 with programmed function key.
SHIFT F5
= Mode
Select the editing mode: insert or overwrite.
SHIFT F6
= Page fwd
Page one screen down.
SHIFT F7
= Page
back
Page one screen up.
SHIFT F8
= Help
Display the function key assignment.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Creating the
Assignment List
1. Type in the character string for the absolute operand,
e.g. I 1.1.
2. Position the cursor in the symbols column using the mouse or
TAB.
3. Type in the character string for the symbol without preceding
it with a hyphen, e.g. SIGNAL 1.
In the assignment list itself, you do not enter the hyphen before
the symbolic operand. The column width corresponds to the
symbol length you selected in Object\Settings\page1. If you do
not make an entry in the symbols column (the symbols field is
empty) STEP 5 displays the prompt:
”Accept absolute operand as symbol?”
Yes
No
Operand Comments
C79000-G8576-C820-01
The character string of the absolute operand is used as
the symbolic operand in the symbols file. In the
sequential source file, this field remains empty. The
symbolic operand is only entered in the sequential
source file following a conversion (→ Management, →
INI > SEQ).
The absolute operand is not used as the symbolic
operand, the field remains empty.
If you want to add an explanatory text to the symbolic operands,
a maximum 40 character wide comment column is available. The
operand comment can also be input if you have selected
”comments: no” in the settings (→ Project). The operand
comments (upper and/or lower case letters) are not separated, but
are also stored in the symbols file.
1. Position the cursor in the comments column with the mouse
or TAB.
2. Type in the character string for the operand comment, e.g.
example of a comment.
3. Exit the line with the mouse or press the Return key.
3-215
3.3
Editor
Form Feed
If your assignment list is long, you can divide it into pages by
entering a control character. To do this,
type in ”.PA” in the ”operand” field beginning in the first
column.
You cannot make any further entries in this line.
When you call up and output the sequential source file, this
control character produces a form feed in the printout. The
control character is not entered in the symbols file (*Z0.INI).
3.3
Complete Editing
1. Press F6 = Enter.
The sequential source file is stored and translated into the
symbols file. If no errors occur, STEP 5 displays the message ”n
lines processed, no errors found”.
(n = number of lines).
2. Click on OK or press the Return key.
STEP 5 exits the editor and returns to the menu.
Errors when Editing
If one error occurs during the translation, STEP 5 displays the
message ”error found in line n. Absolute parameter does not
match OPID”. (OPID = operand identifier).The editor remains
active, the incorrect line is displayed as the first line on the
screen. After you have eliminated the error in the sequential
source file, you can start a new translation by storing.
If several errors occur, STEP 5 displays the message ”n lines
processed, n errors found”. ”Display error list?”:
Yes:
the error list is displayed
No:
you exit the editor
STEP 5 records the error in the *ZF.INI file.
3-216
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
You can output this error list with the management function
→ Assignment lists, Output error list.
Seq. file:
Line:
C:EXAMP1Z0.SEQ
Operand
Symbol
12
- Insert mode -
139Kb
Comment
I 1.0
Signal
Example of comment
IW 124
IWORD124
Input word 124
Q 1.0
OUTP. 1.0
Output 1.0
QB 122
QBYTE122
Output byte 122
QD 100
QD-100
Output double word 100
F 1.0
FLAG. 10
Flag 10
S4095.7
S-FLAG
New flag 4095.7
; An additional comment begins with a semi-colon.
; The comment length is the sum of the columns:
; Operand + symbol + comment + spaces between
SW 64
S-F 64
New flag, flag word 64
C 6
COUNT 6
Counter 6
3.3
F Text 1
F Text 2
F Text 3
F Text 4
F Mode
F Page fwd F Page back F
1 Mark
2 Recall
3 Cut out
4 Find
5 Replace
6 Save
7 Enter
Help
8 Cancel
Figure 3-54 Example of the Assignment List in the Sequential Source File
Editing Support
STEP 5 provides editing functions when you create the
assignment list and they can be activated using the softkey menu.
The individual functions are described below.
F1 = Mark
C79000-G8576-C820-01
F Text 1
1 Mark
F Text 2
2 Recall
F Text 3
3 Cut out
F
1
F
2
F
F
F
3 Field sta 4Field end 5
Line
Text
F Text 4
4 Find
F Mode
5 Replace
File
F Page fwd
6 Fct keys
3-217
Editor
With this key, you can write selected lines, character strings and
whole fields of lines to a buffer, from where you can fetch it
again when it is required (copy). You can also transfer text fields
to a different sequential source file.
F1
= Line
Buffer the line containing the cursor so that it can be
copied elsewhere.
F2
= Text
Buffer a text you have typed in (max. 40 characters) for
copying.
F3
= Field sta
Mark the start of a field of lines (including the line in
which the cursor is located).
Note on the repetition factor
The field start character @ is set until the field is marked.
3.3
F4
= Field end
Mark the end of a field of lines (including the line in
which the cursor is located).
This field can also be transferred to another sequential
source file, → F5 = File
F5
= File
Store the marked field in a different sequential source file.
This file does not need to exist first.
F6
= Fct keys
You can assign texts you have typed in (max. 40
characters) to four function keys so that you can call up
regularly recurring strings during the editing session (→
Programmable function keys).
F
1
Text 1
Mark
F Text 2
2 Recall
F Text 3
3 Cut out
F Text 4
4 Find
F Mode
5 Replace
F
1
Line
F
2
F
3
F
4
F
5
F2 = Recall
3-218
Text
Field
File
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
A line, text you have typed in or a field of lines is inserted before
the line in which the cursor is located, i.e. copied from the buffer.
You can specify a repetition factor if you wish to copy the content
of the buffer several times. You can also insert a different
sequential source file in the assignment list you are working on.
Note on the repetition factor
The cursor cannot be positioned on the input field for the
repetition factor, it only jumps to this field after a number has
been entered in the repetition factor line.
F1
= Line
The marked line or a line written to the buffer with the
delete function is inserted before the line in which the
cursor is located.
The text you have typed in and marked is inserted before
the line in which the cursor is located.
The marked field of lines or a previously deleted field is
inserted before the line marked by the cursor.
The marked field of lines is transferred (copied) to a
different sequential source file whose name you must
specify. The file must already exist, and its previous
contents will be overwritten.
F2
= Text
F3
= Field
F5
= File
Note
If you accidentally overwrite a file, you can recreate the original
sequential source file by generating the source file from the
symbols file using → Management, Convert INI > SEQ. The
conversion, however, ignores comments and control characters.
F3 = Cut out
C79000-G8576-C820-01
F Text 1
1 Mark
F Text 2
2 Recall
F Text 3
3 Cut out
F
1
F
2
F
F
3 Field sta 4Field end
Line
F Text 4
4 Find
F Mode
5 Replace
F
5
3-219
3.3
Editor
With this function you can delete a line or field. The deleted line
or field is written to the buffer. If you have already buffered a
field or line this is overwritten. You can then copy the content of
the buffer elsewhere → F2 = Recall.
F1 = Line
Delete the line containing the cursor. The line is
written to the buffer.
Mark the start of a field.
F3 = Field sta
Note
The field start character @ is set until the field is marked.
F4 = Field end
3.3
Mark the end of a field. As soon as you press this key
or click on it with the mouse, the block is deleted and
written to the buffer.
F4 = Find
F
1
F
1
Text 1
Mark
Text +
F Text 2
2 Recall
F Text 3
3 Cut out
F
4
F
2
F
3 Operand+
F
4 Operand –
F
5
F Page fwd
6 To start
F Page back
7
End
Text –
Text 4
Find
F Mode
5 Replace
Line
The cursor is moved to a specified line or to the beginning or end
of the text. It is also possible to search for operands or text
strings.
3-220
F1
= Text +
Search for a character string in the operand comments or
the additional comments (following ”;”) starting from the
cursor position.
F2
= Text –
Search for a character string in the operand comments or
the additional comments (following ”;”) backwards from
the cursor position.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Note
The search key must be identical to the text including upper and
lower case letters.
F3
= Operand +
F4
= Operand –
F5
= Line
F6
= To start
F7
= End
Search for absolute operands from the cursor position.
Search for absolute operands backwards from the
cursor position.
Jump to the line with the specified line number.
Position the cursor at the beginning of the file.
Position the cursor at the end of the assignment list.
3.3
F5 = Replace
F
1
Text 1
Mark
F
1 Conf.
F Text 2
2 Recall
F Text 3
3 Cut out
F
4
F
2 No conf.
F
3
F
4 All
Text 4
Find
F Mode
5 Replace
F
5
You can replace a character string (max. 20 characters) either
automatically or after a prompt for confirmation.
F1
= Conf
C79000-G8576-C820-01
The character string is searched for in the assignment list n
times (n = repetition factor) from the cursor position and
is replaced by the new string you entered. Before it
replaces a text, STEP 5 prompts you for confirmation.
Yes
The characters are replaced.
No
The characters are not replaced, the cursor
jumps to the next character string (if n > 1)
and the prompt is repeated.
Cancel:
The function is stopped.
3-221
Editor
F2
= No conf
The character string is searched for in the assignment list n
times (n = repetition factor) from the cursor position and
replaced by the text you have typed in. No confirmation is
prompted.
F4
= All
The character string is searched for throughout the whole
assignment list and replaced by the new string.
Programmable
Function Keys
You can assign character strings (max. 40 characters) to four
function keys, so that you can insert regularly recurring text
strings at any position in the assignment list. The key assignment
is stored in the file *ZT.SEQ,
Programming
You have selected ”symbols: yes” in the setting (→ Project).
1. Press F1 = Mark.
STEP 5 displays the next key level.
2. Press F6 = Fct keys.
The editor for the function keys is displayed. The cursor is
flashing in the first line.
3. Type in the character string and press the Return key.
4. Move the cursor from line to line using the Return key or
cursor up/down keys.
The mouse cannot be used except to activate F7 = Enter.
3.3
F
1
Key :
Text :
Shift F1
:Example
Shift F2
: Operand comment
Shift F3
:Message
Shift F4
: Operating
F
2
F
3
F
4
ÎÎ
F
5
F
6 Save
F
7 Enter
5. You can delete characters marked by the cursor using the
DEL key and characters left of the cursor with backspace.
To complete editing:
6. Press Insert or cancel with ESC.
3-222
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Editor
Modifying the
Assignment List
How to Modify and
Change the Field
Lengths
If you want to modify an assignment list you have already created
and translated, you can edit the sequential source file providing it
still exists. If the sequential source file does not exist, this is
generated automatically from the symbols file and output.
Please note that when editing, you cannot exceed the preset
operand comment and symbolic operand length. If you want to
use longer operand symbols and comment texts in an existing
assignment list, you must set up a new sequential source file
(→ Project, Settings) and copy the existing assignment list to this
new file using the editing functions F2 = Recall and F5 = File.
1. Type in the ”drive” and ”name” of the new symbols file you
want to create in the settings (page 1) and set the ”symbols
and comment length” on page 2. These lengths must be the
same or longer than the existing lengths.
2. Call the assignment list editor (→ Editor, Assignment list)
STEP 5 displays a new, empty assignment list.
3. Copy the file you want to change into the current file by
pressing F2 = Recall and F5 = File.
STEP 5 displays the message: ”file name
Z0.SEQ”
4. Here, enter the ”drive” and ”file name” of the existing
assignment list and complete your input with the Return key.
After copying the file you can change to the editing mode with
F8 = Return. You can now edit the sequential source file as usual.
To overwrite entries, change to the overwrite mode F5 = Mode.
Inserting Lines
You can insert lines at any point. In the input mode, pressing the
Return key creates an empty line below the line containing the
cursor. The vertical expand key inserts an empty line above the
line containing the cursor. In the overwrite mode, position the
cursor at the beginning of the next line with the Return key.
Overwriting Files
When storing the modified assignment list, the existing symbols
file and the sequential source file with the same name are
overwritten without prompting you to confirm your intention.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-223
3.3
Editor
Additional
Comment
3.3
If there is no space for your comment, you can also add an
additional comment. To do this, type in the character ”;” as the
first character in the operand column followed by the required
additional comment. The character ”;” marks the line as an
additional comment line. The semicolon must always be in the
first column of the operand field. You can enter additional
comments in any line.
The number of characters available for entering an additional
comment is the total of the operand length (10 characters) the
preset symbol and comment length and the characters available in
between the columns. Depending on the preset symbol and
comment lengths, 19 to 76 characters are possible.
The special character ”;” ( Fig. 3-54 ) can no longer be deleted by
the editor. If you want to eliminate this character, you must delete
the whole line (→ F3 = Cut out, F1 = Line ).
Note
Additional comments and printer control characters only exist in
the sequential source file. If you generate a sequential source file
from the symbols file using → Management, Convert INI > SEQ,
additional comments and printer control characters (.PA) are lost.
3-224
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Test
3.4
Test
This submenu includes test, information and start-up functions
that you can execute on the PG in the online mode.
To use the online functions, there must be a physical and logical
connection between the PG and PLC. Apart from establishing the
cable connection, you must also set the correct bus path for a bus
link (SINEC H1, SINEC L2 or AS511) and the mode on the PG.
The following test functions
– signal status display of operands (→ Status variable)
– forcing output process interface modules (→ Force
outputs) and
– modifying process variables (→ Force variables)
require the listing of process variables which you can store in a
variables block (VBnn (1 <= nn <= 255)) after editing. If you use
the variables block, you do not have to input the operands again
when you call a test function a second time. Variables blocks are
stored in the program file.
Online Functions PG –PLC
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Online Function
PLC Status
Processing in PLC
Explanation
Status block
RUN
User checkpoint
test sequence of statements
in the user program
Status variable1
RUN
System checkpoint
output signal states of
process variable (I, Q, F, S,
T, C, D)
Start PLC
Stop PLC
Compress memory
Force variable1
STOP > RUN
RUN > STOP
RUN, STOP
RUN
Start cycle
Stop cycle
PLC RAM area
System checkpoint
as with manual operation
as with manual operation
compress memory
modify process variable (I,
Q, F, S, T, C, D)
Force outputs1
STOP
System checkpoint
peripherals
set outputs to signal state
(QB, QW, QD)
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-225
3.4
Test
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1
3.4
Online Function
PLC Status
Processing in PLC
Explanation
ISTACK / BSTACK
STOP
PLC memory
system area
output interrupt stack /
block stack
Output memory contents RUN,
STOP
RAM/EPROM, S5 bus,
I/Os
output memory and I/O
addresses in hexadecimal
Memory configuration
RUN, STOP
PLC RAM, EPROM
data about user memory of
the PLC (RAM/EPROM)
System parameters
RUN,
STOP
Release of PLC SW,
CPU
info about internal PLC
structure and software
release (CPU)
Program test ON
PROG TEST
User checkpoint
test single program steps:
PB, FB, FX, OB, SB,
search
Program test OFF
PROG
TEST> STOP
User checkpoint
terminate program test;
executed immediately
Lists of operands can be stored in variables blocks (VB).
3.4.1
Block Status
Test
Block status
3-226
With this function you can test and correct blocks loaded in the
PLC (user memory).
STEP 5 outputs the current signal status of the following process
variables:
– inputs (I), timers (T) and counters (C)
– outputs (Q) (parameter type Q the identifier of an FB
(FX))
– flags (F, S)
– data (D) (the data depends on the DB open at the time of
the status output).
Status processing is subject to the following restrictions:
– The status output of the current block parameters of
function blocks is only possible with the S5-135U,
S5-155U and S5-115U.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Test
– With parameter declarations (formal parameters) and the
statement LIR in an FB or FX, no signal status is
displayed.
– The operation DO DW/DO FW is processed along with
the next operation as if it were a single operation. For this
reason, only the status of the next operation is displayed.
– Some operations terminate the status processing mode,
since following their execution a branch is made to the
operating system or to other blocks, e.g. LIR, BEC and all
jumps and blocks calls.
– A hardcopy is always possible after status processing has
been terminated.
– While status processing is active, the mouse cannot be
used.
After you select the function in the test menu, the selection box
“Block status” appears. Here, you specify the block to be tested
(→ Graphical user interface, Selection box).
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
Input field
Block
Explanation
– Without nesting: type in the block type and
block number or symbolic name of the block.
– With nesting: type in the block to be tested
first and then the sequence of blocks preceding
it in the program (maximum 5) via which the
block status is to be displayed during the test.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Search Key
Here, you can specify the search key of the
statement to be tested. STEP 5 automatically
searches for this and displays the block section
containing this term on the screen. All possible
search keys are listed in the help box.
Overwrite
In this window, you specify whether STEP 5
overwrites the old block directly following
modifications or only after user confirmation.
Seq. source file
Here, you must enter an “X” to specify whether
STEP 5 updates the Z0.SEQ file or not.
3-227
3.4
Test
Example of Nesting
You want to display the status of FB 21 when this has been called
by PB 2. In this case, you enter the blocks as follows:
FB 21, PB 2, OB 1
Block list:
BLOCK 1: FB 21
BLOCK 2: PB 2
BLOCK 3: OB 1
Nesting of the blocks:
OB1
SPA PB1
SPA PB1
SPA PB1
3.4
Representation of
the Signal Statuses
on the Screen
3-228
PB1
PB4
FB21
PB2
PB3
PB5
STL:
The signal states are displayed as a list of status
information.
LAD/CSF:
In the Ladder Diagram and Control System
Flowchart, the signal states are indicated by the
way in which the connection lines are displayed.
=========
Signal state 1
..........
Signal state 0
– – – – – – – – – Signal state cannot be represented (for example,
is not one of the 20 displayable statements; the
number of statements depends on the PLC).
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Test
After OK, STEP 5 begins the status processing and displays, e.g.
the following screen in CSF:
PB 1
Segment
I 32.0
I 32.1
1
0000
&
==
Example 1
=
Q 32.0
=
F 1.1
Figure 3-55 Status processing
The display is not updated following each cycle.
All the functions made available in the function key menu (→
Editor, STEP 5 blocks) can be executed during status processing.
Note
You cannot display addresses.
3.4
In STL, STEP 5 displays the following screen (example):
PB 1
Segment
:A
:A
:=
:=
:***
DBADR=0000
1
I
I
Q
F
STL status
32.0
32.1
32.0
1.1
LEN=35
RLO Status/ACCU1 –––ACCU2––––Status
0
0
00000000
0
1
00000000
0
0
00000001
0
0
00000001
SAC
D054
D056
D058
D05A
Figure 3-56 Screen Layout
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-229
Test
PB 1
DBADR=
Segment
:JU
:AN
:L
:SE
:L
:T
:JC
Name
INP1
OUT1
INP2
1
STL status
PB
T
KT
T
T
KT
FB
1
9
010.0
9
0
0
10
:TEST
:
F
:
FW
:
FW
:
10.0
12
12
RLO
LEN=20
Status/ACCU1 –––ACCU2–––– Line comment
Start timer
:BE
The display is not updated after each cycle.
Abbreviations
RLO
Result of logic operation
STATUS
Bit operands
DBy
Current data block
ACCU 1
Content of ACCU 1
ACCU 2
Content of ACCU 2
STATUS
Status of the result condition code bits
SAC
Step address counter
Identifiers for status display:
R
Timer running
:
N
Negating bit scan, i.e. with the AT (AND
timer) the result is 0
U
Upwards counter input
D
Downwards counter input
S
Set and start input
E
Enable input
3.4
3-230
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Test
All the functions made available with the function keys (→
Editor, STEP 5 blocks) can be executed during status processing
with the exception of displaying addresses.
Block status processing
Action
Operation
Move breakpoint
Move the cursor before the required
STEP 5 continues status processing.
operand with cursor keys or search
Message: “Status processing active”.
function. Fetch other segments onto the
screen with cursor keys or “+”/”–”.
Abandon
processing
Press ESC (cancel) once.
The message “Status processing active”
is cleared.
Continue
processing
Press INSERT (enter) once.
Message: “Status processing active”.
Correct program
Press F6-Edit.
Status processing is stopped and you
Same operations as in the editor mode. change to the editor mode.
Enter correction
1. Press INSERT( Enter)
2. Acknowledge with yes.
3. Acknowledge with yes if you
want to “overwrite”.
Prompt “Enter modified segment?”
”...already in PLC, overwrite?”
The corrected block is in the PLC and
status processing is restarted.
1. Press ESC (cancel) twice.
2. Confirm prompt with yes.
Prompt “Exit status?
Stop/terminate
processing
Messages
Possible messages:
”Statement not
processed”
Messages/Explanations
Causes:
block is not called
statement is skipped
a block or sequence of blocks does
not exist
the PLC is in the STOP mode
”Block does not exist in
PLC”
the block to be tested does not exist
the block to be tested calls a further
block that does not exist in the PLC.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-231
3.4
Test
3.4.2
Status Variable
Test
Status variable
Using this function you can output the current signal statuses of
selected operands in the form of a list as they occur at the system
checkpoint (→ Appendix A2, Glossary) during program
execution. You enter the operands to be monitored (process
variables) in a list which STEP 5 displays as an empty table when
you call the “status variable” test function, providing no variables
are entered otherwise the last table saved is displayed (variables
block). With F6 = Activate, or with the Insert key you can
display the current signal state of the listed operands.
The listed operands are called during status processing and their
current signal status is displayed before they are modified by the
user program.
Operands:
F
1
3.4
Fetch
F
2 Store
Formats:
F
3 Delete
F
4
Field
F
5
Figure 3-57 Table for Editing the Operand List
The following functions are available for this table:
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Key:
Function
F1 = Fetch
F2 = Store
F3 = Delete
F4 = Field
Call a variables block
Store the operand list as a variables block
Delete the current line
Display variables in fields, keys + or – fetch the
previous or next field.
Activate status processing (= enter). Only
available when at least one operand is entered
Saves the operand list in the current variables
block (only available when at least one operand
is entered)
F6 = Activate
F7 = Return
3-232
F8 = Return
Return to menu selection
SHIFT F8 = Help
Information about certain activities
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Test
Safety prompt
If you make changes when entering the operand list, that are not
saved in the variables block, you will be asked whether you want
to keep the changes. Answer with <Yes> or <No>:
– Cancel (ESC)
– F8 = Return
– F1 = Fetch
The text of the prompt depends on whether or not you have
selected a variables block.
No variables block selected: Discard changes?
Variables block selected:
Discard modified block?
Action
Reaction to <Yes>
Cancel
F8 Return
Changes are discarded;
STEP 5 displays the function menu.
F1 Fetch
Changes are discarded;
After you complete the command line,
specify the variables block VBnn.
Editing the
operand list
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Reaction to <No>
You remain editing the operand
list,changes can be saved in a variables
block.
Note: The changes must be explicitly
saved (F2 Store or F7 Save).
You remain editing the operand
list,changes can be saved in a variables
block.
Note: The changes must be explicitly
saved (F2 Store or F7 Save). Call a new
variables block with F1 Fetch.
You can enter the following operands in the operand list:
Operand
F/Q/I/S
FY/QB/IB/SY
FW/QW/IW/SW
T
C
DW/DL/DR
DB
FD/QD/ID/DD/SD
Permitted data formats
KM
KH
(KM, KY, KS, KF)
KH
(KM, KY, KS, KF)
KT
(KM, KH)
KC
(KM, KY, KS, KF)
KH
(KM, KY, KS, KF)
–
KH
(KG, KY, KS)
3-233
3.4
Test
After you type in an operand, the PG displays the first format, i.e.
the format not in brackets, in the table above. You can overwrite
this format when making your input.
With the operands DD, DW, DB, DL, DR, you must first specify
the corresponding data block in the operand list. Otherwise, the
PG displays the message “No DB selected”.
You must type in the characters of an operand in the correct order
(syntax) otherwise the cursor remains in the input field.
You can save the operand list in a variables block (VB). Call an
existing variables block with F1 = Fetch.
Note
The last variables block (VB) you saved is loaded automatically
when you call “status variable”.
Editing Operations
3.4
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Function
Operation
Messages/Explanations
Input an operand
1.
2.
After you input the operand
press double arrow key right
Change or keep format
The PG suggests a data format for each
operand. The cursor is positioned on
the operand.
3.
Complete line with Return
The cursor jumps to the beginning of
the next line.
Correct
Overwrite incorrect input
Insert operand
1.
Add operand at
start
3-234
2.
3.
Position cursor with cursor
key (up/down)
Press expand vertically
Type in operand
1.
2.
3.
Position cursor in top line
Press expand vertically
Type in operand
If the syntax is wrong the cursor only
leaves the field after it has been corrected.
You can append operands to the list
when the cursor is positioned below the
last line of the list.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Test
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Function
Operation
Delete operand
1.
2.
Messages/Explanations
Position cursor on the first
character of the operand
Press delete character
several times
Delete line
1. Position cursor on the line to
be deleted
2. Press F3 (Delete)
The current line is deleted with the
operand and format, the next lines are
closed up.
Fetch operand list
1. Press F1 (Fetch)
2. Complete the command line
Display variables block VBnn
If you have made changes, that were
not saved in a variables block, a prompt
is displayed (“Discard changes?” or
Discard modified block?”)
If you did not make changes or if you
answer the prompt with Yes, STEP 5
fetches the operand list from variables
block VBnn after you have completed
the command line.
Save operand list
Press F7 (Save)
STEP 5 saves the operand list in the
currently selected variables block. In
contrast to F2 (Store), you do not
specify a variables block number. The
function is only available when a
variables block is selected.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Store operand list
1.
2.
Press F2 (Store)
Fill in the command line
Store variables block VBnn
STEP 5 stores the operand list in the
variables block VBnn.
Fetch operand list
as field
1.
2.
Press F4 (Field)
Fill in the command line
Field display from variable:
QB 26
Format: KH
STEP 5 displays an operand list with
20 consecutive bytes starting from output 26.
The operand list can contain a maximum of 20 operands (if you
are using words, this reduces to 10 and for double words 5).
At the bottom edge of the screen you can see what percentage of
the operand list is already completed.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-235
3.4
Test
Status of the
Operands
(outputting
process variables)
The current signal statuses of the process variables in the operand
list are output before you modify the user program (i.e. at the
system checkpoint).
Once you have edited the operand list or have displayed it on the
screen,
press F6 = Activate or Insert.
The PG displays the signal statuses of the listed variables and the
message “status processing active”.
VB 5
3.4
C:PROBSPST.S5D
PLC in the cycle
Operands:
–MAINSWIT
–EMERSTOP
–I32.2
–IN–POS
–CAR–IN
–C–BACK
–DOOROP
–DOORCL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
32.0
32.1
32.2
32.3
32.4
32.5
32.6
32.7
Signal states:
KM=1
KM=0
KM=1
KM=0
KM=0
KM=0
KM=0
KM=1
START
I
33.0
KM=1
C–FWDS
C–BWDS
OPENDOOR
Q
Q
Q
32.0
32.1
32.2
KM=0
KM=0
KH=00
1184: Status processing active
Figure 3-58 Operand List with Binary Inputs/Outputs and a Flag Byte
3-236
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Test
Operation During Status Processing
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Action
Operation
Messages/Explanation
Interrupt status pro- Press ESC
cessing
The cursor jumps to the first line in the
operand list.
Continue status
processing
STEP 5 displays the status of the individual variables again.
Press F6 = Activate
Terminate/abort sta- Press ESC twice
tus processing
Possible Messages
and Operator Errors
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Messages
If you have made changes, that were
not saved in a variables block, a prompt
is displayed (“Discard changes?” or
Discard modified block?”)
If you did not make changes or if you
answer the prompt with Yes, STEP 5
displays the function menu.
Causes
”No DB selected”
You have not specified the data block for an
operand.
”KH= *data element
missing”
The DB for the specified operands (DD, DW,
DB, DL, DR) is not in the PLC memory or
there are not enough data words.
”KT = stopped”
The selected timer was not started.
”KH = * DB missing”
The DB does not exist in the selected program file.
”* illegal”
Operand not allowed in the PLC
3-237
3.4
Test
3.4.3
PLC Control
PLC Control
Test
Within this submenu, you can start and stop a PLC connected
online and compress the user memory in the PLC.
PLC control
Start PLC
Stop PLC
Compress memory
Starting the PLC
Test
PLC control
Start PLC
3.4
Stopping the PLC
Test
PLC control
Stop PLC
3-238
The function “start PLC” triggers a cold restart or warm restart on
the programmable controller (refer to your PLC manual).
Before the PLC is started with this function, you are prompted by
the PLC to confirm your intention.
– Acknowledge the message with yes:
The PLC is set to the selected status,
or
– Acknowledge the message with no:
The PLC is not started.
The function “Stop PLC” switches the programmable controller
to the STOP mode (refer to your PLC manual). The processor
stops executing program statements.
In multiprocessor operation (S5-135U) all the processors are set
to the stop mode.
Before the PLC is stopped with this function, you are prompted to
confirm your intention.
– Acknowledge the message with yes:
The PLC is set to the stop mode,
or
– Acknowledge the message with no:
The PLC does not stop.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Test
Compressing the
PLC Memory
Test
PLC control
Compress memory
3.4.4
When you delete blocks in the PLC, these are declared “invalid”
in the PLC RAM but are not physically deleted. Whenever you
correct a block, the old version of the block is invalidated but
remains in memory and the corrected block is written into the
RAM. This means that the PLC memory can become full. The
“compress memory” function deletes invalid blocks and shifts
valid blocks together so that there is memory again for new
blocks.
The “compress memory” function detects the following errors:
– wrong block length,
– corrupted pattern “7070” in the block header,
– invalid block type (with OB, invalid block number).
If STEP 5 detects one of these errors, the function is abandoned
and a corresponding message is displayed.
Force Variables
Test
Force variables
C79000-G8576-C820-01
This online function allows you to modify process variables and
to intervene directly in the process. Before you force variables,
you should consider the reaction of the process to your
intervention!
– The variables I, Q, F, S, T, C, D can be modified. The PG
influences the variables I, Q and F only in bytes or words
in the process image.
With the variables T and C in the format KM and KH, the
forcing of edge flags must be taken into account.
– The function can be executed in the STOP and RUN
modes of the programmable controller.
– The signal status display is stopped if an incorrect format
or operand is found.
– STEP 5 displays the message “forcing not possible”.
– Since STEP 5 modifications are made in bytes, variables
cannot be modified en bloc.
3-239
3.4
Test
3.4
How to use “Force
Variables”
The following procedure is advisable when working with the
“force variables” function:
1. Call “force variables”.
STEP 5 displays an empty table for the operand list providing
no variable is entered. Otherwise the last variables block you
saved is displayed.
2. Make your entries in the operand list and complete the editing
with the Insert key.
The status of the variables is displayed.
3. Cancel the status display with ESC.
The operand list with the current values is displayed.
4. Modify the current values and complete your input with the
Insert key.
From point 2 onwards you can repeat the procedure.
Operation
After selecting the “force variables” function, STEP 5 displays
the empty table for entering the operand list (Fig. 3-58) or the
variables block last selected for “force variables”.
Editing the
Operand List
You can enter the following operands in the operand list:
Operand
F/Q/I/S
FY/QB/IB/SY
FW/QW/IW/SW
T
C
DW/DL1)/DR1)
DB
FD/QD/ID/DD/SD
–Symbol
1)
3-240
Permitted data formats
KM
KH
(KM, KY, KS, KF)
KH
(KM, KY, KS, KF)
KT
(KM, KH)
KC1)
(KM, KY, KS, KF)
KH
(KM, KY, KS, KF)
–
KH
(KG, KY, KS)
Dependent on operand type
These operands and formats can only be seen (not
controlled).
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Test
After you type in a byte or word operand, STEP 5 displays the
first format, i.e. the format not in brackets, in the table above.
You can overwrite this format when making your input.
With the operands DD, DW, DB, DL, DR, you must first specify
the corresponding data block in the operand list. Otherwise,
STEP 5 displays the message “No DB selected”.
You must type in the characters of an operand in the correct order
(syntax) otherwise the cursor remains in the input field.
You can store the operand list in a variables block (VB). Call an
existing variables block with F1 = Fetch.
The operand list can contain a maximum of 20 operands (with
word operands, the maximum is reduced to 10, and with double
words 5). At the lower edge of the screen, the occupation of the
operand list is displayed as a percentage.
The editing options are the same as for the “status variables”
function, on page 3-218.
Note
The last variables block (VB) you saved is loaded automatically
when you call “force variables”.
Status of the
Operands
(displaying
process variables)
C79000-G8576-C820-01
The current signal statuses of the process variables in the operand
list are output.
Once you have edited the operand list or have displayed it on the
screen,
– Press F6 = Activate or Insert.
The PG displays the signal statuses of the listed variables and the
message “status processing active”.
To interrupt status processing,
– Press ESC = Cancel.
The cursor jumps to the first line of the operand list.
3-241
3.4
Test
Influencing
Process Variables
from the PG
The current signal state of the listed process variables is
displayed on the screen. You can now modify the values of the
displayed process variables in the PLC (force variables).
Modifying the Value
of a Variable
The PG displays the operand list with the column “signal states”
in which the currently valid signal states are displayed. The
message “status processing active” and the PLC mode are also
displayed.
1. Press ESC = Cancel once.
The PG changes the name of the “signal statuses” column to
“force process image” and waits for you to input the forced
values. The cursor jumps to the first line.
2. Enter the forced values line by line and press the Return key
after each input.
You complete the input of variable values by
3. Pressing the Insert key.
STEP 5 displays the message “End of force fct.” and transfers
the modified variables to the PLC.
4. Pressing the Insert key.
The PG changes the name of the “Force” column to “Signal
states”. You can see changed signal states.
To stop the force variables function,
5. Press ESC = Cancel twice.
If you have made changes, that were not saved in a variables
block, a prompt is displayed (“Discard changes?” or Discard
modified block?”)
If you did not make changes or if you answer the prompt with
Yes, STEP 5 returns to the basic functions menu.
3.4
3-242
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Test
3.4.5
Force Outputs
Test
Force outputs
How to use “Force
Outputs”
C79000-G8576-C820-01
With this function you can set outputs to the required signal state
directly. The function does not influence the process image or
program execution, since the programmable controller must be in
the STOP mode.
The outputs of a programmable controller can be forced
individually. You can therefore check their assignment to the
actuators of your plant (e.g. valves, motor etc.). With this
function you can check whether output modules are defect or not
plugged and that the wiring is correct.
Single bits cannot be addressed, but only the formats byte, word
and double word.
The “force outputs” function is used as follows:
1. Change the PLC to “STOP”
2. Call the “force outputs” function.
STEP 5 displays an empty table for the operand list providing
no operand is entered. Otherwise, the variables block you
saved last is displayed.
3. Enter the operands and complete the list with the Insert key.
4. Type in or modify the required values and complete your
entries with the Insert key .
The PG transfers the values to the outputs of the PLC.
From the third point onwards you can repeat the procedure.
When you select the “force outputs” function, STEP 5 displays
the empty table for the operand list (Fig. 3-58) or the variables
block last selected for “force variables”.
3-243
3.4
Test
Editing the
Operand List
You can enter the following operands in the operand list:
Operand
OB
OW
OD
–Symbol
Inputting Operands
3.4
3-244
Permitted formats
KH
(KM, KY, KS, KF)
KH
(KM, KY, KS, KF)
KH
(KG, KY, KS)
Dependent on operand type
After you type in an operand, STEP 5 displays the first format,
i.e. the format not in brackets, in the table above. You can
overwrite this format when making your input.
You must type in the characters of an operand in the correct order
(syntax) otherwise the cursor remains in the input field.
You can store the operand list in a variables block (VB). Call an
existing variables block with F1 = Fetch.
The operand list can contain a maximum of 20 operands (with
word operands, the maximum is reduced to 10, and with double
words 5). At the lower edge of the screen, the percentage of the
operand list completed is displayed.
The formats of the operands depend on the PLC type:
S5-130 W/A, S5-150 A/K
: QB, QW;
S5-150 S, S5-135 U, S5-155 U
: QB, QW, QD;
The editing options are explained on page 3-232.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Test
Setting Output
Variables at the PG
STEP 5 displays the last selected variables block or an empty list
in which you can enter signals and states.
Modifying Output
Values
STEP 5 displays the operand list with the columns “Operands”
and “Force I/O modules”.
1. Type in the required forced values line by line and press the
Return key after each input.
STEP 5 displays an X after each entered value. If you type in less
characters than the maximum length, the more significant places
are automatically padded with zeros.
To complete the entry of input values:
2. Press the Insert key.
The PG displays the message “End of force fct.” and transfers the
modified output values to the PLC.
If you want to stop the force outputs function,
3. Press ESC (cancel).
If you have made changes, that were not saved in a variables
block, a prompt is displayed (“Discard changes?” or Discard
modified block?”).
If you did not make changes or if you answer the prompt with
Yes, STEP5 returns to the basic menu of the functions. Refer to
3.4.2 Status Variable”
Corrections
C79000-G8576-C820-01
The cursor only exits the input field when the input is correct. If
you make errors inputting the values the cursor remains in the
input field.
3-245
3.4
Test
3.4.6
Outputting PLC Info
The online functions you can select in this submenu provide you
with information about the status of the connected PLC.
– Interrupt stack (ISTACK)
Test
– Block stack (BSTACK)
Output PLC info >
– Memory and I/O addresses, hexadecimal (output memory
contents)
ISTACK
– Information about the user memory on the PLC (memory
BSTACK
Output mem. contents
configuration)
Memory configuration
– Information about the internal PLC structure and the
System parameters
software releases of the CPU (system parameters)
ISTACK
Interrupt Stack of
the PLC
Test
Output PLC info
3.4
ISTACK
3-246
After you select the ISTACK, a table of control bits and their
current settings is displayed on the screen. You can select the
abbreviations using the cursor and an explanation of the currently
marked abbreviation is displayed in a window at the lower edge
of the screen.
The control bits are explained in detail in the PLC manuals.
To display the control bit screen form, the PLC does not need to
be in the STOP mode.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Test
C O N T R O L bits
BARBEND PG–STP STP–SCH STP–BEF
X
>>STP<<
X
STP–6
FE–STP
>>ANL<<
ANL–6
NEUSTA
MWA
AWA
>>RUN<<
RUN–6
BARB
OB1GEL
32KWRAM
16KWRAM
EINPROZ
X
8KWRAM
EPROM
ANL–2
FB0GEL
X
KM–AUS KM–EIN
MP–STP
NEUZU
MWA–ZUL
X
X
OBPROZA OBWECKA
DIG–EIN
DIG–AUS
UA–SYS
X
UA–PRFE
X
UA–SCH
DB0–FE
DB1–FE
DB2–FE
KOR–FE
ZYK
QVZ
ADF
FE–3
LZF
REG–FE
X
URGELOE
URL–IA
STP–VER ANL–ABB
UA–PG
DX0–FE
FE–22
MOD–FE
RAM–FE
NAU
PEU
BAU
STUE–FE
BCF
FE–6
FE–5
FE–4
WECK–FE
DOPP–FE
>>STP<<: Processor is in STOP mode
3.4
Figure 3-59 Table of Control Bits (e.g. CPU 928 B)
Once the control bit table is displayed, you can display the
ISTACK by changing the PLC to the STOP mode and pressing
the
1. Press the Insert key.
How you handle the plain text display is explained in a window
at the lower edge of the screen which you select by pressing
2. Press HELP.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-247
Test
INTERRUPT stack
Level: 01
OP–REG:
0000
BLK–STP:
0000
SAC:
–NO.:
0000
000C
ACCU1: 0000 0000
Condition code:
Cause of interrupt:
ICMK:
ACCU2:
CC1
BA–ADD:
0100
0000 0000
CC0
–NO.:
DBL–REG:
0000
ICRW:
0000
ACCU3:
0000 0000
ACCU4:
0000 0000
OVFL
OVFLS
MPSTP
ZYK
QVZ
LZF
REG
STATUS
RLO
NAU
PEU
BAU
ADF
STP
X
STUEU
BCF
S–6
WECK
DOPP
STUEB
STP
0000
DB–NO.:
REL–SAC:
LEVEL:
DB–ADD:
OR
ERAB
: STP op. caused stop
3.4
Figure 3-60 Display of the Interrupt Stack
Note
There may be more than one screen page.
3-248
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Test
Block Stack of the
PLC (BSTACK)
Test
Output PLC info
BSTACK
Each time a block is called, the PLC enters the start address of
the currently valid block along with the relative and absolute
return address in the block stack. The return address is the
memory address at which the program must be continued once
the newly called block has been processed.
You can call up this information using the BSTACK function
when the PLC is in the STOP mode.
Block stack
Block no. Block addr. Return address Rel. addr.
PB 3
OB 1
D05A
D0C2
D05B
D0C7
DB no. DB addr.
0001
0005
Possible message:
1. “Wrong mode at PLC”
The PLC is not in the STOP mode.
2. Empty or incomplete stack.
Outputting
Memory Contents
Test
Output PLC info
Output memory
contents
Operation
C79000-G8576-C820-01
This function outputs the absolute addresses and their contents on
the screen, printer or to a print file.
The output of the addresses is only possible in the online mode.
Note
Manipulation can cause undefined statuses in the PLC – think
out the consequences before you make changes.
The PG displays the job box “PLC INFO: output memory
contents”.
1. Under “Output from address:” enter the first byte address to
be output as a hexadecimal number ( e.g. ADAC, for S5-155U
(20 bit address): e.g. FADAC).
2. Press the Insert key.
STEP 5 displays the addresses and their contents rolling the
screen downwards in columns.
3-249
3.4
Test
The address output always begins at an even address.
Non-configured memory areas are marked with XX. STEP 5
outputs a maximum of 1024 absolute addresses.
To freeze/interrupt the address output:
3. Press ESC = Cancel.
To continue the output, confirm the prompt or press the Insert
key.
If you want to make corrections:
4. Click on correction and position the cursor on the relevant
value with SHIFT + cursor right/left.
5. Enter the value and complete your input with the Insert key.
The message “Enter modified addresses in PLC?” appears.
6. Click on yes or no.
To stop and exit the output function
7. Press ESC = Cancel twice.
No correction
3.4
After
correction
3-250
Press ESC once and reply to the prompt with
NO.
Modified addresses are output: acknowledge
the message.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Test
Memory
Configuration of
the PLC
Test
Output PLC info
Memory
configuration
With this function, you can see the configuration and amount of
user memory being used. The addresses are displayed in
hexadecimal form. The memory assignments and configuration
options are described in the programming instructions for the
specific PLC.
On the screen, you can see the size of the user memory of the
PLC and the amount currently occupied either in graphical or text
form. The display differs depending on the performance of the
PLC.
User memory:
End addr.
PLC
S5-100U
CPU ident.
CPU 90
DFFF
free memory
Memory occupied
3.4
Start addr.
D0F5
D000
Figure 3-61 User Memory Size and Assignment on the S5-100U
Memory
configuration
Memory configuration
End addresses in PLC RAM hexadecimal
PLC RAM configured to:
3FFE
PLC memory occupied to:
70
Message
Continue?
< Yes >
Figure 3-62 User Memory Size and Assignment as Text
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-251
Test
System
Parameters of the
PLC
Test
Output PLC info
System parameters
Operation
With this function, you can display the following PLC system
parameters on the screen:
– release of the PLC software
– CPU identifier
– CPU type
– CPU number
– memory distribution
– block list lengths
STEP 5 displays the PLC system parameters on the screen.
The list is spread over two screen pages. The following
illustration is an example of page 1. To move onto page 2 or to
terminate the function, confirm the prompt “continue” with yes.
System parameters
Numbers specified in hex.
PLC software release
Z 01
CPU identifier
PGAS software release
3.4
I/O module inputs 0
I/O module inputs 0
Process image inputs
Process image outputs
Flag memory
Timer memory
Counter memory
RS memory area
3.4.7
Z 00
EF00
EF80
EE00
EC00
ED00
EA00
Program Test ON
Test
Program test ON
3-252
AG 100 U CPU 90
With this function, the PLC processes a block step by step. When
you invoke the program test function, the program is stopped at
the point marked by the breakpoint (statement in which the cursor
is located) and the command output is disabled (all outputs
blocked). This means that the program is only processed as far as
the selected statement and the current signal states and the RLO
are output. On the PLC the BASP LED is lit (block all outputs).
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Test
Note
Not all PLCs support the program test function, refer to your
PLC manual.
In the program test mode
– the processing cycle is stopped,
– no inputs or outputs are processed, only the process image
can be modified,
– the program can be moved on operation by operation by
moving the breakpoint.
In the program test mode, the PLC stops at the last selected
breakpoint. You can select the following test functions (allowing
corrections to be made if necessary) parallel to the program test:
– Status variable
– Force variables
– Force outputs
– Info about the Interrupt STACK
– Info about the Block STACK
Special features of the program test function for specific
programmable controllers are described in the PLC manuals.
After calling the “Program test ON” function, enter the following
information in the box under “Selection”:
1. the block (absolute or symbolic name) or a list (nesting) of
blocks you want to check.
2. as “search key”: an operand you want to check in the block
you have selected.
3. Then click on OK.
STEP 5 displays the selected block in STL. The screen
representation is the same as that for block status (see page
3-226 ). Instead of the function “Status” the “Program test”
function is displayed.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-253
3.4
Test
4. Press the cursor down key.
The breakpoint is selected.
STEP 5 displays information about the operation that has just
been executed. The cursor is positioned in the next statement
line. The processor of the PLC is stopped, i.e. no operation in
the user program is executed unless you trigger it explicitly.
5. Press the cursor down key.
The next breakpoint is selected.
The PLC executes the next operation and the processor stops
the processing again.
If you discover an error that needs correcting, proceed as
follows:
6. Press ESC = Cancel twice. To exit the program test, call an
editor.
Since the program test function is still active, the processor of
the PLC is stopped.
To return to the “program test” mode
7. Call the “program test ON” function again.
You can now test the corrected program.
3.4
Note
Not all function keys are active.
Program Test OFF
Test
Program test OFF
3-254
This function deactivates the program test.
Select “Program test OFF”.
The PLC changes to the STOP mode and must be restarted (→
PLC control, Start PLC) or by changing the CPU selector from
STOP to RUN).
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Management
3.5
Management
This main menu includes a series of utilities which you require
when working with the STEP 5 editing and test functions.
3.5.1
Generate XRF
Generate XRF
Management
Generate XRF
3.5.2
With this function you can generate a reference list (cross
reference list) of the default program file in a file with the name
*XR.INI. This is the source for cross references in LAD, CSF and
STL segments in the I/Q/F list, in the program structure and in
checklists and for the printout of the cross reference list itself. If
you make corrections in a STEP 5 program, you must regenerate
the reference list.
After triggering the function in the main menu, this function is
executed automatically.
The generated reference list is required in the block editor for
documentation in the KOMDOK format and in GRAPH 5 for
processing the F2 functions = Reference.
XRF files (cross-reference lists) can also be generated in the
block editor and before KOMDOK output.
EPROM
Management
EPROMs
C79000-G8576-C820-01
With this function, you transfer STEP 5 blocks from a program
file to an EPROM/EEPROM submodule. This is commonly
known as “blowing” an EPROM.
These memory submodules must be inserted in an EPROM port
on the PG. You should only insert the module in a slot on the
programmable controller (PLC) after you have transferred the
block to the submodule.
STEP 5 supports you in selecting the correct submodule
parameters for different EPROM types.
3-255
3.5
Management
The following functions are available:
– loading blocks in an EPROM/EEPROM
– reading blocks from an EPROM/EEPROM and
transferring them to the active program file
– erasing EEPROM submodules
– displaying information about EPROM/EEPROMs
– transferring SYSID parameters
Note
No comment, documentation or variables blocks are transferred
to the submodule.
PRESETS
MODE
FOOTER
3.5
SIMATIC S5 / PDS04
:
:
WORD
PROGRAM FILE
NO
C:PROEXAST.S5D [RW]
SYSID FILE
:
C:NONAMESD.INI
:FOOTER FILE
:
C:PROEXAF1.INI
C:NONAMEDR.INI
PRINTER FILE
CHECKSUM
F
1
F
2
:
NO
F
3 Select
F
4
F
5
F
6 Enter
F
7
Info
F
8
Operation
As soon as you have selected this function, the above box appears
on the screen.
Presets
On the right-hand side of the screen, the files you have selected
under → Project are displayed. Enter your input with F6 = Enter.
The function is then activated.
The following inputs are possible:
3-256
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Management
Input field
Mode
WORD
Write/read byte-oriented (depending on the
submodule type).
WORD/
FIELD
Mandatory for the CPU 946/947 (memory
module 335). With the S5-155U, the first
character of the useful data of a block is at the
paragraph boundary (16 bytes).
YES
F
F
1 Blow
2
Read
Defining the
Function
Write/read word-oriented (depending on the
submodule type).
BYTE
Checksum
NO
Function Selection
Explanation
The checksum of the block transferred to the
submodule is not created.
The checksum of the block transferred to the
module is created, appended to the block and
transferred to the submodule.
Once you have entered the “presets” with F6, the selection box
“select function” is displayed. Your settings remain visible, but
you can no longer change them. The displays simply serve as
information. You can activate the individual functions using the
softkey menu.
F
F
3 Delete
4 Duplicate 5
F
F
E Info
F
6 Presets 7
F
Aux fct
8 Return
How to use and define a function is described based on the
“blow” function and is basically the same for the other EPROM
functions (read, delete and duplicate).
Press F1 = Blow.
The following command line is then displayed at the lower edge
of the screen:
BLOW EPROM
BLOCK:
PTR:
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-257
3.5
Management
The following table explains the possible inputs:
Inputs
Block
3.5
Complete this input with the Return key.
PBn (e.g.)
Single block name.
PB (e.g.)
All blocks of one type.
*
A list is displayed in which you can enter a
maximum of 6 blocks.
A
All blocks in the preset program file
(→ Project)
Ptr
Programming
Number
Explanation
You complete this input with the Insert key.
Blank
Output only on the screen.
*
Standard printout.
1
Normal print.
2
Condensed print.
Once you have confirmed your inputs, the following input line is
displayed:
PROG NUMBER?
Here, you must enter the programming number. The
programming number identifies the EPROM/EEPROM
submodule you are using.
Selecting the PROG
NUMBER
3-258
There are two ways of entering this number:
1. Type in the number directly.
2. Select the number using the HELP key.
A list supplied with STEP 5 contains the assignments. You can
display this list with the HELP key and can page through it. You
can then position the cursor on a submodule in the list and press
the Return key to enter the programming number in the “PROG
NUMBER” field.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Management
The list of EPROM/EEPROM modules contains the following
information:
Term
Explanation
MLFB
Order number of a module.
Prog. no.
The programmer identifies the
EPROM/EEPROM submodule with this
programming number. Each number belongs to a
different order number.
Capacity
Memory capacity of the EPROM/EEPROM
Note
The prog.no. 500 is reserved for SIMATIC memory cards. You
program and check these cards the same way as described in this
section.
Submodule
Information
Once you have typed in the programming number and pressed the
Insert key, a screen containing submodule information is
displayed which you also acknowledge with the Insert key.
Note
If you type in the wrong “Prog. no.”, EPROM/EEPROMs can be
destroyed.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-259
3.5
Management
If, for example, you only type in the programming number 57
instead of 457 for submodule 6ES5 372-1AA61, the submodule
will be destroyed.
EPROM INFORMATION
MLFB NUMBER
PROGRAMMING NUMBER
HARDWARE ID
:
CONFIGURATION
:
SOCKET 1 *27256
:
SOCKET 2 *27256
:
SOCKET 3 *27256
:
SOCKET 4 *27256
:
MODE
:
WORD-WORD/FIELD; AS SUBSTITUTE BYTE
CAPACITY
:
PROG NUMBER ?
BLOW EPROM
:
:
6ES5 373–0AA81
163
––
–EPROM HAS NO HARDWARE IDENTIFIER–
64
KWORDS
OR
128
KBYTES
IF EPROM CORRECT SIMPLY PRESS ENTER KEY
BLOCK. : PB44
PTR :
Figure 3-63 Example of the EPROM/EEPROM Information Screen
3.5
How to Activate
Functions
3-260
The various EPROM functions activated by softkeys (F1 - F8) are
explained in the following table.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Management
Key level
1
Effect of the function keys
2
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
F1
Cursor keys → Appendix A4, key assignment
Blow:
Transfer blocks to an EPROM/EEPROM module. Inputs are made as described
on pages 3-257. The transfer is completed with the message
Main function
End address nnnnnnnn
Address:
The displayed addresses are physical addresses of the EPROM/EEPROM.
Cancel the transfer with ESC:
The block currently being transferred is completely transferred before the function is terminated.
F2
Read:
Transfer blocks from an EPROM/EEPROM submodule to the active program
file (→ Project). The transfer is completed with the message :
EPROM check
Free from nnnnnnnn
F3
Delete:
This function erases EEPROMs and memory cards and is completed with the
message:
Main function
End address nnnnnnnn
EPROMs are erased with an erasing unit.
Duplicate: only for the PC package
Duplicates EPROM/EEPROM submodules using a programming unit “PROMMER”. If you do not have a PROMMER, an error message is displayed.
F4
F5
C79000-G8576-C820-01
E info:
Displays information about the submodule inserted in the EPROM slot.
Changes to the next key level.
3-261
3.5
Management
Key level
Effect of the function keys
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1
2
F1
F2
3.5
3-262
Dir:
Outputs the directory of blocks on the EPROM/EEPROM on the screen or
printer. If a block or block header is found, the block list is displayed on the
screen.
Depending on the setting you have selected, the output is completed with the
following message: For a block or a group of blocks:
Block found at
Header end address nnnnnnnn
For all blocks:
EPROM check
free from nnnnnnnn “Free from” is the
physical end address of the last block in the EPROM/EEPROM submodule.
Compare:
Compares the S5 blocks stored in the EPROM/EEPROM with those in the
active program file. The result of the comparison is displayed on the screen or
printed out.
During the comparison, messages appear on the screen. The following messages complete the compare function.
Comparing all blocks:
EPROM check free from nnnnnnnn “Free from” is the physical end address of the last block in the EPROM/EEPROM submodule.
Comparing a block or a group of single blocks:
Main function
End address nnnnnnnn
If there is a discrepancy between blocks, the following messages are displayed:
Address
The relative block address in the submodule.
Ref
The reference is the content of the memory location stored
at the relative block address in the program file.
Act
The actual value is the content of the memory location at
which the relative block address is stored in the EPROM/
EEPROM submodule.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Management
Key level
Effect of the function keys
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1
2
F3
Parameters:
Output of EPROM/EEPROM parameters on the screen and comparison with
the parameter values of the submodule inserted in the EPROM slot. If the information matches up, the PG displays the parameter values as shown in Figure
3-65.
F5
SYSID inp:
Transfer the data in the SYSID file to the EPROM/EEPROM submodule.
If the EPROM/EEPROM submodule is not completely empty, the following
message is displayed: SYSID writing prohibited
The transfer is completed with the following message:
Main function
End address nnnnnnnn
F6
SYSID out:
Transfer the SYSID data contained in the EPROM/EEPROM submodule to the
preset SYSID file and display on the screen. The preset SYSID file can be overwritten with this function. The transfer is completed with the following message:
Main function
End address nnnnnnnn
F8
Return
Return to the first key level
F6
Presets
Return to the EPROM presets
F7
Aux fct
Calls auxiliary functions corresponding to the user interface of STEP 5 versions
prior to V6.0.
F8
Return
Return to function selection
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-263
3.5
Management
3.5.3
Rewiring
Management
Rewire >
Automatic...
Manual
3.5
Example
With the “rewiring” function, you can rename operands as
follows:
– automatically, based on an assignment list or
– manually, based on a list of changes you have created.
“Rewiring” is a term going back to the days of hardwired
systems and is synonymous with “rename operands”.
You want to assign different (new) addresses to one or more
operands within the user program.
The rewiring function ensures that these operands are renamed in
the entire user program and you only need to input the
assignment once for each operand in a list. You can decide
whether to address the operands in symbolic or absolute form.
These operands belong to the types input I, output Q, flag F, timer
T or counter C. “S” flags are not taken into account.
You can change the addresses but cannot change the symbol for
an operand.
Blocks in which no operands have been changed are stored by
STEP 5 unchanged in the “new” program file so that the structure
of the user program remains the same.
To transfer the structure of the user program unchanged, the data
blocks must be transferred separately to the new file.
You have entered the following operands in the block:
I 1.0 (with the symbol –MOTOR) and I 1.5 (with the symbol
–SWITCH).You want to assign the new address I 1.5 to input
I 1.0. STEP 5 “rewires” this input (changes the address) in the
required blocks or in the entire user program. If the operands in
the “new” blocks have symbolic names, the symbol –SWITCH
will be output instead of the symbol –MOTOR.
Note
If you replace I1.0 → I20.0, IB/EW1 does not become IB/IW20.
3-264
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Management
Automatic
Rewiring using the
Assignment List
Management
Rewire
Automatic
How to Rewire
Operands
With this function you can rename operands automatically based
on a modified or new assignment list.
You copy the assignment list (symbols file) belonging to the user
program and then change the addresses of the operands in this list
as required.
The PG uses this “new” assignment list as a reference list to
recognize the changed operands in the entire “old” user program
(or in individual blocks) automatically and to store the rewired
operands in the second program file as a “new” user program.
The “old” user program is retained. You can change any number
of operands.
Make a copy of the assignment list and change the operands to be
rewired.
After you call the automatic rewiring function, STEP 5 displays
the relevant job box (→ Graphical user interface, Job box).
The name of the user program in which you want to rename
operands is displayed in the program file field. Enter the names
of the “new” files to be created as a result of the modification in
the “to program file:” field and enter the file name of the copy of
the assignment list in the “with new symbols file:” field.
If you only want to rename operands in certain blocks, type in the
block list under “Selection” or mark all blocks of one type or all
blocks.
After you click on OK, STEP 5 displays a list of the files affected
by the renaming function either on the screen, printer or to a file.
Error?
If an error occurs during the renaming, the block currently being
processed is not transferred to the new program file and a
message displayed to this effect.
To Stop the
Function
Press ESC = Cancel.
The PG does not store the block currently being processed.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-265
3.5
Management
Manual Rewiring
with a Modification
List
Management
Rewire
Manual
With this function you can rename operands in an operand list
displayed on the screen.
Apart from the new operand addresses, you must also specify a
name for the “new” user program.
After you have selected the manual rewiring function, the PG
displays the relevant job box on the screen (→ Graphical user
interface, Job box).
The name of the user program in which you want to rename
operands is displayed in the “program file:” field. Enter the
names of the “new” files created as a result of this modification
in the “to program file:” field.
After you click on OK, STEP 5 displays the empty table “Manual
rewiring” in which you enter the operands in the old and new
program file on the screen.
This list can contain up to 16 operands with the old and new
address in absolute representation (Fig. 3-64).
Complete each entry with the Return key.
Manual r e w i r i n g
3.5
SIMATIC S5 / PDS03
Old program file : C:[email protected]@ST.S5D
New program file :
Old operand: I 1.1
New operand:
I
C:[email protected]@ST.S5D
Old operand: Q 7.5
New operand:
Q 3.5
Old operand: -MOTOR
New operand:
F 6.6
1.3
Figure 3-64 Operand List for Manual Rewiring (Example)
After editing the modified operand addresses, complete your
input with the Insert key.
STEP 5 now renames the operands and displays the name of the
block being processed in the “Manual rewiring” screen form
(Fig. 3-65).
3-266
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Management
When you input the operands, STEP 5 checks each completed
input field immediately for syntax errors and displays the
message “syntax wrong” if an error is detected.
Printout
If you select “output on printer” in the selection box, STEP 5
prints out a list of the renamed operands after you press the Insert
key. This list contains the addresses “old/new”, the number of
operands renamed in the block affected in conjunction with the
length information from the block header.
Error messages indicate the operand for which an error was
detected. Following an error, STEP 5 aborts the rewiring
function.
Manual r e w i r i n g
Old program file:
Old operand:
Old operand:
PB1
Number of rewirings:
PB2
Number of rewirings:
PB7
Number of rewirings:
OB1
OB1
Number of rewirings:
SIMATIC S5 / PES03
page 1
C:[email protected]@ST.S5D
Q 1.2
I 6.3
New program file:
New operand:
New operand:
LENGTH =
C:[email protected]@ST.S5D
Q 1.1
I 7.5
29
0
1
LENGTH =
8
LENGTH =
11
3
3.5
LENGTH =
34
Block already exists ! = overwrite?
0
Figure 3-65 Printout Following Manual Rewiring (Example)
To Stop the
Function
Press ESC = Cancel
The PG does not store the block currently being processed.
Error?
If an error occurs during rewiring, the block in which the error
occurs is not transferred to the “new” program file and a message
is displayed to this effect.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-267
Management
3.5.4
Assignment Lists
Management
Assignment lists
Convert SEQ –> INI
Convert INI –> SEQ
Correct INI
Convert V1.x V2.x
Delete SEQ
Delete INI
Output error list
3.5
With this function you process the assignment lists required to
address operands symbolically in your user programs.
The following functions are available:
– Translation of a sequential source file into a symbols file
(*Z0.SEQ → *Z0.INI).
– Translation of a symbols file into a sequential source file
sorted according to absolute operands or symbolic
operands (*Z0.INI → *Z0.SEQ) with or without sorting
the operands.
– Fast correction of the assignment list directly in the
translated symbols file (*Z0.INI).
– Translation of an old symbols file into a sequential source
file (Convert stage V1.x V2.x).
– Deleting a sequential source file with the corresponding
error file.
– Deleting a symbols file.
– Outputting the list of translation errors (error file).
In the PLC, operands are only processed with absolute addresses.
As a result, the assignment of a “symbolic address” to an
“absolute address” (e.g. button 1 → I 1.1) always requires an
assignment list with a symbols file (*Z0.INI) derived from it.
Editing an
Assignment List
How to edit an assignment list is described in Section 3.3.12.
The source file (*Z0.SEQ) generated following editing, is
converted into three symbols files (*Z0.INI, *Z1.INI, *Z2.INI)
following translation.
Generating Symbols
Files
The symbols files are generated automatically by STEP 5 after
you call the function “Convert SEQ → INI” or when you edit the
assignment list.
Processing in the
PLC
To translate the user program so that it is suitable for the PLC
when it is loaded, only the symbols files are required.
3-268
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Management
Converting
SEQ → INI
Management
Assignment lists
Convert SEQ –> INI
Converting
INI → SEQ
Management
Assignment lists
Convert INI –> SEQ
C79000-G8576-C820-01
With this function, you translate the sequential source file into the
corresponding symbols file.
After selecting “Convert SEQ → INI”, STEP 5 displays a job box
in which you type in the name of the source file to be translated,
if it is not already displayed.
After you click on OK, the file is translated.
If you have included absolute operands without corresponding
symbolic operands in the sequential source file, the message
“Accept absolute operand as symbol?” is displayed.
Acknowledge this message either with yes or no.
If the conversion is error-free, the message “n lines processed, no
error found” is displayed which you confirm with OK.
If errors occur during the conversion, the message “n lines
processed, x errors found” is displayed. Once again acknowledge
this message with OK.
With this function, the symbols file is converted to the
corresponding sequential source file, sorted according to absolute
or symbolic operands as you require.
After you select the function “Convert INI → SEQ”, STEP 5
displays a job box in which you type in the name of the symbols
file to be translated and specify how the source file is to be
sorted.
After clicking on OK, the file is translated.
The translation is completed with the message “n lines processed,
no errors found” which must be acknowledged with OK.
3-269
3.5
Management
Correcting
Assignments in
the Symbols File
Management
Assignment lists
Correct INI
With this function, you can correct individual assignments in long
assignment lists (avoiding long translation times required for all
the assignments).
After selecting the function “Correct INI”, STEP 5 displays a job
box in which you can type in the name of the symbols file to be
corrected if the name you require is not already displayed.
After clicking on OK, the following box is displayed:
Symbols file:
C:PROEXAZ0.INI
Operand
Symbol
Comment
Operand assignment:
Symbol assignment:
3.5
Inputting the
Assignment Line
3-270
F
F
F
F
F
F
1 Insert
2 Display
3Del abs
4Del sym
5 Opt symf
6
Below the three terms “Operand - Symbol - Comment” there is
an input line. Here, you type in a new assignment in the symbols
file.
The cursor is positioned at the beginning of the input line. The
input line is edited in the “overwrite” mode.
– The DEL key deletes the character marked by the cursor.
– The horizontal expand key inserts a blank at the cursor
position.
– With the roll screen (up and down) keys you can alternate
between input and display lines.
– The Return key and the TAB key move the cursor one
input field to the right.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Management
When editing the assignments in the symbols file, STEP 5 makes
the following functions available with the function keys.
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Function
F1 = Insert
F2 = Display
F3 = Del abs
F4 = Del sym
F5 = Opt symf
F8 = Return
Explanation
The assignment in the input line is entered
providing the operand address is not assigned.
Otherwise, the error message: “Key already
exists” is displayed.
The assignment to the absolute or symbolic
parameter is displayed if this exists in the
symbol file. The display remains on the
screen until you press F2 again.
The assignment belonging to the absolute
parameter (operand) in the input line is
deleted from the symbols file. If the
assignment is not defined, an error message is
displayed.
The assignment belonging to the symbolic
parameter in the input line is deleted from the
symbols file. If the assignment is not defined,
an error message is displayed.
The assignment list is optimized.
After modifications in the symbols file,
STEP5 prompts you to confirm that the
source file (Z0.SEQ) should be generated. If
you want to generate the source file, press the
Insert key, otherwise terminate with NO.
1. If you want to insert a new operand in the symbols file,
type in a free absolute and symbolic address and the operand
comment and press F1 = Insert.
2. If you want to rename the absolute address of an existing
operand,
type in the relevant operand and delete its absolute address
with F3 = Del abs. Now overwrite the operand with its new
address and press F1.
3. If you want to change the symbolic address of an existing
operand,
proceed as described under 2), but delete with F4 = Del sym.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-271
3.5
Management
Converting Stage
V1.x V2.x
Management
Assignment lists
Convert stage
V1.x, V2.x
The byte address of an absolute parameter in the “old”
assignment list of the S5-DOS software V1.x and V2.x under
PCP/M is three bytes long. In STEP 5 under S5-DOS/ST/MT, the
byte address is four bytes long owing to the introduction of new
flags (S). For this reason, the “old” symbols file must be
translated to a “new” source file before you can work with it.
Assignment lists created with V3.x do not need to be converted.
Type in the name of the sequential source file in the displayed job
box. When you click on OK, the file is translated.
During the translation, a message is displayed on the screen.
If you have specified absolute operands without corresponding
symbolic operands in the sequential source file, a message is
displayed. Acknowledge the message to suit your requirements.
Deleting SEQ
Management
Assignment lists
Delete SEQ
3.5
3-272
With this function you can delete a sequential source file.
At the same time, the error list assigned to the file is also deleted.
After you trigger the function “Delete SEQ”, STEP 5 displays a
job box in which you type in the name of the source file to be
deleted if it is not already displayed.
After clicking on OK, the *SEQ files are deleted.
On completion of the function, the deleted files are listed on the
screen.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Management
Deleting INI
With this function, you delete the symbols files (*Z0.INI,
*Z1.INI and *Z2.INI).
After selecting the function “Delete INI”, STEP 5 displays a job
box in which you type in the name of the symbols file to be
deleted if this is not already displayed.
After clicking on OK, the symbols files are deleted. On
completion of the function the deleted files are listed on the
screen.
Management
Assignment lists
Delete INI
Outputting the
Error List
STEP 5 collects the error messages occurring during one of the
following translations.
– Translation of the sequential file *Z0.SEQ into the
symbols files (*Z0.INI, *Z1.INI, *Z2.INI)
– Retranslation of the symbols files into the sequential
source file (INI → SEQ).
After calling the function “Output error list” a job box is
displayed in which you type in the name of the error file
(*ZF.S5D) to be output, i.e. the name of the program file but with
the extension *ZF.S5D.
Management
Assignment lists
Output error list
Example
File
After clicking on OK, STEP 5 displays the error file.
3.5
C:PROEXAZF.SEQ
Translation seq. file C:PROBSPZ0.SEQ => Symbols file C:PROEXAZ0.INI
***
F1.71
Error in line
6: Absolute parameter does not match OPID
***
susi
Error in line
7: Wrong operand identifier
***
8 lines processed,
2 errors found
***
***
***
Figure 3-66 Error List after Editing the Source File (Example)
An error message indicates the incorrectly assigned operand, the
location of the error and the error type.
Each time you translate the same sequential source file, STEP 5
automatically overwrites the previously stored error list. The file
is also generated if no error occurs.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-273
Management
3.5.5
Selecting a Drive
Management
Select drive
Using this function, you select the drives in which STEP 5
searches for files with S5 system blocks. The selected drive
(marked with an asterisk) from which STEP 5 is currently active
is displayed but cannot be changed.
The “drives” selection box is displayed. The cursor flashes on the
specified drive. You can move the cursor with cursor left or
cursor right. After you have selected a drive with F3, you must
save the setting with F6.
3.5.6
Bus paths
Management
Bus paths
Online connections between programmers and the modules of the
PLC are not only established by direct connecting cables
(point-to-point connection) but also via the bus systems SINEC
H1, SINEC L1 or SINEC L2 and the PLC bus (with the
S5-155U).
You can create, store and activate these connections with the “bus
paths” function. When editing, STEP 5 supports you graphically.
– With this function, you edit and activate paths.
Paths are permanent connections from a PLC to a station. Via
this path, you can perform all the programming functions according to the protocol just as with a direct point-to-point connection.
3.5
A path consists of the following:
start node. (e.g. PG/AS511, PG/CP-H1. PG/CP-L2),
bus (1 or more)
nodes (e.g. CP),
end nodes (e.g. CPU)
– You edit and store station addresses in the offline mode.
– An edited path is stored under a path name (→ Project, settings) and this can be activated at any time provided it exists
physically.
3-274
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Management
– You can store several paths with their path names in a selectable path file (→ Project, settings) and activate a path using its
name.
– The establishment (activation) of a path is supported. This is,
however, only possible in the online mode.
– The termination (deactivation) of a path is supported by this
function.
You can assign 4 files to each path:
Program files....ST.S5D
Symbols files....ZO.INI
Printer files....DR.INI
Footer files....F1.INI or ....F2.INI
These file names are saved along with the path in the path file.
The assignment does not affect existing files. You can also assign
files that do not yet exist and that you will create later. By
assigning files to a path, you do not change the project settings.
To set these files in the current project, you must select the path
in the project settings (set the path option to always or
confirmation).
PG/AS51
Path name: EXAMP1
3.5
KOR/MUX
CP-H1
Address: 0
CP-H1
Ethernet
address: 080006010000
Password:
SINEC H1
ENDP
Figure 3-67 Example of an Edited Path
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-275
Management
3.5
Settings
The AS511 interface must be set.
For more information about settings refer to → Project.
Operation
After selecting the “Bus Paths” function, the selection box
“Select function/presets” is displayed. If you have not yet made
these settings (→ Project), you can set the following:
– path file
– path name
Editing (Files for
the Path)
After selecting the Files function, the four file entries for the
current path are displayed. You can edit these and save them
again. You can enter any file names you wish. With a new path or
after deleting the file entries, only the file name extensions are
displayed.
Key level
1
2
Explanation
F3
Select
The “file selection” box is displayed. This lists the existing files of the various
types (depending on the cursor position). You can select one of these and activate it with OK
Cursor on the “Path name” input field
A box is displayed containing all the paths in the selected path file. You can
activate the path marked by the cursor with OK.
Delete
Shift
F3
F4
The four file entries for the path are deleted. No existing files are modified, but rather the assignment between the path and the files is cancelled.
F1 F2
If the cursor is located in the input line for the footer file, you can
change over between footer files ...F1.INI (80 characters wide) and
...F2.INI (132 characters wide). If you call the function F3 = Select,
footer files corresponding to the current setting are listed.
F7
Enter
You buffer the file entries made up to now and return to the menu.
The file entries are only saved in the path file when you save the path.
F8
Cancel
Cancels the editing and you return to the menu. All changes you have
made are discarded.
3-276
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Management
Setting Bus Paths
Key level
The inputs you can make in the “Select function/presets”
selection box are described in the following table (example, see
page 3-281).
Explanation
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1
2
F1
Edit:
The path editor is started. You can now edit the bus path in the working
field displayed. The softkeys are assigned a new function. Owing to the
wide range of functions of the bus editor, you will find detailed information from page 3- 272 onwards.
F2
Print
You branch to the “documentation” function level.
F3
Dir:
Prints the (path) directory of the specified “path file”.
F4
All paths:
Prints all the path names in the specified “path file”.
F5
Cur path
Prints the currently set path in the “path file”.
F8
Return:
Returns to the last menu (select function).
3.5
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-277
Management
Key level
1
Explanation
2
F3
Select:
Cursor positioned on the “path file” input field.
The file selection box is displayed. This lists all the path files. You can
select a path from this list and enter it with OK.
Cursor on the “path file” input field.
A box is displayed listing all the paths in the set path file. You can enter
the path marked by the cursor with OK.
F4
Set up:
With this function, the set path is displayed. You can correct through to the
end point step by step using the function F3 = Next n(ode) or in one step
(F5 “all n(odes”). Selected nodes are marked by “*”. With the CPs (H1,
L2 and L1) you can read out the system identification with F1 (n SYSID).
This data cannot be modified.
F5
Terminate:
The connection set up with F4 is terminated in the order determined by the
path.
F6
Delete:
The path name is deleted in the selected path file.
F8
Return:
Return to the last menu. You exit the bus path function.
3.5
Editing Bus Paths
3-278
F1
This starts the bus path editing function. Here, you have two
possibilities:
1. The path name exists.
The path is displayed in the path field. You can delete the
nodes one by one using F7, beginning with the last node. Use
the softkeys to insert new nodes.
2. You are creating a new path.
By specifying selectable nodes one after the other you can
create a path to suit your system. If you select an unsuitable
path configuration, the message “not pref. path” is displayed.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Management
Note
The path is set up even if the message “not pref. path” appears.
Siemens, however, cannot guarantee that such path will function.
Selecting Nodes
If you press one of the function keys displayed in the menu, a
corresponding node is displayed graphically. You then change to
a new function key level. Here, you can select a further node or
bus. Within these function key levels, only nodes or buses
suitable for the configuration you have selected are available.
Node addresses:
Each node has an address assigned either by jumper or switch
settings or assigned using the software. The bus editor recognizes
two node addresses:
Address (KOR/MUX, SINEC L1 and SINEC L2). When you
edit, you must type in the address in decimal in the “address
field”.
– KOR/MUX address from 1 to 30.
– SINEC L1 address from 1 to 30
– SINEC L2 address from 1 to 31
Ethernet address. This only occurs with SINEC H1 bus
3.5
system, it must be entered in hexadecimal.
Start Node
You can select the following start nodes at the highest key level
of the editor:
F2
PG/AS511
F3
PG/CP-H1.
F4
PG/CP-L2
In this editing mode, the PLC bus and end
node PG/CP-H1 can be selected.
During editing, these start nodes are not dependent on the set
interface. The functions of the softkeys from now on depend in
part on the start node you have selected.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-279
Management
Function Keys
In the editing mode (F1) the function keys are assigned as
follows for all function levels:
Function
F1 = ENDP
Explanation
Add the end node (end point).
F2 = KOR-MUX
F3 = CP-H1
Add a bus of the type AS511.
Add a node of the type CP-H1.
F3 = PLC-BUS
Add a bus of the type PLC bus (backplane bus).
This is only possible with the S5-155U.
End node of the type PG/CP-L2.
Add a node of the type CP-L2.
Add an end node of the type PG/CP-H1.
F3 = PG/CP-L2
F4 = CP-L2
F4 = PG/CP-H1
F5 = CP-L1
F6 = Enter
Add a node of the type CP-L1.
The edited path is stored. The selection box
displays “save path as”.
1. Here, specify a path file and a path
name. The path is stored in the path file
(press F6). Here, you select a path file.
2. With F3 and the cursor on the “path
file” input field, the selection box “file
selection box” is displayed with all its
path files.
3. With F3 and the cursor on the “path
3.5
F7 = Del elem
3-280
name” input field, a selection
box is displayed containing all the paths
in the selected path file. Here, you can
select a path name.
Deletes the last node and/or bus from the path.
F8 = Spec fct
This function is for paths created with STEP5
stage 5. Entries in the displayed “function info”
have no effect.
SHIFT F8 = Help
Displays information about the functions of the
softkeys at the current level.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Management
Editing a path.
You want to create the following path:
Editing Example
CP-H1
Addr.2
PG/AS511
CP-H1
Ethernet
address: 080006010001
ENDP
KOR/MUX with address 7
Ready to Start?
The AS511 interface is set.
You have selected the function “Management, Bus paths”.
Operation
The “select function/presets” box is displayed.
1. Specify the path file.
2. Type in a new path name.
3. Press F1 = Edit.
An empty working field is displayed along with the following
softkeys:
F2 = PG/AS511
F3 = PG/CP-H1
F4 = PG/CP-L2
4. Press F2 = PG/AS511.
The start node is displayed and the softkeys are assigned new
functions.
PG/AS511
F
1
F
F
2 KOR/MUX 3 CP-H1
Path name : EXAMP1
F
4 CP-L2
F
5 CP-L1
F
6
5. Press F2 = KOR/MUX
The KOR/MUX bus is added and the softkeys are assigned
new functions.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-281
3.5
Management
6. Press F3 = CP-H1
The CP-H1 node with the SINEC H1 bus is added and the
softkeys are assigned new functions.
7. Press F3 = CP-H1
The CP-H1 node is added and the softkeys are assigned new
functions.
8. You can now type in the MUX address, the Ethernet address
and if required the password. Move the cursor to these fields
using the cursor down key.
9. Press F1 = ENDP
The end point, i.e. the destination of the bus connection, is
added. New function key functions are displayed. The screen
should appear as follows when the path is complete.
PG/AS511
KOR/MUX
Path name : EXAMP1
CP-H1
Address : 0
CP-H1
Ethernet
address : 08000601000
Password:
SINEC H1
ENDP
3.5
The path must now be stored.
10. Press F7 = Enter.
If the file name is new, a box appears in which you once again
have the opportunity of changing the name.
11. Press F7 = Enter.
The path is stored in the path file and you can activate it at
any time.
3-282
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
3.6
Documentation
The documentation menu provides a range of functions with
which you can output program sections such as blocks, files and
lists on a printer (A3, A4) or to a file, e.g.
– program blocks, data blocks, lists, structures
– text files (ASCII files)
In addition to this, it is also possible to evaluate certain data
according to different criteria, e.g.
– output the cross reference list according to selected
operands
– output the assignment list sorted according to symbolic
operands
If the screen display covers more than one page, the prompt
“Continue? yes/no” is superimposed on the screen. You can clear
this box from the screen with the space bar.
You can add a footer to the bottom of each printout. Outputs are
either printed out or are directed to a file.
You can make hardcopies of the screen at any time. Once again,
these can be printed out or stored in an ASCII file.
The following functions can be selected:
Preparing for printing (settings)
3.6
You set the printer parameters and footer
Standard output
The program sections are output in the form in which you
edited them and with a footer if you have selected this
function. The data can be output either from the program file
or from the PLC.
Enhanced output
The program sections are printed out with additional graphical
elements (lines, boxes etc.) and a footer. This data can only be
output from the program file and not directly from the PLC.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-283
Documentation
Doc command
All the functions of the enhanced output can be executed by
doc commands which you edit and store in files. Using these
commands, you can run frequently recurring outputs without
laborious input routines. Some doc commands can be used to
call further doc command files achieving a sequential
structure. This can be represented graphically with the “Edit
structure” function.
Getting to Know the
Functions
3.6.1
This chapter is structured so that the possible inputs and
selections are explained for the various functions, whereas the
key functions themselves are described extra in a separate section
(→ Graphical user interface, Job box).
To get to know the documentation functions quickly, we
recommend the following procedure:
1. Familiarize yourself with the key functions described in
→ Graphical user interface.
2. The inputs required for each individual function are explained
in this chapter. If you are familiar with the key functions, you
will then find it easy to activate these functions.
Standard Output
Documentation
3.6
Standard output
Program structure
STEP 5 blocks
Data blocks
DB screen forms >
Assignment list
XRF list
I/Q/F list
Three-in-one
3-284
With this function, you can output program sections in their basic
form (as you edited them) either on a printer (A3, A4) to files or
on the screen. You can decide whether to output from the
program file or from the PLC. You can output the following
program sections:
→ program structure
→ STEP5 blocks
→ data blocks
→ DB screen forms
You can also output the following lists:
→ assignment list
→ XRF list
→ I/Q/F list
→ three-in-one (all three lists at once)
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Note
For standard output, no cross reference list (file *XR.INI) is
necessary.
You can output this information both from a program file as well
as from a PLC. In this case, the PLC type and CPU ID must also
be specified in the selection boxes.
Example of a
Printout
The following example in the LAD method of representation
(PB1, segment 1) contains a STEP 5 block in its basic form, i.e.
the blocks are printed out as you edited them. If you select
enhanced output, further graphical information is added to the
printout. The footer is not illustrated.
PB 1
C:EXA4095ST.S5D
LEN=27
Page 1
Segment 1
Segment title PB 1 Seg 1
Segment comment PB 1, Seg 1
07.04.92
!I 1.2 I 1.1
Q 1.1
+-––] [---+---]/[---+-------+-------+-------+-------+-------+---( )-!
!
:BE
3.6
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-285
Documentation
Operation
Once you have selected the functions for outputting program
sections and lists, a job box is displayed with a structure similar
to that for standard functions (→ Graphical user interface, Job
box).
Print STEP5 block(s)
Program file : C:EXA409ST.S5D
Selection
( X ) block list : [
or all:
(
(
) PB
) PC
(
(
) FB
) FC
]
(
(
) FX (
) FCX (
) OB
) OC
Segment number: from [ 1 ] to [ 255 ]
Output on/to
( X ) printer
( ) file
Name: [ E: NONAMELS.INI]
< OK >
< F3=select >
(
(
) SB
) SC
(
) all blocks
Printout
( X ) Standard
( ) Condensed with margin
( ) Super condensed print; DIN A4
< ShiftF8=Help >
< ESC=cancel >
Figure 3-68 Example of a Job Box
3.6
Program Structure
Documentation
Standard output
Program structure
3-286
With this function, you can output the call structure (program
overview) of the individual blocks in a user program. You can
output the program overview from the program file or from the
PLC. The output is in three parts:
1. List of all blocks (including symbolic names if they exist)
including the length, number of words of the individual
blocks.
2. List of all block types in the program file, with the length of
each block type.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
3. Program overview in which the nested calls (nesting depth
maximum 8 block calls) of the individual blocks starting with
the block type OB is specified. With each block, a further ID
is output as follows:
–
Block is called unconditionally
=
Block is called conditionally
#
Block call follows a BO DW or DO FW operation
(indirect addressing)
?
Block call as formal operand An actual operand can
be output as a constant or as MC 5 machine code.
???????
The called block does not exist in the program file
!F113!
There are further block calls that cannot be
represented (nesting depth too great)
!F114!
Recursive block call, e.g. calling an OB in a PB
You can display the structure on the screen and output it to a
printer or to a file.
Settings
Operation
C79000-G8576-C820-01
The following must be set:
– program file
– symbols file (only when “symbols:yes” is set)
– footer file (only if a footer is required)
– mode (online when you want to output from the PLC)
– printer file (the PT88 is the default printer)
Information about making settings can be found in → Project.
The job box “Output program overview” is displayed. Here, you
can make your selections (→ Graphical user interface).
3-287
3.6
Documentation
Example
Standard output of a program structure with data blocks.
Program overview with D B
:
1
PB
:
2
PB
:
3
PB
:
12
PB
:
10
FB
:
1
OB
:
10
DB
Length : PB
64
Length : SB
0
Length : FB
50
Length : FX
0
Length : OB
13
Length : DB
28
Length : DX
0
Length :
155
P r o g r a m
+–OB 1– +=PB
I
I
I
I.
.
o v e r v i e w
w i t h
Page 1
Length
Length
Length
Length
Length
Length
Length
D B
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
9
21
9
25
50
13
28
Page
2
1– +DB 10–
I
+=PB 3–+FB 10
I
I.
.
Figure 3-69 Program Overview with DB
STEP 5 Blocks
3.6
Documentation
With this function, you can output the blocks of a program file or
from the PLC memory in the LAD, CSF or STL method of
representation. You can also output the blocks to a file or printer.
Standard output
STEP 5 blocks
Settings
3-288
The following must also be set:
– program file
– footer file (only if a footer is required)
– symbols file (only when “symbols: yes” is set)
– mode (online when you want to output from the PLC)
– printer file (the defaults apply to the PT88)
For more information about settings, refer to → Project.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Operation
The job box “Print STEP 5 block(s)” is displayed. Here, you can
make your selections (→ Graphical user interface). In the
following table only the inputs for this function are explained.
Input field
Segment number
from
to
STL address
rep.
None
Byte oriented
Word oriented
Data Blocks
Documentation
Explanations
Output segment numbers from n
to n from
a program block.
Only when STL is selected:
select the type
of address information.
No addresses in the printout.
Statement address output in byte
Statement address output in
words.
With this function, you can either output individual or all the data
blocks of a program.
Standard output
Data blocks
Example of an
output
”With comments” was selected in the “settings”.
DB 10
C:EXAXXXST.S5D
0:
1:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
KH = 0000;
KS = ’DB 10 for S5 90 ’;
KT = 010.1;
KT = 020.1;
KC = 010;
KC = 020;
KM = 00000000 00000000
KM = 00000000 00000000
KF = +00010;
KF = +00020;
KH = 0000;
KH = 0000;
LEN=25
Variables
Block for S590
Actuator
/16
Page 1
Bit pattern 1
Bit pattern 2
Figure 3-70 Example of Data Block Output
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-289
3.6
Documentation
Settings
The following must also be set:
– program file
– comments
– footer file (only if a footer is required)
– mode (online when you want to output from the PLC)
– printer file (the defaults apply to the PT88)
For more information about settings, refer to → Project.
Operation
The job box “Print STEP 5 data block(s)” is displayed. Here, you
can make your selections (→ Graphical user interface, Job box).
Here, only the inputs specific to this function are explained.
DB Screen Forms
With this function, you can output data blocks containing screen
forms.
The following must be set:
– program file
– footer file (only if a footer is required)
– mode (online when you want to output from the PLC)
– printer file (the defaults apply to the PT88)
For more information about settings, refer to → Project.
Documentation
Standard output
DB screen forms
Operation
The job box “DB SCREEN FORMS: print blocks” is displayed.
Here, you can make your selections (→ Graphical user interface,
Job box).
3.6
3-290
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Assignment List
With this function, you output an assignment list.
Documentation
Standard output
Assignment list
Example of an
Output
File C:EXA409Z0.SEQ
Operand
I 1.1
I 1.2
I 1.3
I 2.1
.
.
.
Symbol
INP 1
INP 2
INP 3
S 2–1
.
.
.
Comment
Input 1.1
Input 1.2
Input 1.3
Input 2.1
.
.
.
Figure 3-71 Example: Output of an Assignment List
Settings
The following must be set:
– footer file (only if a footer is required)
– printer file (the defaults apply to the PT88)
For more information about settings, refer to → Project.
Operation
The job box “Print SYMBOLS:SEQ file” is displayed. Here, you
can make your selections (→ Graphical user interface, Job box).
XRF List
With this function, you output a cross reference list from an
existing program file.
The following information is provided:
– cross references to operand areas I, Q, F, T, C. S flags are
not output in the cross reference list.
cross references to data
cross references to I/Os
cross references to block calls
– cross references to individual symbolic or absolute
operands (e.g. –MOTOR, I1.0)
You cannot specify a single operand only for a single
block.
Documentation
Standard output
XRF list
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-291
3.6
Documentation
The cross reference list contains
– the blocks processed
– the cross references sorted according to operand, symbolic
name, the blocks and segments and an identifier (see
table).
Cross reference list: flags
F
F
32.1 -Flag321
32.2 -Flag322
F
33.3 -Flag333
Operand
Symbolic name
Block
PB 1
PB 1
PB 2
PB 1
Block no.
1*,
1 ,
1
3*,
2,
2,
4
5,
7?
4 ,
5,
6*
Operand as
assignment
Segment no.
Operand
as scan
3.6
3-292
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
The significance of the “identifier” beside the segment is as
follows:
Identifier
Settings
Explanation
”Blank”
The operand occurs as a scan (e.g.: -A I 1.0)
*
The operand occurs as an assignment (e.g.: Q
1.1).
?
The operand occurs as a parameter for an FB call.
An actual operand can be output as a constant or
as MC 5 code.
#
The operand follows DO FW or DO DW
operations (indirect addressing).
S
The operand is addressed in a standard function
block.
!
The operand is addressed in a standard function
and in a user block.
^
Operand references continued.
The following must be set:
– program file
– symbols file (only if symbols are selected in the presets)
3.6
– footer file (only if a footer is required)
– mode (online when you want to output from the PLC)
– printer file (the defaults apply to the PT88)
Operation
C79000-G8576-C820-01
After you call the “XRF list” function, the “Output cross
reference list” job box is displayed. Here, you can make your
selections
(→ Job box). In the following table only the inputs specific to
this function are explained.
3-293
Documentation
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input field
Explanations
Cross reference list
I/Q/F list
Documentation
Standard output
I/Q/F list
3.6
3-294
all elements
All elements (operands) are
listed in the order I, Q, F, S, T,
C, B, P, D on one page.
Flags, data block, inputs,
timers, I/Os, outputs,
counters, block calls
A cross reference list is only
output for these elements.
Single operand
Indicates the occurrence of an
operand in all blocks. If you
only specify a single block, an
error message is displayed. F3 =
Select is not possible in this
situation.
With this function, you output an I/Q/F list on the screen, on a
printer or to a file. The I/Q/F list takes the form of a table and
provides you with an overview of which bit is occupied in the I,
Q, F, operand areas. One line is reserved for every two bytes of
an operand area, in which the 8 possible bits are marked.
– a byte (B)
– a word (W)
– a double word (D)
(see Fig. 3-72)
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Meaning of the identifiers in an I/Q/F list:
Identifier
Explanation
”Blank”
The operand is addressed as a byte, word or
double word operation and not as a bit operation.
–
The operand is not addressed.
X
A bit operation is performed on the operand.
#
The operand follows DO FW or DO DW
operations.
S
The operand is addressed in a standard function
block.
?
The operand occurs as a parameter of an FB call.
!
The operand is addressed in a standard FB and in
a user FB.
Page 1
I / Q / F list:
PB
PB
PB
PB
FB
OB
1
2
3
12
10
1
:
:
:
:
:
:
Processed
Processed
Processed
Processed
Processed
Processed
Page 2
I / Q / F list
Inputs in program
! 7 6 5 4 3 2 1! 0 B W
! D
!
!
!
Byte 0!
!
!
Byte 2!
!
XX !
Byte 4!
!
X !
!
Byte 6!
!
Byte 8!
!
!
!
Byte 10!
!
!
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
! 7 6 5 4 3 2 1! 0 B W
! D
!
!
!
1!
!
!
!
3!
!
!
5!
!
!
7!
!
9!
!
!
!
11!
!
!
Figure 3-72 Example of a Standard I/Q/F List
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-295
3.6
Documentation
Settings
The following must be set:
– program file
– footer file (only if a footer is required)
– mode (online when you want to output from the PLC)
– printer file (the defaults apply to the PT88)
For more information about settings, refer to → Project.
Operation
The job box “Display I/Q/F list” is displayed. Here, you can
make your selections (→ Graphical user interface).
Three-in-one
With this function, you trigger a multifunction job in which
Documentation
Standard output
Three-in -one
Settings
– program overview
– I/Q/F list
– XRF list
are output one after the other without interruption, either on the
screen, to the printer or to a file.
The following must be set:
– program file
– symbols (if you require symbolic representation)
– footer file (only if you require a footer)
– mode (online when you want to output from the PLC)
– printer file (the defaults apply to the PT88)
For more information about settings, refer to → Project.
3.6
Operation
The job box “Execute three-in-one” is displayed. Here, you can
make your selections (→ Graphical user interface, Job box).
Note
For standard output, no cross reference list (file *XR.INI) is
necessary.
3-296
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
3.6.2
Enhanced Output
Documentation
Enhanced output
Program sections
Reference data
Text files
Doc commands
The “enhanced output” function, previously also known as
KOMDOK allows you to document STEP 5 and GRAPH 5
programs in detail and for the most part automatically (using doc
commands). In contrast to the standard output, program data can
be sorted and evaluated and also prepared in a graphical form.
Output is also possible with continuous lines (see Figure 3-73 and
Figure 3-74). You can print on either A3 or A4 paper. The
printout on A4 paper is a compressed form of the A3 printout.
The objects to be documented must be located on diskette or hard
disk. If you only have programs in the PLC memory, you must
first transfer them from the PLC to diskette or hard disk.
The main feature of the enhanced output is that you can use
→ Doc commands to control the printout with a minimum of
keystrokes. There are doc commands for all the functions of the
enhanced output. You can store doc commands in a selectable
file.
You can output or generate the following:
STEP 5 blocks and GRAPH 5 blocks with comments and
symbols in
– Ladder Diagram (LAD),
– Control System Flowchart (CSF)
– Statement List (STL)
– data blocks with comments
– documentation blocks.
As options, the following can be printed out for each segment:
– cross references
– diagnostic setpoint data.
→ Block list
→ Assignment list sorted according to various criteria
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-297
3.6
Documentation
→ Reference data such as program structure, cross reference
list, I/Q/F list or checklist from a program file
→ Text files (ASCII files)
→ Doc commands, which you can edit and store for each
function. The files containing the doc commands can be
nested with special calls in the files to provide you with a doc
command call structure. These call structures can be
displayed graphically.
You can select the printer setting in the → Settings, Printer
parameters before printing out.
Selecting the
Enhanced Functions
When you select the “enhanced output” function, a menu is
displayed in which you can select the following elements for
output:
Program sections → block lists, blocks, assignment lists
Reference data → program structure, cross references,
IQ/Flist, checklist.
Text files
Doc commands
3.6
3-298
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Example of a
Printout
The first printout illustrates enhanced output and the second is a
standard printout. Note the difference between the two.
Control System Flowchart
Block:
PB 1 Symbol: Garage Comment: Garage door control with buttons
Segment 1
0000
Lib no.: Length: 25
OPEN DOOR from inside or outside
Outside: Activate keyswitch and OPEN button briefly.
Inside: Press OPEN button briefly.
Door opens until upper limit switch is reached or HALT button is pressed.
-OPENout
-Lock
&
>=1
-OPEN-in
-opDOOR
-LIMtop
-EMERHALT
Operand
I
I
I
I
I
Q
1.2
1.5
1.0
0.0
1.4
1.0
&
0
0
OPEN button outside
OPEN button inside
Upper limit switch
HALT or EMER STOP button
Keyswitch outside
Door opened by motor
OPENout
OPENin
LIMtop
EMERHALT
Lock
opDOOR
DATE:
8.09.92
ACCEPT TEST:
K O M D O K / ST
S I E M E N S TEST:
NAME:
XYZ
VERSION:
V 4.0 (7.9.92)
KARLSRUHE
FOOTER:
KODOEMF2.INI
with DR211N
AUT E1 161 B
SIMATIC S5
-opDOOR
=
Operand comment
Symbolic operand
TEST SYSTEM:
PG 770
+
WITH PCP/M-EMULATOR
(V2.1, 8/92)
UNDER:
M S - D O S (V 5.0)
Block:
Program file:
A:GARAGEST.S5D PB 1
Segm:
1
FOR FM-NO.:
FOR PR-NO.:
3.6
PAGE
1
Figure 3-73 Enhanced Printout of a Control System Flowchart
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-299
Documentation
PB 1
-Garage
Segment 1
A: GARAGEST.S5D
0000
Lib No.: Length: 25
OPEN DOOR from inside or outside.
Outside: Activate keyswitch and OPEN briefly
Inside: Press OPEN button briefly.
Door opens until upper limit switch is reached or HALT button is pressed.
&
-OPENout
-Lock
>=1
-OPENin
-opDOOR
&
-LIMtop
-EMERHALT
I
I
I
I
I
Q
1.2
1.5
1.0
0.0
1.4
1.0
=
=
=
=
=
=
OPENout
OPENin
LIMtop
EMERHALT
Lock
opDOOR
0
0
+
8.09.92
ACCEPT TEST:
K O M D O K / ST
S I E M E N S
NAME:
XYZ
VERSION:
V 4.0 (7.9.92)
KARLSRUHE
TEST:
UNDER:
AUT E1 161 B
FOOTER:
KODOEMF2.INI
-OPDOOR
OPEN button outside
OPEN button inside
Upper limit switch
HALT or EMER STOP button
Keyswitch outside
Door opened by motor
DATE:
TEST SYSTEM:
PG 770
with DR211N
=
SIMATIC S5
WITH PCP/M-EMULATOR
(V2.1, 8/92)
M S - D O S (V 5.0)
Block:
Program file:
A:GARAGEST.S5D PB 1
Segm:
1
FOR FM-NO.:
FOR PR-NO.:
PAGE
1
3.6
Figure 3-74 Simple Printout of a Control System Flowchart
3-300
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Program Sections
Documentation
Enhanced output
Program sections
Blocks
DB 1 screens
Block list
Assignment list
Blocks
Documentation
Enhanced output
A menu is displayed, in which you can activate the output of the
following data:
→ Blocks
→ DB1 screens
→ Block lists
→ Assignment lists
This function prints out blocks in the LAD, CSF or STL methods
of representation with or without references, with or without
diagnostic setpoint data, in A3 or A4 format. You can also direct
the printout to a file (*LS.INI).
Program sections
Blocks
Settings
C79000-G8576-C820-01
The following must be set:
– program file
– footer file ( A3)
– symbols file (only when “symbols:yes” is set)
– XRF file (→ Generate XRF).
– printer file (the defaults apply to the PT88)
– method of representation
For more information about settings, refer to → Project.
3.6
3-301
Documentation
Operation
The job box “Documentation of blocks” is displayed. Here, you
can make your selections (→ Graphical user interface, Job box).
In the following table only the inputs specific to this function are
explained.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input
Explanations
Option
None
With forward and
backward refs.
Forward references:
If operands are assigned in the printed segment, the program
sections are also printed out in which the scans occur.
Backward references:
If outputs or flags are scanned in the printed segment, the program
sections are printed out in which the assignments occur.
A line in the printout contains as many cross references per
statement as permitted by the layout. The characters “>>>” at the
end of the line indicate that there are further cross references in the
program.
With diagnostic setpoint
data
Layout
Standard
Optional
3.6
DB1 Screens
Documentation
Enhanced output
Program sections
DB1 screens
Operation
3-302
If you press SHIFT F8 an example of a standard format is
displayed.
Only relevant in A3 format for the CSF method of representation
and for the data block list. The printout is similar to “standard
output” in A4 format (left CSF. right cross references).
This function prints out the data block with the I/O assignment in
A3 or A4 format. You can also output to a file (*LS.INI)
The following must be set:
– program file
– footer file ( A3)
– printer file
For more information about settings, refer to → Project.
The job box “DB1 Screens” is displayed. Here, you can make
your selections (→ Graphical user interface, Job box).
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Block List
Documentation
Enhanced output
Program sections
Block list
With this function, you can output a block list in A3 or A4 format
on paper or to a file (*LS.INI).
The list contains all the program and data blocks of the selected
program file.
You obtain the following information about the listed blocks:
– block type
– block number
– symbolic identifier (if you selected “symbols: yes”)
– operand comments
– block length
– LIB number
– documentation files with length information
– footer
Settings
The following files must also be set:
– program file
– symbols file (only when “symbols:yes” is set)
– footer file ( A3)
– printer file (the defaults apply to the PT89)
For more information about settings, refer to → Project.
Operation
Depending on the setting, a block list is printed out or output to
the selected file. While the block list is being generated, the
message
printout block list
is displayed. When this message disappears and if no error
message is displayed the function is complete and the block list is
output.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-303
3.6
Documentation
Assignment List
Documentation
Enhanced output
Program sections
Assignment list
Operation
You can output an assignment list as follows:
– in sequential form, as edited
– sorted according to absolute operands
– sorted according to symbolic operands.
The following files must also be set:
– symbols file
– footer file (A 3)
– printer file (the defaults apply to the PT89)
For more information about settings, refer to → Project.
The job box “Documentation assignment list” is displayed. Here,
you make your selections (→ Graphical user interface, Job box).
You can output the assignment list in the following modes:
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Inputs
Explanations
Standard output of the seq
file
Seq file sorted according to
absolute operands
Unsorted output. The symbols setting is not
relevant.
The output is sorted according to absolute
operands. A new page is started for each of these
operands which are output in the order I, Q, F, S,
T, C, B, P, D. “Symbols: yes” must be set.
The output is sorted according to symbolic
operands. A new page is started for each of these
operands which are output in the order I, Q, F, S,
T, C, B, P, D. “Symbols: yes” must be set.
Option
Seq file sorted according to
symbolic operands
3.6
Layout
Standard
Optional
If you press SHIFT F8 or the Help key, an
example of a standard format is displayed.
Only relevant in A3 format. Operation as
described above.
As soon as you exit the job box with OK, the following message
flashes on the screen:
Printout assignment list
If this message disappears, the function is completed and,
providing no error message has occurred, the assignment list is
output.
3-304
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Reference Data
Documentation
A menu is displayed, in which you can activate the output of the
following list and data:
Enhanced output
→ Program structure
Reference data
→ Cross reference list
Program structure
Cross reference list
I/Q/F list
I/Q/F list S flags
Program Structure
Documentation
Enhanced output
Program sections
Program structure
→ I/Q/F list
→ Checklist
This function outputs the block calls in a program file in A3 or
A4 format on paper or to a file (*LS.INI). The output has the
following conventions:
– The type of block call is specified before each block
– The block name is entered
in absolute form
and in symbolic form (only when you have selected
“symbols: yes” → Project).
– The maximum nesting depth that can be recorded is 9.
– You can output with or without data blocks.
The following calls are listed:
JU
Unconditional block call
DOU
Unconditional function block (FX) call
JC
Conditional block call
DOC
Conditional function block (FX) call
C
Data block call
CX
Data block (DX) call
G
Generate data block
GX
Generate data block (DX)
AI
Block as parameter (call formal operand)
#
Block call
*REC*
Recursive block call
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3.6
3-305
Documentation
Example of a
Printout
Program structure without data blocks
Level 1
OB 1
Org.blk. +_JU
Level 2
Level 3
PB 1
FB 10
PROG 1 +_JC
Data
+_DO
Level 5
DX 11
FX 11
+_CX
+_DOC
FX 20
DB 10
+_C
F-blk.
Level 4
Ext.FX +_GX
Ext DB
DB 16
DX 12
+_#
Ext DB
DB 14
+_AI
Data
Figure 3-75 Output of a Program Structure without DB
3.6
Settings
3-306
The following files must also be set:
– program file
– symbols file (only when “symbols:yes” is set)
– XRF file (→ Management, Generate XRF)
– footer file (A3)
– printer file (the defaults apply to the PT89)
For more information about settings, refer to → Project.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Operation
The job box “Documentation of program structure” is displayed
(→ Graphical user interface).
Input field
Program file
Structure from block
without DB calls
with DB calls
Output
Explanations
Cannot be selected here. Must be preset
(→ Project)
The structure of the program is output
starting from the specified block.
Data blocks are ignored in the structure.
Data blocks are included in the structure.
As in all job boxes.
As soon as you exit the job box with OK, the following message
flashes on the screen:
Printout program structure
When this message disappears and if no error message has
occurred, the function is completed and the program structure
output.
Cross Reference
List
Documentation
Enhanced output
Reference data
Cross reference list
With this function, you output cross references within the
program file according to certain criteria from an existing cross
reference list (*XR.INI).
The information is compiled:
– cross reference list according to operand IDs, e.g. B, I, Q, F ...
– cross reference list according to single symbolic or absolute
operands (e.g. I 1.0, MOTOR) in the preset file.
Note
Make sure there is always an up to date cross reference list (XRF
file) of the valid program file when outputting cross references
(→ Management, → Generate XRF).
If you modify the program, the cross reference list must be
regenerated.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-307
3.6
Documentation
Settings
The following files must also be set:
– program file
– symbols file (only when “symbols:yes” is set)
– XRF file
– footer file
– printer file (the defaults apply to the PT88)
Operation
The job box “Print XRF list” is displayed. Here, you can make
your selections (→ Graphical user interface, Job box).
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input field
Selection
all elements
Explanations
All the elements are output in the order I, Q, F, S, T, C, B, P, D, each type
on a separate page.
Flags, extended flags, data block, These operands are selected singly. A
inputs, timers, I/Os, outputs,
cross reference list is then only
counters, block calls
output for these operands.
Single operand
Specify a single operand (absolute or
symbolic). F3 = Select is not possible
here. SHIFT F8 provides
information.
Layout
Standard
If you press SHIFT F8 or the Help
key, an example of a standard format
is displayed.
Optional
3.6
Standard in compact form
Only relevant in A3 format.
Operation as above.
Compact means: if an operand in a
segment is addressed n times with the
same operation, the segment is not
listed n times but only once.
As soon as you exit the job box with OK, the following message
flashes on the screen:
Printout XRF list
When this message disappears and if no error message has
occurred, the cross reference list is output.
3-308
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
I/Q/F List
Documentation
Enhanced output
Reference data
I/Q/F list
With this function, you output an I/Q/F list. The I/Q/F list takes
the form of a table and provides you with an overview of which
bit is occupied in the I, F, Q operand areas. One line is reserved
for each byte of an operand area, in which the 8 possible bits are
marked. In addition, the I/Q/F list also indicates whether the
command processes
– a byte (B)
– a word (W)
– a double word (D)
Meaning of the identifiers for bits and bytes in an I/Q/F list:
Identifier
”Blank”
–
Explanation
The operand is addressed as a byte, word or double word
operation and not as a bit operation.
The operand is not addressed.
X
#
A bit operation is performed on the operand.
The operand follows DO FW or DO DW operation.
’’
The operand is addressed as a byte, word or data word
operation, not as a bit operation.
The operand is addressed in a standard function block.
S
?
!
The operand occurs as a parameter for an FB call.
The operand is addressed in a standard FB and in a user
FB.
Example of I/Q/F
List
3.6
I/Q/F list inputs
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
0
1
2
3
4
5
!7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
!
!
!
XX
!
X
!
!
!
! BWD
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
32
33
34
35
36
37
!7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!B W D
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Figure 3-76 I/Q/F List of the Inputs
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-309
Documentation
Settings
The following files must also be set:
– program file
– XRF file (→ Management, Generate XRF)
– footer file (A3)
– printer file (the defaults apply to the PT88)
For more information about settings, refer to → Project.
Operation
An I/Q/F list is printed out or output to a file without STEP 5
requiring further information. During the output of the I/Q/F list,
the following message is displayed inversely on the screen:
Printout I/Q/F list
When this message disappears and if no error has occurred, the
function is completed and the I/Q/F list output.
Note
Make sure there is always an up to date cross reference list (XRF
file) of the valid program file when outputting cross references
(→ Management → Generate XRF).
I/Q/F List
Documentation
3.6
This function outputs the I/Q/F list for the S flags (see Fig. 3-76
“I/Q/F list”).
Enhanced output
Reference data
I/Q/F list S flags
3-310
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Checklist
Documentation
Enhanced output
Reference data
Checklist
This function searches through the program file. Depending on
the option selected, the following information is output:
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Object
Free operands
Explanation
These are operands that occur in the assignment
list but not in the program blocks output in the
order I, Q, F, S, T, C, B, P, D.
No symbol
These are operands in the program blocks to
which no symbol is assigned in the assignment
list. These operands are output in ascending
order.
These exist in the diagnostic data record but there
are no setpoint data assigned to them.
Setpoint data
absent
I/Q/F operands
Settings
The following files must also be set:
– program file
– symbols file (→ Management, Generate XRF)
– XRF file
– footer file
– printer file (the defaults apply to the PT88)
For more information about settings, refer to → Project.
Operation
The job box “Documentation checklist” is displayed. Here, you
can make your selections (→ Graphical user interface, Job box).
Text Files
With this function you can print out LS files or ASCII files or
output them to an LS.INI file. Text files can have footers added to
them although this is not part of the text file itself. You can
therefore add a footer later.
Documentation
Enhanced output
Text files
Settings
The following must also be set:
– footer file (only if a footer is required)
– printer file (the defaults apply to the PT89)
For more information about settings, refer to → Project.
Operation
The job box “Print ASCII file” is displayed. Here, you can make
your selections (→ Graphical user interface, Job box).
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-311
3.6
Documentation
3.6.3
Doc Commands
Documentation
Enhanced output
Doc command
Edit
Check
Output error list
Start
Print
Edit structure
Print structure
You can execute all the functions of the enhanced output using
doc commands. These doc commands are put together like a
program in a file (submit file) and can be executed by calling this
file. The way in which you use the doc commands decides on the
type and order of output.
The following functions are available to process doc commands:
→ Editing doc commands
→ Checking doc commands This triggers a test which checks
whether all the commands can be executed. If errors are
detected, they are written to an error list.
→ Executing doc commands
→ Outputting doc commands on the printer or to a file
→ Outputting the error list You can output the list of errors if
errors were detected during the test.
A doc command string consists of doc commands for
– presets ($)
– commands ( – )
– comments ( ; ) (if required)
Structure of the Doc
Commands
3.6
You can call individual doc command files by means of a suitable
statement in a doc command sequence (Fig. 3-79 ). Following the
call, the doc commands in the opened file are executed. Once the
sequence of doc commands has been executed, the invoking doc
command sequence is continued.
With these commands, you can create a series of statements
(structures). To allow a better overview of possibly complex
structures, the two following functions are available:
→ Editing the structure
The combination of individual doc command files is
represented graphically.
→ Print out the structure
3-312
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Example
EXAMP1
$Presets
–Command
–Command
–Command
–PRINT COM:EXAMP2
–Command
–PRINT COM:EXAMP3
EXAMP2
$Presets
–Command
–Command
–Command
–PRINT COM:EXAMP3
EXAMP3
$Presets
–Command
–Command
–Command
EXAMP3
$Presets
$Voreinstellung
–Command
–Kommando
–Command
–Kommando
–Command
–Kommando
Figure 3-77 Structures of the Doc Commands (Example)
3.6
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-313
Documentation
Syntax of the Doc
Commands
3.6
3-314
Presets:
Doc command
Explanation
$LAD, $CSF, $STL
Method of representation: of the
Ladder Diagram (LAD), Control System
Flowchart (CSF), Statement List (STL).
$PROG:X:NNNNNN
Program file: to select the file in drive X
under the name NNNNNNST.S5D.
$SYMB:X:NNNNNN
Symbols file: to select this file in drive X
under the name NNNNNNZ0.INI.
$SYMB:NO
Symbolic operands: are not output.
$FOOT:X:NNNNNN
Footer file: selected in drive X under the
name NNNNNNF2.INI.
$PRFI:X:NNNNNN
Printer file: selected in drive X under the
name NNNNNNDR.INI.
$PATH:X:NNNNNN
(PATH name)
Path file: the files in the path are
declared valid.
$PAGE:nnnn
Page number: the page number is
incremented from the number nnnn.
$PLST:X:NNNNNN
Output to file: all outputs are stored on
drive X under the file name
NNNNNNLS.INI
$PLST:NO
Output to printer again.
$CHARSET:ASCII
Layout: use the ASCII character set
(broken lines).
$CHARSET:CHA.
GRAPHICS
Layout: use the IBM character set.
$DIR
Directory: from this doc command
onwards, a directory is kept. This preset
can no longer be reset in the active
submit.
$PAUSE:COMMENT
Interrupt processing the doc command.
The comment is displayed at the lower
edge of the screen. By pressing a key the
pause is terminated.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Commands
Blocks
Doc commands
Explanation
–BLOCK:A
All blocks
–BLOCK:OB
All organization blocks
–BLOCK:PB
All program blocks
–BLOCK:FB
All function blocks
–BLOCK:FX
Extended function blocks
–BLOCK:SB
All sequence blocks
–BLOCK:DB
All data blocks
–BLOCK:DX
Extended data blocks
–BLOCK:
(e.g. PB1, PB2–PBn)
A list of blocks
–BLOCK:PBx, 1, 3–5
A list of single segments of a block.
If blocks are output with cross references or diagnostic setpoint
data, you must indicate this with an option.
3.6
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-315
Documentation
Blocks
Doc commands
–BLOCK(R):A
Explanation
All blocks with cross references.
–BLOCK(O):PBx
PBx in an optional layout (only
relevant for CSF and A3 output).
PBx with cross references in an
optional layout (only relevant for
CSF and A3 output).
–BLOCK(RO):PBx
–BLOCK(D):PBx
PBx in the preset method of
representation (LAD, CSF, STL)
with diagnostic setpoint data.
–BLOCK:#NNNNNN
Documentation block with the
name NNNNNN (max. 8
characters).
–BLOCK:PBSO.n
Setpoint data of PBn.
Block List
Doc commands
–BLST
Explanation
Output the block list of the preset
program file.
I/Q/F List
Doc commands
–BLOCK(R):PB
3.6
Nested doc
Command
You can call a doc command sequence from other doc command
sequences. The maximum nesting depth is 6. Recursive calls are
not allowed and are rejected during the test or when a doc
command file is started (→ edit structure).
Doc commands
–DOC–COM:x:nnnnnn
3-316
Explanation
All program blocks with cross
references.
Explanation
The doc command file
nnnnnnSU.INI is called and
started.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Directory
A directory of all previous printouts is output if you activate the
preset “$DIR”.
Doc commands
–DIR
–DIR:n
Explanation
The directory is output with the
current footer. The page number
begins automatically at I and is
restored on completion of the
directory.
The page numbering of the
specified directory begins at n (n=
1, 2...)
Checklist
Doc commands
Explanation
–CHECKLIST/FO
The operands occurring in the
assignment list but not in the blocks
are listed.
–CHECKLIST/NS
The operands used in the blocks but
without a symbol in the assignment
list are listed
–CHECKLIST/SA
With the SP data checklist, you can
list I/Q/F operands defined as an
“assignment” but to which no SP
data were assigned.
3.6
Program Structure
Doc command
–XRF:program, (OBn)
–XRF(D):program, (PBn)
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Explanation
Output the program structure from
OBn (n=0–255), without data blocks.
Output the program structure from
PBn (n=0-255), with data blocks
3-317
Documentation
XRF List
Doc commands
–XRF:GENERATE
–XRF:PRINTOUT, (I)
–XRF:PRINTOUT, (Q)
Explanation
The reference list (*XR.INI) of the
set program file is generated.
Output the input operands.
Output the output operands.
–XRF:PRINTOUT, (F)
–XRF:PRINTOUT, (S)
Output the flags.
Output all S flags.
–XRF:PRINTOUT, (T)
–XRF:PRINTOUT, (C)
Output all timers.
Output all counters.
–XRF:PRINTOUT, (B)
–XRF:PRINTOUT, (P)
Output all blocks.
Output all I/Os.
–XRF:PRINTOUT, (D)
–XRF:PRINTOUT, (X)
Output all data.
Collective command for all
elements.
Output the XRF list of an absolute
operand (n = 0 – 7).
Output the XRF list of a symbolic
operand (e.g. -SYMBOL).
Output the XRF list of an input
operand in compact form. If the
input is used more than once in a
segment
The optional form of the XRF list
is output. In contrast to the
standard the cross references are
not output sorted according to
blocks but according to
operations, blocks and segments.
–XRF:PRINTOUT, (I1.n)
–XRF:PRINTOUT,
(–SYMBOL)
–XRF(C):PRINTOUT, (I)
–XRF(O):PRINTOUT, (Q)
3.6
3-318
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
I/Q/F List
Doc command
Explanation
–XRF:IQF
Output the I/Q/F list. The XRF list must exist.
(→ Management, Generate XRF)
–XRF:IQF
S FLAGS
Output the I/Q/F list of the S flags.
Assignment List
Doc command
Explanation
–SYMF:SEQ
–SYMF:SYM
Output the source (sequential) file (unsorted).
Output sorted acc. to symbolic operands.
–SYMF:ABS
–SYMF(O):SEQ
Output sorted acc. to absolute operands.
Output unsorted single column (only relevant in
A3 format).
3.6
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-319
Documentation
Editing Doc
Commands
To edit doc commands, you can activate auxiliary functions using
the function keys. The edited statements are stored in a submit
file (*SU.INI).
Apart from this fixed function key assignment, you can also
assign texts or commands to function keys which you activate
with SHIFT F1 to SHIFT F7.
Documentation
Enhanced output
Doc commands
Edit
Operation
A job box is displayed in which you select a submit file (→
Graphical user interface, Job box). The new file name is entered
in the settings box (→ Project, Settings, Page 1). As soon as the
screen below is displayed, the cursor is positioned in the first
editing line. You can now edit.
Example
Screen display.
Submit file editor
3.6
File : C:EXAMP1SU.INI
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
008
009
010 .
;TOTAL DOCUMENTATION OF THE PROGRAM FILE ON A3
$PROG:A:STDRAN
$SYMB:A:STDRAN
$SFOOT:A:KODOTE
$PRIN:A:PT89
-BLIST
-XRF:GENERATE
-XREF(D):PROGRAM, (OB1)
-SYMF:SEQ
-SYMF:SYM
-SYMF:ABS
012
F
F
1 Field
2 Fetch FKLD 3 Fetch FIL 4 Fetch LIN 5 Search
F
F
F
F
F
6 Replace 7
F
Jump
8 Fct key
Figure 3-78 Submit File Editor
3-320
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Function Key
Assignment
The following section and table describes the key strokes to
assign functions to keys.
F1 (Key level 1)
Enter the 1st field delimiter. Change to
the 2nd key level.
F3 (Key level 2)
Select the file name for storing the
field. Change to the 3rd key level.
F6 (Key level 3)
The field is stored under the selected
file name.
The following table shows the effects of the function keys and
which key combinations are possible.
Key level
Effect of the function keys
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1
2
3
Store the input with the Insert key. Cursor keys
→ Appendix A4, key assignment.
F1
Field
The 1st field delimiter is marked in the current line
with <B>. The 2nd field delimiter can be moved over
further lines with the cursor keys.
F1
Field
The marked field is stored for the current session.
F3
File
The field is stored under a selectable file name
but it remains in the buffer.
F6
Enter
The field is stored in the selected file.
F8
Return
Return to previous key level without action.
F4
Find (text)
Search for a max. 30 character string in a field. If
the text is found, the 2nd field delimiter is set in
this line.
F5
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Repeat
Repeat the last search.
3-321
3.6
Documentation
Key level
1
2
3.6
3-322
3
F6
Srch fwd
Text searched for towards the end of the file.
F7
Srch back
Text searched for towards the start of the file.
F8
Return
Return to previous key level without action.
F6
Enter
The block is stored for the current session.
F7
Jump
Jump to the start/end of the file or to a selectable
line number.
F8
F2
Effect of the function keys
F6
To start
Jump to the start of the file.
F7
Line
Jump to the selected line.
F8
End
Jump to the end of the file
Return
Return to previous key level without action.
Fetch fld
The currently buffered field is fetched and
inserted after the cursor position.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Table 3-9
Existing Submit File
Key level
1
2
3
F3
Fetch file
A selectable submit file is fetched from a selectable
drive.
F1
File
The file is fetched.
Fct keys
The function assignment is fetched from the file and is
active from now on.
F2
F6
Enter
The file is fetched without function assignment.
Return
Return to previous key level without action.
F8
Table 3-10
Fetch Line/Find Text
Key level
1
2
3
Effect of the function keys
F4
Fetch line
A previously deleted line (with the delete key) is
fetched back → Key assignment.
F5
Find
Search for a max. 30 character string. The repetition
factor can be selected.
F5
F6
F7
F8
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Effect of the function keys
Repeat
Repeat the last search
Srch fwd
Search towards the end of the file.
Srch back
Search towards the start of the file.
Return to previous key level without action.
3-323
3.6
Documentation
Table 3-11
Replace Character String
Key level
1
2
3
F6
F1
F1
F2
3.6
3-324
Replace
A character string is replaced by another. You can
enter a max. 30 character long string and a repetition
factor. The text is replaced by the second.
Rep? fwd
Search to end of file. Replacement must be confirmed.
Yes - The text is replaced.
No - The text is not replaced.
F8
Return
Return to previous key level without action.
Rep? back
Search to start of file. Replacement must be
confirmed.
F1
F3
Yes - The text is replaced.
No - The text is not replaced.
F8
Return
Return to previous key level without action.
Rep fwd
Search to end of file. Text replaced without conf.
F2
F3
Effect of the function keys
F4
Rep back
Search to start of file. Text replaced without conf.
F6
Repeat
Repeat the last replacement.
F8
Return
Return to previous key level without action.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Table 3-12
Jump
Key level
1
2
Effect of the function keys
3
F7
Jump
Jump to the start/end of the file or to a selectable
line number.
F6
Start
Jump to the start of the file.
F7
Line
Jump to the selected line.
F8
End
Jump to the end of the file.
Table 3-13
Editing Function Keys
Key level
1
2
F8
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Effect of the function keys
3
Fct keys
Assigns the keys SHIFT F1-F8 with a selectable
max. 30 character string. This string is entered in
the line marked by the cursor in the editing mode
when the function key is pressed (SHIFT F1 F8). e.g.
SHIFT+F1: |$PROG:C:FILE|
SHIFT+F2: |$SYMB:C:SYMDAT|
F4
Fetch 1
Fetch back the characters deleted with the delete
key(→ Key assignment).
F6
Enter
The function key assignment is entered.
F8
Return
The function key assignment is entered.
3-325
3.6
Documentation
Checking Doc
Commands
Documentation
The feasibility of doc commands is checked in a selectable file. If
errors are recognized, the cause of the errors is entered in an
*SF.INI file.
Enhanced output
Doc commands
Check
Example of an Error
Message
The following figure illustrates the error messages that can be
displayed.
Test run result for C:EXAMP1SU.INI
001 $CSF
002 $PROG:C:EXA400
*** Error: ***
C:EXA400ST.S5D
not found
003
004 $SYMB:C:EXA409
can be executed
005 $PRIN:C:EXA409
can be executed
1 error(s) found in file C:EXAMP1SU.INI
3.6
Operation
The job box “Check doc command file” is displayed. Here, you
enter the name of the file you want to check. The check is started
as soon as you click on OK.
Note
If no errors are found, no error file is created.
3-326
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Outputting The
Error List
Documentation
Enhanced output
Errors found in the functions “Check doc command” or “Execute
doc command” are written to a file. You can output these files
with this function.
The following must also be set:
– printer file (the defaults apply to the PT89)
Doc commands
Output error list
Operation
For more information about settings, refer to → Project.
The job box “Output error list” is displayed. Here, you can make
your selections (→ Graphical user interface). The name of the
generated error file is set here.
Destination
Executing Doc
Commands
Documentation
Enhanced output
Explanation
Error file
Name of the error file. The generated error
file name is the default. You can select a
different name with F3.
Screen
Output directly on the screen.
Printer
Output directly on the printer according to
the selections made for printer parameters.
File
Output to a selectable file.
With this function, you can activate the doc commands in your
file.
The current settings remain valid unless you change them with a
presets statement ($PROG:...$CSF, etc.). The preset statements
are, however, only valid for the time when the doc commands are
executed.
Doc commands
Start
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-327
3.6
Documentation
Operation
The job box “Start doc command file” is displayed. Here, you
enter the name of the file whose doc commands you want to use
in the field “File name”. You can select a file by pressing F3
(→ Graphical user interface, Job box). Once you confirm the
“Start doc command” with OK the doc commands are processed.
Note
If errors occur, you can branch to an error list.
Printing Doc
Commands
You can print out the content of a doc command file.
Documentation
Enhanced output
Doc commands
Print
Operation
3.6
3-328
The job box “Documentation of doc command file” is displayed.
Here, you enter the name of the file you want to print in the “File
name” field. You can select a file with F3 (→ Graphical user
interface, Job box) BI. When you click on OK the doc commands
are printed out.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Editing the
Structure
Documentation
Enhanced output
Doc commands
Within the doc commands you can include statements (→
Structure statements) which call and start other doc command
files. This function shows you how the various doc command
files are connected by the structure statements.
This function also allows you to start the doc command editor
and modify the statements of the current doc command file.
Edit structure
Example
The figure shows how the editor represents the connections
between doc command files established by doc commands.
Graphical user interface
C:EXAMP1SU.INI
C:EXAMP2
C:EXAMP1
C:EXAMP3
C:EXAMP4
F
F
1 Edit
2
F
Test
3
F
Start
4
F
E List
5 Print
Figure 3-79 Interconnecting Doc Command Files
Operation
C79000-G8576-C820-01
The job box “Edit doc command structure” is displayed. Here,
you specify a doc command file name or select a name with F3.
Using this file as the starting point, the relationship between the
doc command files is displayed.
Once you exit the job box with OK a structure diagram is
displayed. The doc command file with which you called the
editor is highlighted.
3-329
3.6
Documentation
Moving the Marker
You can change the marking of the individual doc command files
in the structure display with the cursor keys (→ Appendix A4,
Key assignment).
Function key
Assignment
The following section explains the significance of the various
function keys.
F6 = Key level 1
You want to search for a particular doc
command file in the structure file. You
change to the 2nd key level.
F1 = Key level 2
The first structure statement file is
marked.
The table shows which key combinations are possible and the
effects of the function keys.
Key level
1
2
F1
Edit
The doc command editor is called and the
content of the current doc command file is
displayed. You can edit these doc commands (→
Editing doc commands).
F2
Test
The doc command file highlighted (color/gray
background) in the structure display is tested.
The result is displayed on the screen
immediately. If errors are found, they are written
to an error file.
F3
Start
The doc command file highlighted in the
structure display is started. If errors occur during
execution, they are written to an error file and
displayed on the screen.
F4
E list
The error list of the doc command file marked on
the screen is displayed and, if required, printed
out.
3.6
3-330
Effect of the function keys
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Key level
1
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Effect of the function keys
2
F5
Print
The doc command file marked in the structure
display is output on the printer or to a file
depending on the settings.
F6
Search
Switch to the search functions.
F1
To start
The first doc command file in the structure
display is marked and is now the current file.
F2
End
The last doc command file in the structure
display is marked and is now the current file.
F3
Caller
The doc command file via which the structure
display was called is marked and is now the
current file.
F4
Error
Starting from the currently marked file.
F6
Srch fwd
A selected doc command file is searched for
towards the end of the display. If it is found it is
marked and is now the current file.
F7
Srch back
A selected doc command file is searched for
towards the start of the display. If it is found it is
marked and is now the current file.
F8
Return
Return to the calling level.
SHIFT
F8
Help
3-331
3.6
Documentation
Printing the
Structure
The structure of connected doc command files is printed out in
A3 or A4 format or output to a file (LS.INI).
Documentation
Enhanced output
Doc commands
Print
Settings
The following must be set:
– printer file (the defaults apply to the PT89)
– footer file
For more information about settings, refer to → Project.
Operation
The job box “Print doc command structure” is displayed. Here,
you can make you selections (→ Graphical user interface).
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input field
Explanation
Submit file
Name of the doc command file about which you
want to see structure information. Starting from
this file.
Structure
Here only the structure is displayed.
Structure with doc
commands
The content of the doc command files involved is
also printed out, each file on a separate page.
3.6
3-332
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
3.6.4
Settings
Settings
Documentation
Settings
Printer parameters
Footer editor
Setting Printer
Parameters
Documentation
Before you can print out files or redirect them to a file in a
printable format you must do the following:
– Set the parameters for your printer (→ Printer
parameters).
A variety of printers can be connected to the programmer.
The parameters required for the printer must be set and
stored in a printer file (*DR.INI) in the system directory.
There are “off the shelf” printer files available for the
various printer types. These contain settings for specific
printers and the type of printout (portrait, landscape). In
the “Settings, page 2” box, you can click “Printer file” to
obtain a list of printer files (*DR.INI) available in the
system directory. Press F3 to display a printer selection
box.
– Select and edit the footer (→ Footer).
You prepare a control character record for your printer and store
it in a file of the type DR.INI. This controls the printout directly
on the printer. You make these entries in a selection box.
Settings
Printer parameters
Settings
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Select the printer file of type *DR.INI in the “Settings, page 2”
box. The asterisk (*) stands for the six-character name of the
printer file.
For more information about settings, refer to → Project.
3-333
3.6
Documentation
Operation
The box “Printer parameter assignment” is displayed (example
below). The file C:[email protected]@DR.INI for the HP III (C) printer was
selected in the “Settings, page 2” box.
PRINTER PARAM ASSIGNMENT
PAGE FORMAT : ( X ) A4
( )
SKIP_OVER
: ( X ) YES
WAIT TIME
: [CR 0 * 25 MS ]
INTERFACE:
E:TESTTEDR.INI
PRINTER FILE:
A3
Modification
LINES/PAGE: [72]
( ) NO
BUSY :
(X) YES
( ) NO
[ LF 0 * 25 MS ]
LPT 1 ( )
LPT 2 ( )
CONTROL CHARACTER FUNCTION
Start sequence
End sequence
Pitch
(10 char/inch)
Pitch
(12 char/inch)
Pitch
(17 char/inch)
Horizontal tabulator
Left column index
LPT 3 ( )
DEFAULT (X)
CONTROL CHARACTER SEQUENCE
[
[
[ 1B, 5B, 31, 77;
[ 1B, 5B, 32, 77;
[ 1B, 5B, 34, 77;
[;
[ 01; ]
]
]
]
]
]
]
F
1
F
2
F
3 Select
F
4
F
5 Save as
F
6 Save
F
7
Info
F Help
8 Return
F
1
F
2
F
3 Edit
F
4
F
5 Save as
F
6 Save
F
7
Info
F Help
8 Return
3.6
3-334
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Function Keys
In this box, you can activate certain functions using function keys
as explained in the table.
Key
Function
F3
1. (Select)
When the cursor is positioned on an input field in which you can select
various parameters, the function key “Select” is displayed. You can select
parameters with F3.
2. (Edit)
When the cursor is positioned on an input field in which you can type in
characters, the function key “Edit” is displayed. You can position the
cursor on the character field with F3.
3. (Edit control character functions)
When the cursor is on an input field under “CONTROL CHAR
FUNCTION”, the “Edit” softkey is also displayed. With F3, you can
open an editing window for control characters for your printer. You enter
your input with the Insert key.
F5 = Save as
The PRINTER FILE is stored under the name you select. Once you press
this key the cursor jumps to the field with the file name. You can now
change this if you wish. The Return key stores the parameter settings
under this name.
F6 = Save
This stores the selected parameters in the current PRINTER FILE:
F7 = Info
With this key, you can obtain information about the field marked by the
cursor. You clear this text from the screen using the cursor keys (→
Appendix A4, key assignment).
F8 = Return
Return to the calling level.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3.6
3-335
Documentation
Parameter Dialog
Box
The following list explains entries in the parameter assignment
box.
Input field
Explanations
PRINTER FILE
The printer settings are stored in this file. You can specify the name under
→ Project or with “F5 (Save as).
PAGE FORMAT
A4
LINES/PAGE
Number of lines per page.
SKIP_OVER:
YES
NO
The control character FF (form feed) is output to trigger a form feed. The
remaining page is output with empty lines up to the number specified in
LINES/PAGE providing no lines contain characters.
BUSY
Not relevant for the PT88/PT89/PT10. This only affects older printer types.
Following each character sent to the printer, STEP 5 waits a specified time
(WAIT TIME) for confirmation from the printer before sending the next
character.
NO
No confirmation is expected.
A3
YES
A confirmation is expected.
WAIT TIME
You can set the wait time for a confirmation (in milliseconds).
CR
LF
INTERFACE
3.6
for carriage return
for line feed
The device interface LPT1, LPT2 and LPT3 on which information is
transferred to the printer can be selected by entering an X. The default is
LPT1.
In the printer files supplied, LPT1 is set (X). The default setting of the PG
assigns the parallel device interface to LPT1. No further interfaces for
connecting a printer are assigned to the LPT2 and LPT3 ports.
Note
If you change the assignment of the LPT ports (serial printer), remember
that with PGs of the 7xx series the COM1 (PLC) and COM2 (mouse) ports
are assigned.
CONTROL CHAR
FUNCTION
You can edit a control character string for your printer. A character string
can be up to a maximum of 127 bytes long. Only hex. characters are
allowed.
Start sequence
Before each print job
3-336
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Input field
Explanations
End sequence
After each print job
Pitch
Here you select the number of characters per inch.
(10 char/inch)
NORMAL
(12 char/inch)
CONDENSED
(17 char/inch)
SUPER CONDENSED
Horizontal tabulator
With this the printer head is positioned on a column. The dummy character
for the dynamic entry of this column is “00”. The next column with a
printable character is calculated from the current position of the head and
the number of blanks following it. This position is entered in the control
character string.
Left column index
The dummy character for the horizontal tabulator is calculated with this. It
is the index of the left page column of the printer and specifies whether it
begins with 0 or 1.
Explanation for the printer names in the system directory.
Name
Meaning
Emul.
A3, A4
Emulation
Page format: A3, A4
Norm.
Comp.
Print type: normal
Print type: compact
L/P
(C)
Lines/page
Identifies printers of other vendors for which Siemens does not guarantee perfect
operation.
Footer
C79000-G8576-C820-01
You can append a fixed number of automatically generated footer
lines to each page of a printout of S5 user programs or S5
program sections. In the “Settings, page 2” box, you can select a
footer width of either 80 or 132 characters.
Each footer is stored in its own file and is created using the footer
editor (files *F1.INI for 80 characters wide and *F2.INI for 132
characters wide). You can select any combination of S5 files and
footers.
3-337
3.6
Documentation
Editing Footers
With this function, you can write a new footer or modify an
existing one. The size of the editing field displayed is adapted to
the number of footer characters. A field in which an entry can be
made is highlighted. You cannot write in fields marked with ##
since these are reserved for automatically generated text, e.g.
– SIMATIC S5
– Program file
– Block
– Segment
– Page number
Documentation
Settings
Footer editor
Example
The screen displays the editing window for 132 character wide
footer. The editing window for an 80 character footer only has 4
fields. The name of the file is displayed at the top left of the
screen. The top right of the screen tells you whether it is a new
file or whether you are modifying an old one.
FOOTER File: C:NONAMEF2.INI
Modification
Input field
Date:
Footer
##
##
*
3.6
######
##
##
##
##########
##########
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1 Text inp
2 Text end
3
4 -> 80 C
5 Save as
6 Enter
7
F
Help
8 Return
Figure 3-80 Editing Window for 132 Character Wide Footer
Settings
3-338
The following files and parameters must be set:
– footer file
– footer width (80 or 132)
For more information about settings, refer to → Project.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Documentation
Operation
When you start the footer function, an editing window is
displayed. The upper field is the input window. You only have
direct access to this field. The lower field is the footer in which
the text is inserted. When a field in the footer is highlighted, you
can enter text for this field in the input window (the cursor
flashes in the input window). You can familiarize yourself with
the keys relevant for the footer editor in → Using the footer keys.
Note
Input field “Date”:
If no date is entered here, it is entered automatically by the
system.
When you print using the enhanced mode (KOMDOK), this is
overwritten by the current system date.
Using the Footer
Keys
C79000-G8576-C820-01
With these keys, you can position the cursor and input texts.
Key
Functions
F1
Activate text input. The input window is activated and
the cursor flashes inside it.
F2
Deactivate text input. No input is possible in the input
window.
F4
Switch the footer width to 80 or 132 characters.
F5
Change the footer file name.
The change can be saved with F8 = Return and YES.
F6
The edited footer is stored.
F8
Return to the previous level.
SHIFT F8
Return to the previous level.
3-339
3.6
Documentation
Cursor in the footer: (SHIFT + a cursor key)
SHIFT
+
4
4
3.6
6
6
8
2
8
2
.
DEL
3-340
(4)
Positions the cursor on the previous left footer field.
(6)
Positions the cursor on the next right footer field.
(2)
Positions the cursor on the next lower footer field (also
without SHIFT).
(8)
Positions the cursor on the previous upper footer field 1
(also without SHIFT).
Cursor in the input window
(4)
Positions the cursor on the character before and replaces
it.
(6)
Positions the cursor on the next character and replaces it.
(2)
Positions the cursor on the next line. If the cursor leaves
the input field as a result, text input is terminated.
(8)
Positions the cursor on the line above. If the cursor
leaves the input field as a result, text input is terminated.
Delete character
The character marked by the cursor is deleted and the following
characters brought forward to close the gap.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Change
3.7
Change
With this function you can change to other S5 packages. If they
are not already loaded, they must be installed in a directory on a
drive. With the “Change” function, you exit the STEP 5 package.
further..
Change
further...
All the installed S5 packages available on the drive and in the
directory you have selected are displayed. You can then change to
one of these programs.
With the “further” function, you exit STEP 5. The user interface
of the selected S5 package is displayed and you can then continue
working with the new package.
You can return to STEP 5 from any other S5 package. The STEP
5 settings are retained, so that you can resume work immediately
without needing to select new settings.
PG Link
The S5 package “PG Link” is supplied with the STEP 5 package.
It is installed in the directory C:\STEP 5\S5_ST\PG_PG. If you
set the appropriate path in the selection box, the PG Link
program is displayed and you can start it.
Operation
The “Other S5 programs” job box is displayed. Here, the installed
S5 packages you can select are displayed. The lower part of the
box displays stamp information about the S5 package marked by
the cursor.
You make your selection in this box (→ Graphical user
interface). Once you have selected a package and confirmed your
selection with OK, the user interface of the selected package is
displayed.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
3-341
3.7
Change
3.7
3-342
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Help
3.8
Help
Help
Key assignment list
Info-STEP 5 version
Version of S5
packages
3.8.1
Key Assignment List
Key Assignment
List
Help
Key assignment list
3.8.2
With the functions in this menu, you can obtain information
about the currently active STEP 5 package, as follows:
– a list of all the function keys (F1 - F10 and SHIFT F1 SHIFT F9). Using these keys, you can select STEP 5
functions from the main menu directly,
– information about the version of STEP 5 you are currently
working with,
– a list of all the program components in the currently active
STEP 5 package.
This list provides you with information about the function keys
you can activate directly in the user interface. These keys allow
you to select certain functions directly without using the menus.
When you select this function, a list explaining the functions of
the keys is displayed on the screen. You can page through this
list.
Info-STEP 5 Version
A box is displayed containing information about the currently
active STEP 5 package.
Help
Info-STEP 5 version
3.8.3
Version of S5 Packages
Help
Version of S5
packages
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A list of all the program components in the currently active
STEP5 package is displayed. You can set the drive and the
directory in which the program components are looked for.
The information is output to screen, printer or file. If you output
to printer or file, the layout is the same as the standard output.
3-343
3.8
Help
Directory: C:\STEP5\S5_ST
Page
1
Version of the data medium:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––-––––––––––––––––––––
Name
Identifier Date
Serial no
PG
Designation
C:S5DXBPX6.VER S792xxxxx
090395
7994–0102–654321
665
PC BASE
V6.6
Version of the S5 command interpreter:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Name
C:S5KXS01X.CMD
C:S5KDS01X.DAT
C:S5KXS03X.CMD
C:S5KDS03X.DAT
C:S5KXS02X.CMD
C:S5KDS02X.DAT
C:S5KXS04X.CMD
C:S5KDS04X.DAT
Identifier
V 6.6 44
V 6.6 44
V 6.6 44
V 6.6 44
V 6.6 44
V 6.6 44
V 6.6 44
V 6.6 44
Date
010995
010995
010995
010995
050995
050995
050995
050995
Serial no.
7994–0102–654321
7994–0102–654321
7994–0102–654321
7994–0102–654321
7994–0102–654321
7994–0102–654321
7994–0102–654321
7994–0102–654321
PG
7XX
7XX
7XX
7XX
7XX
7XX
7XX
7XX
Designation
S5–KOMI
S5–KOMI
S5–MENU–MANAGER
S5–MENU–MANAGER
S5–KOMI–UP’S
S5–KOMI–UP’S
DIALOGMANAGER
DIALOGMANAGER
Version of the packages:
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Name
C:S5PXS03X.CMD
C:S5PDS03X.DAT
Identifier
V 6.6 44
V 6.6 44
Date
010995
010995
Serial no
7994–0102–654321
7994–0102–654321
PG
7XX
7XX
Designation
XRF,COMP,REW
XRF,COMP,REW
Figure 3-81 Example of the Versions of the S5 Packages
Settings
The following must be set:
– footer file (only if footers are selected)
– printer file (for output to printer/file, the default is the PT 88)
For information about making settings, refer to → Project.
Operation
The job box for the version of the S5 packages is displayed. Here,
you make your selections (→ Graphical user interface, Job box).
Directory
The version in the directory displayed here is shown. The
standard setting after calling the function is always the S5 system
directory. You cannot edit the “Directory” field although the field
can be selected with the cursor or mouse. If you select the
“Directory” field, you can select the required directory with F3 =
Select or by double clicking with the mouse.
3.8
3-344
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Description of Technical Resources
C79000-G8576-C820-01
4
4-1
Description of Technical Resources
4.1
S5 Files
This section tells you which directories contain files necessary for
STEP 5. For more detailed information about the directories and
files on your device refer to the product information.
Under S5-DOS/ST
C:\DOS\
MS-DOS system directory. This contains the MS-DOS
operating system.
C:\SIMATIC\S5_ST\
STEP 5 system directory with the STEP 5 basic package
and the CP/M emulator, the file S5.BAT, with which you
start the STEP 5 basic package and the P-Tools. .
Further files: S5*.CMD, the corresponding S5*.DAT files,
the printer files ??????DR.INI and the interface parameter
assignment files AS511S0?.DAT.
C:\S5_DATEN\DEFAULT\
This contains the example program which is stored in the
directory C:\S5_DATEN\EXAMPLE\ after processing.
C:\S5_DATEN\EXAMPLE\
The example program with the program blocks and
assignment list is stored in this directory after processing.
C:\STEP 5\S5_ST\INSTALL
Contains backups of the individual S5 program sections.
C:\STEP 5\S5_ST\PG-PG
Link between two PGs for exchanging STEP 5 blocks and
files.
C:\STEP 5\S5_ST\S5_COM
Default directory for optional packages (COMs, PROMs).
4.1.1
STEP 5 Files with Special Functions
This section lists the files in which STEP 5 stores its settings and
data. Most of the files are stored in the STEP 5 working directory.
The question marks in the file names stand for characters defined
by the user.
4
4-2
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Description of Technical Resources
Paths
Settings
S5 MEMORY.DAT
File for the last values entered in the job and selection boxes.
STEP 5 CF.INI
(STEP 5 Configuration File) This contains the path and the name of the
??????PJ.INI file last used. Stored in the STEP 5 system directory.
??????PJ.INI
Data selected in the “Settings” screen form.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Programs
??????ST.S5D
STEP 5 program file under S5-DOS data management
Assignment list
??????Z0.SEQ
Sequential, not translated assignment list (S5-DOS data management). Under
S5-DOS/MT you can generate and modify this file both under STEP 5 and with the
HARD PRO tool SIGNAL.
??????ZF.SEQ
Assignment error list: list of the errors that occurred converting from ??????Z0.SEQ
to ??????Z0.INI.
??????Z0.INI
Symbols file (S5-DOS data management), translated assignment list.
??????Z#.INI
Assignment list index files (# = 1 or 2).
??????ZF.INI
Stores the function key assignment.
Printer output
??????.DR.INI
Printer parameters. Stored in the STEP 5 system directory.
??????F1.INI
Footer file (80 characters)
??????F2.INI
Footer file (132 characters)
??????LS.INI
File to store a redirected printout.
Specific files
??????XR.INI
(Reference list) XRF file
??????SU.INI
DOC commands (Submit)
??????SF.INI
Submit error list
??????TP.INI
Key macros
Bus selection
??????AP.INI
Path file
The bus paths you edit are stored here. This file is located in the STEP 5 system
directory.
??????SD.INI
SYSID file
System identification characteristics, e.g. of CPs.
C79000-G8576-C820-01
4-3
4
Description of Technical Resources
4.2
Data Management S5-DOS
Under the S5-DOS/ST operating system, STEP 5 uses the
S5-DOS data management to handle its data.
The S5-DOS data management has been optimized to meet the
requirements of STEP 5.
Characteristics:
– Data is saved extremely quickly.
– The data are stored in compressed form. If a certain
amount of data has been deleted (more than 10 gaps) the
remaining data are reorganized so that the data base is not
unnecessarily extended by gaps and so that the data does
not need to be broken up on the storage medium. The
S5-DOS data management therefore requires little space
on the medium.
– The program files are of the type ??????ST.S5D.
– The number of blocks is limited to a maximum of 255.
This means that there cannot be a documentation block for
every block.
– The assignment list (file of the type ??????Z0.SEQ) for
one PLC and one CPU can be created and edited both with
the HARDPRO tool SIGNAL and with STEP 5. This must
then be converted to a symbols file of the type
??????Z0.INI under STEP 5.
Summary
S5-DOS data management:
4
4-4
Program file for PLC1, CPU1:
[email protected]
Symbols file for PLC1, CPU1:
[email protected]
(Symbol, Operand, Comment)
Program file for PLC1, CPU2
[email protected]
Symbols file for PLC1, CPU2:
[email protected]
Program file for PLC2, CPU1:
[email protected]
Symbols file for PLC2, CPU1:
[email protected]
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Appendix
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A
A-1
Creating the Program for the Example
A.1
Creating the Program for the Example
Creating the elements of a STEP 5 program (program blocks,
segments, data blocks, assignment lists) for a given task demands
a certain development process. In general, you require the
programming instructions for your PLC and should know the
basics of the SIMATIC S5 system.
For the simple case of a carwash, the development process is
restricted to executing the following steps:
S1:
The process to be controlled and the process
elements are represented schematically.
S2:
The input/output signals are listed and given
symbolic names.
S3:
The control sequence with its conditions and
actions is represented in a decision table
according to the verbal description of the
process.
S4:
The data block is set up.
S5:
The blocks of the program are programmed in
STL (a segment for each process step).
A.1
A-2
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Creating the Program for the Example
Step 1:
Schematic representation of the process to be controlled
As preparation before writing the program, the carwash is
represented schematically, so that the process peripherals of the
controller (sensors/actuators) and their effects in the control
sequence can be recognized (Fig. A-1).
To achieve the correct logical combinations in the PLC, it is
important to know the way in which the input elements function.
When programming, you must know whether the contacts are
normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC).
”Dry” (Q 33.2)
air valve
”Rinse” (Q 33.0)
”Wax” (Q 33.1)
”Open door” (Q 32.2)
”Close door” (Q 32.3)
”Shampoo” (Q 32.7)
solenoid valve
Carriage
with brushes
”Rotate”
(Q 32.6)
”Door open” (I 32.6)
”Door closed” (I 32.7)
light barriers
”Carriage front”
(I 32.4)
limit switch
”Position”
(I 32.3)
pressure contact
”Carriage fwds” (Q 32.0)
”Carriage bwds” (Q 32.1)
contactor for drive motor
Carriage back”
(I 32.5)
limit switch
Figure A-1 Carwash with Process Inputs/Outputs
A.1
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-3
Creating the Program for the Example
The schematic representation of the carwash provides
information for comparing lists of the process inputs/outputs
which will be processed by the control system as operands. The
process signals for the operation and display elements as shown
in Fig. KEIN MERKER must also be added to this list.
DRIVE CAR OUT
(Q 32.5)
DRIVE CAR IN
(Q 32.4)
Displays
Operating panel
Messages
Main
switch
(I 32.0)
Start
button
(I 33.0)
Emer.OFF
(I 32.1)
NC contact
Actuating signals
(outputs)
Controller
(PLC)
Carwash
Operator signals
Process signals (inputs)
Figure A-2 Control Structure with Operator Inputs/Outputs
All the data transferred to and from the control program via the
process interface and required for creating the operand list and
describing the process sequences are now known.
A.1
A-4
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Creating the Program for the Example
Step 2:
Listing the input/output variables
To describe the process and to write the program, it is easier to
use symbols for the input/output variables. The plant and operator
I/Os are then compiled in a table as shown below.
Table A-1
List of Process Signals
Operand
Process
element
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Display
Display
Step 3:
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Design, Mode of
operation
Keyswitch, NO
Button, NC
Button, NO
Pressure contact, NO
Limit switch, NO
Limit switch, NO
Limit switch, NO
Limit switch, NO
Coupling relay
Coupling relay
Coupling relay
Coupling relay
Coupling relay
Coupling relay
Coupling relay
Coupling relay
Coupling relay
Lamp or display panel
Lamp or display panel
absolute
symbol
I 32.0
I 32.1
I 33.0
I 32.3
I 32.4
I 32.5
I 32.6
I 32.7
Q 32.0
Q 32.1
Q 32.2
Q 32.3
Q 32.6
Q 32.7
Q 33.0
Q 33.1
Q 33.2
Q 33.4
Q 33.5
”Mainswit”
”Emerstop”
”Startwas”
”In–pos”
”C–front”
”C–back”
”Doorop”
”Doorcl”
”C–fwds”
”C–bwds”
”Open–d”
”Close–d”
”Rotate”
”Shampoo”
”Rinse”
”Wax–on”
”Dry”
Car-in
Car-out
Description of the process sequence, representation of the
control functions in a decision table.
An important step in the program development is to establish the
control sequence based on the schematic representations and the
list of all the process variables. This can be achieved for example
in the form of flowcharts.
A verbal description of the process sequence has been selected
and the control task is solved using a decision table.
A-5
A.1
Creating the Program for the Example
The decision table (Table KEIN MERKER) should be read as
follows:
– The conditions that must be evaluated in a logical control
step are listed above the double line and the actions that
are executed if the conditions are fulfilled are listed below
the double line.
– A column corresponds to a control number which is
described verbally in the sequence and then programmed
as a STL segment in step 5 of the program development.
Process sequence
1. Prepare for the program sequence.
2. Define the operating status.
The control system defines the process status “on” when the
main switch is on (I 32.0 = 1) and the PLC has started up
(start–up ID in OB 20/21/22 = 1).
3. Switching off the process/stopping the carwash.
To be able to stop the process at any time, e.g. in an
emergency situation a safe switch off procedure is necessary:
if the emergency stop button (I 32.1 = pulse) or the main
switch is switched off (I 32.0 = 0) the control system resets
the internal PLC status and deactivates all the outputs.
4. Moving the process to the initial position.
When the control system starts up, the carwash is brought to
its “initial position” if it is not already in this position. In the
basic position, the door is open (I 32.6 = 1), the carriage with
the brushes is at the back (I 32.5 = 1) and there is no car in the
washing position (I 32.3 = 0).
The control system must therefore check that these process
statuses are correct. If not, the appropriate movements:
“carriage backwards” (Q 32.1 = 1) and/or “open door”
(Q 32.2 = 1) are started and if there is still a car in the
carwash the display DRIVE CAR OUT (Q 32.5 = 1) must be
lit up.
A.1
A-6
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Creating the Program for the Example
5. Establishing the conditions to start washing.
The carwash status “initial position” is checked, i.e. the door
is open (I 32.6 = 1), the brush carriage is at the back (I 32.5 =
1) and there is no car in position (I 32.3 = 0). This initial
position is indicated by the display DRIVE CAR IN (Q 32.4 =
1). The display DRIVE CAR OUT (Q 32.5) goes off.
6. Driving the car in and starting the washing process.
The car is driven into the washing position (I 32.3 = 1) and
the driver leaves the car and goes to the control panel outside
the carwash and presses the start button for the washing
process (I 33.0 = pulse). After checking “car in position”
(I 32.3 = 1) and “start button pressed” the control system
closes the door (Q 32.3 = 1) and switches off the display
DRIVE CAR IN (Q 32.4 = 0).
The following parts of the actual washing process including
opening the door once the car has been cleaned run automatically
without the driver taking any further action.
7. Applying shampoo.
After the system checks the input signal “door closed”
(I 32.7 = 1), the carriage moves forward (Q 32.0 = 1) with
rotating brushes (Q 32.6 = 1) and the shampoo jets open
(Q 32.7 = 1). The car is shampooed and brushed and the dirt
loosened.
8. Washing, rinsing.
After checking the front position “carriage front” (I 32.4 = 1),
the control system switches off the frame drive
(Q 32.0 = 0), closes the shampoo jets (Q 32.7 = 0), opens the
water jets (Q 33.0 = 1) and moves the carriage backwards
(Q 32.1 = 1) once again with the brushes rotating
(Q 32.6 = 1). The car is cleaned and rinsed.
9. Applying wax.
After checking “carriage back” (I 32.5 = 1) the drive is
switched off (Q 32.1 = 0), the water jets closed (Q 33.0 = 0)
and the brush drive switched off (Q 32.6 = 0).
The carriage is now moved forward (Q 32.0 = 1) with the jets
for applying wax open (Q 33.1 = 1).
10. Forming a wax film.
When the front position is reached (I 32.4 = 1), the wax jets
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-7
A.1
Creating the Program for the Example
are closed (Q 33.1 = 0) and the frame moved backwards again
(Q 32.1 = 1).
11. Once the back position is reached (I 32.5 = 1), the drive is
switched off (Q 32.1 = 0). The wax sprayed onto the car now
requires a certain time (WT) to be distributed and to form a
complete film on the surface of the car. The control system
therefore waits until WT has elapsed. Once WT has elapsed,
the next step of the process is enabled.
12. Drying the car.
The drying process is initiated by starting the drying time DT
and simultaneously opening the air valve (Q 33.2 = 1). When
DT has elapsed, the air valve is closed (Q 33.2 = 0) and the
door opened (Q 32.2 = 1).
13. Driving the car out.
After opening the door (I 32.6 = 1), the door drive is switched
off (Q 32.2 = 0) and the display DRIVE CAR OUT is lit
(Q 32.5 = 1).
14. The carwash is empty.
If there is no car in position (I 32.3 = 0) the control system
switches off the display DRIVE CAR OUT (Q 32.5 = 0) and
resets the internal step counter to zero.
The washing cycle is now completed. Once the car has been
driven out, the carwash returns to the initial position (here, point
5) and the display DRIVE CAR IN is lit. The next car can be
driven in and the washing process started again.
Note: The movement of the brushes to adapt to the height and
profile of the car is not included in the example. This would be
performed by a different subprogram.
The following diagram (Fig. KEIN MERKER) is a graphical
representation of the process sequence. The numbers in brackets
indicate the assignment to the process steps described and at the
same time to the segment number in the decision table.
A.1
A-8
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Creating the Program for the Example
To separate one process step from another in terms of the
program, an internal step counter is used. Once an operation is
completed, the control system increments this counter by 1 and
includes the current counter reading in the conditions for
executing the next process step. The assignment and step counter
reading are shown on the left in Fig. A-3.
START
(1)
(2)
Preparation: program execution
Definition: operating status
CARWASH ON?
no
Reset outputs and counters
(3)
END
yes
COLD RESTART?
Go to initial setting
Reset step counter
Internal
step counter
:0
:1
Initial status
Start: washing process
(5)
:2
:3
:4
: 5/6
:7
:8
Apply shampoo
Wash/rinse
Apply wax
Formation of wax film
Dry
Drive car out
(7)
:9
Carwash empty
Check: checkback signal
END
(4)
(6)
(8)
(9)
(10/11)
(12)
Washing process
(13)
(14)
(15)
(1) = Control no. in decision table,
i.e. segment in example program
Figure A-3 Flowchart of a Carwash Process
A.1
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-9
A-10
Carwash stop (reset outputs)
Dry
Apply wax
Wash/rinse
Q 33.0
Q 32.7
Q 32.3
Apply shampoo
Q 32.2
Open (Q 32.2), close (Q 32.3) door
10
4
5
Q 33.1
Q 32.0 Q 32.1 Q 32.0 Q 32.1
3
Q 32.6 Q 32.6
Q 32.1
Carriage fwd (Q 32.0), bwd (Q 32.1)
Q 32.4
KF + 1
9
I 32.4 I 32.5 I 32.4
8
Rotate brushes
Q 32.5
DRIVE CAR OUT
Display: DRIVE CAR IN
Counter reading KF
Wax application time WT, drying time DT
Pulse counter for switch on
M 10.1
2
1
0
Step counter for washing process
I 32.7
I 32.6 I 32.6
7
Door open (I 32.6), closed (I 32.7)
I 33.0
6
I 32.5 I 32.5
5
Carriage front (I 32.4), back (I 32.5)
4
I 32.3 I 32.3 I 32.3
M 10.1
I 32.0
I 32.0
I 32.1
3
2
CONTROL no. (Segment)
Car in position
”Start” (washing process) button
”Emeergency OFF” button
Main switch/PLC start-up (OB20...22)
OPERATIONS/actions
7
12
Q 33.2
Q 32.2
WT DT
WT = 0DT = 0
6
I 32.5
11
Q 32.5
8
I 32.6
13
9
I 32.3
14
Creating the Program for the Example
Table A-2 Decision Table for the “Carwash” Program
A.1
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Creating the Program for the Example
Before we can move on to the next steps in creating the STEP 5
program, the program structure must first be established. Only a
structured program can run on a PLC.
As simple as our example program may be, for it to run properly
not only the program or function block with the control
statements for the washing process and the corresponding data
block are required, but also at least one organization block (OB
1). OB 1 is responsible for the cyclic execution of the program in
the processor. In addition to this, the start–up blocks (OB
20/21/22) are also necessary. These are responsible for the cold or
warm restart of the process under different conditions.
Without explaining the functions of the organization blocks in
greater detail, Fig. KEIN MERKER illustrates the program
structure with the block names as they are used in the example.
OB 1
OB 20
FB 5
DB 5
Carwash program
OB 21
OB 22
Figure A-4 Structure of the Carwash Program
A.1
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-11
Creating the Program for the Example
Step 4:
Specifying the data block
There are two further requirements for the control system:
– The service personnel should be able to change the times for
wax distribution WT and the drying time DT.
– The number of washing cycles should be recorded and the
number output when required.
These functions are best implemented by setting up a data block
(Fig. A-5). The data block contains the setpoints for WT and DT
as well as the actual values of the timers in the formats KH and
KF.
DB 5
”Carwash: counters / timers
The service personnel enter the setpoint times for the formation of the way film WT and
the drying time DT in the DB. The controller stores the corresponding actual times here
in the formats KH and KF.
DW
Default
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
KH
KH
KC
KH
KT
KH
KF
KH
KT
KH
KF
KH
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Comment
0000;
0000;
000;
0000;
030.2
0000
+00000
0000;
045.2
000;
0000;
030.2
empty
counter for number of cars washed (KH)
counter for number of cars washed (KC)
empty
setpoint for wax distribution time WT
WT actual value (KH)
WT actual value (KF)
empty
setpoint for drying time DT
DT actual value (KH)
DT actual value (KF)
empty
Figure A-5 Contents of the Data Block for the Carwash (Printout)
A.1
A-12
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Creating the Program for the Example
Step 5:
Programming (here only the first 5 segments)
FB 5
Segment 1
C: CARWASST.S5D
0000
LIB=2
LEN=166
”Prepare program execution”
Before the carwash program stored in function block FB 5 can be processed, DB 5
which
is called in FB 5 must be open (operation: C DB5)
:C
DB5
call DB5 (timer/counter values)
0005
0006
:***
Segment 2
0007
”Define operating status”
When the carwash is switched on or following a cold restart, the program sets pulse flag F 10.1 for one
cycle. THis is evaluated in segment 4 and if necessary the carwash is brought to the initial position.
The operating status itself is represented by edge flag F 10.0 (pos.edge) for the events ”main switch
on” or ”cold restart”. A warm restart of the carwash is only possible after F 10.0 is reset by ”main
switch off”.
0007
0008
0009
000A
000B
000C
000E
000F
0010
0011
Segment 3
:O
:O
:AN
:=
:R
:A
:S
:AN
:AN
:R
:***
0012
I:
F :
F :
F :
F :
F :
F :
I :
F :
F :
32.0
10.7
10.0
10.1
10.7
10.1
10.0
32.0
10.7
10.0
-MAINSWI
-STARTUP
-POSEDGE
-POSPUL
-STARTUP
-POSPUL
-POSEDGE
-MAINSWI
-STARTUP
-POSEDGE
main switch ”carwash on”
restart identifier from OB 20/21/22
edge flag for positive edge
puls flag (only one cycle!)
reset restart identifier
update edge flag
no ”carwash on ”command
no restart identifier
reset edge flag
”Define operating status”
When the carwash is switched off or the emergency stop button is pressed, the outputs in QW 32 and
QB 33 are set to zero and the program is terminated.
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
001A CONT.
:A
:A
:JC
:R
:L
:T
:T
:BEU
:***
I :
32.0
I :
32.1
=CONT
C
2
KB
0
QW
32
QB
33
-MAINSWI
-EMERSTOP
-STEP
main switch ”carwash on”
emergency stop button not pressed
(program branch)
reset step counter
reset outputs in QB 32
”
”
in QB 33
block end
A.1
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-13
Creating the Program for the Example
FB 5
Segment 4
C: CARWASST.S5D
001B
LIB=2
LEN=166
”Move to initial position”
The pulse generated in segment 2 when the carwash is switched on or cold restarted triggers the
carwash to move to the initial position if necessary. The carriage is brought to the “back” position,
the door is opened and if a car is in position the request DRIVE CAR OUT is displayed
001B
001C
001D
001E
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028 CONT
:AN
:JC
:R
:L
:T
:T
:AN
:S
:AN
:S
:A
:S
:***
F : 10.1
=CONT
C
2
KH
0000
QW
32
QB
33
I :
32.5
Q :
32.1
I :
32.5
Q :
32.2
I:
32.3
Q :
32.5
-POSPUL
pulse flag “carwash on/cold restart”
-STEP
reset step counter
-C-BACK
-C-BWDS
-DOOROP
-OPEN-D
-IN-POS
-CAR-OUT
reset outputs
“
”
carriage not in back position
move carriage backwards
door is not open
open door
car still in the carwash
display: DRIVE CAR OUT
Segment 5
0029
”Set up initial situation”
The initial position of the carwash is checked and when this is confirmed the request “DRIVE CAR IN”
is displayed.
step counter to ACCU 1
:L
C
2
0029
-STEP
request: step 0
:L
KC
000
002A
:!=F
002C
I : 32.3
-IN-POS
no car in position
:AN
002D
I : 32.5
-C-BACK
carriage in back position.
:A
002E
I : 32.6
door is open
-DOOROP
:A
002F
Q : 32.4
display: DRIVE CAR IN
-CAR-IN
:S
0030
Q : 32.5
reset: DRIVE CAR OUT
-CAR-OUT
:R
0031
:CU
C
2
-STEP
increment step counter by 1
0032
0033
:***
The complete program including all comments and the
assignment list can be found in the directory
C:\S5_DATEN\DEFAULT under the name PROEXAST.S5D.
A.1
A-14
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Glossary
A.2
Glossary
A
absolute address
This is the physical address (number) of the memory location of
an operand, at which it is accessed.
access rights,
access protecion
With STEP 5, it is also possible to work from the PG via a bus
link. The system manager then assigns attributes to the files: read
only, read/write etc. These access rights to programs are set prior
to editing in the ”Settings”.
actual operand
The actual operands (parameter list in the calling block) replace
the formal operands in an FB/FX when it is called.
assignment list
List of assignments of absolute and symbolic operands and
operand comments.
The assignment list is edited as a sequential file (*Z0.SEQ).
When you save it, this sequential source file generates the →
symbols file (*Zn.INI, n = 0,1,2).
B
block
A block is a section of a user program for a specific function,
structure or use. In STEP 5, a distinction is made between blocks
containing statements (OB, PB, SB, FB/FX) and blocks
containing data (DB/DX) and variables blocks (VB) that are not
used in the program but contain lists of variables for test
purposes.
block body
The block body contains statements/logic operations in segments
or it contains process data (in DBs).
block header
STEP 5 automatically sets up the header (length 5 DW)
containing the start identifier, type and number of the block and
the PG identifier, the library number and the block length
(including the preheader).
A.2
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-15
Glossary
block preheader
In data and function blocks (DB/DX, FB/FX), STEP 5 generates
an additional block header with the formats of the data used
(DV/DX) or the identifiers of the jump labels (FV/FVX). The
preheader is not transferred to the PLC or to EPROM/EEPROMs.
blow
Transferring STEP 5 blocks to an EPROM/EEPROM submodule.
breakpoint
To test sequences of statements in blocks, a breakpoint can be set.
This is a point at which the RLO can be observed in the program
(→ Test, Block status/Status variable). Program execution is
stopped at the breakpoint and the signal states of the → actual
operands are output.
buffer
Temporary store to which selected program or text sections are
written during editing so that they can be recalled and copied or
transferred. The next buffer command overwrites the current
content.
bus selection
With the bus selection utility (Management, bus paths)
connections from the PG to selected stations can be set up and
activated. All STEP 5 functions can be performed via such a bus
path just as with a point to point connection.
C
change
STEP 5 menu for calling other S5 packages (e.g. GRAPH 5). It is
possible to change to one of the loaded packages displayed in the
COM selection box and then return to STEP 5 at any time.
A.2
A-16
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Glossary
comments
STEP 5 provides a wide range of possibilities for adding
comments and explanations to programs. Comments are not
transferred to the PLC. STEP 5 accepts statement, segment and
plant comments. Since data blocks do not have segments, a block
comment is created.
– Statement comments and line comments for DB/DXs (max.
32 characters) and segment titles (with DBs block titles) are
stored in comment blocks (OC, PC, SC, FC).
– Segment comments and block comments for DB/DXs with a
maximum of 16K characters are stored in documentation
blocks (e.g. #PBDO.nnn). These are assigned to the
”program” block (PB, SB,FB etc.).
– The plant comment (explanation of the user program) is
stored in an S5 documentation file with a freely selectable
name (#DOCFILE, name = max. 8 characters).
compress memory
When blocks are deleted in the PLC, they are first declared
invalid in the user memory. Whenever a block is corrected, an
unaltered old block remains in memory. The STEP 5 function
”Test, PLC control, Compress memory” eliminates invalid blocks
and closes the gaps between valid blocks to create more memory.
connector
An intermediate flag used to temporarily store the RLO (also
inverted), so that the RLO can be used elsewhere avoiding
repetitive logic operations.
control system
flowchart, CSF
Representation of the logical relationships of a control task in the
form of function symbols complying with DIN 40719, Part 6.
cross reference
If the function ”Management, Generate XRF” is activated, STEP
5 generates the cross references to other uses of each operand and
writes the references to a special program file *XR.INI. You can
call up this information in the block editor (F2 Reference)
covering more than one block.
cross reference list
This is created by STEP 5 from the set program file after the
function has been selected in the ”Documentation, Standard
output or Enhanced output”. The list contains the symbol for
every absolute operand and indicates the blocks and segments
where they occur.
A.2
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-17
Glossary
cursor
The STEP 5 editors use a large cursor (known as the long cursor)
and a small cursor. The long cursor indicates the current editing
position in the editing field. It is displayed inversely and its
length is generally the length of the actual input field. The small
cursor is character oriented and is used for precise editing in the
editing fields.
In LAD/CSF, the long cursor supports the graphical design of the
segment in conjunction with the mouse. The cursor is moved
within the grid of 8 columns and 50 lines (= 2.5 x screen height).
In the ”small cursor” mode, no mouse operation is possible.
cursor control
(automatic)
When using automatic cursor control, the cursor jumps to the
next empty input field automatically when an entry is completed.
The function switched on and off with the CURS key.
cycle time
The time required for the program to run through once in cyclic
program execution. This time determines the maximum reaction
time of a PLC to an external signal.
D
data block DB/DX
These blocks contain data (e.g. bit patterns, constant values) with
which the program works. After it has been called, a data block
remains ”open” until another data block is called.
directory
With the STEP 5 function ”Directory, in the program file” or ”in
the PLC or file”, the block list of a program file is displayed or
printed out. The block type, number, length and the library
number of each block is displayed (not if PLC is selected).
documentation
The STEP 5 menu ”Documentation” provides functions for
outputting program blocks and elements on a printer or to a file.
In the ”Standard output”, the elements are output as they appear
on the screen, in the ”Enhanced output”, graphical elements are
added and a footer with user information is appended to each
page.
documentation
block
This contains the segment comments assigned to blocks
(#OBDO.nnn, # PB.., #SB.., #FB..) and a block comment for data
blocks (#DBDO.nnn).
E
A.2
A-18
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Glossary
editor
A software tool for creating → blocks in the form of Statement
Lists (STL), Ladder Diagrams (LAD) or Control System
Flowcharts (CSF) depending on the → settings. Special editors
are used to create → data blocks, or → assignment lists and for
writing segment and plant comments.
The STEP 5 ”Editor” menu provides access to the central tools
for programming, creating blocks, designing logic controls and
for acquiring process data.
EPROM/EEPROM
In terms of STEP 5, this is a utility which can be invoked under
”Management” and used to load (blow) and erase user programs
in EPROM/EEPROM submodules.
F
flag
Flags are internal memory locations that can be addressed either
bit or byte oriented (identifier F). Intermediate results of
operations are written to flags.
footer
This is a labelling field appended to the bottom of each page
printed out. The footer can be either 80 or 132 characters wide.
This is selected in the ”Settings, Page 2”.
formal operand
An operand that can be assigned parameters and that is connected
to a substitution statement. In the FB/FX, only the operation to be
performed on the operand is specified. The actual operand is
substituted for the formal operand based on a parameter list when
the block is called.
function block FB
This type of block contains programs or program sections
(subprograms), particularly functions which are required
frequently (→ standard function blocks) in the form of STEP 5
statements (basic and supplementary operations). FBs are
intended for multiple use. The actual operands are transferred to
the FB via the parameter list when it is called.
A.2
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-19
Glossary
function element
A function element in LAD/CSF represents the relationship
between ”input – processing – output” in a control system as a
box with the signal flow ”conditions – function – operations”.
STEP 5 recognizes binary function elements, e.g. ”&”, ”= >”,
connectors, timers/counters and complex word–oriented function
elements (digital functions) e.g. arithmetic, shift or convert
operations. Owing to the different operand types, it is not
normally possible to cascade binary and complex function
elements.
function keys
These can have a fixed assignment (e.g. delete key, cancel etc.)
or may be assigned functions appropriate to the current editor and
situation (softkeys
F1 ...F8 – activated by pressing the keyboard key or clicking on
the buttons at the lower edge of the screen).
I
input field
An operand field in LAD/CSF in which the operand with its type
identifier and parameter or symbolic name (with hyphen) can be
entered. An input field is ”undefined” when it contains 9
question marks. The field is ”not connected” when it can remain
empty without an operand.
interrupt stack
ISTACK
At each program execution level, the system program writes an
entry in the interrupt stack whenever the PLC is interrupted, so
that after the interrupt has been serviced, the program returns to
the previous level. The information output (Test, PLC info)
includes the address of the interrupt point with the current
condition codes, the contents of the ACCUs and the cause of the
interrupt.
I/Q/F list
This provides information about the bit assignments in bytes (W,
DW) of the operand groups inputs (I), flags (F) and outputs (Q)
(Documentation, standard output, I/Q/F list and Enhanced
output).
job box
A dialog window for defining STEP 5 functions. Apart from
naming the object to be processed, you can also select processing
or output options.With the ”select” function in the job box a →
selection box is displayed in which files and blocks etc. can be
found and selected.
A.2
A-20
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Glossary
L
Ladder diagram
(LAD)
Graphical editing language for STEP 5 blocks in logic control
programs, derived from circuit diagrams (DIN 19 239).
library number
5 digit number to identify blocks (block number)
long box
→ Function element
M
management
The STEP 5 ”Management” menu provides functions with which
the user program can be manipulated (generating cross
references, rewiring operands, translating assignment lists etc.)
and for storing blocks on EPROM/EEPROMs. This menu also
includes an editor for creating path files for PG bus connections.
memory areas
There are three memory areas in each PLC: the user area, the
system area (BSTACK, ISTACK, address lists, counters, timers,
flags, PII, PIQ) and the peripheral area (addresses of the process
I/Os).
memory
configuration
STEP 5 function which diplays the amount of user memory
occupied in the PLC.
N
new display
When editing in LAD and CSF, this function (half screen key)
reorganizes the screen and optimizes the display of the current
segment, even when the operands are still incompletely labelled.
node
Nodes are stations (PLC, PG, server) connected to a network.
They are identified by a unique name. A bus path leads from the
start node to (e.g. PG/AS511) via one or more nodes (e.g. CP) to
an end node (e.g. CPU in the S5-135). Each node has a network
address (node number).
O
A.2
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-21
Glossary
object
An item which can be selected for processing in the STEP 5
”Object” menu. According to this definition an object can be one
of the following:
– a → project, i.e. the configuration of a user program
– a block, i.e. an editable and callable program module
– a PCP/M file that can be converted to an S5–DOS/ST/MT file
or deleted.
– an S5-DOS/ST/MT file that can be converted to a PCP/M file
or deleted.
operand
Process variable that can be addressed in absolute form (e.g. I
32.0) or in symbolic form (e.g. VALVE 1).
operand comment
These can be added to the symbols in the assignment list. They
can be entered and modified directly in the block editor.
organization block
OB
These contain STEP 5 operations (basic operations) particularly
block calls. OBs are called by the operating system or by the user
to call special functions and trigger certain reactions from the
PLC. OBs are part of the user program and form the interface to
the system program.
overall reset
Deletes all the blocks loaded in a PLC.
P
path file
A path file contains a selected (edited) bus path with all the node
names and addresses. It is called using the required path name
with the extension *AP.INI. The PG then establishes the path
automatically.
PG link
Direct connection of two PGs via connecting cables.
plant comment
Text file for adding comments to a user program. This is not
linked to a block. The file name must be preceded by the
character #. The other 8 characters can be selected freely.
printer file
This file contains the parameters for the printer (formats, control
sequences). It is named in the Settings, page 2. Its extension is
*DR.INI and it is stored in the system directory.
process
peripherals
All the sensors (limit switches etc.) required for process input and
the actuators and indications required for process output.
A.2
A-22
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Glossary
process variable
A process variable, also known simply as a variable, is an
operand to which a process–dependent value can be assigned.
These values can be variable or constant. The operands adopt a
signal state.
program blocks
→ Blocks
programming
number
This is used to identify the type of EPROM/EEPROM plugged in.
This is assigned to the order number of the specific submodule.
When a function is invoked (e.g. blow EPROM), STEP 5
examines the programming number and then displays the
parameters of the submodule. This avoids errors when
submodules are exchanged.
program structure
Program overview display in which the nested calls of individual
blocks is indicated starting from the OB (→ Documentation,
Standard output and Enhanced output).
project
The term ”project” (STEP 5 menu) is used to identify all the
STEP 5 files belonging to one user program in a project file
(*PJ.INI). This project file, which can be both loaded and saved,
contains all the information, e.g. parameter settings and
directory/file names for straightforward processing and
maintenance of the user program.
process image
If the operand groups I or Q are addressed by STEP 5 statements,
the bits on the I/O modules are not scanned or modified directly,
but rather a special area of the system memory in the PLC,
known as the process image.
The process image of the inputs (PII) and outputs (PIQ) is
processed and updated cyclically by the CPU. During start–up
and at the start of every cycle, the signal states of the input
modules are transferred to the PII. At the end of the program
cycle, the CPU transfers the signal states in the PIQ to the output
modules.
A.2
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-23
Glossary
User
memory
direct peripheral access
User
program
Process image of
the Inputs (PII)
(OB, PB, SB, FB,
Process image of
the Outputs (PIQ)
Update process
image
Input
modules
Update outputs
FX, DB, DX)
- time driven
- interrupt driven
Flags
Timers
Counters
other
system data
S5 – BUS
- cyclic
Output
modules
Data blocks
Memory area (CPU module)
A.2
A-24
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Glossary
R
result of logic
operation
The signal state at a particular point in the program, which is
used for further binary signal processing. The RLO is the result of
bit–oriented logic operations or the truth statement for
comparator operations. It can, e.g. be combined with the status of
operands or operations are executed depending on the previous
RLO (e.g. conditional jumps). The RLO is in bit 1 of the
condition code byte.
rewiring
This function assigns different or new addresses to operands in
the user program. The function ”Management, Rewire” renames
the operand in the whole program although the assignment only
needs to be entered in a list once for each operand. Only the
address and not the symbol is changed.
S
search
This function allows operands, segments or addresses to be
located quickly within the program file. Before the function is
started, the search key (identical the item to be found including
upper and lower case letters) must be specified.
segment
A segment is a unit of a block which contains a sequence of
logic operations (at least one) which implement a particular task
and produce an intermediate result that can be used for further
program execution. A segment can consist of any number of
statements, however, in LAD and CSF, the number of operations
is restricted to 6 or 7 owing to the size of the editing field on the
screen. A segment is completed with ***.
segment identifier
To allow the editor to assign a segment comment to the correct
segment, the editor automatically generates a 7–character string
preceded by the $ character (e.g. [email protected]). The number is the
number of the segment. This identifier must not be modified or
deleted otherwise the assignment of comment to block is lost.
selection box
A dialog window called in the job box for finding and selecting
objects (blocks/files) in drives, directories and programs for
processing with STEP 5.
A.2
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-25
Glossary
settings
Settings box (2 pages) in the ”Object” menu to define a →
Project in terms of naming the program files and selecting
operating modes and type of representation on the PG/PC. All
subsequent work in editing sessions relates to the selections made
here.
SINEC H1
This is a bus system (network) for industrial environments
complying with IEEE 802.3 (ETHERNET). PGs, PCs and PLCs
can be connected. A bus segment has up to 100 stations
connected and can be up to 500 m long. Segments are connected
by repeaters. A maximum of two repeaters can be inserted
between any two stations.
SINEC L1
This is a bus system for implementing small distributed
automation systems with simple ressources. Only PLCs can be
connected. A master PLC organizes the data traffic on the bus
cable. The other PLCs are operated as slaves.
SINEC L2
This is a bus system based on the PROFIBUS standard (DIN
19245). There are both active and passive stations. Active
stations can only access the bus when they have the token.The
token is passed on in the logical ring in ascending order of the
station addresses. Up to eight segments with a length between 0.2
and 1.2 km depending on the data rate can be connected via
repeaters.
softkey
→ Function keys
standard function
blocks
These are ready programmed ”off-the-shelf” function blocks for
special applications. Each standard function block has a serial
number assigned to it. The blocks represent self-contained
functions that are required regularly in the user programs.
start address
The start addresses of all blocks in the user program are stored in
the address list of DB2.
statement
The smallest independent unit of a program. It represents a task
to be performed by the processor. A statement consists of the
operation and the operand. The operand consists of the type
identifier (e.g. I, Q, F, DW) and the parameter (e.g. 10.5, 25).
A.2
A-26
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Glossary
statement
comment
This is an explanatory comment added to an STL statement. It is
stored with the segment titles in comment blocks (OC, PC, SC,
FC/FCX).
Statement List
An assembler-type alphanumeric input language for
programmable controllers (DIN 19239) with one statement per
program line. It can be used universally both for simple and
complex control tasks. The statements are input and assigned
addresses in the order in which they will be processed.
status
This function outputs the signal state of operands (bit 2 in the
condition code byte). The status function is an online function
and is selected in ”Test” menu.
symbols file
The list of the assignment of symbolic to absolute operands
stored in a source file. Blocks programmed using symbolic
operands are converted to absoulte address format with the help
of the symbols file. They can then be understood by the
processor.
system checkpoint
The system checkpoint is the interface between the operating
system of the PLC and the user program. OB1 is called at the
system checkpoint. In each cycle, the PLC operating system
passes through the system checkpoint. At this point the process
variables have the same state as the current process image. At the
system checkpoint (Figure), the PG can be used to monitor or
modify the signal states of the process variables and to set an
output signal.
A.2
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-27
ÑÑÑ
STOP
START
Glossary
Process image
of the inputs
PII
Peripheral
inputs
Anwenderprogramm
OB 1
F 5.3
I 10.1
User checkpoint
e.g.
Block call
JC PB1
.
.
.
BE
System
checkpoint
OB 1 called
Process image
of the outputs
PIO
System program cycle
PB 1
I 2.0
I 1.1
Breakpoint
F 1.0
.
.
.
BE
Peripheral
outputs
User program cycle
system
identification file
The SYSID file (Settings, Page 1) contains identification data
and characteristics, e.g. for the communications processors (CPs).
SYSID system
parameters
These are data about the internal structure and the releases of the
software and are located on every PLC. Information about the
system paramenters is available with the function ”Test, Output
PLC info”.
test
The STEP 5 menu ”Test” provides functions for testing user
program blocks with the PLC online with the PG: these tests
include logical and feasibility tests beyond the boundaries of one
block. At the same time, information and correction functions are
available depending on the PLC mode and the states of the
process signals.
A.2
A-28
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Glossary
text editor
Tool for creating and working with segments and operand
comments in
→ Documentation blocks. Documentation blocks are called using
the job/selection box in the STEP 5 block and the data block
editor.
user checkpoint
During program execution, process variables are changed
dynamically and transferred to the process peripherals by the
PLC at the end of each cycle. To be able to follow the changes to
the variables while the program is running, the signal states of the
variables can be output at any point in the program (Status
variables or program test ON) (see Figure overleaf).
Operating
system of
PLC
S
OB 1
FB
PB
Organisation
of block
processing
A
U
U
PB
FX
U
SB
U
FB
U
Organisation
block (OB)
S=System checkpoint
Program-, sequence
block (PB, SB)
U
Function
block (FB, FX)
A= User checkpoint (selectable)
Checkpoints during program processing in the PLC.
V
variables block VB
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A variables block is used to store the content of the screen
(operands, process variables) entered during the test functions
status variables and the force functions → block.
A.2
A-29
Glossary
wildcards
* = substitute for a character string or a format-dependent name.
? = substitute for a character
XRF list
→ cross reference list
A.2
A-30
C79000-G8576-C820-01
S5 Terminology
A.3
S5 Terminology
The following list provides you with the most common
SIMATIC S5 abbreviations.
A
ABS
Absolute addressing, e. g. I 1.0
ACCU
Accumulator
ADF
Addressing error
AL
Assignment list
ARCNET
Attached Resource Computer NETwork. Network for the office
environment
AS 511
Interface module 511, interface to the PLC
B
B
Block
BCD
Binary coded decimal number
BE
Block end
BSTACK
Block stack
C
C
Counter
COM n
Programmer software for a communications processor
COMP
Software program for comparing blocks
CP n
Communications processor (n = the number of the
communications processor)
CPU
Central processing unit
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A.3
A-31
S5 Terminology
CSF
Control system flowchart, graphical representation of the
automation task using symbols complying to DIN 40 700/DIN 40
719
D
D
Data (1 bit),
DB
Data block
DBA
Data block start address
DBDO.nnn
Documentation block for a DB data block
DC
Comment block for a DB data block
DCX
Comment block for a DX data block
DD
Data double word (32 bits).When applied to diskettes: double
density
DIR
Directory of the hard disk, diskette, PLC, EPROM and files
DL
Left data byte (8 bits)
DOCFILE
Documentation file, e. g. for plant comments
DR
Right data byte (8 bits)
DSP ABS
Presets screen form, display absolute operands
DSP SYM
Presets screen form, display symbolic operands
DV
Block preheader for a DB
DVS
Data management system for assignment lists
DVX
Block preheader for a DX
DW
Data word (16 bit)
DX
Extended data block
DXDO.nnn
Documentation block for a DX data block
E
EEPROM
Electrically erasable programmable read–only memory
A.3
A-32
C79000-G8576-C820-01
S5 Terminology
EPROM
Erasable programmable read–only memory
ERAB
First scan (status bit)
F
F, FY, FW, FD
Flag bit, flag byte, flag word, flag double word
FB
Function block
FBDO.nnn
Documentation block for an FB function block
FC
Comment block for an FB function block
FCX
Comment block for an FX function block
FD
Default program file in which you are currently working. This
abbreviation was used mainly in older STEP 5 software under
PCP/M.
FlexOS
Operating system
FT
File transfer
FV
Block preheader for an FB
FVX
Block preheader for an FX
FX
Extended function block
FXDO.nnn
Documentation block for an FX function block
G
GRAPH 5
Software package for planning and programming sequence
controls in a clear graphic representation (optional package)
I
I, IB, IW, ID
Input, byte, word, double word
IP
Intelligent peripheral module
ISTACK
Interrupt stack
K
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A.3
A-33
S5 Terminology
KOR
Coordinator module
L
LAD
Ladder diagram, graphical representation of the automation task
with the symbols of a circuit diagram complying with DIN 19239
LEN
Length of a block
LIB
Library number
N
NAU
Power failure
O
OB
Organization block
OBDO.nnn
Documentation block for an organization block
OC
Comment block for an organization block
OY, OW
Byte, word from the extended peripherals
P
A.3
PB
Program block
PBDO.nnn
Documentation block for a program block
PC
Comment block for a program block
PCP/M-86
Personal CP/M–86 operating system
PG
Programmer
PG-NET
Software package for connecting programmers to a network
(option)
PI
Process image
PII
Process input image
PIQ
Process output image
A-34
C79000-G8576-C820-01
S5 Terminology
PLC
Programmable controller
PW
Peripheral word
PY
Peripheral byte
Q
Q, QB, QW, QD
Output, byte, word, double word
QVZ
Timeout
R
RAM
Random access memory
REW
Rewire, renaming inputs and outputs in the user program
RLO
Result of logic operation (bit condition code)
RO
Read-only access
RW
Read and write access
S
S5-DOS/MT
S5 operating system
S, SY, SW, SD
S flag, extended flag, byte, word, double word
SAC
Step address counter
SB
Sequence block
SBDO.nnn
Documentation block for a sequence block
SC
Comment block for a sequence block
SINEC H1
Bus system, network for an industrial environment
SINEC L2
Bus system based on PROFIBUS standards
STA
Status (bit condition code)
STEP 5
Programming language for programming SIMATIC S5
programmable controllers
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A.3
A-35
S5 Terminology
STL
Statement list, STEP 5 method of representation using
mnemonics of the S5 operations (complies to DIN 19239)
SYM
Symbolic addressing (e.g. –INPUT)
SYSID
Block for system identification
T
T
Timer
V
VB
Variables block
X
XRF
Cross reference list (file *XR.INI)
Z
ZYK
Cycle error
A.3
A-36
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Key Assignment
A.4
Key Assignment
The keyboard of a personal computer can have different functions
assigned to the keys, i.e. the key functions depend on the
currently active software. This also applies to the STEP 5
software. As soon as you load STEP 5, the keys take on specific
S5 functions. There are two types of keys:
dynamically assigned keys (function keys)
keys with a fixed assignment
Dynamically
Assigned Keys
(function keys)
The keys F1 to F8 are known as function keys. Depending on the
software level at which you are currently working, these keys are
assigned the functions that are possible and also required at this
level. The function keys are displayed in the menu at the lower
edge of the screen. Some of the keys have a double assignment,
function keys F1 to F8 and SHIFT F1 to SHIFT F8.
Keys with a Fixed
Assignment
Such keys always have the same function, e.g. within STEP 5, the
HELP function or the cursor control. These can also have
multiple uses in combination with the SHIFT, ALT or CTRL
keys.
Keys in LAD/CSF
Function Control
Keys
Key name
Key
Output
HELP
Displays a help text
on the screen
PRINT
Prints out the whole Prints out the whole
screen on a printer or screen on a printer or
to a file
to a file
HELP
Hardcopy
Edit
Displays help
information
Remarks
Also available with
SHIFT F8
A.4
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-37
Key Assignment
Key name
Half screen
Key
ÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌ
Output
CTRL
New, optimised
screen display
In ”edit” also with
”extras” (SHIFT
F7) and F2 ”New
disp”
Disabled
Changes to ”symbol
correction”
In output, only
available with F1. In
”edit” also with
”extras” (SHIFT
F7) and F2 ”New
disp”
Changes to the
editing mode
(correction)
Disabled
In ”output” also with
F6.
Changes to the
comment input
mode – branch to
segment title or
segment comment
As output
In ”output” and
”edit” also with
SHIFT F6.
END
Editing mode
5
CORR
Segment
comment
÷
COM
Insert segment
Delete segment
SHIFT
Remarks
Disabled
PAUSE
Zoom-in
Edit
A segment is
Disabled
inserted before the
current segment. An
empty screen is
displayed and you
change to the editing
mode
In ”output” also in
”segment functions”
with F5 (Insert)
Deletes the
displayed segment.
The segment is not
buffered.
In ”output” also in
”segment functions”
with SHIFT F4. In
”segment functions”
the segment is
written to the buffer
file.
Disabled
A.4
A-38
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Key Assignment
Terminating Keys
Key name
Key
Output
Edit
Remarks
ESC
Changes back to the
previous level
Modifications within
a field can be
cancelled. Otherwise
you change to
”output”. Newly
entered segments are
deleted.
If you exit ”edit” the
segment is displayed
in its old form. If the
segment has been
input as a new
segment, the
previous one is
displayed. Also with
F8.
Stores the currently
displayed block if it
has been changed.
Changes back to the
calling level.
Stores the currently
edited segment.
Displays the
segment in its
newest form.
Same as F7.
Disabled
Completes input in
fields. In empty
fields the cursor is
moved one field to
the right.
A new segment is
inserted after the
segment displayed.
An empty screen is
displayed and you
change to the editing
mode.
Enters the segment
you are currently
working with and
opens a new
segment.
Cancel (escape)
Insert
0
Insert
Return
Enter segment
ÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌ
ENTER
***
In ”edit” also with
F6.
A.4
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-39
Key Assignment
Control keys
Key name
Key
Page up
9
Page down
3
SHIFT Page up
SHIFT
9
SHIFT Page
down
Page one
segment
forwards
SHIFT
3
+
Page one
segment back
Segment end
SHIFT
Output
SHIFT
Input field end
TAB
+
Remarks
Moves the displayed As ”output”
segment one line up.
In selection boxes
one page up.
Moves the displayed As ”output”
segment one line
down.
In selection boxes
one page down.
Moves the displayed As ”output”
segment one page
down.
Rolls the displayed
segment one page
up.
As ”output”
The next segment is
displayed.
Jump to the end of
the current line.
The previous
segment is
displayed.
Jump to the start of
the current line
Disabled
Jump to the end of
the displayed
segment.
Disabled
Jump to the start of
the displayed
segment.
Disabled
Jump to the end of
the input field on
which the cursor is
positioned.
+
Segment start
Edit
In ”output” also in
the ”segment
functions” with F2.
A.4
A-40
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Key Assignment
Key name
Input field start
Key
SHIFT
Output
Jump to the start of
the input field on
which the cursor is
positioned.
7
Disabled
Expand the segment Not permitted at the
by one column at the left margin of a LAD
cursor position.
segment. In ”edit”
also with SHIFT F7
= Extras as F6 =
Hor exp
1
Disabled
Expand the segment
by one line at the
cursor position.
Disabled
Deletes a single
character marked by
the cursor.
Disabled
Deletes a whole
subfield.
Disabled
Deletes a single
character to the left
of the cursor.
Positions the cursor
on the next input
field to the right. At
the end of the line
jumps to the first
position in the line.
As ”output”. Within
the input field you
can also move the
cursor to the
position right of the
short cursor.
Positions the cursor
on the next input
field to the left. At
the start of the line
jumps to the last
position in the line.
As ”output”. Within
the input field you
can also move the
cursor to the
position left of the
short cursor.
Vertical expand
Delete character
marked by cursor
Delete subfield
Remarks
Disabled
TAB
+
Horizontal
expand
Edit
.
DEL
SHIFT
.
Not permitted in the
two top lines of
LAD segments.
DEL
Delete character
left of cursor
Cursor right
Cursor left
6
4
A.4
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-41
Key Assignment
Key name
Cursor up
Cursor down
Key
8
2
Change to input
field
SHIFT
Change to next
input field
SHIFT
Output
Remarks
Positions the cursor
on the input field
above the long
cursor.
As ”output”
Positions the cursor
on the input field
below the long
cursor
As ”output”
As cursor right
The editing mode to
modify the input
field is activated.
Empty input fields
are deleted with this
mode change. This
key completes the
input field and
moves on to the next
field to the right.
As cursor left
Completes the input
field, moves to the
next input field to
the left.
6
4
Edit
A.4
A-42
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Key Assignment
Special Keys
Key name
Key
Output
Connector = F9
SHIFT
Inputs a connector at Also F5 = Binary
the current cursor
op and F4 = #
position
Disabled
Inputs a negated
connector at the
cursor position
Disabled
Input fields are
marked as undefined
when this key is
pressed first after
selecting the input
field
F9
Not defined ”?”
?
Key Assignment
STL
Key name
Also F5 = Binary
op and F5 = /.
The following tables only explain the key assignment when the
functions are different from those for LAD or CSF. All other key
functions are listed under → Key assignment LAD/CSF.
Key
Cancel (escape)
ESC
Half screen
PAUSE
Segment
comment
Remarks
Disabled
F9
Negated
connector = F9
Edit
÷
COM
Output
Edit
Return to previous
level.
Delete newly input
segments
Changes the
comment mode
between operand
and statement
comments.
As ”output”
Changes to the input As ”output”
mode for segment
title, if pressed twice
to the segment/block
comments.
Remarks
Also SHIFT F4
In ”output” also with
SHIFT F6.
A.4
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-43
Key Assignment
Control Keys
Key name
Cursor right
Cursor left
Change to next
input field
Change to next
input field
Key
6
4
SHIFT
Output
Edit
Remarks
Disabled
Positions the cursor
to the right within an
input field. At the
end of the field
jumps to the first
position of the next
input field.
Disabled
Positions the cursor
to the left within an
input field. At the
end of the field
jumps to the first
position of the next
input field.
Disabled
As output
Disabled
As output
6
SHIFT
4
A.4
A-44
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Brief Operating Instructions
A.5
Brief Operating Instructions
Job Boxes
Object
The majority of selectable functions must first have parameters
assigned and then be activated. You assign parameters after
calling the function in job and selection boxes.
Within these boxes, you can move the cursor with the mouse or
the tab key and the cursor keys. In certain fields (colored or
inverse display) you can call further selection boxes with F3
= Select.
This menu provides functions with which you can organize your
program and files.
Project
You make all the required settings for a program once and store
them in a project file (*PJ.INI). The following must be set, e.g.:
– storage location for the various files
– files involved
– method of representation (LAD/CSF/STL)
– mode
– parameters for printing out
etc.
Settings
page 1
page 2
In the displayed “settings boxes” you enter the files and
parameters. This box is divided into two pages. The selected
parameters are set in the corresponding job and selection boxes.
The set files and parameters on these two pages are valid for all
the work in the project. In the “settings box” you can position the
cursor using the cursor keys or the mouse. By double clicking on
the parameters, you can either open a selection box or change the
default. You can also achieve this by pressing the F3 key twice.
A.5
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-45
Brief Operating Instructions
Save
This saves all the settings made in the “settings” boxes in the current
project file (*PJ.INI).
Save as
Save the settings in a new (selectable) project file (*PJ.INI).
Load
A file created as described above is loaded. All the settings contained
in the file are then valid. Existing settings are overwritten.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Blocks
Here, you manage blocks and documentation files on the PG or the
PLC. The following functions are available:
Directory
This outputs a directory on the output device selected in the job box
(PG-PLC).
Transfer
Transfers blocks and documentation files from file to file, file to
PLC, PLC to file. You select the source and destination in the
displayed job boxes.
Compare
You can compare single blocks with each other, single blocks of a
group of blocks or all blocks of a program file with a second program
file. You can compare file with file, file with PLC, PLC with file.
Delete
This is used to delete blocks on the PG and PLC and documentation
files only on the PG, PLC overall reset.
DOS files
With this function you manage files without having to change to the
operating system level. You select a directory or search for a
particular file in a directory using the job box. The following
functions are available:
Directory
This lists the contents of a directory.
Copy
You can copy single files or groups of files.
Delete
You can delete single files or groups of files.
A.5
A-46
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Brief Operating Instructions
PCP/M files
With this function you can handle PCP/M files.
Directory
A directory created under PCP/M is displayed in the “directory of
PCP/M files” job box, depending on your specifications.
Copy
This converts PCP/M files to S5–DOS ST/MT files. It can also be
used to convert STEP 5 files created with S5–DOS ST/MT into
PCP/M files.
Delete
PCP/M files on a PCP/M medium are deleted.
Editor
STEP 5 block
Using this menu you can start various program editors.
With this function, you can start the LAD/CSF or STL editors. The
job box “edit STEP 5 block(s)” is displayed. Here, you select a
block. The editor selected in the “settings” is then displayed.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data blocks
With this function you supply parameters and start the editor for data
blocks.
DB screen forms
With this function you supply parameters and start the editor for DB
screen forms.
Assignment list
As soon as you activate this function, the editor for the sequential
source file is called directly.
Test
With this menu, you activate the test, information and start–up
functions with the PG in the online mode. There must be a
physical and logical connection between the PG and PLC. You
create this connection in the “settings” boxes using the “mode”
field.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Block status
With this function you can test and correct blocks loaded on the PLC.
You select the block to be tested in the “block status” selection box.
Status variables
With this function you output the current signal states of selected
operands at the system checkpoint during program processing. You
edit the operand list in an empty table.
A.5
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-47
Brief Operating Instructions
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
PLC control
With this function you can start and stop a PLC connected online or
compress the user memory in the PLC.
Start PLC
With this function you trigger a cold or warm restart on the
programmable controller.
Stop PLC
This changes the PLC to the STOP mode.
Compress
memory
With this function you can eliminate invalid blocks on the PLC and
shift the valid blocks together.
Force variables
With this function you can modify process variables and intervene in
the process. You edit an operand list in the displayed table.
Force outputs
With this function you can set outputs to on or off. The PLC must be
in the STOP mode.
Output PLC info
You can obtain information about the status of the connected PLC.
ISTACK
A table of the control bits and their current status is displayed on the
screen. With the PLC in the STOP mode, the interrupt stack is output
to allow you to analyze the cause of an error.
BSTACK
This provides you with information about the start address of the
currently valid block and the relative and absolute return address in
the block stack.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Output memory
contents
This function outputs the absolute addresses of the PLC and their
contents on a selectable medium.
Memory
configuration
This outputs the memory configuration and indicates how much of
the user memory in the PLC is currently occupied.
System
parameters
This displays the system parameters of the PLC on the screen.
Program test ON
With this function, a block in the PLC is processed step by step. You
select the box in the “program test ON” selection box which you can
then manipulate or search for an operand that you want to monitor.
Program test OFF
This switches off the program test function.
A.5
A-48
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Brief Operating Instructions
Management
This menu provides you with a series of utilities required in many
situations when working with the STEP 5 editing and test
functions.
The presets for the individual functions must already be made in
the “settings” boxes.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Generate XRF
This generates a cross reference list for the set program file. As soon
as you activate this function, a cross reference list is generated.
EPROMs
With this function you can transfer (blow) STEP 5 programs from the
selected program file to EPROM/EEPROM submodules. The “presets” box is displayed.
Rewire
With this function you can rename operands and assign them to
different outputs.
Automatic
The operands are renamed automatically based on a modified or new
assignment list. The job box “automatic rewiring” is displayed. Here,
you select the new program file name “to program file” and “with
new symbols file”. The function is then executed immediately.
Manual
You rename operands in an operand list. The job box “manual
rewiring” is displayed. Here, you select the new program file name
“to program file”. Following this, you enter the operands in a table.
Assignment list
With this function you can process the assignment lists required for
symbolic addressing of operands in your user program.
Convert
SEQ >INI
You convert the sequential source file to the corresponding symbols
file. You enter the name of the source file to be converted in the
“convert SEQ > INI” job box.
Convert
INI >SEQ
You convert the symbols file to the corresponding sequential source
file, and you can have this sorted according to absolute or symbolic
operands. You enter the name of the symbols file to be translated and
the type of sorting you require in the “convert INI > SEQ” job box.
Correct INI
With this function you can change the name of the symbols file to be
corrected. You enter the name of the symbols file to be corrected in
the “correct INI” job box. Following this, you can correct the
symbols file.
A.5
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-49
Brief Operating Instructions
Convert stage
V1.x
V2.x
Symbols files created with earlier versions (V1.0, V2.0) can be
converted.
Delete SEQ
This function deletes a sequential source file.
Delete INI
You delete the symbols files (*Z0.INI, *Z1.INI, *Z2.INI).
Output error
list
You output the error list created if errors occurred during the
conversions.
Select drive
With this function you can select the drives on which, for example,
further S5 packages are installed.
Bus paths
With this function you can create, store and activate connections that
are not established as point–to–point connections. You can create bus
paths in the “select function/presets” selection box.
Documentation
This menu provides a selection of functions with which you can
output programmable components such as blocks, files and lists
on printers or to files. You can also evaluate certain data
according to various criteria.
You can select either the standard output, i.e. output as edited or
the enhanced output function. Enhanced output corresponds to
the functions previously provided by KOMDOK.
The footer file and printer parameter file must be defined in the
“settings” box.
In the “documentation” menu, you also select the printer
parameters and the footer.
How to move the cursor in the job box to assign parameters for
the output function is described briefly in this appendix in → Job
box.
Standard output
With this function, you output program components in their basic
form (as you edited them) either on a printer (A3, A4), to files or on
the screen. At the same time, you decide whether the information is
output from a program file or from the PLC.
Program structure
This outputs the call identifiers of the individual blocks of a program
file. You select the required blocks in the “output program overview”
job box.
A.5
A-50
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Brief Operating Instructions
STEP 5 blocks
You output the blocks of a program file in the methods of
representation LAD, CSF and STL with or without cross references
and with or without diagnostic SP data. You select the output you
require in the “print STEP 5 blocks” job box.
Data blocks
You can output either individual or all the data blocks of a program.
DB screen forms
This function outputs data blocks containing screen forms. Select the
blocks in the “DB SCREEN FORMS print blocks” selection box.
Assignment list
You output an assignment list. If the assignment list is not already
set, you can select it in the “SYMBOLS: print SEQ file” selection
box.
XRF list
You generate a cross reference list from an existing program file.
Select the required operands in the “output XRF list” job box. A
cross reference file does not need to exist.
I/Q/F list
You output an I/Q/F list. Select the required group of operands in the
“output I/Q/F list” job box.
Three-in-one
With this function you output the program overview, the I/Q/F list
and cross reference list with one command.
Enhanced output
This function, previously known as KOMDOK, allows you to
document STEP 5 programs comprehensively and with little effort
using DOC commands. In contrast to the standard output, the
printouts have graphics added to them. Using DOC commands, you
can structure the printout for your needs.
Program sections
In this menu, you can activate the output of the following files:
Blocks
You print out blocks of a program file in the methods of
representation LAD, CSF and STL with or without cross references
and with or without diagnostic SP data.
Block list
This function prints out a list of all the program and data blocks of
the set program file.
Assignment lists
You output an assignment list. You can print this either in sequential
form as edited or sorted according to absolute/symbolic operands.
Reference data
In this menu, you can activate the print out of the following lists or
data:
A.5
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-51
Brief Operating Instructions
Program structure
This prints out the call structure of the individual blocks in a program
file.
XRF lists
This prints out cross references from a cross reference list according
to specific criteria.
I/Q/F list
This prints out an I/Q/F list. The I/Q/F list shows you which bits in
which bytes of the operand groups F, I, Q are assigned.
Checklist
This function checks through the programming data. Depending on
the operation, the free operands, operands without symbols, and
operands without setpoint data for the I/Q/F operands.
Text files
You can print out *LS.INI files or any ASCII files.
DOC commands
You can control all printouts made with the enhanced output function
using DOC commands. These commands are put together like a
program, stored in a file and started when the file is called. You can
also call up other DOC command files using an appropriate statement
in a DOC command string. This allows you to structure the printout.
Edit
You edit DOC commands and store them in a file.
Check
The DOC commands are checked to ensure that they can be run. If
errors are detected, the exact cause of the error is written to an error
file. If there are no error messages, no error file is created.
Output error list
Errors detected executing the “check DOC command” or “execute
DOC command” functions are output.
Execute
The DOC commands in a file are started.
Print
This prints out a DOC command file.
Edit structure
This provides you with information about the connections between
individual DOC command files. At the same time, you can edit
individual DOC command files.
Print structure
The structure of interconnected DOC command files is output
graphically.
Settings
Before you can print out the various files, you must select the printer
parameters and the footer.
A.5
A-52
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Brief Operating Instructions
Printer
parameters
You create a control character record for your particular printer
which is stored in a printer file.
Edit footer
With this function you can create a new footer file or modify an
existing file.
A.5
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-53
Brief Operating Instructions
Change
further
Help
In this menu, you can change to other S5 packages. These
packages must be installed in a directory on one of the drives.
You can then change to one of the S5 packages displayed. Once
you select another package, you exit the STEP 5 user interface.
You can change back to the STEP 5 interface, however, from
every other S5 package.
You select the S5 package you want to activate in the “other
SIMATIC S5 programs” selection box.
With these functions, you can display the following information:
Key assignment
list
This displays information about the “acceleration keys”. These are
function keys with which you can activate certain functions directly.
Info-STEP 5
version
This provides information about the current STEP 5 version you are
using.
Version of S5
packages
A list of the individual program components of the STEP 5 software
is displayed.
A.5
A-54
C79000-G8576-C820-01
PG Link between two PGs
A.6
PG Link between two PGs
The task of the PG link package is the exchange of STEP 5
blocks or files between various programmers.
The compatibility is ensured despite different diskette formats (40
or 80 tracks) diskette sizes (3 1/2” or 5 1/4”) and recording
densities.
Hardware
Requirements
Data exchange with the partner PG is only possible on an active
TTY interface (20 mA).
If the existing COM1 port is only equipped with a V.24 or passive
TTY interface, the S5 interface must be emulated. To do this, a
converter (Köster box) is connected between the PG and the
connecting cable to the partner PG. This converter converts the
V.24 interface of the PG to an active TTY interface and therefore
simulates the S5 interface of an S5 programmer.
You connect your PG with the partner in one of the two following
ways:
– Via the active TTY interface COM 1
The PG and the partner PG are connected via two connecting
cables.
or
– Via the passive TTY or V.24 interface COM 1
If you have a PG with a passive TTY interface or with only
one V.24 interface COM 1 the passive interface must be converted to an S5 interface using a Köster box.
The PG is connected to the Köster box via a connecting cable.
The Köster box is connected to the partner PG via a further
connecting cable.
The connecting cables are described in the PG 7xx manuals.
A.6
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-55
PG Link between two PGs
Loading the PG Link
Package
Load this package using the STEP 5 function ”change”
(→ Change).
As soon as you have activated the PG link package, this is started
and you immediately switch to the PG link user interface.
PG Link
With the PG link package you can perform the following
functions:
– Switch the PG passive. For data exchange an active and passive PG are required.
– Send data from the active to the passive PG.
– Fetch data from the passive to the active PG.
Entering the
Presets
Once you have activated the PG link, the ”PRESETS” box is
displayed. Here, you select the ”program file” (all the block
specifications you make refer to blocks in this program file). You
move to this file with SHIFT and the cursor keys.
The fields ”path file” and ”path name” are not relevant. Within
the box you can make the following entries:
Input field
Explanation
F3 = Select
The cursor only jumps to the position at which you
can make an input after you press the F3 key.
F6 = Enter
The parameters you input are entered and you call
”function selection”. The Enter key has the same
effect.
F7 = Info
You obtain information about the field marked by the
cursor.
ESC = Cancel
Return to STEP 5 without any action being taken.
A.6
A-56
C79000-G8576-C820-01
PG Link between two PGs
Function Selection
Key level
1
2
As soon as the presets have been entered (F6), the ”SELECT
FUNCTION” box is displayed. You can make the following
inputs:
Effect of the function keys
F1
PASSIVE
This switches the programmer from the ACTIVE to PASSIVE status. The PG to
which data are sent must always be PASSIVE. The passive setting is cancelled by
pressing ESC.
F3
SEND
You switch to the next key level in which the data exchange is activated.
F1
BLOCK (send)
The command line:
BLOCK:
SEND TO PARTNER
appears.
You can make the following inputs in the ”block” field.
e.g. Explanation
PBx
Single blocks
#DOC
Documentation files
FB
Blocks of one block type
*
Various blocks from a block list
A
All blocks of the preset program file
# All DOC files
empty
All blocks and DOC files
Complete your input with the Enter key and the transfer to the partner PG begins
automatically.
F2
FILE (send)
The command line
FILE:
SEND TO PARTNER
DEST DR:
appears.
Here, you enter the file names to be transferred:
X:NNNNNNNN.EEE (maximum 8 characters before the period).
e.g.
C:PROGFILE.S5D
DEST DR: here, you enter the required drive.
Complete your input with the Enter key and the transfer to the partner PG begins
automatically.
A.6
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-57
PG Link between two PGs
Key level
1
2
F4
F6
F7
F8
Effect of the function keys
F5
P-DIR
This outputs the directory of the partner PG. The command line
OUTPUT DIR FROM PARTNER BLOCK:
appears.
Here, you enter the blocks as described under F1. A block list (*) cannot be
selected.
Complete your inputs with the Enter key and the display of a block list is started
automatically.
F6
P-PRG.DAT
With this you can set the program file of the partner PG. The command line
SET PRG.FILE PARTNER
FILE NAME:
ST.S5D
appears.
Type in the required file name. When you complete your inputs with the Enter key,
the file is set.
FETCH
This is effectively the same function as ”SEND”, however, you transfer the files or
blocks from the passive to the active PG.
PRESETS
The ”presets” box is displayed
AUX FCT
With this function you can manage blocks and documentation files and select
program files.
You can perform the following functions:
Transfer blocks and documentation files (F1 TRANSFER)
Delete blocks and documentation files, overall reset of the PLC
(F2 DELETE)
Output a directory (F3 DIR)
Change the preset program file (F6 PRG.DAT)
RETURN
Return to STEP 5
A.6
A-58
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Key Macro
A.7
Key Macro
Using the key macro program, you can record key sequences in
the block editor. The sequences are saved in the S5 file *TP.INI.
This file is on the drive in which STEP 5 was installed. You will
find the file in the directory selected in Settings page 1 for this
drive.
Entering a key macro
Key macro permitted offline
1. Press key combination CTRL + A
2.
RECORDING KEY SEQUENCE
MACRO NAME: @@@@@@TP.INI
3. Name of the key macro: max. 6 characters.
During recording the mouse must not be used.
Note
Continuing after a message
Once the PG has output a message relating to the key
macro, you can only continue working after entering a file
name.
A.7
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-59
Key Macro
Completing entry of the
key macro and saving
Press key combination CTRL + E
Note
Make a note of the starting point
Remember to make a note of the start and end points of
your keyboard entries. The content of the key macro
cannot be documented. You cannot check your entries
afterwards based on the saved key macro.
Testing and running the
key macro
1. Return to the start point you noted.
2. Press the key combination CTRL + D.
3.
REPLAYING KEY SEQUENCE
MACRO NAME: @@@@@@TP.INI
4. Type in the name
5. Press the Return key.
Note
Continuing after a message
Once the PG has output a message relating to the key
macro, you can only continue working after entering a file
name.
A.7
A-60
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Programming Rules
A.8
Programming Rules
This section describes some of the programming rules for
changing between the methods of representationm LAD, CSF and
STL. A program block written, for example, in STL cannot
always be represented as a Ladder Diagram or Control System
Flowchart. This also applies when you change from one of the
graphical methods of representation (LAD and CSF) to the other.
STL
CSF
LAD
Figure A-6 Scope and Limits of the STEP 5
Methods of Representation
Note
Programs you have written in LAD or CSF can always be
translated back to STL.
A.8
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-61
Programming Rules
A.8.1
Available Blocks and Parameter Limits
Block
Parameter limits
Comment
Name
STEP5
ID
I/O on
PG
Call in
program
Organisation block
Program block
Sequence block
Function block
Extended function block
Data block
Extended data block
Comment block for OB
Comment block for PB
Comment block for SB
Comment block for FB
Comment block for FX
Comment block for DB
Comment block for DX
Segment comment for OB
Segment comment for PB
Segment comment for SB
Segment comment for FB
Segment comment for FX
Segment comment for DB
Segment comment for DX
Plant comment
OB
PB
SB
FB
FX
DB
DX
OC
PC
SC
FC
FCX
DC
DCX
#OBDO
#PBDO
#SBDO
#FBDO
#FXDO
#DBDO
#DXDO
#Name
0–255
0–255
0–255
0–255
0–255
0–255
0–255
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Max. 4096 segments
g
per
p block:
length max. 4096 Kw per block
bl k
per segmentt 256 statements
t t
t
Variables block
VB
1–39
0–255
0–255
0–255
0–255
0–255
0–255
1–39
0–255
0–255
0–255
0–255
0–255
0–255
0–39
0–255
0–255
0–255
0–255
0–255
0–255
# + max.
8 chars.
0–255
–
PLC function
max. 2048 DW pper block without header
max.(6x256)+40
(6 256) 40 blocks
bl k per S5D file
fil
Size: max. 16 Kb
– max.
ma (6 S 256) + 40
blocks per S5D file
Size max. 16 Kb or 8 Kw
per block
max. 255 blocks
bl k per S5D file
fil
– Max. size of an S5D file : 4 Mb
– –
LAD + CSF:
max. 400 display elements per block,
max. 50 lines / 8 columns
A.8
A-62
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Programming Rules
A.8.2
Graphical Input in LAD and CSF
Input in LAD,
Output in CSF
If you use too many nesting levels when inputting in LAD, you
may exceed the display limits for output in CSF.
LAD
– INP. 1 – INP. 2 – INP. 4 – INP. 6
– OUTPUT
– INP. 3
– INP. 5
– INP. 7
Figure A-7 Example of Nesting when Inputting in LAD
CSF
– INP. 1
&
– INP. 2
>=1
&
– INP. 3
>=1
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
&
>=1
– INP. 6
– OUTPUT
– INP. 7
Figure A-8 Example of the Nesting above Output in CSF
A.8
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-63
Programming Rules
Input in CSF,
Output in LAD
Too many entries in a CSF box can exceed the display limits (8
levels) in LAD.
CSF
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
– INP. 6
– INP. 7
&
OUTPUT
Figure A-9 Example of Nesting when Inputting in CSF
LAD
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
– INP. 6
– INP. 7
–OUTPUT
Figure A-10 Example of the Nesting above Output in LAD
Output of a
Complex Element
The output of a complex element (latch, comparator, timer or
counter) must not be ORed.
– FLAG 1
– INP. 1
S
– INP. 2
R Q
– INP. 3
&
–OUTPUT
Figure A-11 Only AND Boxes are Permitted after a Complex Element
Connectors
Connectors are temporary flags used to save logic operations that
recur often.
To make things clearer, the rules for connectors are listed
separately for LAD and CSF. Following the rules, there is an
example to illustrate both methods of representation.
Connectors in LAD
A.8
A-64
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Programming Rules
LAD
STL
F...
#
:A F...
:= F...
Figure A-12 Connector in LAD and STL
A connector is set to the result of the logic operation produced by
the operations programmed before it on the power rail. The
following rules apply:
Connector in series
LAD
#
...
STL
...
:A
:A(
:A
:= F
:A F
:A
Figure A-13 Connector in Series
Connectors in series with other connectors. In this case the
connector is treated as a normal contact.
A.8
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-65
Programming Rules
Connector in a parallel branch
LAD
#
...
STL
: A. . .
:A(
:A...
:O(
:A...
:= F
:A F
:)
:)
:A...
Figure A-14 Connector in a Parallel Branch
In a parallel branch , a connector is treated like a normal contact.
The entire parallel branch must be enclosed in parenthesis of type
O (...).
A connector must never follow the power rail immediately
(connector as first contact) or come directly after a power rail has
been opened (connector as first contact in a parallel branch).
Connector in CSF
CSF
– # F. . . –
STL
:= F...
:U F...
Figure A-15 Connector in CSF and STL
The connector is set to the result of the logic operation as a
temporary flag for the entire binary logic operation before the
connector. The following rules apply:
A.8
A-66
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Programming Rules
Connector at the first input of an AND or OR box
CSF
STL
–#F
&
:= F...
:A F...
:A...
:A...
Figure A-16 Connector at the First Input
The connector is not within parenthesis.
Connector not at the first input of an OR box
CSF
STL
>=1
PREVOP #F
:O...
:O(
PREVOP
:= F...
:A F...
:)
Figure A-17 Connector not at the First Input
The binary logic operation before the input is enclosed in
parentheses of the type O (...).
A.8
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-67
Programming Rules
Connector not at the first input of an AND box
CSF
STL
&
PREVOP #F
:A...
:A(
PREVOP
:= F...
:A F...
:)
Figure A-18 Connector not at the First Input
The binary logic operation before the input is enclosed in
parenthesis of the type A (...).
Only allowed with CSF, this cannot be represented graphically in
LAD !
(in the figures: PREVOP = previous logic operation)
Examples of
Connectors
STL
:A
:A
:A
:A(
:A
:A
:A
:O
:A
:A
:)
:A
:=
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– FLAG 1
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– FLAG 2
– INP. 5
– FLAG 3
Example without connectors
CSF
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– FLAG 2
&
– INP. 5
– FLAG 3
&
– FLAG 4
– OUTPUT
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– FLAG 1
&
>=1
– OUTPUT
– FLAG 4
LAD
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– FLAG 1
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
– FLAG 3
– FLAG 2
– FLAG 4
- OUTPUT
Figure A-19 Example without Connectors
Example with connectors
A.8
A-68
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Programming Rules
STL
:A
:A
:=
:A
:A(
:A
:A
:=
:A
:O(
:A
:=
:A
:)
:)
:=
:A
:=
CSF
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– FLAG 1
– FLAG 1
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– FLAG 2
– FLAG 2
– INP. 5
– FLAG 3
– FLAG 3
– FLAG 4
– FLAG 4
– OUTPUT
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
Connector 1
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
&
– INP. 5
&
&
# – FLAG 1
# – FLAG 2
>=1
Connector 2
0(
# - FLAG 3
&
# – FLAG 4
)
– OUTPUT
Connector 3
Connector 4
LAD
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– FLAG 1
#
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
– FLAG 3
#
0(
- FLAG 2
#
- FLAG 4
#
- OUTPUT
)
Figure A-20 Example with Connectors
A.8
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-69
Programming Rules
A.8.3
Input in STL
You must keep to the programming rules if you want to translate
the program to LAD or CSF. If you have not kept to the rules and
attempt to make corrections when outputting in LAD or CSF,
errors can occur when you save the program without the PG
displaying an error message.
AND Operation
With AND operations, the operands are connected in series, the
signal states of the A or AN operations are scanned and ANDed.
LAD
CSF
&
STL
A....
LAD: contact in series
CSF: input of an AND box
STL: statement A...
STL
:A
:A
:=
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
...
CSF
LAD
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
...
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
&
...
A.8
A-70
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Programming Rules
STL
:A
:A
:O
:O
:A
:A
.
.
.
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– INP. 3
:A
:A
:O
:O
:A
:A
.
.
.
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
LAD
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
CSF
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
&
>=1
– INP. 3
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
&
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
&
>=1
– INP. 3
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
&
Figure A-21 Example of the Rule for AND Operations
A.8
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-71
Programming Rules
OR Operation
Scan the signal state and perform an OR operation.
LAD: only one contact in a parallel branch
CSF: input of an OR box
STL: statement O...
LAD
>=1
CSF
O....
STL
STL
:A
:A
:O
:O
:A
:A
..
.
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
LAD
- INP. 1
- INP. 2
CSF
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– INP. 3
- INP. 4
&
>=1
– INP. 3
–INP. 5
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
&
Figure A-22 Example of the Rule for OR Operations
A.8
A-72
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Programming Rules
AND before OR
Operation
1st parallel branch
next parallel branch(es)
LAD
&
CSF
&
>=1
A. . . .
A....
STL
>=1
O...
A...
LAD: more contacts in a parallel branch
CSF:
AND box before OR box
STL: statements
O...
parallel branch
STL
:A
:A
:O
:O
:A
:A
..
.
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– INP. 3
A...
A...
LAD
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
CSF
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
&
>=1
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
&
Figure A-23 Example of the Rule for an AND before OR operation
A.8
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-73
Programming Rules
Parenthesis
This rule covers the use of parenthesis with complex,
self-contained binary logic operations and complex elements with
operations before and after them.
A (
Complex
– OPERATION BEFORE
)
– OPERATION AFTER
Complex binary operation
These operations include OR before AND operations.
OR before AND operation
STL
A(
O...
O....
O...
)
A...
STL: statements
A(
OR operation
)
A
LAD
LAD: Connect parallel contacts in series.
A.8
A-74
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Programming Rules
CSF
>=1
&
CSF: OR box before AND box.
These operations are a subset of the complex binary operations,
two parallel contacts being the simplest operation.
Complex Elements
(latch, timer,
comparator and
counter functions)
The following rules apply to complex elements:
– no following operation: no parenthesis
– AND operation follows: A (...).
– OR operation follows: O (...), only for CSF.
– Complex elements cannot be followed by other operations.
LAD / CSF
Complex
function
element
A (
)
&
FOLLOP
CSF
Complex
function
element
0(
)
>
=1
FOLLOP
Figure A-24 Parenthesis with Complex Elements
Comparator function
A comparison of floating point numbers is only possible in STL.
A.8
C79000-G8576-C820-01
A-75
Programming Rules
Complex
Elements,
Undefined Inputs
and Outputs
Each undefined input or output must be supplied with NOP 0 in
STL.
Only one complex element is permitted per segment.
STL
:A
:L
: SE
: NOP
: NOP
: NOP
:A
:=
– INP. 2
DW 10
T
100
0
0
0
T
100
– OUTPUT
:A
: CU
:A
: CD
:A
:L
:S
: NOP
: NOP
: NOP
:A
:=
– INP. 1
– COUNTER
– INP. 2
– COUNTER
– INP. 3
– COUNTV.
– COUNTER
0
0
0
– COUNTER
– OUTPUT
LAD
CSF
T 100
– INP. 2
1
V
TV BI
DE
DW 10
T 100
– INP. 2
DW 10
– OUTPUT
R
1
R
Q
V
TV BI
DE
Q
– OUTPUT
: BE
– COUNTER
– INP. 1
CU
– INP. 2
CD
– COUNTER
– INP. 3
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– INP. 3
– COUNTV.
S
– ZAEHLW.
CV BI
DE
– OUTPUT
R
Q
CU
CD
S
CV BI
DE
Q
R
– OUTPUT
: BE
Figure A-25 Example of Undefined Inputs and Outputs in STL, LAD and CSF
A.8
A-76
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Index
Index
A
Absolute addresses, number, 3-249
Absolute display, settings, 3-29
screen layout, 3-212
standard output, 3-291
table of operand types, 3-211
variables block, 3-211
Active interface, TTY, A-55
Actual operand, 3-81
B
Additional comment, assignment list, 3-224
BLock, 3-32
Address, displaying, 3-79
Block
address list, 3-32
compare, 3-37
comparing, 2-28
copying a segment, 3-70
delete, 3-38
deleting a segment, 3-72
editing, 3-49, 3-51
enhanced output, 3-297
storing, 3-79
transferring, 2-20, 3-33
AND operation, A-70
Arithmetic operation
CSF, 3-127
LAD, 3-100
ASCII, settings, 3-30
Assignment list, 3-44
additional comment, 3-224
correction, 3-46
creating, 3-215
editing aids, 3-217
editing area, 3-213
editing functions, 3-217
editing the, 3-209
enhanced output, 3-304
error message, 3-216
example, 3-217
form feed, 3-216
function keys, 3-213
inserting a line, 3-223
management, A-49
modifying, 3-223
operand comment, 3-209, 3-215
operand identifier, 3-216
programmable function keys, 3-222
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Block body, 3-82, 3-149
data block, 3-149
function block, 3-82
Block call
CSF, 3-129
LAD, 3-101
Block comment, 2-13, 3-149
form feed, 3-149
inputting, 3-150
number of characters, 3-150
store, 3-67
storing, 3-151
Block header, 3-81, 3-148
data block, 3-148
Index-1
Index
function block, 3-81
length, 3-148
library number, 3-148
Block length, data block, 3-148
Block list
enhanced output, 3-303
job box, 3-55
Block parameters, 3-82
Block preheader, 3-81, 3-147
data block, 3-147
function block, 3-81
influencing the length, 3-151
Block status, 2-31, 3-226
Block title, 2-12, 3-151
Blow, EPROM, 3-31
BSTACK, displaying, 3-249
Bus paths, 3-50
all paths, 3-53
cur. path, 3-53
deleting, 3-54
dir, 3-53
editing, 3-53, 3-54
printing, 3-53
selecting, 3-54
set up, 3-54
setting, 3-53
start node, 3-55
terminating, 3-54
Buttons, 3-15
C
Carwash, example, 2-3
Change, 3-117
further, 3-117
Character
deleting, 2-12
inserting, 2-12
Character graphics, settings, 3-30
Character set, settings, 3-30
Checklist, enhanced output, 3-311
Checksum, settings, 3-28
Cold restart, triggering on the PLC, 3-238
COM DB1, assigning parameters, 3-177
Command mode, 3-60
key strokes, 3-60
Comment, 3-29
for DW, 2-12
length, 3-29
settings, 3-29
statement, 3-79
Comment block, 3-67, 3-79
Comment length, 3-209
operand comment, 3-209, 3-215
symbolic operand, 3-209
Comment line, data block, 3-159
Common functions, in STL, LAD, CSF, 3-51
Comparator operation
CSF, 3-134
LAD, 3-106
Index-2
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Index
Complex function
CSF, 3-124
key assignment CSF, 3-125
key assignment LAD, 3-98
LAD, 3-97
Connector
at the first input of an AND or OR box,
A-67
CSF, 3-123
deleting, 3-123
editing, 3-123
in a parallel branch, A-66
in CSF, A-66
in series, A-65
inserting, 3-123
LAD, 3-96, A-64
negated, CSF, 3-123
negated, LAD, 3-96
not at the first input of an AND box, A-68
not at the first input of an OR box, A-67
Connector stack, CSF, 3-123
Contact, inserting, 3-93
Cross reference list, enhanced output, 3-307
Cross references, 2-25
CSF, 3-113
arithmetic operation, 3-127
block call, 3-129
comparator operation, 3-134
complex functions, 3-124
connector, 3-123
connector stack, 3-123
conversion operation, 3-133
counter operation, 3-137
inserting a function block, 3-122
inserting an operand, 3-122
latching operation, 3-132
load and transfer operation, 3-130
logic operation, binary, 3-118
logic operation, digital, 3-135
screen layout, 3-115
shift and rotate operation, 3-131
timer operation, 3-139
CSF editor, 3-114
Cursor keys, 3-8
Control System Flowchart, 3-113
Conversion operation
CSF, 3-133
LAD, 3-105
Converting, LAD, 3-105
Copying, PCPM files, 3-45
Correction, symbols file, 3-46
Counter operation
CSF, 3-137
LAD, 3-108
Cross reference, displaying, 3-73
C79000-G8576-C820-01
D
Data block
block body, 3-149
block header, 3-148
block preheader, 3-147
generated, 3-149
inputting data words, 3-153
library number, 3-148
preheader, 3-147
structure, 3-147
title field, 3-144
Index-3
Index
Data block editor, 3-141
basic menu, 3-143
comment display field, 3-145
comment field, 3-145
editing area, 3-145
format error field, 3-145
format field, 3-145
repetition factor, 3-145
Data format, 3-147
force outputs, 3-243
modifying, 3-153
Data screen form
DB1, 3-162
DX0, 3-168
Data word
inputting, 3-153
number field, 3-144
Data word comment, 3-156
Data word number, selection box, 3-142
Data words, reproducing, 3-157
DB screen form, 3-161
data input, 3-163, 3-166, 3-168
DX0, 3-164, 3-165, 3-166
S5-135U, 3-161
S5-155U, 3-161
DB screen forms, standard output, 3-290
DB1
outputting to printer, 3-204
saving to program file, 3-207
transferring to the PLC, 3-206
Delete, 3-38
block, 3-38
block type, 3-38
documentation file, 3-38
program file, 3-38
Index-4
Diagnosis, settings, 3-30
Directory, 3-32
PCPM file, 3-43
Display, settings, 3-29
Doc command file, settings, 3-23
Doc command syntax, 3-314
assignment list, 3-319
block list/commands, 3-316
blocks, 3-315
checklist, 3-317
directory, 3-317
I/Q/F list, 3-316, 3-319
nested doc commands, 3-316
program structure, 3-317
XRF list, 3-318
Doc commands, 3-312
editing, 3-320, 3-329
error list, 3-327
executing, 3-327
key functions, 3-321
outputting the error list, 3-327
presets, 3-314
printing, 3-328
structure, 3-312
testing, 3-326
Documentation, 3-283
doc command, 3-284
enhanced output, 3-283
preparing for printing, 3-283
settings, 3-30
standard output, 3-283
Documentation block, 3-59
command, 3-60
deleting text, 3-60
inserting text, 3-60
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Index
Documentation file, 3-149
DOS files, 3-39
directory, copy, delete, A-46
Dynamic, settings, 3-27
E
E list, see error list, 3-330
Editing
assignment list, 3-209
Control System Flowcharts, 3-113
DB screen forms, 3-161
doc command, 3-320
Ladder diagrams, 3-87
statement list, 3-78
duplicating, 3-37
function selection, 3-33
management, A-49
presets, 3-32
PROGNUMBER, 3-34
programming no., 3-34
reading, 3-37
EPROM (E info), 3-37
compare, 3-38
dir, 3-38
parameters, 3-39
SYSID inp, 3-39
SYSID out, 3-39
Error list
deleting, 3-49
outputting, 3-327
Editing aids, assignment list, 3-217
Error messages, assignment list, 3-216
Editing area, assignment list, 3-213
ESC key, 3-15
Editor, 3-49
graphical user interface, 3-51
selecting, 3-51
Establishment, bus paths, 3-51
End, 3-48
Enhanced output, 3-297, A-51
assignment list, 3-304
block list, 3-303
checklist, 3-311
cross reference list, 3-307
documentation, A-50
I/Q/F list, 3-309
program sections, 3-301
reference data, 3-305
text files, 3-311
EPROM, 3-31
blowing, 3-31, 3-33, 3-37
defining functions, 3-33
deleting, 3-37
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Ethernet address, bus paths, 3-55
Example
assignment list, 3-217
conditions for implementing, 2-4
creating, 2-8
editing the assignment list, 2-9
editing the data block, 2-11
F
File
copying, 3-39, 3-40
deleting, 3-39, 3-42
transferring, 2-20
File directory, outputting, 3-39
File management, functions, 3-39
Index-5
Index
File mode, program file, 3-22
Floating point number, 3-155
data block, 3-158
testing, 3-158
Function keys, 3-8, 3-15
assignment list, 3-213
function selection, 3-8
programming, 3-213, 3-222
Footer, 3-337
editing, 3-338
keystrokes, 3-339
settings, 3-30
Function selection, 3-8
function keys, 3-8
hotkeys, 3-8
mouse, 3-8
Footer file, settings, 3-23
G
Force outputs, 3-243
data format, 3-243
Generate XRF, 3-31
Force variables, 2-35, 3-239
Graphical user interface, 3-5
Forced value, modifying, 3-242
Forced values, modifying, 3-245
Form feed
assignment list, 3-216
block comment, 3-149
segment comment, 3-64
Formal operand, 3-81
Format field, 3-145
Function block, 3-81
appending, 3-121
basic operation, 3-81
block body, 3-82
block header, 3-81
block preheader, 3-81
editing, 2-14, 3-83
structure, 3-81
supplementary operation, 3-81
system operation, 3-81
H
Hardcopy, 3-283
Hardware requirements, PG link, A-55
Help, 3-119
Hotkeys, 3-8
function selection, 3-8
I
I/O assignment, 3-162
I/Q/F List, 3-294
I/Q/F list, 3-309
enhanced output, 3-309
identifier, 3-295, 3-309
standard output, 3-294
Function element, 3-88
Info-STEP 5 version, 3-119
Function key, assignment, 3-56
Information line, 3-6
Index-6
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Index
Interface
settings, 3-28
TTY, A-55
V.24, A-55
Interrupt stack, 3-246
IPC flags, 3-162
ISTACK, displaying, 3-246
J
Job box, 3-11
block list, 3-55
DB screen form, 3-161
search key, 3-53
standard output, 3-286
Job/selection box, 3-10
K
L
LAD, 3-87
Ladder diagram
arithmetic operation, 3-100
block call, 3-101
comparator operation, 3-106
complex functions, 3-97
connector, 3-96
connector, negated, 3-96
conversion operation, 3-105
counter operation, 3-108
inserting a contact, 3-93
latching operation, 3-103
load and transfer operation, 3-102
logic operation, binary, 3-92
logic operation, digital, 3-107
screen layout, 3-89
shift and rotate operation, 3-102
timer operation, 3-111
Ladder diagrams, 3-87
Key assignment
complex functions CSF, 3-125
complex functions LAD, 3-98
Latching operation
CSF, 3-132
LAD, 3-103
Key assignment LAD/CSF
control keys, A-40
function control keys, A-37
special keys, A-43
terminating keys, A-39
Library number, 3-57
data block, 3-146, 3-148
Key assignment list, 3-119
Line
deleting, 2-12
inserting, 2-12
Key macro, A-59
Load operation
CSF, 3-130
LAD, 3-102
Keyboard, A-37
Loading, project, 3-18, 3-31
Keyboard assignment, A-37
Loading the program, 2-30
Key assignment STL, control keys, A-44
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Index-7
Index
Logic operation, binary
CSF, 3-118
LAD, 3-92
Logic operation, digital
CSF, 3-135
LAD, 3-107
Long box
CSF, 3-124
LAD, 3-97
M
Management, 3-31
directory, 3-32
Memory area, 3-250
Memory configuration, 3-246, 3-251
Menu bar, 3-5
Menu option, settings, 3-19
O
Object, 3-17, A-45
Offline, mode/settings, 3-27
Online, mode/settings, 3-27
Online functions, overview, 3-225
Operand
absolute, 3-76
appending, 3-121
data format, 3-233
naming, 3-116
rewiring, 3-40
search, 3-76
search/find, 3-220
symbolic, 3-76
operand
actual, 3-81
formal, 3-81
Mode, settings, 3-27
Operand areas, outputting the I/Q/F list,
3-294
Mouse, 3-8
function selection, 3-8
Operand comment, 3-58, 3-209, 3-215
number of characters, 3-209, 3-215
Multiprocessor operation, 3-162
Operand identifier, 3-216
N
Node, bus paths, 3-55
Normal output, 3-284
Operand list
data block, 3-233
data format, 3-240
editing, 3-233, 3-240
number of process variables, 3-235, 3-241
variables block, 3-234
Operand types, 3-211
table, 3-211
Operating COM DB1, 3-175
Index-8
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Index
OR operation, A-72
Output PLC info, A-48
Plant comment, 3-58, 3-59
number of characters, 3-59
Parameter assignment software COM DB1,
3-169
PLC
cold restart, 3-238
control, 3-238
I/O assignment, 3-162
memory, 3-251
output info, 3-246
overall reset, 3-38
switching from STOP to RUN, 3-208
Parameter block comment, entering, 3-200
PLC type, settings, 3-27
Parameter list, 3-82
Presets, PG link, A-56, A-58
Parameters, editing, 3-201
Printer file, settings, 3-30
Passive interface, TTY, A-55
Printer parameters, 3-333
dialog box, 3-336
keystrokes, 3-335
Overall reset, 3-38
P
Page 2, settings, 3-21, 3-26
Path file
bus paths, 3-51
Settings, 3-23
settings, 3-28
Path name
bus paths, 3-50
settings, 3-28
Paths, bus paths, 3-50
PCPM file, 3-43–3-45
copying, 3-47
deleting, 3-48
directory, 3-43
PCPM files
copying, 3-45
directory, copy, delete, A-47
Performance of COM DB1, 3-170
PG Link, A-55
PG link, 3-117, A-56
presets, A-56
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Process image, 3-239
Process variable, 3-4
displaying, 3-241
forcing, 3-239
modifying, 3-239
operand, 3-232
outputting, 3-236
PROGNUMBER, EPROM, 3-34
Program data, A-58
Program file, 3-22
file mode, 3-22
settings, 3-22
Program sections, 3-298
enhanced output, 3-301
Program structure
enhanced output, 3-305
standard output, 3-286
Index-9
Index
Program test OFF, 3-254
Program test ON, 3-252
Programmer, identifier, 3-148
Programming number, 3-34
Programming rules, A-61
Project, 3-17
load, 3-31
object, A-45
save, 3-31
save as, 3-31
settings, 3-19
load, save, save as, A-45
R
S
S5 files, 4-2
function, 4-2
overview, 4-2
S5 identifier, 3-6
S5 packages, change, 3-117
S5 terminology, A-31
S5-DOS data management, 4-4
S5-DOS/ST, 1-4, 1-6
Safety prompt, 3-233
Save, project, 3-19, 3-31
Save as, project, 3-19, 3-31
Relative operation address, displaying, 3-79
Screen layout
assignment list, 3-212
CSF, 3-115
LAD, 3-89
Repetition factor, 3-145
see data block editor, 3-157
Search, 3-53, 3-76
data block, 3-142
Representation
settings, 3-27
switching over, 3-58
Search key, 3-52, 3-53
assignment list, 3-220
job box, 3-55
RESD, file mode, 3-22
Segment, 3-67
buffering, 3-71
copying, 3-70, 3-71
deleting, 3-72
modifying, 3-118
shifting, 3-72
transferring, 2-20, 3-72
Reference data, enhanced output, 3-298,
3-305
Result of logic operation, 3-106
Rewire, A-49
Rewiring, 2-28, 3-40
automatic, 3-40, 3-41
manual, 3-40, 3-42
printout, 3-43
Rotate operation
CSF, 3-131
LAD, 3-102
Index-10
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Index
Segment comment, 2-17, 3-58, 3-64
completing, 3-66
deleting characters, 3-66
form feed, 3-64
inserting characters, 3-66
number of characters, 3-64
storing, 3-66
Segment title, 3-58, 3-67
length, 3-67
Select drive, 3-50
Selection box, data word number, 3-142
Sequential file, deleting, 3-48
Sequential source file, 3-209
saving, 3-214
settings, 3-23
updating, 3-53
Settings, 3-333
absolute display, 3-29
character set, 3-30
checksum, 3-28
comment, 3-29
comment length, 3-29
diagnosis, 3-30
doc command file, 3-23
documentation, 3-30
dynamic, 3-27
footer, 3-30
footer file, 3-23
interface, 3-28
mode/offline, 3-27
mode/online, 3-27
page 1, 3-21
page 2, 3-26
path file, 3-23, 3-28
C79000-G8576-C820-01
path name, 3-28
PLC type, 3-27
printer file, 3-30
project, 3-19
representation, 3-27
sequential file, 3-23
symbol length, 3-29
symbolic display, 3-29
symbols, 3-29
symbols file, 3-23
SYSID, 3-23
working directory, 3-22
XRF file, 3-23
Shift operation
CSF, 3-131
LAD, 3-102
Sicherheitsabfrage, 3-233
Signal state
displaying, 3-232
forcing, 3-245
signal state
forcing, 3-239
number of statements, 3-228
operand, 3-232
representation, 3-228
SIMATIC Memory Cards, EPROM, 3-35
SINEC H1, 3-225
SINEC L1, 3-50
SINEC L2, 3-225
Source file
converting, 3-45
deleting, 3-48
Space bar, 3-15
Index-11
Index
Standard output, 3-284, A-51
assignment list, 3-291
data blocks, 3-289
DB screen forms, 3-290
I/Q/F list, 3-294
program structure, 3-286
STEP 5 blocks, 3-288
XRF list, 3-291
Start node, bus paths, 3-55
Statement
comment, 3-79
correcting, 3-79
inputting, 3-78
Supplementary operation, 3-81
conversion operation, 3-105, 3-133
logic operation, digital, 3-107, 3-135
shift and rotate operation, 3-102, 3-131
Symbol length
assignment list, 3-209
settings, 3-29
Symbolic display, settings, 3-29
Symbolic operand, 3-76
Symbols, settings, 3-29
Statement comment, 3-58
Symbols file
correcting, 2-16
setting, 3-23
Statement list, 3-78
SYSID file, settings, 3-23
Station addresses, bus paths, 3-50
Status processing
actions, 3-231, 3-237
block nesting, 3-228
calling, 3-228
messages, 3-231, 3-237
representation of the signal states, 3-228
restrictions, 3-226
screen layout in STL, 3-229
Status variable, 2-33, 3-232
STEP 5 files, special functions, 4-2
STL, 3-78
Structure
doc commands, 3-312
editing, 3-329
logic example, 3-313
printing, 3-332
Index-12
T
Termination, bus paths, 3-51
Test, 3-225
overview, 3-225
requirements, 3-225
Testing the program, 2-31
Text files, enhanced output, 3-311
Timer operation
CSF, 3-139
LAD, 3-111
Title field, 3-144
Transfer operation
CSF, 3-130
LAD, 3-102
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Index
TTY
active interface, A-55
passive interface, A-55
W
Working directory
inputting, 3-24
settings, 3-22
V
V.24 interface, A-55
Version of S5 packages, 3-119
X
XRF, updating, 3-53
XRF file, settings, 3-23
XRF list, standard output, 3-291
C79000-G8576-C820-01
Index-13
An
Siemens AG
AUT E 146
Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50
D-76181 Karlsruhe
From:
Your Name: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Your Title: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Company Name: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Street: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
City: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Phone: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
✄
Please check the industry that applies to you:
❒
Automotive
❒
Pharmaceutical
❒
Chemical
❒
Plastic
❒
Electrical Machinery
❒
Pulp and Paper
❒
Food
❒
Textile
❒
Instrument and Control
❒
Transportation
❒
Nonelectrical Machinery
❒
Other _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
❒
Petrochemical
C79000-V7076-C066-01
1
Remarks Form
Your comments and recommendations will help us to improve the quality and usefulness of
our publications. Please take the first available opportunity to fill out this questionnaire and
return it to Siemens.
Please give each of the following questions your own personal mark within the range from
1 (very good) to 5 (poor).
Title of Your Manual: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Order No. of Your Manual: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.
Does the contents meet your requirements?
2.
Is the information easy to find?
3.
Is the text easy to understand?
4.
Does the level of technical detail meet your requirements?
5.
Please rate the quality of the graphics/tables:
Additional Comments:
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
C79000-V7076-C066-01
2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement